Professional Documents
Culture Documents
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00001 Project Title Page MJA
00010 Table of Contents MJA
00015 List of Drawings MJA
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast-in-place Concrete RSD
03541 Gypsum Underlayment MJA
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04720 Cast Stone - DELETED LPA
04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies MJA/RSD
04860 Stone Masonry LPA
04901 Clay Masonry Cleaning and Restoration MJA
04902 Cast Stone Cleaning and Restoration MJA
04903 Marble Cleaning and Restoration. MJA
04904 Masonry Efflourescence Removal MJA
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 Structural Steel RSD
05310 Steel Deck RSD
05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing MJA/RSD
05500 Metal Fabrications RSD/MJA
05511 Metal Stairs MJA
05521 Pipe And Tube Railings MJA
05700 Ornamental Metal MJA
05710 Monumental Stairs and Railings MJA
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09111 Non-load-bearing Steel Framing MJA
09210 Plaster Cleaning and Repair - ADDED MJA
09215 Gypsum Veneer Plaster MJA
09250 Gypsum Board MJA
09265 Gypsum Board Shaft-wall Assemblies MJA
09280 Ornamental Plaster Replacement MJA
09310 Ceramic Tile MJA
09512 Acoustical Tile Ceilings MJA
09545 Ceiling Fabric Panels – DELETED MJA
09629 Cork Flooring MJA
09641 Bamboo Flooring - DELETED MJA
09651 Resilient Floor Tile MJA
09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories MJA
09654 Linoleum Floor Coverings & Desk Tops MJA
09680 Carpet MJA
09851 Sound Absorbing Ceiling Units - DELETED MJA
09911 Exterior Painting MJA
09912 Interior Painting MJA
09931 Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes MJA
09991 Encapsulation Coating System MJA
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10101 Visual Display Surfaces MJA
10155 Toilet Compartments MJA
10185 Unit Shower MJA
10200 Louvers and Vents MJA
10410 Directories TBD by DCPL
10431 Exterior Signage TBD by DCPL
10436 Exterior Post and Panel Signs TBD by DCPL
10449 Interior Signage TBD by DCPL
10505 Metal Lockers MJA
10522 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets MJA
10523 Fire Extinguishers MJA
10671 Metal Storage Shelving MJA
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11054 Library Stack Systems HWA
11130 Audio-Visual Equipment Poly
11132 Projection Screens Poly
11451 Residential Appliances MJA
11510 Library Equipment (Book Trucks & Book Return Carts) HWA
11511 Library Book and Media Depository MJA
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12355 Institutional Casework MJA
12356 Kitchen Casework MJA
12484 Floor Mats and Frames MJA
12560 Library Furniture and Equipment MJA
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials JJC
15055 Motors JJC
15075 Mechanical Identification JJC
15100 Valves JJC
15125 Pipe Expansion Joints JJC
15135 Meter and Gages JJC
15145 Hangers and Supports JJC
15181 Hydronic Piping JJC
15241 Mechanical Vibration Controls JJC
15260 Pipe Insulation JJC
15290 Duct Insulation JJC
15326 Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems JJC
15411 Water Distribution Piping JJC
15420 Drainage and Vent Piping JJC
15430 Plumbing Specialties JJC
15440 Plumbing Fixtures JJC
Division 16 – Electrical
16050 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods JJC
16051 Electrical System Protective Device Study JJC
16111 Conduit Systems JJC
16112 Busway JJC
16126 Cables, High Voltage (Above 600 Volts) JJC
16127 Cables, Low Voltage (600 Volts and Below) JJC
16140 Wiring Devices JJC
16150 Motors JJC
16160 Panelboards JJC
16170 Disconnect Switches (Motor and Circuit) JJC
16430 Metering JJC
16450 Grounding JJC
16460 Transformers (General Purpose) JJC
16464 Switchgear, Low Voltage (600 Volts and Below) JJC
16500 Lighting Fixtures Cutsheets and Schedule MCLA
16510 Building Lighting, Interior JJC
16511 Ornamental Lighting Cleaning and Restoration - DELETED MCLA
16520 Site Lighting JJC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and any Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the installation of a structured telecommunications cabling plant (voice
and data communications cabling) as described in the attached specifications and drawings.
The contractor will be responsible for all parts, labor and other hardware directly associated
with the structured cabling system including, but not limited to:
B. Work specified in this Section consists of all elements related to horizontal (station) and
backbone (riser) cabling for voice, data and video including, but not limited to:
C. Work specified also applies to the installation of small horizontal sleeves or firestop material
that will, from time to time, when not previously provided by others, be required when a cable
or cable bundle must penetrate a fire rated barrier while routing to a main or intermediate
wiring closet or equipment room (MDF/IDF). Coordinate the placement of all such work with
the Architect/Owner’s Representative prior to installation.
6. Telephone and Data Equipment, Switches, Routers, Servers, Wireless Access Points,
UPS or other active electronic devices.
7. Final Cross Connection Placements (Patching) for Voice and Data systems.
A. This specification documents materials and installation requirements for the structured cable
plant with specified quantities for horizontal and backbone cabling, terminations and related
hardware to be included in the bid price.
B. A listing of the cable/outlet quantities by riser closet has been included in this section (below)
to facilitate gaining an overall understanding of the scope of work outlined herein. Quantities
and configurations of Cable Outlets and Cables shown on the contract documents are the
best estimates currently available. It is the responsibility of the bidder to verify the correct
final quantities from the construction drawings. A complete range of unit prices for additions
is specified in the bid form.
C. The system is based upon the installation of horizontal cable runs composed of a quantity of 1
to 6 (see contract drawings for actual cable count per outlet) four-pair Category-6 UTP
plenum-rated workstation cables at workstation outlets allowing 1 Gigabit Ethernet (1 GbE)
transmissions up to 90 Meters. Copper riser and vacant fiber optic innerduct (with pull rope)
to the Telco Entrance Demarcation is also part of this system.
1. Pricing Option No.1 for Cabling will be to price (in lieu of conventional Category-6 UTP)
the use of 10-Gigabit Station Cabling (Siemon or Equivalent) Category-6A F/UTP
shielded cable for voice and data this will include all related 10-Gigabit rated shielded
jacks, patch panels and patch cords for a complete compatible 10-GIG system.
OUTLET TYPE AND CABLE QUANTITY BY FLOOR
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit three copies of the manufacturer's technical data for the
floor boxes to be used on this project.
C. Product Data: Upon contract award, submit complete list of all materials, components,
equipment, systems, and products proposed.
1. Include the proposed Project Manager's (RCDD) resume. The Project Manager is to be
assigned for the duration of the project; any reassignment to be pre-approved by the
Owner. Provide a listing of any sub-contractors to be used on this project, contact
information and synopsis of background, experience particularly on Contractor's past
projects.
F. Project Documentation: As part of the installation, the Contractor shall provide detailed
documentation of the structured wiring system to facilitate system administration, system
maintenance and future system changes. This requirement includes:
1. Record drawings with all cables and cable routes identified and a cable record
document, which facilitates the cross-connection of the voice riser system to the
station, cable system and the fiber optic data riser to the network electronics.
2. All labeled infrastructure shall be shown in the documentation.
3. Provide documents electronically in AutoCAD and PDF, Spreadsheets in Excel and
Text in MS Word format as most suited to the material.
4. System test data signed and dated by the Contractor shall also be provided to establish
the baseline performance of the system.
5. All test documentation shall be printed out, bound and formally submitted for
acceptance. An electronic copy shall also be provided in Owner approved electronic
format with accompanying software used to create report.
6. All cable test documentation shall be printed out, bound and formally submitted for
acceptance. An electronic copy shall also be provided in Owner approved electronic
format with accompanying software used to create report and shall include, but limited
to run, length, jack number and actual passing test results.
A. Installer Qualifications: The Contractor shall have prior successful experience on a minimum
of three (3) projects preferred similar in size and scope to this offer. In terms of the Cable
Pricing Option 001 for Cat-6A F/UTP 10-GIG cabling, in lieu of the F/UTP experience,
successful Category-6 experience will be acceptable if, along with references, the Contractor
submits a statement from the Cable Manufacturer stating that the Manufacturer’s standard
warranties will apply.
D. All work performed on this project will be installed in accordance with the latest editions of the
following standards which are incorporated by reference:
1.6 WARRANTY
B. All materials and workmanship hereinafter specified and furnished shall be fully warranted by
the contractor and/or manufacturer for a minimum or fifteen (15) years against any defects
which may occur as the result of faulty materials or workmanship after installation acceptance
by the Owner. Any such defects shall be corrected by the contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner. The Manufacturer’s standard warranties will remain otherwise.
A. The structured cabling system will be deemed acceptable when the Contractor delivers to the
Owner:
B. Acceptance will be deemed "in full" upon receipt by the Contractor of a Notice of Acceptance
issued by the Owner upon beneficial use and full implementation of the Terms and Conditions
and Technical Specifications of the Contract.
1.8 INSPECTION
A. The Owner shall, at all times, have access to the work. The Contractor shall not close up any
work until the Owner has been given an opportunity to inspect the work or waive the
opportunity to inspect. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing when the work is
ready for inspection. The Owner, or its Agent, will inspect the work as expeditiously as
possible after receipt of notification from the Contractor.
1.9 INQUIRIES
A. Any questions relating to the technical scope of work or requirements of this specification
during the bidding process shall be placed in writing and submitted through:
B. Following the Bid Award, all RFI’s will be submitted through the formal contract established
procedure inclusive of the contracting officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Patch panels shall meet TIA/EIA channel requirements for Category-6 cabling systems.
2. Separate patch panels for each floor’s cable.
3. Color: Black
4. 48 Port Increments
5. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics or
equivalent
6. As noted in Section 1.3 Paragraph D, Cable Pricing Option No. 1 will be to price the
use of 10-Gigabit Cabling (Siemon or Equivalent) Category-6A F/UTP shielded cable
for voice and data including all related 10-Gigabit rated shielded jacks, patch panels
and patch cords.
1. Color: Black
2. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics MM6
Vertical Cable Mgmt. “Cage” with door (OR-MM6VMD710) or equivalent
1. Color: Black
2. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics Cable
Management Panel with Cover 2U (OR-MM6HMF2RU) or equivalent.
D. Cable Support Hangers - For Routing small cable bundles to hallway cable tray.
E. Firestop
1. UL-1479 approved caulk, putty, strip or sheets that shall be specifically designed to fill
holes, spaces, and voids at communications penetrations.
2. Shall provide adhesion to substrates and maintain fire and smoke seal under normal
expected movements of substrates, conduits and cables.
3. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Nelson, 3M, Hilti or
equivalent
1. Cable shall be two (2) 25-Pair Category-5, UTP 24 AWG, CMP (Plenum Rated).
2. Route From MDF (RM 309 to Basement Demarc Rm 026) in conduit down thru chase.
3. Terminate all cable ends in 110-100 type wall-mounted Connector Block with C5 wiring
chips
4. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide General, Superior or
Equivalent
1. Place for future use. 1.25”, PVC, Color – Orange with pull rope. Installed in EMT
conduit provided by others.
A. Faceplates:
A. Modular Cords
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate all installation work with the General Contractor to minimize conflicts including:
1. Review building plans with the Owner and/or Owner’s representative to determine and
document all workstation outlet locations and jack quantities in each building area.
2. Develop and document a numbering and labeling plan for horizontal and backbone
cabling in coordination with Owner and based on ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 standards.
3. Participate in design review meetings with the Owner and incorporate design revisions
as directed.
4. Fully install, test, and label all horizontal and backbone cabling and terminations for the
specified voice and data structured cable plant.
5. Provide record drawings documenting all workstation outlets, jack quantities, and
numbering in each building area.
6. Provide record drawings in the form of fiber optic and copper backbone cable one-line
diagrams with cable numbering.
B. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in
which related work is specified and for other conditions affecting performance.
C. Remove and reinstall any obstacles that may be in the way of the work (i.e. ceiling tiles,
carpet, etc.). Repair and/or Report any damages to in-place materials that may occur due to
the work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Provide a schedule identifying when work is to commence, the expected duration of the
activities and the location of the work effort.
E. The Owner is not responsible for loss, theft or damage to any stored or in-place materials.
A. The Contractor performing the work shall provide a supervisory work force sufficient to
efficiently and effectively execute the Contractor's responsibilities. The Contractor’s Project
Manager shall be an RCDD and will act as a single point of contact for all activities regarding
this project. The Project Manager must be on the job at any time that work is being performed
or workers are present
B. Installation personnel shall meet manufacturer's training and education requirements for
implementation of the warranty program.
D. Provide all new materials that are of the best grade for each, unless otherwise specified
herein.
E. The Contractor shall, without charge, replace or repair any work found by the Owner’s
Representative not to conform to contract requirements. The Contractor shall promptly
remove rejected materials from the premises. Inspections of the work shall be performed in a
manner as to not cause delay to the work other than delays caused due to required work
repair or replacement.
F. Follow specifications for all required cable slack storage as detailed in this section. Cables
with insufficient slack will be reinstalled at the Contractor’s expense.
G. Floor Boxes
4. Knockouts: Open only knockouts which will be used for a conduit. Install tight fitting
knockout closers in holes from which conduits have been removed.
5. Box Supports: Fasten raceways and boxes securely in place, using any approved
spring clips and other fasteners, required in Section 16072 - Supporting Devices.
6. No Extension Rings: Install boxes which provide the required volume without the use
of extension rings.
7. Masonry Boxes: Install masonry boxes where boxes are recessed in wood, concrete
block or brick or wood paneling. Saw-cut the opening for the boxes so that they will fit
snugly in the opening. Install boxes with front edges flush with adjacent surfaces.
8. Cast Metal Boxes: Install cast metal boxes with weatherproof covers under any of the
following conditions:
a. Exterior locations
b. Where exposed to moisture
c. In exposed rigid steel conduit systems
11. Box Covers: Install box covers appropriate for the box, type of outlet and device, and
with additional requirements as follows:
12. Care for Insulation: Replace any thermal insulation cut or damaged during installation
of boxes.
13. Floor Box Adjustment: Adjust floor boxes and covers so that cover plates are flush with
the finished floor around the entire circumference.
14. Carpet Plates: In carpeted areas, install a carpet plate at each floor box.
B. Securely fasten side by side racks to each other using manufacturer hardware.
C. Mount with 36” of clear access area at front and rear of rack (and open end of a rack row)
C. Patch panels shall mount to standard floor-mounted EIA 19” grounded equipment racks with
tops at 84” high.
E. Cables shall be neatly dressed to their respective patch panel and within rack cable
management using Velcro ties and/or rack cable management loops.
B. Ladder Rack
1. VE 1, Class 20C Ladder type tray. Formed Aluminum, painted with gray epoxy.
Provide with 12” Wide path with 6” Rung Spacing on center.
2. Mount in MDF above four post equipment cabinets. Use Manufactured approved wall
bracket to secure to wall and J-bolt hardware to affix to top of cabinets.
3. Bond to TGB system using No. 6 AWG copper wire.
4. Provide compatible cable drop out trays from ladder rack to each equipment cabinet.
C. Cable Hangers (to route smaller bundles of horizontal cables to hallway cable tray or to IDF)
D. Sleeves
1. Small miscellaneous EMT sleeves may be needed when a cable route requires a
through-penetration in a non rated or fire rated barrier. Coordinate placement and
installation of all sleeves with the General Contractor. Seal voids between sleeve and
building construction with joint sealant. Penetrations of any fire rated partition must be
properly fire-stopped.
E. Firestop
1. Fire-stopping products may be in the form of UL 1479 approved caulk, putty, strip or
sheets that shall be specifically designed to fill holes, spaces, and voids at
communications penetrations.
2. Fire-stopping materials shall also provide adhesion to substrates and maintain fire and
smoke seal under normal expected movements of substrates, conduits and cables.
3. All telecommunications-related penetrations through fire rated partitions, including
those in floor sleeves (used and unused) and poke-thru's must be properly fire-
stopped.
A. Coordinate type of power strip with the Owner’s Project Manager based on the anticipated
requirements.
D. Secure all power cords so that they do not pose any hazard and cannot be disconnected
accidentally.
1. Provide (2) 25 Pair Cat-5 Cable from the MDF to Telco Demarc. CMR rated and ran in
EMT conduit provided by others.
2. Cable will be continuous without splicing.
3. Secure vertical weight of cables at MDF. Review fasteners, strain relief and routing
with Owner’s Representative.
A. Innerduct will be placed from MDF to Telco Demarcation via an EMT conduit (by others) for
future use.
C. Install innerduct in a manner that will prevent any kinks or damage to future fiber optic cable
installed in it.
D. Cap or Cover both ends of the innerduct, also securing pull rope and pull rope slack for easy
access in the future.
A. Horizontal Copper Cabling (All cables ran from outlet location to MDF - Room 309)
1. Cable shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. All work
shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electric Code. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B.1
through ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B.3, NECS/BICSI 568, ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 A and
ANSI/TIA/EIA 606 shall be adhered to during all installation activities. This also
includes EIA/TIA TSB 67, ICEA S 83 596 and UL. All cable termination shall be in the
proper order and sequence.
2. Horizontal station cable runs shall not exceed a cable drop distance limitation of 292.5
feet (90 meters) from the serving wiring closet IDF to the workstation outlet.
3. The contractor will leave 4 meters of slack at the workstation outlet’s conduit stub-out in
the ceiling above the outlet and a 3 meters slack loop at the IDF. The slack loop’s
shape or securing mechanism should not degrade the cable performance in any way.
4. The contractor will secure cables and cable bundles via Velcro Strips so as not to
squeeze or deform the cable sheath shape from excessive binding pressure.
5. Manufacturer’s and TIA/EIA instructions and standards for installation, bending radius,
pulling tension, clearances and terminations will be followed as a minimum.
6. Submit a testing and labeling plan for the Owner’s approval prior to placement, using
current ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 standards.
7. Cables ran to Wi-Fi Access Point locations shall be provided with a 25-foot slack coil.
8. Cable for elevator phone will be ran to the elevator machine room. The elevator
contractor will make the connection to the traveling cable assembly serving the elevator
car.
A. Faceplates:
1. It is the Cabling Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate all faceplate and insert types
and colors with wall, floor or millwork colors or types prior to any materials ordering or
installation.
2. For Floor boxes, Millwork, or Modular Furniture installed by work of other sections
and/or by others, the Cable Contractor will supply all bezels, faceplates and jack inserts
compatible with installed in-floor hardware.
B. Jack Inserts
A. Modular Cords
1. Patch cords shall be used in workstation to data network patch panels and shall meet
TIA/EIA 568 B.2 1 Category 6 requirements.
2. The Owner’s Network personnel and/or the Owner’s PBX Contractor shall perform the
final patching and/or cross connections tasks.
3.12 TESTING
A. Station Cable
1. Each communication outlet tested should include the Cat 6 patch panel port, a 3-foot
"factory" patch cord (Cat 6), device jack (Cat 6) and a 2-meter (Cat 6) "factory" launch
or workstation stranded connect cord. Testing shall be end to end using a tester that
meets the TIA/EIA accuracy performance requirements as specified in TIA/EIA 568-
B.2-1 (for Cat-6A Add Alternate - draft addendum #1 to TIA/EIA-B.1 for Category 6A
F/UTP cabling).
2. Test results should clearly identify the tested cable and its IDF point of origin. Links
which report a "Fail" for any of the individual tests shall result in an overall link fail. All
individual tests must result in a Pass to achieve an overall Pass.
3. Testing reports shall include testing results for wire map (continuity, shorts, crossed
pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs), total physical cable length including test equipment
cords, attenuation and near end cross talk.
4. The Contractor shall submit, prior to testing, a copy of their step by step copper cabling
test procedure for review and approval.
B. Voice Riser
1. Test each riser pair end to end. Test results shall be submitted in writing. Testing
should diagnose, at a minimum, the presence of all open loop conductors, shorts,
crossed pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs and any other problems which would preclude
pair use for telecommunications applications.
3.13 FIRESTOPPING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the fire-stopping of all telecommunications related
conduits and sleeves and/or any penetrations of fire rated walls to facilitate the installation of
communications cabling. The fire-stopping of all fire rated wall penetrations shall meet UL
1479 standards.
3.14 CHANGES
A. Any changes or modifications to the scope of work shall conform to the requirements of
Division 1 Specification Section “Product Requirements”.
A. A detailed materials and labor pricing listing should be submitted as part of the RFP response
for approval.
B. All pricing submitted shall be a fully itemized material listing (showing product description
and manufacturer’s name, unit cost and quantity proposed) and also a fully itemized labor
cost listing (showing description, unit cost and quantity proposed for all labor tasks). Please
use the following sub-headings for the itemized listing:
1. MATERIALS
SUBTOTAL
INSTALLATION
SUBTOTAL
SUBTOTAL
GRAND TOTAL
C. Optional pricing requested shall also be fully itemized. Also include any freight or
administrative costs and any supervisory mark-ups to the base price of the entity doing the
actual work and providing materials.
D. Any bid that is not fully itemized will be deemed to be unacceptable and will be rejected.
E. All pricing shall be signed off on by an officer of the bidding company and show any
applicable time limitations e.g. “Pricing good for 120 days”.
3.16 CABLE PRICING OPTION 001 – 10-GIGABIT STATION CABLE CAT-6A F/UTP
A. Provide a fully itemized alternate price to replace all Category-6 station cable, including all
termination hardware, shielded inserts, patch panels, patch cords and testing with a 10-
Gigabit Category-6A F/UTP shielded cabling system (SIEMON or equivalent).
A. Assume standard removable ceiling, with an average cable route distance of 175’(53.34m).
B. Provide the same Adds pricing for Cable Pricing Option 001- 10 GIG Cat-6A F/UTP Cable as
well.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the fire alarm
equipment to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to,
alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control units, fire safety control devices,
annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified.
B. Fire alarm systems shall comply with requirements of NFPA 72 unless variations to NFPA 72 are
specifically identified within these contract documents by the following notation: "variation". The design,
system layout, document submittal preparation, and supervision of installation and testing shall be provided
by a technician that is certified NICET level III or a registered fire protection engineer. The NICET certified
technician shall be on site for the supervision and testing of the system. Factory engineers from the
equipment manufacturer, thoroughly familiar and knowledgeable with all equipment utilized, shall provide
additional technical support at the site as required by the Contracting Officer or his authorized
representative. Installers shall have a minimum of two years experience installing fire alarm systems.
E. The fire alarm control unit shall automatically transmit alarm signals to a listed central station using a digital
alarm communicator transmitter in accordance with NFPA 72.
1.2 SCOPE
A. A new fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the specifications and
drawings. Device location and wiring runs shown on the drawings are for reference only unless specifically
dimensioned. Actual locations shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification.
B. Drawings:
1. Prepare drawings and include all contractors information. Bid drawing files will be provided to the
Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying all critical
dimensions shown on the drawings.
2. Floor plans: Provide locations of all devices (with device number at each addressable device
corresponding to control unit programming), appliances, panels, equipment, junction/terminal
cabinets/boxes, risers, electrical power connections, individual circuits and raceway routing, system
zoning; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors in each raceway; conduit fill calculations
with cross section area percent fill for each type and size of conductor and raceway. Only those
devices connected and incorporated into the final system shall be on these floor plans. Do not show
any removed devices on the floor plans. Show all interfaces for all fire safety functions.
3. Riser diagrams: Provide, for the entire system, the number, size and type of riser raceways and
conductors in each riser raceway and number of each type device per floor and zone. Show door
holder interface, elevator control interface, HVAC shutdown interface, fire extinguishing system
interface, and all other fire safety interfaces. Show wiring styles on the riser diagram for all circuits.
4. Detailed wiring diagrams: Provide for control panels, modules, power supplies, electrical power
connections, auxiliary relays and annunciators showing termination identifications, size and type
conductors, circuit boards, LED lamps, indicators, adjustable controls, switches, ribbon connectors,
wiring harnesses, terminal strips and connectors, spare zones/circuits. Diagrams shall be drawn to a
scale sufficient to show spatial relationships between components, enclosures and equipment
configuration.
5. Two weeks prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the DCPL one (1) set of
reproducible, as-built drawings. As-built drawings (floor plans) shall show all conduit used for the fire
alarm system.
C. Manuals:
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and
operating manuals including technical data sheets for all items used in the system, power
requirements, device wiring diagrams, dimensions, and information for ordering replacement parts.
a. Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation, expansion
and maintenance.
b. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections
between the items of equipment.
c. Include complete listing of all software used and installation and operation instructions including
the input/output matrix chart.
d. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to
properly operate, inspect, test and maintain the equipment and system. Provide all manufacturer's
installation limitations including but not limited to circuit length limitations.
e. Complete listing of all digitized voice messages.
f. Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of recommended spare parts,
tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.
D. Certifications:
1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit the technician's NICET level III fire alarm certification
as well as certification from the control unit manufacturer that the proposed performer of contract
maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include in the
certification the names and addresses of the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed
performer of contract maintenance. Also include the name and title of the manufacturer’s
representative who makes the certification.
2. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from either the control unit
manufacturer or the manufacturer of each component (e.g., smoke detector) that the components
being furnished are compatible with the control unit.
3. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment
manufacturer that the wiring and connection diagrams meet this specification, UL and NFPA 72
requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY
All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects
and shall remain so for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the
Contracting Officer.
1.6 GUARANTY PERIOD SERVICES
A. Complete inspection, testing, maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be provided by
a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of five
years from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer.
B. Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment, parts and labor to perform required inspection,
testing, maintenance and repair.
C. All inspection, testing, maintenance and permanent records required by NFPA 72, and recommended by
the equipment manufacturer shall be provided by the contractor. Work shall include operation of sprinkler
system alarm and supervisory devices. It shall include all interfaced equipment including but not limited to
elevators, HVAC shutdown, and extinguishing systems.
D. Maintenance and testing shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 72. A computerized preventive
maintenance schedule shall be provided and shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of
equipment. The schedule shall include a systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all
equipment.
E. Non-included Work: Repair service shall not include the performance of any work due to improper use,
accidents, or negligence for which the contractor is not responsible.
f. Emergency Service:
1. Warranty Period Service: Service other than the preventative maintenance, inspection, and testing
required by NFPA 72 shall be considered emergency call-back service and covered under the warranty
of the installation during the first year of the warranty period, unless the required service is a result of
abuse or misuse by the Government. Written notification shall not be required for emergency warranty
period service and the contractor shall respond as outlined in the following sections on Normal and
Overtime Emergency Call-Back Service. Warranty period service can be required during normal or
overtime emergency call-back service time periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer or his
authorized representative.
2. Normal and overtime emergency call-back service shall consist of an on-site response within two hours
of notification of a system trouble.
3. Normal emergency call-back service times are between the hours of 7:30 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., Monday
through Friday, exclusive of federal holidays. Service performed during all other times shall be
considered to be overtime emergency call-back service. The cost of all normal emergency call-back
service for years 2 through 5 shall be included in the cost of this contract.
4. Overtime emergency call-back service shall be provided for the system when requested by the
Government. The cost of the first 40 manhours per year of overtime call-back service during years 2
through 5 of this contract shall be provided under this contract. Payment for overtime emergency call-
back service in excess of the 40 man hours per year requirement will be handled through separate
purchase orders. The method of calculating overtime emergency call-back hours is based on actual
time spent on site and does not include travel time.
H. The contractor shall maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit. The log shall list the date and time of all
examinations and trouble calls, condition of the system, and name of the technician. Each trouble call shall
be fully described, including the nature of the trouble, necessary correction performed, and parts replaced.
current induced transients. Protection devices shall be shown on the submittal drawings and shall be
UL listed or in accordance with written manufacturer's requirements.
4. All wire or cable used in underground conduits including those in concrete shall be listed for wet
locations.
C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Cabinets:
1. Shall be galvanized steel in accordance with UL requirements.
2. All new and reused boxes shall be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA 70.
3. Covers shall be painted red in and shall be identified with white markings as "FA" for junction boxes
and as "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" for cabinets and terminal boxes. Lettering shall be a minimum of 19
mm (3/4 inch) high.
4. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have a volume 50 percent greater than required by the NFPA 70.
Minimum sized wire shall be considered as 14 AWG for calculation purposes.
5. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have identified pressure type terminal strips and shall be located at
the base of each riser. Terminal strips shall be labeled as specified or as approved by the COTR.
2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. General:
1. All circuits shall be monitored for integrity.
2. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble condition including, but not limited to main power failure,
grounds and system wiring derangement.
3. Transmit digital alarm information to the fire alarm control unit.
B. Enclosure:
1. The control unit shall be housed in a cabinet suitable for both recessed and surface mounting. Cabinet
and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard
finish.
2. Cabinet shall contain all necessary relays, terminals, lamps, and legend plates to provide control for
the system.
specified. The normal power shall be transformed, rectified, coordinated, and interfaced with the
standby battery and charger.
2. Door holder power shall be arranged so that momentary or sustained loss of main operating power
shall not cause the release of any door.
3. Power supply for smoke detectors shall be taken from the fire alarm control unit.
4. Provide protectors to protect the fire alarm equipment from damage due to lightning or voltage and
current transients.
5. Provide new separate and direct ground lines to the outside to protect the equipment from unwanted
grounds.
E. Circuit Supervision: Each alarm initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and notification appliance
circuit, shall be supervised against the occurrence of a break or ground fault condition in the field wiring.
These conditions shall cause a trouble signal to sound in the control unit until manually silenced by an off
switch.
F. Supervisory Devices: All sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, post indicator valves (PIV), and
main gate valves shall be supervised for off-normal position. Closing a valve shall sound a supervisory
signal at the control unit until silenced by an off switch. The specific location of all closed valves shall be
identified at the control unit. Valve operation shall not cause an alarm signal. Low air pressure switches
and duct detectors shall be monitored as supervisory signals. The power supply to the elevator shunt trip
breaker shall be monitored by the fire alarm system as a supervisory signal.
G. Trouble signals:
1. Arrange the trouble signals for automatic reset (non-latching).
2. System trouble switch off and on lamps shall be visible through the control unit door.
H. Function Switches: Provide the following switches in addition to any other switches required for the system:
1. Remote Alarm Transmission By-pass Switch: Shall prevent transmission of all signals to the main fire
alarm control unit when in the "off" position. A system trouble signal shall be energized when switch is
in the off position.
2. Alarm Off Switch: Shall disconnect power to alarm notification circuits on the local building alarm
system. A system trouble signal shall be activated when switch is in the off position.
3. Trouble Silence Switch: Shall silence the trouble signal whenever the trouble silence switch is
operated. This switch shall not reset the trouble signal.
4. Reset Switch: Shall reset the system after an alarm, provided the initiating device has been reset. The
system shall lock in alarm until reset.
5. Lamp Test Switch: A test switch or other approved convenient means shall be provided to test the
indicator lamps.
6. Drill Switch: Shall activate all notification devices without tripping the remote alarm transmitter. This
switch is required only for general evacuation systems specified herein.
7. Door Holder By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent doors from releasing during fire alarm tests. A system
trouble alarm shall be energized when switch is in the abnormal position.
8. Elevator recall By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent the elevators from recalling upon operation of any of the
devices installed to perform that function. A system trouble alarm shall be energized when the switch is
in the abnormal position.
9. HVAC/Smoke Damper By-Pass: Provide a means to disable HVAC fans from shutting down and/or
smoke dampers from closing upon operation of an initiating device designed to interconnect with these
devices.
I. Remote Control Capability: Each building fire alarm control unit shall be installed and programmed so that
each must be reset locally after an alarm, before the main fire alarm control unit can be reset. After the
local building fire alarm control unit has been reset, then the all system acknowledge, reset, silence or
disabling functions can be operated by the main fire alarm control unit
K. System Expansion: Design the control units and enclosures so that the system can be expanded in the
future (to include the addition of twenty percent more alarm initiating, alarm notification and door holder
circuits) without disruption or replacement of the existing control unit and secondary power supply.
floor, zone, device type, device address and change of status (alarm, trouble, supervisory,
reset/return to normal).
3. System printers shall provide tractor drive feed pins for conventional fan fold 213 mm x 275 mm (8-1/2"
x 11") paper.
4. The printers shall provide a printing and non-printing self test feature.
5. Power supply for printers shall be taken from and coordinated with the building emergency service.
6. Each printer shall be provided with a stand for the printer and paper.
7. Spare paper and ribbons for printers shall be stocked and maintained as part of the five (5) year
guarantee period services in addition to the one installed after the approval of the final acceptance test.
2.6 VOICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (VCS)
A. General:
1. An emergency voice communication system shall be installed throughout the building.
2. Upon receipt of an alarm signal from the building fire alarm system, the VCS shall automatically
transmit a pre-recorded fire alarm message throughout the building.
3. A digitized voice module shall be used to store each prerecorded message.
4. The VCS shall be arranged as a dual channel system capable of transmitting two different messages
simultaneously.
5. The VCS shall supervise all speaker circuits, control equipment, remote audio control equipment, and
amplifiers.
B. Speaker Circuit Control Unit:
1. The speaker circuit control unit shall include switches to manually activate or deactivate speaker
circuits grouped by floor in the system.
2. Speaker circuit control switches shall provide on, off, and automatic positions and indications.
3. The speaker circuit control unit shall include visual indication of active or trouble status for each group
of speaker circuits in the system.
4. A trouble indication shall be provided if a speaker circuit group is disabled.
5. A lamp test switch shall be provided to test all indicator lamps.
6. A single "all call" switch shall be provided to activate all speaker circuit groups simultaneously.
7. A push-to-talk microphone shall be provided for manual voice messages.
8. A voice message disconnect switch shall be provided to disconnect automatic digitized voice
messages from the system. The system shall be arranged to allow manual voice messages and
indicate a system trouble condition when activated.
C. Speaker Circuit Arrangement:
1. Speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is one speaker circuit per smoke zone.
2. Audio amplifiers and control equipment shall be electrically supervised for normal and abnormal
conditions.
3. Speaker circuits shall be either 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS with a minimum of 50% spare power available.
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 16721- 9/15
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
4. Speaker circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of any one speaker circuit will
not cause the loss of any other speaker circuit in the system.
D. Digitized Voice Module (DVM):
1. The Digitized Voice Module shall provide prerecorded digitized evacuation and instructional messages.
The messages shall be professionally recorded and approved by the COTR prior to programming.
2. The DVM shall be configured to automatically output to the desired circuits following a 10-second slow
whoop alert tone.
3. Prerecorded magnetic taped messages and tape players are not permitted.
4. The digitized message capacity shall be no less than 15 second in length.
5. The digitized message shall be transmitted three times.
6. The DVM shall be supervised for operational status.
7. Failure of the DVM shall result in the transmission of a constant alarm tone.
8. The DVM memory shall have a minimum 50% spare capacity after those messages identified in this
section are recorded. Multiple DVM's may be used to obtain the required capacity.
E. Audio Amplifiers:
1. Audio Amplifiers shall provide a minimum of 50 Watts at either 25 or 70.7 VRMS output voltage levels.
2. Amplifiers shall be continuously supervised for operational status.
3. Amplifiers shall be configured for either single or dual channel application.
4. Each audio output circuit connection shall be configurable for Style X.
5. A minimum of 50% spare output capacity shall be available for each amplifier.
F. Tone Generator(s):
1. Tone Generator(s) shall be capable of providing a distinctive three-pulse temporal pattern fire alarm
signal as well as a slow whoop.
2. Tone Generator(s) shall be continuously supervised for operational status.
2.7 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Speakers:
1. Shall operate on either 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS with field selectable output taps from 0.5 to 2.0W and
originally installed at the one-half watt tap. Speakers shall provide a minimum sound output of 80 dBA
at ten feet with the one-half watt tap.
2. Frequency response shall be a minimum of 400 HZ to 4000 HZ.
3. 100 mm (4 inches) or 200 mm (8 inches) cone type speakers ceiling mounted with white colored
baffles in areas with suspended ceilings and wall mounted in areas without ceilings.
B. Strobes:
1. Xenon flash tube type minimum 15 candela in toilet rooms and 75 candela in all other areas with a
flash rate of 1 HZ. Strobes shall be synchronized where required by the National Fire Alarm Code
(NFPA 72).
2. Backplate shall be red with 13 mm (1/2 inch) permanent red letters. Lettering to read "Fire", be oriented
on the wall or ceiling properly, and be visible from all viewing directions.
3. Each strobe circuit shall have a minimum of twenty (20) percent spare capacity.
4. Strobes may be combined with the audible notification appliances specified herein.
2.8 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
A. Manual Fire Alarm Stations:
1. Shall be non-breakglass, address reporting type.
2. Station front shall be constructed of a durable material such as cast or extruded metal or high impact
plastic. Stations shall be semi-flush type.
3. Stations shall be of single action pull down type with suitable operating instructions provided on front in
raised or depressed letters, and clearly labeled "FIRE".
4. Operating handles shall be constructed of a durable material. On operation, the lever shall lock in
alarm position and remain so until reset. A key shall be required to gain front access for resetting, or
conducting tests and drills.
5. Unless otherwise specified, all exposed parts shall be red in color and have a smooth, hard, durable
finish.
B. Smoke Detectors:
1. Smoke detectors shall be UL listed for use with the fire alarm control unit being furnished.
2. Smoke detectors shall be addressable type complying with applicable UL Standards for system type
detectors. Smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and NFPA 72.
3. Detectors shall have an indication lamp to denote an alarm condition. Provide remote indicator lamps
and identification plates where detectors are concealed from view. Locate the remote indicator lamps
and identification plates flush mounted on walls so they can be observed from a normal standing
position.
4. All spot type and duct type detectors installed shall be of the photoelectric type.
5. Photoelectric detectors shall be factory calibrated and readily field adjustable. The sensitivity of any
photoelectric detector shall be factory set at 3.0 plus or minus 0.25 percent obscuration per foot.
6. Detectors shall provide a visual trouble indication if they drift out of sensitivity range or fail internal
diagnostics. Detectors shall also provide visual indication of sensitivity level upon testing. Detectors,
along with the fire alarm control units shall be UL listed for testing the sensitivity of the detectors.
C. Heat Detectors:
1. Heat detectors shall be of the addressable restorable rate compensated fixed-temperature spot type.
2. Detectors shall have a minimum smooth ceiling rating of 2500 square feet.
3. Intermediate temperature rated (200 degrees F) heat detectors shall be utilized.
D. Water Flow and Pressure Switches:
1. Wet pipe water flow switches and dry pipe alarm pressure switches for sprinkler systems shall be
connected to the fire alarm system by way of an address reporting interface device.
2. All water flow switches shall be of a single manufacturer and series and non-accumulative retard type.
3. All switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time that is conveniently adjustable from 0 to 60
seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds. Timing shall be recorded and documented during
testing.
2.9 SUPERVISORY DEVICES
A. Duct Smoke Detectors:
1. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided and connected by way of an address reporting interface
device. Detectors shall be provided with an approved duct housing mounted exterior to the duct, and
shall have perforated sampling tubes extending across the full width of the duct (wall to wall). Detector
placement shall be such that there is uniform airflow in the cross section of the duct.
2. Interlocking with fans shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 90A and as specified hereinafter
under Part 3.2, "TYPICAL OPERATION".
3. Provide remote indicator lamps, key test stations and identification nameplates (e.g. "DUCT SMOKE
DETECTOR AHU-X") for all duct detectors. Locate key test stations in plain view on walls or ceilings so
that they can be observed and operated from a normal standing position.
B. Sprinkler and Standpipe System Supervisory Switches:
1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve, riser valve or zone control valve, and each standpipe
system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test
and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.
2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch.
3. Valve supervisory switches shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of address reporting
interface device. // See Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS for new switches to be
added. Connect tamper switches for all control valves shown on the approved shop drawings. //
4. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die-cast aluminum housing that shall provide a
19 mm (3/4 inch) tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the
valves.
5. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper-proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the
housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.
6. Where dry-pipe sprinkler systems are installed, high and low air pressure switches shall be provided
and monitored by way of an address reporting interface devices.
2.10 ADDRESS REPORTING INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Shall have unique addresses that reports directly to the building fire alarm panel.
B. Shall be configurable to monitor normally open or normally closed devices for both alarm and trouble
conditions.
C. Shall have terminal designations clearly differentiating between the circuit to which they are reporting from
and the device that they are monitoring.
D. Shall be UL listed for fire alarm use and compatibility with the panel to which they are connected.
E. Shall be mounted in weatherproof housings if mounted exterior to a building.
2.11 SMOKE BARRIER DOOR CONTROL
A. Electromagnetic Door Holders:
1. New Door Holders shall be standard wall mounted electromagnetic type. In locations where doors do
not come in contact with the wall when in the full open position, an extension post shall be added to the
door bracket.
2. Operation shall be by 24 volt DC supplied from a battery located at the fire alarm control unit. Door
holders shall be coordinated as to voltage, ampere drain, and voltage drop with the battery, battery
charger, wiring and fire alarm system for operation as specified.
B. Door holder control circuits shall be electrically supervised.
C. Smoke detectors shall not be incorporated as an integral part of door holders.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, 72, 90A, and 101 as shown on the drawings, and as
recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. Fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit. All
conduit and wire shall be installed in accordance with Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS , Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW), and all penetrations of smoke and fire barriers shall be
protected as required by FIRESTOPPING method.
B. All conduits, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may
be exposed in unfinished areas.
C. All exposed conduit shall be painted to match surrounding finished areas and red.
D. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control units and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted
when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.
E. Speakers shall be ceiling mounted and fully recessed in areas with suspended ceilings. Speakers shall be
wall mounted and recessed in finished areas without suspended ceilings. Speakers may be surface
mounted in unfinished areas.
F. Strobes shall be flush wall mounted 2,000 mm (80 inches) above the floor or 150 mm (6 inches) below
ceiling, whichever is lower. Locate and mount to maintain a minimum 900 mm (36 inches) clearance from
side obstructions.
G. Manual pull stations shall be installed not less than 1050 mm (42 inches) or more than 1200 mm (48
inches) from finished floor to bottom of device and within 1500 mm (60 inches) of a stairway or an exit
door.
I. Where possible, locate water flow and pressure switches a minimum of 300 mm (12 inches) from a fitting
that changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of 900 mm (36 inches) from a valve.
J. Mount valve tamper switches so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjust to
operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved
no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position.
3.2 TYPICAL OPERATION
A. Activation of any manual pull station, water flow or pressure switch, heat detector, kitchen hood
suppression system, gaseous suppression system, or smoke detector shall cause the following operations
to occur:
1. Operate the emergency voice communication system in the Building. Flash strobes continuously only
in the zone of alarm.
2. Continuously sound a temporal pattern general alarm and Flash all strobes in the building in alarm until
reset at the fire alarm control unit.
3. Release only the magnetic door holders in the smoke zone after the alert signal.
4. Transmit a separate alarm signal, via the main fire alarm control unit to the fire department.
5. Unlock the electrically locked exit doors within the zone of alarm.
B. Heat detectors in elevator machine rooms shall, in addition to the above functions, disconnect all power to
all elevators served by that machine room after a time delay. The time delay shall be programmed within
the fire alarm system programming and be equal to the time it takes for the car to travel from the highest to
the lowest level, plus 10 seconds.
C. Operation of a smoke detector at a corridor door used for automatic closing shall also release only the
magnetic door holders // on that floor // in that smoke zone //. //Operation of a smoke detector at a shutter
used for automatic closing shall also release only the shutters // on that floor // in that smoke zone //.
F. Operation of duct smoke detectors shall cause a system supervisory condition and shut down the
ventilation system and close the associated smoke dampers as appropriate.
G. Operation of any sprinkler or standpipe system valve supervisory switch, high/low air pressure switch, or
fire pump alarm switch shall cause a system supervisory condition.
3.3 TESTS
A. Provide the service of a NICET level III, competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the
adjustments and tests for the system.
B. When the systems have been completed and prior to the scheduling of the final inspection, furnish testing
equipment and perform the following tests in the presence of the COTR. When any defects are detected,
make repairs or install replacement components, and repeat the tests until such time that the complete fire
alarm systems meets all contract requirements. After the system has passed the initial test and been
approved by the COTR, the contractor may request a final inspection.
1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits,
ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
2. Test the insulation on all installed cable and wiring by standard methods as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer.
3. Run water through all flow switches. Check time delay on water flow switches. Submit a report listing
all water flow switch operations and their retard time in seconds.
4. Open each alarm initiating and notification circuit to see if trouble signal actuates.
5. Ground each alarm initiation and notification circuit and verify response of trouble signals.
3.4 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Prior to final acceptance a minimum 30 day "burn-in" period shall be provided. The purpose shall be to
allow equipment to stabilize and potential installation and software problems and equipment malfunctions
to be identified and corrected. During this diagnostic period, all system operations and malfunctions shall
be recorded. Final acceptance will be made upon successful completion of the "burn-in" period and where
the last 14 days is without a system or equipment malfunction.
B. At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall
repeat the tests in Article 3.3 TESTS and those required by NFPA 72. In addition the representative shall
demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect.
3.5 INSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representative shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of
Operation" including a trouble shooting guide of the entire system for submittal to the VA. The sequence of
operation will be shown for each input in the system in a matrix format and provided in a loose leaf binder.
When reading the sequence of operation, the reader will be able to quickly and easily determine what
output will occur upon activation of any input in the system. The INPUT/OUTPUT matrix format shall be as
shown in Appendix A to NFPA 72.
PART 4 - SCHEDULES
4.1 LOCATION OF VOICE MESSAGES:
Upon receipt of an alarm signal from the building fire alarm system, the voice communication system shall
automatically transmit a 3 second tone alert and a pre-recorded fire alarm message throughout the
building.
- - - END - - -
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing and installation of a complete
master labeled lightning protection system, complying with NFPA 780, UL
96 and UL 96A.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General
electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of
Division 16.
B. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground faults.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS, submit
the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Isometric and plan views showing layout and connections to the
required metal surfaces.
2. Show the methods of mounting the system to the adjacent construction.
C. Qualifications: Submit proof that the installer of the lightning
protection system has had suitable and adequate experience installing
other lightning protection systems, and is capable of installing the
system as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment.
D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies
of the following certifications to the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the lightning protection system has been properly
installed and tested.
2. Certification that the lightning protection system has been
inspected by a UL representative and has been approved by UL without
variation.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions,
supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-02...................National Electrical Code (NEC)
L. When the lightning protection systems have been installed, have the
systems inspected by a UL representative. Obtain and install a UL
numbered master label "C" for each of the lightning protection systems
at the location directed by the UL representative and the Resident
Engineer.
- - - E N D - - -
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of
exterior luminaries, controls, poles and supports.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General
electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one
section of Division 16.
B. Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS: Conduits, fittings, and boxes for
raceway systems.
C. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage
power and lighting wiring.
D. Section 16402, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: Underground
handholes and conduits.
E. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to
determine compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, details,
materials, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection
diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, poles, luminaries, lamps and
controls.
C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of
operating and maintenance manuals to the Resident Engineer. Include
technical data sheets, wiring and connection diagrams, and information
for ordering replacement parts.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies
of the following to the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the materials are in accordance with the drawings
and specifications.
2.2 POLES
A. General:
1. Poles shall be as shown on the drawings, and as specified.
2. Provide a steel-grounding stud opposite hand hole openings.
3. Provide a base cover matching the pole in material and color to
conceal the mounting hardware pole-base welds and anchor bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings,
and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Poles:
1. Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts,
threaded at the top end and bent 1.57 rad 90 degrees at the bottom
end. Provide galvanized nuts, washers, and ornamental covers for
anchor bolts. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged
to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end
of conduit. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent
vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for
luminaire location.
2. After the poles have been installed, shimmed and plumbed, grout the
spaces between the pole bases and the concrete base with non-shrink
concrete grout material. Provide a plastic or copper tube, of not
less than 3/8-inch inside diameter, through the grout tight to the
top of the concrete base for moisture weeping.
C. Foundation Excavation: Depth shall be as indicated. Dig holes large
enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the full depth of the
hole. Place backfill in the hole in 150 mm 6 inch maximum layers and
thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the pole in a conical shape
and pack tightly to drain water away.
D. Photocell Switch Aiming: Aim switch according to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.2 GROUNDING
Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles,
luminaries, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as
specified in Section 16450, GROUNDING. Where copper grounding conductor
is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or
lined connectors suitable and listed for this purpose.
- - - E N D - - -
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of
the interior lighting systems.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General
requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 16.
B. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and
wiring.
C. Section 16140, WIRING DEVICES: Wiring devices used as part of the
lighting systems.
D. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault
currents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND
REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
B. Refer to Paragraph, GUARANTY, in Section 01001, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL), submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to
determine compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials,
required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams,
photometric data, ballasts, lenses, louvers, lamps, and controls.
3. When catalog data and/or shop drawings for fluorescent fixtures are
submitted for approval, photometric data from an independent testing
laboratory shall be included with the submittal, indicating average
brightness and efficiency of the fixture, as specified in
specification or as shown on the drawings. Coefficient of utilization
data will not be considered a suitable substitute.
C. Samples:
2. Ballast package:
a. Size: The ballast case shall be sized to be physically inter-
changeable with standard core-and-coil ballasts and suitable for
standard mounting in new or existing lighting fixtures.
b. Case marking: Mark the ballast to indicate the required supply
voltage, frequency, RMS current, current surge during starting,
input watts, and power factor at the design center voltage, open
circuit voltage, crest factor and efficacy.
3. Performance:
a. Light output:
1) At the design voltage, the light output shall be at least equal
to that obtained by a core-and-coil ballasted system meeting
ANSI, NEMA and CBM standards. The comparison test shall be
measured in the same fixture at 25 degrees C (plus or minus one
degree) ambient room temperature.
2) Tests shall be made in fixtures designed only for the number of
lamps being tested.
3) For other applications (higher ambients, etc.) the tests should
be operated with equivalent lamp wall temperatures plus or
minus 4 degrees C.
b. Efficacy: The efficacy of the high-frequency, electronically
ballasted system shall be at least 15 percent greater than the
equivalent CBM core-and-coil ballasted system (see "Light output"
above).
c. Starting: The ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining
operation of lamps at an ambient temperature of 10 degrees C (50
degree F) or more for an input voltage of plus or minus 10 percent
about the center design voltage unless otherwise indicated. The
ballast shall never be started in the instant start mode at any
temperature.
d. Operation:
1) The ballast shall safely and reliably operate in a room ambient
temperature from 10 degrees C (50 degree F) to 40 degrees C
(105 degree F).
2) The light output shall not vary by more than plus or minus 5
percent for a plus or minus 10 percent variation of the input
voltage about the center design voltage. Light output shall
remain constant for a plus or minus 5 percent variation of the
input voltage.
3) The ballast shall operate the lamps in a manner that will not
adversely curtail the normal life of the lamp.
e. Transient protection: The ballast shall comply with IEEE C62.41,
Cat. A.
f. Flicker: The flicker shall be less than 5 percent and without
visible flicker.
g. Noise: The audible noise levels should be equivalent to or better
than the Class A rating of CBM certified ballasts.
h. Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency
Interference (RFI): The EMI and RFI limits shall meet the
requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules and
Regulations (CFR 47 Part 18).
i. Rated life: The ballast shall have a rated life of 10 years or
30,000 hours (based on a 10 hour day).
j. The two-lamp ballast shall safely operate two F32T8 RS, 32- watt
lamps or two F32T8/U lamps. The single lamp ballast shall safely
operate one F32T8 RS, 32-watt lamp or one F32T8/U lamp.
k. Power factor: Not less than 95 percent.
l. Reliability:
1) Labels: Ballasts must be labeled or listed by UL and CBM/ETL.
2) Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, a certified test
report by an independent testing laboratory showing that the
electronic ballasts meet or exceed all the performance
requirements in this specification.
m. Total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 10 percent.
E. Core-and-coil ballasts (for lamps other than F32T8 and F32T8/U or where
shown on drawings as "core-and-coil"):
1. Shall be rapid starting type.
2. Shall comply with NEMA 82.1 and UL 935.
3. Shall be UL Class P with automatic-resetting, internal, thermal
protection.
4. Shall be CBM/ETL certified.
5. Power factor shall be not less than 95 percent. Capacitors in
ballasts shall not contain PCB (Polychlorinated Biphenyl) fluids or
other fluids recognized as hazardous when discharged into the
environment.
6. Sound ratings shall be Class A or better, except for ballast sizes
which are not available with Class A ratings, as standard products
from any manufacturer. Ballasts which are not available with Class A
ratings shall have the quietest ratings available.
7. Where core-and-coil ballasts are specified or detailed in lieu of the
normally required electronic high-frequency types, two lamp ballasts
shall be energy-saving type, UL listed to operate F40T12 rapid start
lamps for both standard 40 watt lamps and the reduced wattage 35/34
watts energy-saving lamps. Lamp output shall be within 5 percent of
nominal rating. When operating energy-saving lamps, the input watts
to the ballast shall not exceed 78 watts at 120 V.A.C. or 79 watts at
277 V.A.C. Energy-saving type ballasts should not be used in ambient
temperatures below manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Ballasts for lighting fixtures controlled by dimming devices shall be
the electronic, high frequency type as specified herein, equipped for
dimming and conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
associated dimming devices to assure satisfactory operation of the
lighting system.
G. All ballasts serving straight or "U" type lamps shall be mounted by four
non-turning studs (or captive bolts) equipped with lock washers and nuts
or locking type nuts, or by four thread cutting (TC) sheet metal screws
which are firmly secured against the fixture body (or wireway) to
maximize dissipation of heat and minimize noise. Exception: electronic
high-frequency ballasts may be mounted at a minimum of two points, one
at each end of unit.
H. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally
installed position, and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or
wireway covers unless so specified.
I. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be
wired with the outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same
ballast, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the
innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room, each switch
shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in
all fixture units that are being controlled.
J. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements
dictate otherwise, utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the
center lamp in pairs of adjacent units that are mounted in a continuous
row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp fixture shall be factory wired
with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting. Individually
mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a
single-lamp ballast for operation of the center lamp.
G. Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting fixtures
installed and all existing lighting fixtures reinstalled under this
project.
H. Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain that
approved lighting fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and
installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames,
flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed.
I. Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as
specified in Section 16450, GROUNDING.
J. At completion of project, relamp all fixtures which have failed/burned-
out lamps. Clean all fixtures, lenses, diffusers and louvers that have
accumulated dust/dirt during construction.
- - - E N D - - -
AR1 Recessed 1 x 39CDMT6/830 Gotham Lighting #DTH-T6-39MHC-4BC-T20-*-TRW Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling G12 Base Architect to verify fixture flange finish.
Fixture to be provided with full microprism lens trim.
JL1 Surface 1w LED included ProLume #XLA-26'F-2-WW-B Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Bench Warm white Remote driver to be located underneath bench or in millwork bookcase
Fixtures mount underneath bench and will need to be segmented for
radius curve.
JL1a Surface 1w LED included ProLume #XLA-24.5'F-2-WW-B Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Cove Warm white Remote driver to be located underneath bench or in millwork bookcase
Fixtures mount behind letters in a cove on the lower level.
JL2 Surface 1w LED included ProLume #XLA-4.5'F-2-B-L Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Stair Blue Remote driver to be located in an accessible back of house location
Fixtures mount behind perforated panels of stair risers.
JL2a Surface 1w LED included ProLume #XLA-4.5'F-2-WW-B Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Stair Warm White Remote driver to be located in an accessible back of house location
Fixtures mount behind perforated panels of stair risers.
PC2a Pendant 6 x FT36W/2G11/830 GLighting # G-10063 Qvolts F YY G 3 072 Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling 2G11 Base Manufacturer must submit finish sample for design team approval.
MOD: Modify fixture so that there are no visible connectors or hardware. Provide fixture with no visible hardware or connectors.
MOD: Modify fixture suspension for 6'-0" overall height Architect to verify suspension length.
Architect to verify overall diameter of fixture.
PC2b Pendant 6 x FT36W/2G11/830 GLighting # G-10063 Qvolts F YY G 3 036 Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling 2G11 Base Manufacturer must submit finish sample for design team approval.
MOD: Modify fixture so that there are no visible connectors or hardware. Provide fixture with no visible hardware or connectors.
MOD: Modify fixture suspension for 3'-0" overall height Architect to verify suspension length.
Architect to verify overall diameter of fixture.
PC3 Pendant 2 x FT18W/2G11/830 Schmitz # 26982.06/2831 MOD Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling 2G11 Base Architect to verify finish.
MOD: Non-Standard Cable and Power Cord Lengths Overall fixture heights vary from 14' to 51'. Provide a shop drawing for review
PC4 Pendant 8x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Crenshaw # Custom SCUS pendant - oil rubbed bronze Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Architect to verify overall diameter of fixture.
Architect to verify suspension length.
4x CFTR18W/GX24q/830 Provide oiled rubbed bronze finish on metal
GX24q-2 Base
PC6 Pendant 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Brass Light Gallery #CN-411-A8-03M-D303-Brnz-36"-MOD Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Modify fixture for dedicated compact fluorescent lamping and integral
electronic ballast.
Architect to verify finish and overall height
PC7 Pendant 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Brass Light Gallery #CN413-A6-03M-C314-Brnz-30"-Mod Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Modify fixture for dedicated compact fluorescent lamp and integral ballast
Architect to verify finish and stem length.
PF1 Pendant 4 x F24T5HO/830 Artemide # MOUETTE SYMMETRICAL Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling Mini Bipin Base Fixture comes with 72" of cable - field shorten to approximately 30" overall
height - verify with Architect in field
PF5 Pendant 10 x F28T5/830 Focal Point # FTWS M12T5 1C volts D J12 WH 20' Voltage per Electrical Enginner
Mini Bipin Base Architect to verify finish
Bottom of fixture to hang flush with dropped ceiling in public meeting room
Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.
RC1 Recessed 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Kurt Versen # H8632-SZ-WT-FLT6MP-volt Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Architect to verify fixture reflector and flange finish.
Fixture to be provided with full microprism lens trim.
RC2 Recessed 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Kurt Versen # WH432-WHP-LP-volt Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Architect to verify fixture reflector and flange finish.
Fixture to be provide with large prism lens.
RC3 Recessed 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Kurt Versen # H8653-SZ-WT-volt Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Architect to verify fixture reflector and flange finish.
RF2 Recessed 10 x F28T5/830 a.Light # D5-R20-2-volt-A-G-finish-D LUTRON Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling Mini Bipin Base Finish per Architect
Fixture to be integrated into ceiling - taped, mudded and
sanded to provide trimless finish.
Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.
RF2b Recessed 4 x F28T5/830 a.Light # D5-R8-2-volt-A-G-finish-D LUTRON Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling Mini Bipin Base Finish per Architect
Fixture to be integrated into ceiling - taped, mudded and
sanded to provide trimless finish.
Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.
RF3 Recessed 3 x F28T5/830 a.Light # D5-R11-S-volt-A-G-finish-D LUTRON-*MOD* Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling Mini Bipin Base Finish per Architect
MOD: Provide fixture with one lamp staggered lamping. Fixture to be integrated into ceiling - taped, mudded and
sanded to provide trimless finish.
Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY
Lighting Fixture Schedule mcla
29 APRIL 2009 ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
Type Mounting Lamps Manufacturer and Series Notes
SF5 Surface 1 x F28T5/830 Sistemalux # ST 128 ST 109-opal lens Fixture to be surface mounted in cabinet for internal illumination.
Millwork Mini Bipin Base Provide opal lens and have part of lens masked to diminish glare
Provide fixture with UV filtering lens with a minumum filtering of 99.9%. Provide UV filter sleeve
TR1 Track 1 x 50MR16/NFL25 LSI # 260-00-WL-finish/ AAA962/AAA990 Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Mounted Ushio Ultraline Titan Provide UV and beam symmetric spead lens
GU 5.3 Base Finish per Architect
TT1 Recessed n/a LSI # One Ckt Recessed Flangeless Track Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling Recessed track mounted into molding detail to be confirmed by Architect
Finish per Architect
WC1 Surface 2 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Brass Light Gallery # CN-201-A4-(2) B100-Bronze-MOD Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Wall GX24q-3 Base Modify fixture for dedicated compact fluorescent lamps and integral ballast
MOD: Modify fixture for 32W CFL lamping Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8"
to comply with ADA standards.
Provide etched fantail furn shades
OC3 Surface 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Existing Decorative Sconce to be refurbished Fixture must be modified to classify as full cut off classification.
Wall GX24q-3 Base Refurbish exterior metal and repaint
Interior to be cofigured for fluroescent lamp and full cut off distribution.
OC3a Surface 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Crenshaw - Reproduction of Existing Decorative Sconce Fixture must be modified to classify as full cut off classification.
Wall GX24q-3 Base Refurbish exterior metal and repaint
Interior to be cofigured for fluroescent lamp and full cut off distribution.
OM1 Surface 1 x CMH39/T6/830 Refurbish Decorative pier mount fixture Fixture must be modified to classify as full cut off classification.
Wall G12 Base Refurbish exterior metal and repaint
Interior to be cofigured for fluroescent lamp and full cut off distribution.
Fixture is to be mounted to existing pier. Surface conduit required.
Conduit to be painted to match brick wall.
General Notes:
1. Electrical engineer shall verify voltages.
2. All fixture substitutions shall have a working sample provided for review within 10 working days upon request from the design team.
3. Judgment of fixture quality and optics, as equal, shall be determined by the Architect or Lighting Designer.
4. All transpositions of the specifications in this schedule must be complete and accurate in order to be considered valid.
5. Low-temperature ballast must be capable of starting at -18 degrees Celsius.
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
AR1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
CF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
JL1 thru JL2a
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
JL1 thru JL2a
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
NF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC2a/b
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC2a/b
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT: FIXTURE TYPE:
PC3
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC4
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC5
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC6
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC7
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PF5
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PF5
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT: FIXTURE TYPE:
RC1
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT: FIXTURE TYPE:
RC2
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT: FIXTURE TYPE:
RC3
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
RF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
RF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
RF2 thru RF2b
FIXTURE TYPE:
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of
the low voltage indoor switchgear.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 13081, SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS:
Requirement for Seismic Restraint for Nonstructural Components.
B. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General
electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one
section of Division 16.
C. Section 16051, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY: Coordination
study of overcurrent protection devices.
D. Section 16111, CONDUITS: Conduct and outlet boxes.
E. Section 16112, BUSWAYS: Feeder Busways and Fittings.
F. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and
Wiring.
G. Section 16312, UNIT SUBSTATION, SECONDARY: Unit secondary substation.
H. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path for possible fault currents.
1.3 FACTORY INSPECTION:
A. The Government shall have an option to witness factory tests. All
expenses of the Government Representative's trip to witness the testing
will be paid by the Government.
B. Notify the VA Central Office through the Resident Engineer not less than
30 days prior to the scheduled factory tests.
C. Witness tests shall be a repeat of production tests as indicated in IEEE
C37.20 and ANSI C37.51. Tests shall include, but not be limited to,
power frequency dielectric, mechanical, grounding of instrument
transformer case, electrical operation and control wiring, calibration,
control and wiring, dielectric withstand, and no-load operation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL):
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to
determine compliance with drawings and specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Low voltage switchgear shall be in accordance with IEEE, NEMA, NFPA and
UL.
B. Provide complete switchgear including, but not limited to housing,
buses, draw out air circuit breakers, instruments and related
transformers, relays fuses and wiring.
C. Switchgear dimensions shall not exceed the space provided as shown on
the drawings.
D. Manufacturer’s nameplate shall include complete ratings of switchgear in
addition to date of manufacture.
2.2 HOUSING:
A. Construction: Provide housing of structural or formed steel frame braced
to maintain alignment and resist damage during shipment, erection, and
by stresses resulting from short circuits. Enclose the frame on all
sides, top, and bottom (except cable compartment) with sheet steel
covers, doors and panels and equip with interior barriers. Provide rear
access panels of the hinged type with provisions for padlocking. Provide
ventilating louvers where required to limit the temperature rise of
current carrying parts. Provide breakers with hinged covers and cutouts
for control mechanism. Protect all openings against entrance of falling
dirt, water or foreign matter. Isolate each breaker in its own
compartment. Metering transformers and instruments shall be similarly
isolated.
B. Painting: Enclosure shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphate treated and
primed by a phosphate or similar treatment, and followed immediately
with a rust-inhibiting paint. Final finish coat shall be the
manufacturers standard gray. Supply a quart of finish paint for touch-up
purposes.
C. Breaker Compartments: The breaker compartments shall include stationary
primary contacts, stationary secondary contacts as required, barriers,
and rails for the drawout elements.
3. SPD shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of
protection; L-N, L-G, N-G, in WYE systems, and L-L, L-G in DELTA
systems.
4. SPD shall be modular in design. Each mode shall be fused with a
200kAIC UL recognized surge rated fuse and incorporate a thermal
cutout device.
5. SPD shall be integrally mounted to the bus bars of the switchboard.
6. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This
alarm shall activate upon a fault condition. An alarm on/off switch
shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm push to test switch
shall be provided as well.
7. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
a. Maximum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase
shall be:
1) Service Entrance Switchboard 250 kA.
2) Distribution Panelboards 160 kA.
3) Branch Panelboards 160 kA.
4) Service Entrance MCC 240 kA specified.
5) Distribution Class MCC 160 kA.
b. UL 1449 Second Edition Listed and Recognized Component Suppression
Voltage Ratings (SVR’s) for Service Entrance and Distribution
Location equipment shall not exceed the following:
c. Voltage Let-Thru values for Solidly Grounded Systems:
8. SPD shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of –50Db at 100 kHz with
an insertion ration of 50:1 using MIL-STD-220A methodology.
9. SPD shall have the following diagnostic features: transient counter,
status lights on each phase, and one set of 1 NO and 1 NC auxiliary
dry contacts for alarming.
10. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of five years, incorporating
unlimited replacements of suppressor parts if transients destroy them
during the warranty period. Warranty shall be the responsibility of
the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer and shall be
supported by their respective field service division.
adjustable pick-up settings, with both long time and short time
elements, and integral trip unit testing provisions. Devices shall have
time-delay band adjustment of minimum, intermediate, and maximum
setting. Long-time delay element shall have inverse time
characteristics. Main circuit breakers shall have short-time trips, in
lieu of instantaneous trips. Final settings, of pick-up and time bands
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer as reflected by the Electric
System Protective Device Study as shown on the drawings.
E. Position Indicator: Provide a mechanical indicator visible from the
front of the unit to indicate whether the breaker is open or closed.
F. Trip Button: Equip each breaker with a mechanical trip button accessible
from the front of the door, which shall permit tripping of the breaker.
G. Padlocking: Provisions shall be included for padlocking the breaker in
the open position.
H. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, breakers 1600
ampere frame size and less shall be manually operated. Breakers larger
than 1600 ampere frame size shall be electrically operated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install the switchgear in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the
drawings, and as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Anchor switchgear to the floor with plated 1/2 inch minimum anchor bolts
as recommended by the manufacturer. Anchor the switchgear on two 4 inch
minimum channel iron sills with plated 1/2 inch bolts. Furnish sills to
suit the switchgear. Coordinate installation of sills with concrete pour
of floor. Sills shall be level and grouted flush with floor.
3.2 INSTRUCTION:
Furnish the services of a competent instructor for one 4 hour period for
instructing personnel in the operation and maintenance of the switchgear
on the date requested by the Resident Engineer.
3.3 SPARE FUSES:
Furnish two spare sets of current-limiting fuses of each size and rating
for fused circuit breakers. Each set shall consist of three current-
limiting fuses and three trigger fuses. A steel compartmented wall
mounted box or cabinet for fuse storage shall be provided and located in
the switchgear room where directed. Mark the cabinet with 1/4 inch high
letters "SPARE FUSES".
- - - E N D - - -
PDF TO BE MADE.DOC
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the dry type general-purpose
transformers.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 13081, SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Requirements
for seismic restraint of nonstructural components.
B. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 16.
C. Section 16111, CONDUITS: Conduits and outlet boxes.
D. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.
E. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low
impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL),
submit the following Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, impedance, dimensions, weight, mounting details decibel rating,
terminations, temperature rise, no load and full load losses, and connection diagrams.
3. Complete nameplate data including manufacturer’s name and catalog number.
C. Manuals:
1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance
and operating manuals including technical data sheets and wiring diagrams.
2. Two weeks prior to final inspection submit four copies of updated maintenance and operating
manuals to the Resident Engineer.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification by the manufacturer that the transformers conform to the requirements of the
drawings and specifications.
2. Certification that the equipment has been properly installed and
tested.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)
form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by
designation only.
B. National Fire Protection Association (FPA):
70-ional Electrical Code (NEC)
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
ST 20-19921997 ........................ Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
1.Unless otherwise specified, dry type transformers shall be in accordance with NEMA, NEC and
as shown on the drawings. Transformers shall be UL listed or labeled. 2. Rating and winding
connections shall be as shown on the drawings.
2. Transformers shall have copper windings.
3. Ratings shown on the drawings are for continuous-duty without the use of cooling fans.
4. Insulation systems:
a. Transformers 30 KVA and larger: UL rated 220 degree C
system having an average maximum rise by resistance of 150 degree C in a maximum
ambient of 40 degree C.
b. Transformers below 30 KVA: Same as for 30 KVA and larger or UL rated 185 degree C
system having an average maximum rise by resistance of 115 degree C in a maximum
ambient of 40 degree C.
5. Core and coil assemblies:
a. Rigidly braced to withstand the stresses caused by short circuit currents and rough
handling during shipment.
b. Cores shall be grain oriented, non-aging, and silicon steel.
c. Coils shall be continuous windings without splices except for taps.
d. Coil loss and core loss shall be minimum for efficient operation.
e. Primary and secondary tap connections shall be brazed or pressure type.
f. Coil windings shall have end fillers or tie downs for maximum strength.
6. Certified sound levels determined in accordance with NEMA, all not exceed the following:
. Nominal impedance shall be as shown on the drawings. If not shown on drawings, nominal
impedance shall be as permitted by NEMA.
7. Single phase transformers rated 15 KVA through 25 KVA shall have two, 5 percent full
capacity taps below normal rated primary voltage. All transformers rated 30 KVA and larger
shall have two, 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps above, and four, 2-1/2 percent full capacity
taps below normal rated primary voltage.
8. Core assemblies shall be grounded to their enclosures by adequate flexible ground straps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of transformers, as shown on drawings, shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
B. Install the transformers with adequate clearance at a minimum of 4 inches from wall and adjacent
equipment for air circulation to remove the heat produced by transformers.
D. Use flexible metal conduit to contain the conductors from the transformer to the raceway
systems.
- - - E N D - - -
SECTION 16450-GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of electrical and
telecommunication installations for personnel safety, equipment operations and to provide a low
impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as including made,
supplementary, lightning protection system and telecommunications system grounding
electrodes.
C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same
meaning.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 16.
B. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low Voltage power and
lighting wiring.
C. Section 16670, LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM: Requirements for a lightning protection
system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of
aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.
C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and
tested.
GROUNDING
16450 - 1 of 5
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
GROUNDING
16450 - 2 of 5
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
GROUNDING
16450 - 3 of 5
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
C. Metallic Conduit: Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to an electrical
equipment housing by means of locknut and bushings or adapters, shall be provided with
grounding bushings. Connect bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the equipment ground
bus.
3.4 CORROSION INHIBITORS
When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact
surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals
used.
3.5 CONDUCTIVE PIPING
A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding
electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment
ground bus.
GROUNDING
16450 - 4 of 5
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
3. Use insulated 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end at all
intermediate metallic enclosures and cross all section junctions.
4. Use insulated 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building
ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 15 meters.
3.9 GROUND RESISTANCE
A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary modifications
or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the
Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.
B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-
potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before
the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not
less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding
electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The
combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the
specified number of electrodes must still be provided.
C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground
resistance requirements.
D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling.
The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer 24 hours before the connections are ready for
inspection.
3.10 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION
A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 3000 mm (10 feet) in depth.
B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the
exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with
mechanical pressure type ground connectors.
C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding
electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.
---END---
GROUNDING
16450 - 5 of 5
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16430-METERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, complete installation, and connection of the electric meters
for special loads.
1.2 RELATED WORK
Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 16.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, weights, mounting details and clearances required for
servicing.
C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Complete maintenance, operating and testing manuals including wiring diagrams, technical
data sheets and information for ordering replacement parts:
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification by the manufacturer that the meter conforms to the requirements of the drawings
and specifications, and the meter has been properly calibrated.
2. Certification by the contractor that the meter has been properly installed, adjusted, and
tested.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)
form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by
the basic designation only.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
C12.1-01 .................................... Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering
C12.10-04 .................................. American National Standard for Watt-hour Meters
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
METERING
16430 - 1 of 2
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
C37-90.1-02 ............................... Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protection
Relays and Relay Systems
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-05 .......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
414-04 ........................................ Standard for Safety Meter Sockets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMETERING EQUIPMENT FOR SPECIAL LOADS
A. The equipment shall meter all of the single phase and three phase electrical service used by the
equipment shown on the drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as shown on the drawings.
B. Install circuits and make connections as required for the metering equipment.
---END---
METERING
16430 - 2 of 2
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of low voltage disconnect
switches.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division
16: Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
B. Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS.
C. Cables and wiring: Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW).
D. Motor rated toggle switches: Section 16155, MOTOR STARTER.
E. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground
faults: Section 16450, GROUNDING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include sufficient information, clearly presented to determine compliance with drawings and
specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, enclosure types, fuse type
and class.
3. Show the specific switch and fuse proposed for each specific piece of equipment or circuit.
C. Manuals:
1. Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals for disconnect switches, including
technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts.
Deliver four copies to the Resident Engineer two weeks prior to final inspection.
2. Identify terminals on wiring diagrams to facilitate maintenance and operation.
3. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring and any interlocking.
D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of
the certification that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)
form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by
the basic designation only.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT)
16170 - 1 of 3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16170 - 2 of 3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
2.2 LOW VOLTAGE UNFUSED SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS
Shall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and Less, but no fuses.
2.3 LOW VOLTAGE FUSIBLE SWITCHES RATED OVER 600 AMPERES TO 1200 AMPERES
Shall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and Less, except for the
minimum duty rating which shall be NEMA classification Heavy Duty (HD). These switches shall
also be horsepower rated.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
A. Install nameplate identification signs on each disconnect switch to identify the equipment
controlled.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core, with engraved lettering, a
minimum of 1/4-inch high. Secure nameplates with screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings.
B. Fusible disconnect switches shall be furnished complete with fuses.
3.2 SPARE PARTS
Two weeks prior to the final inspection, furnish one complete set of spare fuses for each fusible
disconnect switch installed on the project. Deliver the spare fuses to the Resident Engineer.
---END---
16170 - 3 of 3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16160-PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of panelboards.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09900, PAINTING: Identification and painting of panelboards.
B. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements and items that are common to more than one Section of Division 16.
C. Section 16051, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY: Requirements for the
over current protective devices to be installed to ensure proper equipment and personnel
protection.
D. Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS: Conduits and outlet boxes.
E. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.
F. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low
impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, wiring diagrams
accessories and weights of equipment. Complete nameplate data including manufacturer’s
name and catalog number.
C. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications has been
properly installed, and that the loads are balanced.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)
form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by
the basic designation only.
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
PB-1-2006 .................................. Panelboards
PANELBOARDS
16160 - 1 of 4
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
AB-1-2002 .................................. Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-2005 ..................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
70E-2004 .................................... Standard for Electrical Life Safety in the Workplace
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
50-2003 ...................................... Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
67-2003 ...................................... Panel boards
489-2006 .................................... Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC, and as shown on the drawings.
B. Panelboards shall be standard manufactured products. All components of the panelboards shall
be the product and assembly of the same manufacturer. All similar units of all panelboards to be
of the same manufacturer.
C. All panelboards shall be hinged “door in door” type with:
1. Interior hinged door with hand operated latch or latches as required to provide access to
circuit breaker operating handles only, not to energized ports.
2. Outer hinged door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box with factory bolts,
screws, clips or other fasteners requiring a tool for entry, hand operated latches are not
acceptable.
3. Push inner and outer doors shall open left to right.
D. All panelboards shall be completely factory assembled with molded case circuit breakers. Include
one-piece removable, inner dead front cover independent of the panelboard cover.
E. Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phase, top or bottom feed,
and flush or surface mounting as scheduled on the drawings.
F. Panelboards shall conform to NEMA PB-1, NEMA AB-1 and UL 67 and have the following
features:
1. Nonreduced size copper or aluminum bus bars, complete with current ratings as shown on
the panel schedules connection straps bolted together and rigidly supported on molded
insulators.
2. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the “distributed phase” or “phase
sequence” type. Single-phase, three-wire panelboard busing shall be such that when any
two adjacent single-pole breakers are connected to opposite phases, two-pole breakers can
be installed in any location. Three-phase, four-wire busing shall be such that when any three
PANELBOARDS
16160 - 2 of 4
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different
phases, two-or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location. Current-carrying parts of
the bus assembly shall be plated. Mains ratings shall be as shown.
3. Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast, stamped or machined metal alloys
of sizes suitable for the conductors indicated to be connected thereto.
4. Neutral bus shall be 100% rated, mounted on insulated supports.
5. Grounding bus bar equipped with screws or lugs for the connection of grounding wires.
6. Buses braced for the available short circuit current, but not less than 22,000 amperes
symmetrical for 120/208 volt panelboards, and 14,000 amperes symmetrical for 277/480-volt
panelboards.
7. Branch circuit panels shall have buses fabricated for bolt-on type circuit breakers.
8. Protective devices shall be designed so that they can be easily replaced.
9. Where designated on panel schedule "spaces", include all necessary bussing, device support
and connections. Provide blank cover for each space.
2.2 CABINETS AND TRIMS
A. Cabinets:
1. Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house panelboards.
2. Cabinet enclosure shall not have ventilating openings.
3. Cabinets for panelboards may be of one-piece formed steel or of formed sheet steel with end
and side panels welded, riveted, or bolted as required.
16160 - 3 of 4
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
---END---
PANELBOARDS
16160 - 4 of 4
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 16150-MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of motors.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements that are common to more than one Section of Division 16.
B. Section 16155, MOTOR STARTERS: Starters, control and protection for motors.
C. Section 16480, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: Multiple motor control assemblies, which include
motor starters.
D. Other sections specifying motor driven equipment in Divisions 14 and 15.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL),
submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, horsepower, RPM,
enclosure, starting characteristics, torque characteristics, code letter, full load and locked
rotor current, service factor, and lubrication method.
C. Manuals:
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance
and operating manuals, including technical data sheets and application data.
D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, unless otherwise noted, submit four copies of
the following certification to the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the motors have been properly applied, installed, adjusted, lubricated, and
tested.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)
form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by
designation only.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
MG 1-98 ..................................... Motors and Generators
16150 - 1 of 4
MOTORS
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
MG 2-01 ..................................... Safety Standard and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of
Electric Motors and Generators
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-02 .......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS:
A. For alternating current, fractional and integral horsepower motors, NEMA Publications MG 1 and
MG 2 shall apply.
B. Voltage ratings shall be as follows:
1. Single phase:
a. Motors connected to 120-volt systems: 115 volts.
b. Motors connected to 208-volt systems: 200 volts.
c. Motors connected to 240 volt or 480 volt systems: 230/460 volts, dual connection.
2. Three phase:
a. Motors connected to 208-volt systems: 200 volts.
b. Motors, less than 74.6 kW (100 HP), connected to 240 volt or 480 volt systems: 230/460
volts, dual connection.
c. Motors, 74.6 kW (100 HP) or larger, connected to 240-volt systems: 230 volts.
d. Motors, 74.6 kW (100 HP) or larger, connected to 480-volt systems: 460 volts.
e. Motors connected to high voltage systems: Shall conform to NEMA Standards for
connection to the nominal system voltage shown on the drawings.
C. Number of phases shall be as follows:
1. Motors, less than 373 W (1/2 HP): Single phase.
2. Motors, 373 W (1/2 HP) and larger: 3 phase.
3. Exceptions:
a. Hermetically sealed motors.
b. Motors for equipment assemblies, less than 746 W (one HP), may be single phase
provided the manufacturer of the proposed assemblies cannot supply the assemblies
with three phase motors.
D. Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the
prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the
NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulation.
E. Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected
loads to assure adequate starting and running torque.
F. Motor Enclosures:
1. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors.
16150 - 2 of 4
MOTORS
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
2. Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA
types, which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors are being
installed.
3. Enclosures shall be primed and finish coated at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat
and standard finish.
G. Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply.
H. Energy-Efficient Motors (Motor Efficiencies): All permanently wired polyphase motors of 746
Watts or more shall meet the minimum full-load efficiencies as indicated in the following table,
and as specified in this specification. Motors of 746 Watts or more with open, drip-proof or totally
enclosed fan-cooled enclosures shall be NEMA premium efficiency type, unless otherwise
indicated. Motors provided as an integral part of motor driven equipment are excluded from this
requirement if a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency requirement is indicated for that
equipment by the provisions of another section.
16150 - 3 of 4
MOTORS
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
112 (150) 95.4% 95.8% 94.1% 112 (150) 95.8% 95.8% 95.0%
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
Install motors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, the NEC, NEMA, as shown
on the drawings and/or as required by other sections of these specifications.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
Megger all motors after installation, before start-up. All shall test free from grounds.
---END---
16150 - 4 of 4
MOTORS
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of
wiring devices.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General
electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of
Division 16.
B. Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS: Conduits and outlets boxes.
C. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and
wiring.
D. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault
currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL), submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to
determine compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details,
construction materials, grade and termination information.
C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver four copies of the
following to the Resident Engineer: Technical data sheets and
information for ordering replacement units.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies
of the following to the Resident Engineer: Certification by the
Contractor that the devices comply with the drawings and specifications,
and have been properly installed, aligned, and tested.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions,
supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 1 of 4
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16140 - 2 of 4
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16140 - 3 of 4
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16140 - 4 of 4
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the low voltage power and
lighting wiring.
B. Definitions: The term HCF Type AC cable, as used in this specification, shall mean Type AC
cable in accordance with the National Electrical Code with an insulated equipment grounding
conductor, an internal bonding strip of copper or aluminum and the outer metal armor or sheath
of the assembly shall be approved and identified as an acceptable grounding return path.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Excavation and backfill for cables that are installed in conduit: Section 02200, EARTHWORK.
B. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of time rated construction: Section 07270,
FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS.
C. General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 16: Section
16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
D. Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS.
E. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault
currents: Section 16450, GROUNDING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, furnish the following:
1. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating.
2. Certificates: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies
of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and
has been properly installed.
3. Where Type AC cable is used, manufacturer's literature shall indicate that the outer metal
sheath is approved and identified as an acceptable grounding return path.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)
form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference in the text by
the basic designation only.
B. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):
LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
16127 - 1 of 8
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16127 - 2 of 8
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
a. The lighting circuit “switch legs” and 3-way switch “traveling wires” shall have color
coding unique and distinct (i.e. pink and purple) from the color coding indicated above.
The unique color codes shall be solid and in accordance with the NEC. Field coordinate
for a final color coding with the Resident Engineer.
2. Use solid color compound or solid color coating for No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG branch
circuit conductors and neutral sizes.
3. Phase conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be color-coded using one of the following
methods:
a. Solid color compound or solid color coating.
b. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above.
c. Color as specified using 3/4 inch wide tape. Apply tape in half overlapping turns for a
minimum of three inches for terminal points, and in junction boxes, pull boxes, troughs,
manholes, and handholes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent
possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable
stating size and insulation type.
4. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the
existing wiring system.
5. Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.
16127 - 3 of 8
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16127 - 4 of 8
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. The tape shall be standard, 3 inch wide, 4-Mil polyethylene detectable type.
B. The tape shall be red with black letters indicating “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with the NEC, and as specified.
B. Install all wiring in raceway systems, except where direct burial or HCF Type AC cables are used.
C. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, manholes, or handholes.
D. Wires of different systems (i.e. 120V, 277V) shall not be installed in the same conduit or junction
box system.
E. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC. Provide split wedge
type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens due to cable weight.
F. For panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, and equipment assemblies, neatly form, train,
and tie the cables in individual circuits.
G. Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground, between the wire and conduit where
the cable exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound.
H. Wire Pulling:
1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during
pulling of cables.
2. Use ropes made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.
16127 - 5 of 8
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
3. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes
attached directly to the conductors, as approved by the Resident Engineer.
4. Pull in multiple cables together in a single conduit.
I. No more than (3) single-phase branch circuits shall be installed in any one conduit.
J. The wires shall be derated in accordance with NEC Article 310. Neutral wires, under conditions
defined by the NEC, shall be considered current-carrying conductors.
3.2 ARMORED CABLE SYSTEM INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation: Shall be in accordance with UL, NEC, as shown on drawings and as hereinafter
specified.
B. Install HCF Type AC cable as follows:
1. Flattened, dented, deformed, or opened armor is not permitted. If damaged during
installation, damaged cables shall be replaced with new undamaged material.
2. Assure that cable installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways,
or doorways.
3. Cut square with manufacturer's armor stripping tool and remove burrs.
4. Remove enough armor from cable to permit sufficient conductor to extend into the enclosure.
5. Cable shall be mechanically and electrically continuous.
6. Secure cable to cabinets, junction boxes, and outlet boxes with fittings approved for
grounding.
7. Cables shall be run parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.
C. Bends: Bends shall be made so that the cable is not damaged. The radius of the curve of the
inner edge of any bend shall not be less than five times the diameter of the cable.
D. Concealed Work Installation: Cables installed above furred or suspended ceilings or in walls shall
be supported as specified below.
E. Exposed Work Installation: Cables may be run exposed only in unfinished areas such as
electrical closets or mechanical rooms. Where installed exposed, cables shall closely follow the
surface of the building finish and be supported as specified below.
F. HCF Type AC cable shall not be installed embedded in concrete.
G. Cable Identification: HCF Type AC cable shall be marked in accordance with the NEC except the
cable shall have ready identification of the manufacturer by distinctive external markings on the
cable sheath throughout its entire length.
H. Cable Supports, Installation:
1. The cable shall be secured by approved straps, hangers, or similar fittings designed and
installed as to not damage the cable.
16127 - 6 of 8
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
2. Independently support the cable or install in cable trays. Do not use other supports i.e.,
suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, mechanical
piping, or mechanical ducts.
3. Where independent supports are used for the cable, support at intervals not exceeding 1350
mm (4 1/2 feet) and within 300 mm (one foot) of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet, or
fitting.
4. Where cable trays are used to support the cables, each cable shall be securely fastened to
transverse members of the cable trays. Cable trays shall be independently supported in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NEC.
5. Through Metal Framing: Cable shall be supported in accordance with the NEC where run
through metal framing members.
6. Fished Cables: Cables may be fished in existing structures only. Supports are not required
where cables are fished through existing walls or above non-removable ceilings. Where
cables are installed in new structures, appropriate supports shall be provided.
I. Penetrations:
1. Cutting of Holes
a. Cut holes in concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core
drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type
drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by
limited working space.
2. Fire Stops: Where HCF Type AC cable passes through fire partitions, fire walls or smoke
partitions, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke
and gasses as specified in Section, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS, with rock wool fiber or
silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between cables and openings
with the fire stop material. Penetrations shall meet the requirements of UL 1479.
3. Waterproofing: Where Type AC cable passes through floors, floors shall be core drilled and
appropriately sized sleeves shall be installed for the cables. Sleeves shall terminate not less
than 75 mm (3 inches) above floor slabs and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the
ceiling of the floor below. Completely seal clearances between the cable and sleeve and
make watertight as specified in section, SEALANTS AND CAULKING.
3.3 SPLICE INSTALLATION
A. Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure.
B. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been
installed, remove the devices and install approved devices at no additional cost to the
Government.
16127 - 7 of 8
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16127 - 8 of 8
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
G. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 inches above the buried cables.
3.8 FIELD TESTING
A. Feeders and branch circuits shall have their insulation tested after installation and before
connection to utilization devices such as fixtures, motors, or appliances.
B. Tests shall be performed by megger and conductors shall test free from short-circuits and
grounds.
C. Test conductor phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
D. The Contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for these tests.
3.9 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Furnish the services of a competent factory trained engineer or technician for two, 2-hour periods
for instructing VA personnel in the use and installation of HCF Type AC cable. Sessions shall be
accomplished at the job site and the location will be determined by the VA. The first 2-hour
session shall be presented after submittal approval, but before installation of any of the cable.
Session may be attended by Contractor's staff (maximum of 4 personnel) in addition to VA
personnel. The second 2-hour session shall be accomplished two weeks prior to the final
inspection and shall be attended by VA staff only.
---END---
16127 - 9 of 8
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the high voltage cables.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Bedding of conduits: Section 02200, EARTHWORK.
B. General electrical requirement and items that are common to more than one section of Division
16: Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
C. Conduits for high voltage cables: Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS.
D. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault
currents: Section 16450, GROUNDING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS and Section
16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include splice and termination kit information prior to purchase and installation.
3. Provide cable minimum bend radius, and flammability data.
C. Samples:
1. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with a 300 mm (12
inches) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils or
reels from which the samples were taken. The sample shall contain the manufacturers
markings.
D. Certifications:
1. Factory test reports: Prior to installation of the cables, deliver four copies of the
manufacturers certified NEMA WC 71 or WC 74, standard factory test reports to the Resident
Engineer. Certified copies of test data shall show conformance with the referenced standards
and shall be approved prior to delivery of cable.
2. Field Test Reports: Test Reports on the following shall be in accordance with the paragraph
entitled “Field Tests for High Voltage Cables” and include the following tests:
a. High Potential Tests
b. Dielectric Absorption Tests
c. Radiographic Tests
16126 - 1 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
After testing, submit four certified copies of each of the graphs specified under field testing, to
the Resident Engineer. Adequate information shall be included identifying the cable locations,
types, voltage rating and sizes.
3. Splices and terminations, after having been installed and tested, deliver four copies of a
certificate by the Contractor to the Resident Engineer which includes the following:
a. A statement that the materials, detail drawings and printed instructions used, are those
contained in the kits approved for this contract.
b. A statement that each splice and each termination was completely installed without any
overnight interruption.
c. A statement that field made splices and terminations conform to the following
requirements:
1) Pencil the cable insulation precisely.
2) Connector installations:
a) Use tools that are designed for the connectors being installed.
b) Round and smooth the installed connectors to minimize localized voltage
stressing of the insulating materials.
3) Remove contaminants from all surfaces within the splices and terminations before
installing the insulating materials.
4) Solder block throughout stranded grounding wires that will penetrate the splicing and
terminating materials.
5) Use mirrors to observe the installation of materials on the backsides of the splices
and terminations.
6) Eliminate air voids throughout the splices and terminations.
7) Stretch each layer of tape properly during installation.
d. List all of the materials purchased and installed for the splices and terminations for this
contract including the material descriptions, manufacturer's names, catalog numbers and
total quantities.
E. Power Company Approval: Prior to construction, obtain written approval from the power company
that will supply electrical service for the following items:
1. Service entrance cables. Obtain the power company’s written approval on the submittal
papers for the cables before submitting them for VA approval.
2. Employees who will splice and terminate the service entrance cables.
F. Installer Approval:
1. Employees who install the splices and terminations and test the cables shall have not less
than five years of experience splicing and terminating cables which are equal to those being
spliced and terminated, including experience with the materials in the kits.
16126 - 2 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
2. Furnish satisfactory proof of such experience for each employee who splices or terminates
the cables.
G. Cable Voltage Ratings
1. Medium voltage power cables shall include multiple and single-conductor cable rated as
follows:
a) 5000 Volts shall be used on 4160 3-phase 60hz distribution systems.
b) 15000 volts shall be used on 12,470, 13,200 and 13,800V 3 phase 60hz distribution
systems.
H. Shipment
1. Cable shall be shipped on reels such that cable will be protected from mechanical injury.
Each end of each length of cable shall be hermetically sealed and securely attached to the
reel.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions,
supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the designation
only.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
B3-2001 ...................................... Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
386-95 (R2001) .......................... Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution
Systems above 600 V
400.2-2005 ................................. Guide for Field Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems
404-2000 .................................... Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated
2500-500,000 Volts
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
WC 71-1999 ............................... Standard for Non-Shielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts for
Use in the Distribution of Electrical Energy (ICEA S-96-659)
WC 74-2000 ............................... 5-46 KV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy (ICEA S-93-969)
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-2005 ...................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1072-2006 ................................. Medium-Voltage Power Cables
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE
A. High voltage cable shall be in accordance with the NEC and NEMA WC71, WC74 and UL 1072.
16126 - 3 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16126 - 4 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
2. The fittings shall be suitably designed and the proper size for the cables and wires being
spliced and terminated. Terminations to bus shall be with two hole lugs.
3. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory fittings have been installed, contractor
shall replace the unsatisfactory installations with approved fittings at no additional cost to the
Government.
D. Splicing and Terminating Kits:
1. General:
a. Shall be assembled by the manufacturer or supplier of the materials and shall be
packaged for individual splices and terminations or for groups of splices and terminations.
b. Shall consist of materials designed for the cables being spliced and terminated and shall
be suitable for the prevailing environmental conditions.
c. Shall include detail drawings and printed instructions for each type of splice and
termination being installed, as prepared by the manufacturers of the materials in the kits.
d. Detail drawings, and printed instructions shall indicate the cable type, voltage rating,
manufacturer's name and catalog numbers for the materials indicated.
e. Voltage ratings for the splices and terminations shall be not less than the voltage ratings
for the cables on which they are being installed.
f. Shall include shielding and stress cone materials.
2. Taped splices and terminations with insulating and semi-conducting rubber tapes shall
withstand 200 percent elongation without cracking, rupturing or reducing their electric and
self-bonding characteristics by more than 5 percent.
3. Epoxy resin kits shall be as follows:
a. Compatible with the cable insulations and jackets and make the splices watertight and
submersible.
b. Thermosetting and generate its own heat so that external fire or heat will not be required.
c. Set solid and cure in approximately 60 minutes in 21 degree C (70 degree F) ambient
temperature.
d. Not deteriorate when subjected to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage and fungus.
e. Furnished in pre-measured quantities, sized for each splice and each termination, with
two resin components in an easy mixing plastic bag which will permit mixing the resin
without entrapping air or contaminants. Other methods of packaging and mixing the
epoxy resin components will be considered for approval, provided they include adequate
safeguards to assure precise proportioning of the resin components and to prevent
entrapping air and contaminants.
f. Use snap-together, longitudinally-split, interlocking seam, transplant mold bodies or taped
frameworks, injection fittings and injection gun or pouring equipment. Completely fill voids
within the splices and terminations.
16126 - 5 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16126 - 6 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
E. Cables shall be secured with PVC coated metallic non-metallic cable clamps, straps, hangers, or
other approved supporting devices to tunnel walls, ceilings, and in new or existing cable trays
mounted vertically, where tray bottom is in a vertical plane.
F. Contractor shall ensure that all cable tray is properly secured and supported prior to installing
new armored cable. Contractor shall add new permanent and/or temporary tray support devices
as required to preclude cable tray failure during cable pulling or after cable is installed.
G. Cable or conductors of a primary distribution system shall be rejected when installed openly in
cable trays or openly racked along interior walls; in the same raceway or conduit with AC/DC
control circuits or ac power circuits operating at less than 600 volts; or in a manner allowing cable
to support its own weight.
H. Use suitable lubricating compounds on the cables and wires to prevent damage to them during
pulling-in. Provide compounds that are not injurious to the cable and wire jackets and do not
harden or become adhesive.
I. Splice the cables and wires only in manholes and accessible junction boxes. Ground shields in
accordance with Section 16450, GROUNDING.
J. In manholes, trenches and vaults install the cables on suitable porcelain insulators with steel
cables racks. Ground cable racks in accordance with Section GROUNDING 16450.
K. In manholes, underground raceways and other outdoors locations:
1. Seal the cable ends prior to pulling them in to prevent the entry of moisture.
2. For ethylene propylene rubber and polyethylene insulated cables, use bags of epoxy resin
that are not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) larger in diameter than the overall diameter of the
cable. Clean each end of each cable before installing the epoxy resin over it.
3.2 PROTECTION DURING SPLICING OPERATIONS
Blowers shall be provided to force fresh air into manholes or confined areas where free
movement or circulation of air is obstructed. Waterproof protective coverings shall be available on
the work site to provide protection against moisture while a splice is being made. Pumps shall be
used to keep manholes dry during splicing operations. Under no conditions shall a splice or
termination be made with the interior of a cable exposed to moisture. Conductor insulation paper
shall be moisture-tested before the splice is made. A manhole ring at least 150 mm (6 inches)
above ground shall be used around the manhole entrance to keep surface water from entering
the manhole. Unused ducts shall be plugged and water seepage through ducts in use shall be
stopped before the splice is started.
3.3 PULLING CABLES IN DUCTS, MANHOLES AND UTILITY TUNNELS
A. Medium-voltage cables shall be pulled into ducts and utility tunnels with equipment designed for
this purpose, including power-driven winch, cable-feeding flexible tube guide, cable grips, and
lubricants. A sufficient number of trained personnel and equipment shall be employed to ensure
the careful and proper installation of the cable.
16126 - 7 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
B. Cable reel shall be set up at the side of the manhole or tunnel hatch opening and above the duct
or hatch level, allowing the cable to enter through the opening without reverse bending. Flexible
tube guide shall be installed through the opening in a manner that will prevent the cable from
rubbing on the edges of any structural member.
C. Pulling force for a cable grip on lead-sheathed cable shall not exceed manufacturer’s
recommendation. A dynamometer shall be used in the pulling line to ensure that the pulling force
is not exceeded. Pulling force for a nonmetallic-sheathed cable shall not exceed the smaller of
4400 Newton (1,000 pounds) or a value computed from the following equation:
TM = 0.008 X N X CM
Where: TM = maximum allowable pulling tension in Newton pounds
N = number of conductors in the cable
CM = cross-sectional area of each conductor in square millimeter circular mils.
D. Cable shall be unreeled from the top of the reel. Payout shall be
carefully controlled. Cable to be pulled shall be attached through a swivel to the main pulling wire
by means of a //pulling eye// suitable cable grip permitted only on cables less than 60 mm (200-
feet) long and less than 50 mm (2 inches) in diameter//.
E. Woven-wire cable grips shall be used to grip the cable end when pulling small cables and short
straight lengths of heavier cables.
F. Pulling eyes shall be attached to the cable conductors to prevent damage to the cable structure.
G. Pulling eyes and cable grips shall be used together for nonmetallic sheathed cables to prevent
damage to the cable structure.
H. Cables shall be liberally coated with a suitable cable-pulling lubricant
as it enters the tube guide or duct. Grease and oil lubricants shall be used only on lead-sheathed
cables. Nonmetallic sheathed cables shall be covered with wire-pulling compounds when
required which have no deleterious effects on the cable. Rollers, sheaves, or tube guides around
which the cable is pulled shall conform to the minimum bending radius of the cable.
I. Cables shall be pulled into ducts at a reasonable speed not in excess of maximum permissible
pulling tension specified by the cable manufacturer. Cable pulling using a vehicle shall not be
permitted. Pulling operations shall be stopped immediately with any indication of binding or
obstruction and shall not be resumed until such difficulty is corrected. Sufficient slack shall be
provided for free movement of cable due to expansion or contraction.
J. Cable splices made up in manholes or utility tunnels shall be firmly supported on cable racks as
indicated. No cable splices shall be pulled in ducts. Cable ends shall overlap at the ends of a
section to provide sufficient undamaged cable for splicing. Cables to be spliced in manholes or
utility tunnels shall overlap the centerline of the proposed joint by not less than 600 mm (2 feet).
K. Cables cut in the field shall have the cut ends immediately sealed to prevent entrance of moisture.
Nonleaded cables shall be sealed with rubber tape wrapped down to 75 mm (3 inches) from the
16126 - 8 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
cable end. Rubber tape shall be cover-wrapped with polyvinylchloride tape. Lead-Covered
cables shall be sealed with wiping metal making a firm bond with the end of the sheath or with a
disk of lead fitted over the end and wiped to the sheath.
3.4 INSTALLATION, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. Install the materials as recommended by their manufacturer including special precautions
pertaining to air temperature during installation.
B. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE), Ethylene Propylene Rubber and Polyethylene Insulated
Cables:
1. Cables rated 5000 volts or less: Install epoxy resin splices and terminations, or pre-molded
rubber splices and terminations.
2. Cables rated more than 5000 volts: Install taped splices and terminations, or pre-molded
rubber splices and terminations.
C. Installation shall be accomplished by qualified personnel trained to accomplish high voltage
equipment installations. All instructions of the manufacturer shall be followed in detail.
D. Splices shall be made in manholes or tunnels except where cable terminations are specifically
indicated. Splicing and terminating of cables shall be expedited to minimize exposure and cable
deterioration.
E. Cables shall be terminated in potheads. Dry terminations with medium voltage pennants,
preformed, and hand wrapped stress cones may be used for terminating cables. Potheads shall
be provided with adequate means for making external connections to the cable conductors of
single or multiple conductor cables; protecting the cable insulation against moisture, oil, or other
contaminant; physically protecting and supporting cables, and maintaining the insulation level of
the cable.
F. Pothead terminations shall be field fabricated from termination kits supplied by and in accordance
with the pothead manufacturer’s recommendations for the type, size, and electrical characteristics
of the cable.
G. Installation shall include built-up or prefabricated heat or cold shrink stress-relief cones at the
terminals of all shielded cables and at the terminals of single-conductor lead-covered cables rated
15 kV and above, ungrounded.
H. Cable splices shall be field fabricated from splicing kits supplied by and in accordance with cable
manufacturer’s recommendations for the type, size, and electrical characteristics of the cable
specified. Cable splices in manholes shall be located midway between cable racks on walls of
manholes and supported with cable arms at approximately the same elevation as the enclosing
duct.
I. Cable splices in the tunnel that are not installed in cable trays shall be installed on cable racks or
by other approved methods that will minimize physical stress on the splice connections. Splices
16126 - 9 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
shall be supported at approximately the same elevation as the installed cable except where
space limitations or existing cable length limitations make this method impractical or impossible.
J. Universal demountable splices shall be supported in such manner so as to minimize physical
stress on the splice connections. Each cable end termination shall be supported using a pair of
saddle type supports under the cable end termination and/or cable with a minimum 300 mm (12
inches) and a maximum 750 mm (30 inches) separation between the supports. Cable end
termination and cable shall be secured to the supports in such a manner as to prevent movement
of termination or cable at the support. Saddle type supports shall be installed on galvanized steel
framing channel anchored to the wall or securely fastened to the cable tray or installed by other
approved methods.
3.5 MULTIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS
A. Multiple-conductor potheads shall be hermetically sealed cap-nut type and shall be suitable for
the type, size, and electrical characteristics of the cable. Potheads shall consist of bells or bodies
with bell caps lids, bushing, cable connectors, lugs, and entrance fittings.
B. Pothead bells or bodies shall be cast iron aluminum with mounting brackets as required, pipe
plugs for filings and vent holes, machine-flanged surfaces for bell caps lids, and cable entrance
fittings. Pothead bell caps lids for cables up to 130 mm² (250 Kcmils), 250 amperes shall be cast
iron aluminum; and for cables of larger size and higher current ratings shall be cast aluminum
bronze nonmagnetic metal casting. Bell caps Lids shall have matching machined flanged
surfaces for sealing with gasket and cap-screw connections.
C. Bushings shall be glazed wet-process electrical porcelain insulators, factory assembled and
hermetically sealed to bell cap lid.
D. Cable connectors shall be high-conductivity copper accurately machined and threaded for internal
and external electrical connections. Cross-sectional and contact areas shall be adequate to carry
the full-load current rating of the conductors. Cable connectors shall be solder type with gasket
seal between the connector and bushing.
E. Cable-entrance fittings shall be cast-bronze wiping-sleeve type for lead-covered cable, and cast-
aluminum positive-sealed stuffing boxes for non-lead-covered cables. Conduit couplings and
armor base fittings shall be cast iron.
F. Three-conductor potheads with a neutral stud and lug may be used in lieu of four-conductor
potheads in four-wire grounded neutral systems.
G. Potheads shall be completely filled, leaving no gaps or voids, with an insulating compound
suitable for the type of cable, insulation, voltage rating, and ambient operating temperatures in
accordance with the pothead manufacturer’s recommendations. Pothead parts that do not carry
current shall be grounded.
16126 - 10 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16126 - 11 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
16126 - 12 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
readings shall be 200 megohms at an ambient temperature 20 degrees C (68 degrees F).
Readings taken at other temperatures shall be corrected accordingly.
D. High Potential Test: High potential test shall not be applied to the XLPE new or service aged
cables. All other cables shall be subjected to the test but only upon successful dielectric
absorption test.
1. Leakage current test shall be by high potential dc step voltage method.
2. High potential test shall measure the leakage current from each conductor to the insulation
shield. Use corona shields, guard rings, taping, mason jars, or plastic bags to prevent corona
current from influencing the readings. Unprepared cable shield ends shall be trimmed back
25 mm (1 inch) or more for each 10 kV of test voltage. Upon the successful completion of the
high potential test on new and service aged PE CCLP, PC PVC cables a second dielectric
test will be run on the HV cable system to ensure the cables have not been damaged by the
hi-pot test
E. Safety Precautions:
1. Exercise suitable and adequate safety measures prior to, during, and after the high potential
tests, including placing warning signs and preventing people and equipment from being
exposed to the test voltages.
F. Test Voltages:
1. New shielded EPR and CCLP cable dc test voltages shall be as follows:
2. Existing cable of all types interconnected to a new cable shall be tested at 1.7 times the
existing cable rated voltage (maintenance test).
G. High Potential Test Method:
1. Apply voltage in approximately 8 to 10 equal steps.
2. Raise the voltage slowly between steps.
3. At the end of each step, allow the charging currents to decay, and time the interval of decay.
16126 - 13 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
4. Read the leakage current and plot a curve of leakage currents versus test voltage on graph
paper as the test progresses. Read the leakage current at the same time interval for each
voltage step.
5. Stop the test if leakage currents increase excessively or a "knee" appears in the curve before
maximum test voltage is reached.
a. For new cable, repair or replace the cable and repeat the test.
b. For existing cable interconnected to new cable, notify the Resident Engineer for further
instructions.
6. Upon reaching maximum test voltage, hold the voltage for five minutes. Read the leakage
current at 30 second intervals and plot a curve of leakage current versus time on the same
graph paper as the step voltage curve. Stop the test if leakage current starts to rise, or
decreases and again starts to rise. Leakage current should decrease and stabilize for good
cable.
7. Terminate test and allow sufficient discharge time before testing the next conductor.
H. Test Data: Test data shall be recorded and shall include identification of cable and location,
megohm readings versus time, leakage current readings versus time, and cable temperature
versus time.
I. Final Acceptance: Final acceptance shall depend upon the satisfactory performance of the cable
under test. No cable shall be energized until recorded test data have been approved by the
Resident Engineer. Final test reports shall be provided to the Resident Engineer. Reports shall
have a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the System name, Date, and the words “Final Test
Report” Forward to the Resident Engineer for inclusion in the Maintenance Database.
J. Radiographic Tests: Radiographic tests shall be performed on all potheads at the discretion of the
Resident Engineer to determine if voids exist in the pothead. Unacceptable terminations shall be
reworked at no additional expense to the Government.
SPEC WRITER NOTE: Include the following paragraph
for projects with series outdoor lighting systems.
//K. Series Outdoor Lighting Cables: Test the series outdoor lighting system cables by standard
megger methods in lieu of testing by high potential methods. //
L. The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials and labor for these tests.
---END---
16126 - 14 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the busways to form a
complete coordinated system.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07270, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS: Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity
of time rated construction.
B. Section 07920, SEALANTS AND CAULKING: Sealing around busway penetrations through the
building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building.
C. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 16.
D. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low
impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL),
submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details and position, mounting method,
vertical supports, materials, fire stops, weather stops, and layout of the busway runs.
3. Show the detailed coordinated connections to equipment terminations such as switchgear,
switchboards, transformers and panelboards.
C. Manuals:
1. Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and
information for ordering replacement parts.
2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the manuals to the Resident
Engineer.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
BUSWAY 16112 - 1 of 3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
1. For indoor locations, they shall be totally enclosed, low impedance type and moisture
resistant.
2. Ratings shall not be less than required by the NEC and NEMA BU 1 and not less than shown
on the drawings. Short circuit current ratings shall not be less than 42,000 amps, as required
by NEMA BU 1 or as required for the available fault current, whichever is higher.
3. Busway shall be 3-phase, 4-wire, full neutral except where 3-phase, 3-wire is shown on the
drawings.
4. Busway shall include an internal ground bus bar, not less than 50 percent of the phase bus.
5. All bus bars for each busway shall be within a single housing. Paralleled or multiple busways
will not be accepted.
6. Bus Bars:
a. Shall be copper.
b. Bus bar and interconnection joints shall be silver plated, constant high-pressure type with
high strength, copper silicon alloy bolts, nuts and washers.
c. Shall be completely insulated with flame-retardant, track-resistant, self-extinguishing
insulation.
d. Temperature rises shall not exceed NEMA Standards.
BUSWAY 16112 - 2 of 3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
7. Housings:
a. Shall be steel or aluminum with continuous mounting rails.
b. Bus bar assemblies and housing shall be products of the same manufacturer.
c. Shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted at the factory with primer and the
manufacturer's standard finish.
d. Shall have rustproof metal hardware.
e. At busway entrances to buildings, install external flanges and weatherproofing.
f. For busways that pass through floors or firewalls, incorporate fire stops within the
busway housings and external flanges to close the openings in the walls or floors
adjacent to the busways.
g. Install expansion fittings in the busway runs in compliance with the manufacturer's
standard recommendations.
9. Busway shall not be reduced in size at any point.
C. Storage: All busway shall be stored at the job site as recommended in NEMA BU 1.1.
D. Dimensions and Configurations:
1. Configure within the spaces designated for their installation.
2. Coordinate the routing of equipment installations by other trades to avoid conflicts.
3. Make final field measurements and check them with the shop drawings for the busways prior
to authorization of fabrication of the busways.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install busways as required by the NEC, UL, manufacturer's recommendations and as follows:
B. Support the busways as required by the NEC with not less than 3/8 inch steel rods.
C. Install side bracing to prevent swaying or movement of the busways. In seismic zones, bracing
shall be installed as per details on drawings.
D. When the installations are complete, inspect the busway joints and eliminate any strains and
stresses on the bus bars and housings.
E. Coordinate all of the busway terminations to equipment to insure proper phasing, connection and
lugs.
F. Tighten all of the bolt connections in the busways with a torque wrench as recommended by the
manufacturer of the busways. After the busways have been energized for not less than 30 days,
repeat the torque wrench tightening of all bolt connections.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
A. Perform tests per NEMA BU 1.1 and as follows:
1. After installation but prior to energizing, busways shall be tested for continuity, phasing and
insulation resistance.
BUSWAY 16112 - 3 of 3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
2. Insulation resistance shall be measured phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with a 500 volt
megger and values shall not be less than one megohm.
B. The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials and labor for these tests.
---END---
BUSWAY 16112 - 4 of 3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to
form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceways are required for all wiring
unless shown or specified otherwise.
B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway
types specified.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Bedding of conduits: Section EARTHWORK.
B. Mounting board for telephone closets: Section ROUGH CARPENTRY.
C. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section
FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS.
D. Fabrications for the deflection of water away from the building envelope at penetrations:
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.
E. Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration
into the building: Section 07920, SEALANTS AND CAULKING.
F. Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section PAINTING.
G. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of DIVISION
16: Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
H. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault
currents: Section 16450, GROUNDING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Section, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, furnish the following:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Size and location of main feeders;
2. Size and location of panels and pull boxes
3. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.
4. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.
B. Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the
certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been
properly installed.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 1 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 1/2 inch unless otherwise shown.
Where permitted by the NEC, 1/2 inch flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to
recessed lighting fixtures.
B. Conduit:
1. Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.
2. Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A, ANSI C80.5.
3. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6.
4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to
exceed 4 inch and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.
5. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 2 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 3 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 4 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
4. Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front face of
raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed
with surface style flat or raised covers.
F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.
SPEC WRITER NOTE: Use non-detectable type for
cemetery projects only.
G. Warning Tape: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm (3 inch) wide tape // detectable // non-
detectable // type, red with black letters, and imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE
BELOW”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PENETRATIONS
A. Cutting or Holes:
1. Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or
beams. Obtain the approval of the Resident Engineer prior to drilling through structural
sections.
2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core
drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills
are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by limited
working space.
B. Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions,
fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against
the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS, with
rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between
raceways and openings with the fire stop material.
C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances
around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Section, SEALANTS AND CAULKING.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. In accordance with UL, NEC, as shown, and as hereinafter specified.
B. Essential (Emergency) raceway systems shall be entirely independent of other raceway systems,
except where specifically "accepted" by NEC Article 517.
C. Install conduit as follows:
1. In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.
2. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged
conduits with new undamaged material.
3. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or
doorways.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 5 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
4. Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.
5. Mechanically and electrically continuous.
6. Independently support conduit at 8’.0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended
ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical
piping, or mechanical ducts).
7. Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and 1 foot of each enclosure to which
connected.
8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage to prevent entry of
debris, until wires are pulled in.
9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.
10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type
locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the
enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.
11. Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section, FLASHING AND
SHEET METAL.
12. Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.
13. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed
concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings.
D. Conduit Bends:
1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.
2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits.
3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.
E. Layout and Homeruns:
1. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown.
2. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings
showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the Resident Engineer.
F. Fire Alarm:
1. Fire alarm conduit shall be painted red (a red “top-coated” conduit from the conduit
manufacturer may be used in lieu of painted conduit) in accordance with the requirements of
Section 13850-“Fire Alarm Systems”
3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION
A. In Concrete:
1. Conduit: Rigid steel, IMC or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in contact
with soil, gravel or vapor barriers.
2. Align and run conduit in direct lines.
3. Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs:
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 6 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 7 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
5. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities to avoid
damaging them.
6. Excavation for conduit bedding and back-filling of trenches is specified in Section,
EARTHWORK.
a. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly.
b. Do not kink the conduits.
7. Seal conduits, including spare conduits, at building entrances and at outdoor terminations for
equipment with a suitable compound that prevents the entrance of moisture and gases.
8. Where metal conduit is shown, install threaded heavy wall rigid steel galvanized conduit or
type A20 rigid steel galvanized conduit coated with 20 mil bonded PVC, or rigid steel or IMC,
PVC coated or standard coated with bituminous asphaltic compound.
9. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 inches above conduits or electric lines.
B. Exterior routing of lighting systems and other branch circuits (600 volts and less-under buildings
slab on grade to 5 feet from the building):
1. Pre-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit in accordance with the requirements of Section
16402-“Underground Electrical Construction.”
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 8 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 9 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum
distance between supports is 8 foot on center.
C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to
support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger
itself, and 200 pounds. Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.
D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars,
angle supports, and similar items.
E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:
1. Existing Construction:
a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 1/4 inch bolt size and not less than 1-1/8 inch
embedment.
b. Power set fasteners not less than 1/4 inch diameter with depth of penetration not less
than 3 inches.
c. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete
ceilings.
F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted.
G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.
H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and
approved for the application.
I. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and
bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.
J. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.
K. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and vertical
supports/fasteners within walls.
L. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with
the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal
wedges and retaining collars.
3.11 BOX INSTALLATION
A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:
1. Flush mounted.
2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.
B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables
and wires during pulling in operations.
C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast
metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 10 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
D. Outlet boxes in the same wall mounted back-to-back are prohibited. A minimum 24 inch, center-
to-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes.)
E. Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 4 inches square by
2-1/8 inches deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.
F. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for
example "SIG-FA JB No. 1".
G. On all Branch Circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker.
3.12 TELEPHONE CONDUIT
A. Install the telephone raceway system as shown on drawings.
B. Minimum conduit size of 3/4 inch, but not less than the size shown on the drawings.
C. All conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings.
D. All four inch conduits within buildings shall include pull boxes after every two 90 degree bends.
Size boxes per the NEC.
E. Vertical conduits/sleeves through closets floors shall terminate not less than 3 inches below the
floor and not less than 3 inches below the ceiling of the floor below.
F. Terminate conduit runs to/from a telephone backboard in a closet or interstitial space at the top or
bottom of the backboard. Conduits shall enter telephone closets next to the wall and be flush with
the backboard.
G. Where drilling is necessary for vertical conduits, locate holes so as not to affect structural
sections such as ribs or beams.
H. All empty conduits located in telephone closets or on telephone backboards shall be sealed with
a standard non-hardening duct seal compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases
and to meet fire resistance requirements.
I. Conduit runs shall contain no more than four quarter turns (90 degree bends) between pull
boxes/backboards. Minimum radius of telephone conduit bends shall be as follows (special long
radius):
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 11 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
J. Furnish and install 3/4 inch thick fire retardant plywood specified in Section, ROUGH
CARPENTRY on the wall of telephone closets where shown on drawings . Mount the plywood
with the bottom edge one foot above the finished floor.
K. Furnish and pull wire in all empty conduits. (Sleeves through floor are exceptions).
---END---
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 12 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the requirements of the Electrical System Protective Device Study.
B. A short circuit and coordination study shall be prepared for the electrical over current devices to
be installed under this project to assure proper equipment and personnel protection.
C. The study shall present an organized time-current analysis of each protective device in series
from the individual device back to the utility and the on-site generator sources. The study shall
reflect the operation of each device during normal and abnormal current conditions.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 16.
B. Section 16160, PANELBOARDS: Low voltage panelboards.
C. Section 16462, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS: Low voltage distribution switchboards
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL),
submit the following:
B. Complete short circuit and coordination study as described herein.
C. Protective equipment shop drawings shall be submitted simultaneously with or after the
protective device study. Protective equipment shop drawings will not be accepted prior to
protective device study.
D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification by the Contractor that the protective devices have been adjusted and set in
accordance with the approved protective device study.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
The protective device study shall be prepared by qualified engineers of the low voltage
switchgear manufacturer or an approved consultant. The Contractor is responsible for providing
all pertinent information required by the preparers to complete the study.
1.5 REQUIREMENTS
A. The complete study shall include a system one line diagram, short circuit and ground fault
analysis, and protective coordination plots.
1. Show, on the one line diagram, all electrical equipment and wiring to be protected by the
overcurrent devices installed under this project. Clearly show, on the one line, the schematic
wiring of the electrical distribution system.
2. Also show on the one line diagram the following specific information:
a. Calculated fault impedance, X/R ratios, and short circuit values at each bus.
b. Breaker and fuse ratings.
c. Generator kW and Transformer kVA and voltage ratings, percent impedance, X/R ratios,
and wiring connections.
d. Voltage at each bus.
e. Identification of each bus.
f. Conduit material, feeder sizes, length, and X/R ratios.
C. Short Circuit Study:
1. Systematically calculate the fault impedance to determine the available short circuit and
ground fault currents at each bus. Incorporate the motor contribution in determining the
momentary and interrupting ratings of the protective devices.
2. The study shall be calculated by means of a computer program. Pertinent data and the
rationale employed in developing the calculations shall be incorporated in the introductory
remarks of the study.
3. Present the data determined by the short circuit study in a table format. Include the following:
a. Device identification.
b. Operating voltage.
c. Protective device.
d. Device rating.
e. Calculated short circuit current.
1.6 ADJUSTMENTS, SETTINGS AND MODIFICATIONS
A. Necessary final field adjustments, settings and minor modifications shall be made to conform with
the protective device study without additional cost to the Government.
B. All final circuit breaker and relay settings and fuse sizes shall be made in accordance with the
recommendations of the protective device study.
---END---
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section, Basic Methods and Requirements (Electrical) applies to all sections of Division 16.
B. Furnish and install electrical wiring, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance with the
specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, transformers, cable,
switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, and other items and arrangements
for the specified items are shown on drawings.
C. Electrical service entrance equipment (arrangements for temporary and permanent connections
to the power company's system) shall conform to the power company's requirements. Coordinate
fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the power company's system, and obtain power company
approval for sizes and settings of these devices.
D. Wiring ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors, with the
conduit and raceways accordingly sized. Aluminum conductors are prohibited.
E. All energized electrical work shall be in compliance with VHA Directive 2006-056.
1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
A. References to the National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) are minimum installation requirement standards.
B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements
are greater than those specified in the above standards.
1.3 TEST STANDARDS
A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., standards where test standards have been
established. Equipment and materials which are not covered by UL Standards will be accepted
provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet
safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Equipment of a class which no
nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe,
will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as
NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop
drawings.
B. Definitions:
1. Listed; equipment or device of a kind mentioned which:
a. Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of
production of such equipment.
b. States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested
and found safe for use in a specified manner.
3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended
service.
4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
E. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.
F. When Factory Testing Is Specified:
1. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the Resident
Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.
2. When equipment fails to meet factory test and reinspection is required, the contractor shall
be liable for all additional expenses.
1.6 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Where variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with Section
01001, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, the connecting work and related components shall
include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices,
conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.
1.7 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical
damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:
1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices,
and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum
cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.
2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first class
operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.
3. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet
vinyl or equal.
4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint
and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.
1.8 WORK PERFORMANCE
A. All electrical work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B, NFPA 70E,
OSHA Part 1910 subpart J, OSHA Part 1910 subpart S and OSHA Part 1910 subpart K in
addition to other references required by contract.
B. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.
C. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When
an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the required work, the following
requirements are mandatory:
1. Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating material to
cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.)
while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.
2. Electricians must wear personal protective equipment while working on energized systems in
accordance with NFPA 70E.
3. Before initiating any work, a job specific work plan must be developed by the contractor with
a peer review conducted and documented by the Resident Engineer. The work plan must
include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be
installed, safety equipment to be used and exit pathways.
D. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences.
1.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.
B. Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the NEC for all voltages specified.
C. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of
ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to,
motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.
1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification sign which clearly indicates
information required for use and maintenance of items such as panelboards, cabinets, motor
controllers (starters), safety switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, individual breakers
and controllers in switchboards, switchgear and motor control assemblies, control devices and
other significant equipment.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a
minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are
furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is
herein specified, are exceptions.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to
the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior
approval will not be permitted at the job site.
B. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other
data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials
comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and
clearly identify equipment being submitted.
C. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item
or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be
considered for approval.
1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".
2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and
paragraph numbers.
3. Submit each section separately.
D. The submittals shall include the following:
1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's
name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings,
pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.
2. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems,
control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on
wiring diagrams.
3. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.
F. Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01010, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment
specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders,
(manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual
as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems
or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.
2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND
OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of
Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local
representatives for the system or equipment.
3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents,
with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be
legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
4. The manuals shall include:
a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control of the equipment.
b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
d. Installation and maintenance instructions.
e. Safety precautions.
f. Diagrams and illustrations.
g. Testing methods.
h. Performance data.
i. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency.
j. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of
special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended
spare parts, and name of servicing organization.
k. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment,
including addresses and certified qualifications.
H. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.
G. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of each of
the following:
1. A 12 inch length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of
reels from which the samples were taken.
2. Each type of conduit coupling, bushing and termination fitting.
3. Conduit hangers, clamps and supports.
4. Duct sealing compound.
5. Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, outlet box, manual motor starter, device plate,
engraved nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating material and single pole molded
case circuit breaker.
6. Each type of light fixture specified in Section 16510 or shown on the drawings.
---END---
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 15 to ensure that all systems are
operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general
commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 15
shall be familiar with all parts of Division 01 and shall execute all commissioning
responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.
D. With respect to HVAC commissioning, the Mechanical and Electrical contractors shall:
Include cost for HVAC commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this and other Cx
sections and the Preliminary Cx Plan posted in Div.1, in the quoted price.
Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.
Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification
checks and functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule.
Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all
mechanical and electrical systems provided.
Provide mechanical and electrical system technicians to assist during system verification
and functional performance testing as required by the CxA.
Review specification Division 1 and 16 to fully understand their responsibilities as they
pertain to the commissioning processes.
1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES
Warranty Period
1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-
built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
B. Mechanical Contractor and TAB. The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical and
TAB contractors, during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in
(A) are:
1. Provide start-up for all HVAC equipment, and for the building automation
control system.
2. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and CxA by:
a. Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing
the operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as
required.
b. Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB.
3 Prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 15 pipe and duct system testing,
flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use
by the CxA. Update the schedule as appropriate.
4. Notify the CM/GC when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, start-
up of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be responsible to notify the
CM/GC ahead of time, when commissioning activities not yet performed or not
yet scheduled will delay construction. Be proactive in seeing that commissioning
processes are executed and that the CxA has the scheduling information needed
to efficiently execute the commissioning process.
C. TAB Contractor. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed in (A) are:
1. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component
to the CxA, CM/GC and the Controls Contractor six weeks prior to starting the
TAB. This plan will be developed after the TAB has some familiarity with the
control system.
2. The submitted plan will include:
a. Certification that the TAB contractor has reviewed the construction
documents and the systems with the design engineers and contractors to
sufficiently understand the design intent for each system.
b. An explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The
Controls Contractor will comment on feasibility of the plan.
c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct
drawings during the process.
d. Final test report forms to be used.
e. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and
issue: terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type), diffuser
proportioning, branch / submain proportioning, total flow calculations,
rechecking, diversity issues, expected problems and solutions, etc.
Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and
sensors will be discussed.
f. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and
efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific
test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used.
g. The identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and
their most recent calibration date.
h. Specific procedures that will ensure that the air side is operating at the
lowest possible pressures and provide methods to verify this.
i. Details of how building static and exhaust fan / relief damper capacity
will be checked.
j. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound
measurement methods.
k. Details of all exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including
any required room pressure differentials.
l. Plan for hand-written field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or
uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of
completed tests (scope and frequency).
m. Plan for formal progress reports (scope and frequency).
n. Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution).
3. A running log of events and issues shall be kept by the TAB field technicians.
Submit hand-written reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by
others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA
and CM/GC at least weekly.
4. Communicate in writing to the Controls Contractor all setpoint and parameter
changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect
the control system setup and operation.
5. Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be
provided to the CxA. The report will contain a full explanation of the
methodology, assumptions and the results in a clear format with designations of
all uncommon abbreviations and column headings. The report should follow the
latest and most rigorous reporting recommendations by AABC, ASHRAE
Standard 111.
6. Provide the CxA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft
reports.
7. Provide a final TAB report for the CxA with details, as in the draft.
8. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as
specified for TAB in Division 1 and 15.
ATC Contractor is responsible to act as a Cx team member and issue to the CxA for review
and comment, their prefunctional plan (point to point and startup) and be onsite and
available to perform all required system commissioning.
All ATC/BAS graphics and sequences are to be demonstrated to the CxA prior to functional
testing.
A. Refer to Division 1 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are
found.
B. Refer to Division 1 for sections involving related commissioning work; for functional
testing requirements, and preliminary Cx Plan.
A. The following systems and equipment (including all integral equipment controls) will be
commissioned in this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer
only to equipment that is to be commissioned.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Division 15 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements
of this Division.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUBMITTALS
A. The HVAC mechanical Contractor shall follow the start-up and initial checkout
procedures listed in the Responsibilities list in this Division 1. Division 15 has start-up
responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully
functional, meeting the design objectives of the Contract Documents. The
commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this
responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the CxA or Owner. It is the
contractors responsibility to create the start-up / prefunctional documents and submit to
the CxA for review and comment within two weeks of system startup.
3.03 TAB
A. Refer to this section and the Cx Plan for a list of systems to be commissioned.
B. The CxA shall create the functional performance procedures and guideline after review
and comment of the equipment startup documents supplied by the contractor.
C. The CxA is to witness and document the functional performance testing. All hands on
testing and equipment required by the CxA is to be supplied and performed by the
contractor. The contractor’s fees are to be included in their base bid.
D. If more than one return visit is required by the CxA due to failed systems, the contractor
is responsible for the CxA team hourly rate and expenses.
3.06
A. Special TAB Documentation Requirements. The TAB will compile and submit the
following with other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the
Specifications.
B. Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M
manuals shall be made by the A/E and by the CxA. Refer to Division 1 for details.
A. The CM/GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately
to ensure that training is completed.
1. After completion of TAB, TAB shall meet with facility staff for the number of
hours specified in the contract documents, and shall instruct them on the
following:
a) Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of
each data type.
b) Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that
may affect the proper delivery of air.
c) Identify and discuss any duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that
are close to or are not meeting their design capacity.
d) Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas
that are not finished.
e) Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations,
relative to TAB.
A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan
described in Section 01810 and the executed start-up, initial checkout and prefunctional
checklists.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including sub-mains,
branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of
high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is
withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement.
In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction
side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
the distribution system.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3
of this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step
procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of
report forms intended for use on this Project.
D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared,
as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report
forms.
F. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 2/15
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's
representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and
procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the
participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment
manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other
support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and
location.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting,
and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved
testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced
in this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from one of the following:
A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the
entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing,
adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building
before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and
balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
1.6 COORDINATION
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and
water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article
shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the
following provisions:
1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
D. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions,
statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and
statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment
controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of
HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when
the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air
systems use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7
through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems-Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare
this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification
Sections have been performed.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and
their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient
system and equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify
that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multi-zone units, mixing
boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight,
drafts, and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system
reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC national standards and this Section.
B. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems" or according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC
Systems-Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.
C. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing
and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to
those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation
Specifications for this Project.
D. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar
controls and devices, to show final settings.
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multi-zone, dual-
duct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These
additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflow within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the
fan manufacturer.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps,
heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design
static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect
factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur.
Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect.
Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections
to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and
measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure
amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the
maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, sub-main ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflow within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
2. Re-measure each sub-main and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust sub-mains and branch ducts to design airflow within specified
tolerances.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflow within specified
tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of
design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed
by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature
regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to
input changes.
I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates
on a grounded or non-grounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
3.10 REPORTING
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of
calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data
in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
10. Summary of contents, including the following:
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
F. Roof top Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 11/15
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm o.c.).
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
H. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's
factory startup equipment reports, include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btuh (kW).
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 13/15
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
L. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing
and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to
correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not
performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional
inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including
control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired
controls.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
1. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
4. Written description of sequence of operation.
5. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
6. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics.
7. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk
data conductors.
8. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.
9. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated)
point addresses, and operator notations.
10. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies,
diagrams, modems, and interconnections.
C. ASHRAE BACnet Statement: PICS for each DDC system component (panel, zone
controller, field devices, and operator workstation) proposed.
F. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future power
system revisions or monitoring and control revisions.
G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device
and compressed air station.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components
and devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator
function.
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and
calibration tolerances.
5. Calibration records and list of set points.
I. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with
plans and room details before installation.
F. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator
workstation.
I. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2. DDC Systems:
4. Graphics: Super video graphic adapter (SVGA), minimum 1280 x 1024 pixels, 2.0-
MB EDO video memory.
5. Monitor: 17 inches (432 mm), non-interlaced, color, with maximum 0.28-mm dot
pitch.
6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.
7. Floppy-Disk Drives: 1.44 MB.
8. Hard-Disk Drive: 4.0 GB.
9. CD-ROM Drive: 24x.
10. Mouse: Three-button type.
11. Modem: Auto-dial, internal, minimum 56-kBaud.
12. Tape Backup Internal Zip-drive, 100 MB.
13. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 95 or later.
14. BACnet Conformance: Workstation shall support BACnet device and have
minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the following areas:
a. Network.
b. Functional groups.
c. Standard application services supported.
d. Standard objects supported.
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware
and controlled environment.
HVAC CONTROLS 15970 - 5/15
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator
station.
4. BACnet Conformance: Reside on BACnet LAN in Ethernet IEEE 802.3, Class 3,
minimum, with routers between LAN and other panels, with at least one
communication port, and have minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the
following areas:
a. Network.
b. Functional groups.
c. Standard application services supported.
d. Standard objects supported.
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
A. Central (Master) Control Panels: Fully enclosed, steel-rack-type cabinet with locking
doors or locking removable backs. Match finish of panels and provide multicolor graphic
displays, schematically showing system being controlled.
B. Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting,
located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all
panels.
C. Alarm Panels: Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and
test switch, mounted in hinged-cover enclosure.
A. Step Controllers: Six- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads
and operated by electric motor.
1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible
control readjustment potentiometer.
2.6 SENSORS
A. Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct
mounting as required.
h. Room Security Sensors: Stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and
security screws.
5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range
suitable for system; proportional output 4 to 20-mA.
6. Space and Duct Humidity Transmitters: One pipe, directly proportional, with
minimum sensing span of 20 to 80 percent relative humidity for 3- to 15-psig (21-
to 103-kPa) output signal, corrosion resistant and temperature compensated, and
with factory-calibrated adjustment.
3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers,
adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.
C. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and
2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.
G. Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state zircon cell sensing,
suitable over a temperature range of minus 32 to plus 1100 degrees F (0 to 593
degrees C), calibrated for 0 to 5 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20-
mA output, and wall mounted.
H. Refrigerant Detectors: Dual-level detectors, using solid-state sensors, with alarm preset
for 300-ppm, alarm indicator light, alarm silence light and button, alarm test light and
button, and trouble light. Provide auxiliary relay preset for 150-ppm.
I. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity
control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment, for flush mounting.
2.7 THERMOSTATS
A. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with two-, three-, or
four-position, push-button or lever-operated fan switch.
a. Time of day.
b. Actual room temperature.
c. Programmed temperature.
d. Programmed time.
e. Duration of timed override.
f. Day of week.
g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."
1. Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, with off position on
dial wired to break ungrounded conductors.
2. Dead Band: Maximum 2 degrees F (1 degree C).
1. Reset: Manual.
2.8 HUMIDISTATS
2.9 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action or two-position action.
B. Electronic Damper Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-
stroke cycles at rated torque.
1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential
pressure.
2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
2.10 DAMPERS
A. Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring: As specified in Division 16 Section
"Control/Signal Transmission Media."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator
workstation.
B. Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring and pneumatic piping
are installed before proceeding with installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
D. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation. Locate all 60 inches (1524 mm) above the floor.
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
3. Where indicated.
G. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to
outdoor temperatures.
J. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
Section "Refrigerant Piping."
M. In concealed locations, such as pipe chases and suspended ceilings with easy access,
install copper tubing. Electrical metallic tubing materials and installation requirements are
specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and
piping are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multi-conductor instrument cable in place of single cables
where several cables follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect
against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of
control system, except local individual room control cables.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
B. Ground equipment.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
retest.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment, and retest.
4. Calibration test electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and
stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.
Part 1 – GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Division 15900 Section “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for control equipment and
devices and for submittal requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General - The chiller plant control system shall monitor and control the chilled water system
including the chiller(s), pump(s), and variable speed drive(s) as appropriate.
B. The chiller plant control system shall have a fully editable user interface set-up via point and click
on a standard windows screen. It shall not require special software tools or a building
automation system technician to operate.
C. The chiller plant control system shall include the following features:
1. Operator interface
2. System Start/Stop
4. Failure Status
D. Operator interface - The chiller plant control system shall include the following operator interface
elements:
2. Screen that allows editing of the following data (to be performed without entering
program code editor):
3. Individual Chiller Graphic(s) to include all data listed on the supplementary Chiller
System Point List, including:
− Chiller Name
− Chiller Operating Mode
− Chilled Water Setpoint
− Chiller RLA %
− Entering Chiller Water Temperature
− Leaving Chilled Water Temperature
− Evaporator Flow Status
E. System Start/Stop - The chilled water system shall start in response to a binary signal from an
external source such as the building automation system, with the option to use outside ambient
temperature lockout.
1. Upon the start of the chilled water system the chiller plant control system shall
automatically start Trend Log Reports to include:
F. Module Sequencing - The chiller plant control system will start and stop the chilled water
pump(s) and chillers based upon system load.
1. When the chilled water system is enabled the chiller plant control system shall:
2. The chiller plant control system shall initiate the start of the next chiller in the
sequence whenever insufficient chilled water capacity exists continuously, as
indicated by supply water temperature deviation from system chilled water
temperature setpoint, is not met for [ 20 ] minutes.
a. The chiller plant control system will unload operating chillers to an operator
editable current limit prior to starting a lag chiller.
b. Lag chillers shall start in a similar manner to the lead chiller start sequence.
3. The chiller plant control system shall initiate the shut down of the next chiller in the
sequence whenever excess chilled water capacity, as determined by the system
supply and chiller return water temperatures, exists for [ 20 ] minutes.
a. The chiller shall shut down its pump when the chiller determines it is safe to
do so.
4. Upon sensing a chiller failure the chiller plant control system shall shut down the failed
chiller immediately and initiate the start of the next chiller in the rotation sequence.
5. The chiller plant control system shall control individual chiller setpoints to maintain the
system supply water temperature at setpoint.
6. The design system chilled water setpoint shall be [ 42 ] degrees F and editable by the
operator.
7. Reset of the system chilled water supply temperature upward shall be allowed only
when a single chiller is operating. The maximum reset chilled water setpoint shall be [
5 ] degrees F above the base setpoint. Reset shall be accomplished using critical
valve position OR system return chilled water temperature OR outside air dry bulb.
a. The system chilled water supply temperature shall not be reset if the space
relative humidity rises above [ 60% ].
1. If required by the chiller manufacturer the chiller shall be permitted to start its pump
for unit freeze protection.
H. Diagnostics/Protection - the Building Automation System shall be able to alarm from all sensed
points and diagnostic alarms monitored by the chiller controller.
I. Chiller Status Report - Provide an operating status report for each chiller. The report(s) shall
provide the present status for the following information to provide the operator with critical chiller
operating data.
J. Demand Limiting - As part of the demand limiting scheme on the building, the chiller plant control
system shall be able to monitor and reduce peak power demand through the limiting of chiller
current draw.
1. The Master Controller operates the independent refrigeration circuits based on the
inputs from its integrated chilled water sensors. Every 24 hours the master
controller will select a new lead compressor.
2. The Master Controller utilizes return water temperature control. Based on the set
points (which are field programmed into the controller) and the return water
temperature of the system the chiller will enable and disable all refrigerant
circuits to meet the system load. All compressors are either on or off and do not
modulate. For a full description of the available system set points and how they
affect system operation please see the Airstack User’s Manual.
1. The Pump Module incorporates a lead and a standby pump. The lead pump may
be selected and rotated manually by the “Lead-Lag” switch located in the pump
control panel. Whenever the Pump Module is enabled (by applying power to the
module and closing the dry-contact start signal to the control system) the lead
pump will start.
2. Once the system is in operation a proof of flow signal is monitored by the control
system. This signal is received from an integrated differential pressure switch
installed across the pumping system’s common inlet and outlet. If this signal is
interrupted for more than 4-seconds the control system will automatically shutdown
the lead pump and start the stand-by pump. An associated 24vac alarm
signal will be enabled and may be monitored by the customer.
C. SEQUENCE TIMING
1. The pump module and mechanical cooling modules may be started and stopped remotely
through a two-wire dry contact interlock. Additionally, both the pump module and master
mechanical cooling module can provide a 24cvac, 5va feedback signal for an alarm condition.
If a BAS System is sequencing the Airstack Chiller the following timing is recommended:
D. START-UP
1. Enable the chilled water pump via the two-wire dry contact interlock at the Airstack Pump
Modules Terminal Strip. This must be done no less than 10-seconds before enabling the
Mechanical Cooling Modules.
a. Note: If pumps are provided by others, insure they are started at least 10
seconds prior to initiating the start signal to the Airstack Chiller.
1. Enable the Airstack Mechanical Cooling System via a two-wire dry contact
interlock (EX2) at the chiller Master Controller Terminal Strip.
2. Monitor the fault signal at both the Airstack Pump Module Terminal Strip (if
applicable) and the Mechanical Cooling System’s Master Controller Terminal
E. Shut-Down
1. Disable the Mechanical Cooling System by opening the two-wire interlock (EX2)
at the chiller Master Controller Terminal Strip.
2. Shut Down the chilled water pumps no sooner than 10-seconds after the chiller
has been disabled.
A. Boiler System: The boiler system shall be selected for operation and shall remain in
constant operation while building has a need for heating.
C. Pumps: Pumps HWP-1, HWP-2, shall be capable of being started and stopped manually,
or automatically by the BAS, through an H-O-A switch on the starter.
D. Existing boiler controller shall be upgraded if necessary to provide points new DDC
controller with BACnet Interfaces.
E. Boilers 1 and 2 will be operated with Lead-Lag control. The Lead Boiler shall maintain
supply water temperature setpoint. If the Lead Boiler fails, the Lag Boiler shall be
energized. Provide weekly alternation of the Lead Boiler.
F. To prevent short cycling, the boiler system shall run for a minimum of 5 min (adj) and be
off a minimum of 1 min (adj) unless shutdown on safeties or outside air conditions. The
boiler shall run subject to its own internal safeties and controls.
A. Occupied Mode:
B. Unoccupied Mode:
A. Occupancy - The occupancy mode can be communicated or hardwired to the ASC via a
binary input. Valid Occupancy modes for the ASC shall be:
3. Occupied Bypass: Mode used to temporarily place the unit into the occupied
operation. Tenants shall be able to override the unoccupied mode from the space
sensor. The override shall last for a maximum of 4 hours (configurable). The
tenants shall be able to cancel the override from the space sensor at any time.
During the override the unit shall run in occupied mode.
B. Heat Cool Mode - The Heat Cool mode can be set by a communicated value or
automatically by the ASC. In standalone or auto mode the ASC shall automatically
determine the Heat Cool mode by integrating over time between the active setpoint and
the space temperature.
1. Heat Cool Setpoint- The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either
by a local hardwired setpoint, the ASC default setpoint or a communicated value.
The ASC uses the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local hardwired
setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a hardwired setpoint and
communicated setpoint exist, the ASC shall use the communicated value.
C. Cooling Operation - When the unit is in cooling mode, the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active cooling setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the
active cooling setpoint shall be one of the following:
The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to
determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled
based on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity.
D. Heating Operation - When the unit is in heating mode, the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active heating setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the
active heating setpoint shall be one of the following:
The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to
determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled
based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity.
E. Transition from Unoccupied to Occupied - When the unit transitions from unoccupied
mode to the occupied mode, morning warm-up/cool down and random start routines shall
be activated.
1. Morning Warm-Up - When there is a call for heating and the space temperature
is three degrees F or more below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-
up sequence shall be activated. During warm-up the fan shall be turned on, the
outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating capacity shall be
enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees of the
occupied heating setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode.
2. Morning Cool-down - When there is a call for cooling and the space temperature
is three degrees F or more over the occupied cooling setpoint a morning cool-
down sequence shall be activated. During morning cool-down the fan shall be
turned on, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the cooling capacity
shall be enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees
of the occupied cooling setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode.
3. Random Start - A randomly generated 3-32 second delay shall be activated
when electric power is applied to the ASC or after receiving a communicated
occupied command.
F. Fan Operation - The fan shall be configurable to operate continuously or cycling in all
occupied modes. During Unoccupied operation, the fan shall cycle between off and high
regardless of the fan configuration. The fan can be configured to run continuous at a
configured speed, cycling or off. When configured for cycling the ASC shall cycle on and
off based on the required capacity.
G. Hydronic Cooling Valve Control- If the unit is in the cooling mode the ASC shall cycle on
and off the cooling valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain space comfort. The cooling
valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the heating capacity is enabled.
H. Hydronic Heating Valve Control- If the unit is in the heating mode, the ASC shall cycle on
and off the heating valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain the space comfort. The
heating valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the cooling capacity is enabled.
I. Generic Binary Output - The controller shall have a 24V output to be controlled from a
BAS.
J. Discharge Air Temperature - The ASC shall be capable of passing a discharge air
temperature to the BAS.
K. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the ASC the occupied space heating
and cooling temperature setpoints. The BAS shall also send the following commands:
Occupied
Unoccupied
Heat/Cool Mode
Priority Shutdown Commands
If communication with the BAS is lost, the ASC shall use predetermined default setpoints
and operate in the occupied mode.
1. Space Sensor Failure - If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor module, it
shall be feed back to the BAS. Zone sensor failure shall cause the unit to shutdown.
2. Fan Status - The ASC shall monitor the fan outputs to determine fan status.
3. Filter Status - A maintenance timer shall be incorporated into the ASC to signal a filter
change after a configurable number of fan run hours.
4. Reset - All diagnostics shall be capable of being reset through the zone sensor, service
tool, BAS, or by cycling power to the unit. Some diagnostics can only be reset by cycling
power or replacing the failed sensor.
5. Fan Off Delay - After heating has being controlled off, the ASC shall keep the fan
energized for an additional 30 seconds. The purpose of this action is to remove residual
heat from the heating source.
6. Condensate Overflow - When the condensate overflow switch trips, the ASC shall shut
the unit down, close all valves and close the outside air damper (if present).
7. The BAS system shall provide alarm messages for the following ASC diagnostics. The
ASC shall initiate a failsafe operational sequence based on the diagnostic condition.
M. TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Manual Output Test - The ASC shall be able to manually exercise all outputs for
troubleshooting. This shall be done directly from the controller board with no need of
additional tools.
2. Unit Identification - The ASC shall have the capability of flashing an LED upon receiving a
command from a service tool or BAS. The ASC shall also be able to send the unit
neuron ID and the program ID to a service tool or BAS for unit identification from the
controller board or space sensor with no need of additional tools.
3. Water Valve Override - This command from a service tool or BAS shall cause all valves
to stroke fully open for water balancing.
N. COMMUNICATIONS
Master/Slave - Master/Slave shall be used for operating multiple units from a single
space sensor. The Master unit shall share space temperature, setpoint, heat/cool
mode, occupancy, fan speed, entering water temperature, economizer, and capacity
control algorithm data over a twisted pair of communication wire to ensure seamless
cooperation between the units.
A. Occupancy - The occupancy mode can be communicated or hardwired to the ASC via a
binary input. Valid Occupancy modes for the ASC shall be:
3. Occupied Bypass: Mode used to temporarily place the unit into the occupied
operation. Tenants shall be able to override the unoccupied mode from the space
sensor. The override shall last for a maximum of 4 hours (configurable). The
tenants shall be able to cancel the override from the space sensor at any time.
During the override the unit shall run in occupied mode.
B. Heat Cool Mode - The Heat Cool mode can be set by a communicated value or
automatically by the ASC. In standalone or auto mode the ASC shall automatically
determine the Heat Cool mode by integrating over time between the active setpoint and
the space temperature.
4. Heat Cool Setpoint- The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either
by a local hardwired setpoint, the ASC default setpoint or a communicated value.
The ASC uses the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local hardwired
setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a hardwired setpoint and
communicated setpoint exist, the ASC shall use the communicated value.
C. Cooling Operation - When the unit is in cooling mode, the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active cooling setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the
active cooling setpoint shall be one of the following:
The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to
determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled
based on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity.
D. Heating Operation - When the unit is in heating mode, the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active heating setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the
active heating setpoint shall be one of the following:
The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to
determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled
based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity.
E. Transition from Unoccupied to Occupied - When the unit transitions from unoccupied
mode to the occupied mode, morning warm-up/cool down and random start routines shall
be activated.
5. Morning Warm-Up - When there is a call for heating and the space temperature
is three degrees F or more below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-
up sequence shall be activated. During warm-up the fan shall be turned on, the
outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating capacity shall be
enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees of the
occupied heating setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode.
6. Morning Cool-down - When there is a call for cooling and the space temperature
is three degrees F or more over the occupied cooling setpoint a morning cool-
down sequence shall be activated. During morning cool-down the fan shall be
turned on, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the cooling capacity
shall be enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees
of the occupied cooling setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode.
7. Random Start - A randomly generated 3-32 second delay shall be activated
F. Fan Operation - The fan shall be configurable to operate continuously or cycling in all
occupied modes. During Unoccupied operation, the fan shall cycle between off and high
regardless of the fan configuration. The fan can be configured to run continuous at a
configured speed, cycling or off. When configured for cycling the ASC shall cycle on and
off based on the required capacity.
G. Hydronic Cooling Valve Control- If the unit is in the cooling mode the ASC shall cycle on
and off the cooling valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain space comfort. The cooling
valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the heating capacity is enabled.
H. Hydronic Heating Valve Control- If the unit is in the heating mode, the ASC shall cycle on
and off the heating valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain the space comfort. The
heating valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the cooling capacity is enabled.
I. Generic Binary Output - The controller shall have a 24V output to be controlled from a
BAS.
J. Discharge Air Temperature - The ASC shall be capable of passing a discharge air
temperature to the BAS.
K. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the ASC the occupied space heating
and cooling temperature setpoints. The BAS shall also send the following commands:
Occupied
Unoccupied
Heat/Cool Mode
Priority Shutdown Commands
If communication with the BAS is lost, the ASC shall use predetermined default setpoints
and operate in the occupied mode.
8. Space Sensor Failure - If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor module, it
shall be feed back to the BAS. Zone sensor failure shall cause the unit to shutdown.
9. Fan Status - The ASC shall monitor the fan outputs to determine fan status.
10. Filter Status - A maintenance timer shall be incorporated into the ASC to signal a filter
change after a configurable number of fan run hours.
11. Reset - All diagnostics shall be capable of being reset through the zone sensor, service
tool, BAS, or by cycling power to the unit. Some diagnostics can only be reset by cycling
power or replacing the failed sensor.
12. Fan Off Delay - After heating has being controlled off, the ASC shall keep the fan
energized for an additional 30 seconds. The purpose of this action is to remove residual
heat from the heating source.
13. Condensate Overflow - When the condensate overflow switch trips, the ASC shall shut
the unit down, close all valves and close the outside air damper (if present).
14. The BAS system shall provide alarm messages for the following ASC diagnostics. The
ASC shall initiate a failsafe operational sequence based on the diagnostic condition.
M. TROUBLESHOOTING
4. Manual Output Test - The ASC shall be able to manually exercise all outputs for
troubleshooting. This shall be done directly from the controller board with no need of
additional tools.
5. Unit Identification - The ASC shall have the capability of flashing an LED upon receiving a
command from a service tool or BAS. The ASC shall also be able to send the unit
neuron ID and the program ID to a service tool or BAS for unit identification from the
controller board or space sensor with no need of additional tools.
6. Water Valve Override - This command from a service tool or BAS shall cause all valves
to stroke fully open for water balancing.
N. COMMUNICATIONS
Master/Slave - Master/Slave shall be used for operating multiple units from a single
space sensor. The Master unit shall share space temperature, setpoint, heat/cool
mode, occupancy, fan speed, entering water temperature, economizer, and capacity
control algorithm data over a twisted pair of communication wire to ensure seamless
cooperation between the units.
A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall perform the following VAV Air System
(VAS) control strategies, appropriate to the given occupancy mode of the system, as
determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day schedule for the system.
1. The BAS will intitiate the Normal Start mode when it receives an Occupied command
from the schedule associated with the VAV Air System.
The VAS shall enable ventilation functions for the associated ERU and VAV
boxes.
The air handler shall modulate its airflow to maintain the duct static pressure
setpoint.
The ERU shall control to either its cooling occupied setpoints, as determined by
the Outside Air Temperature and BAS.
Each VAV box in the VAV Air System shall modulate its air damper to control to
its local occupied setpoints.
2. Occupied Mode
a) The BAS shall place the members of the VAV Air System into
Off/Standby mode as determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day
schedule for the system. The VAV boxes shall control to their
individual unoccupied temperature setpoints, and all ventilation
functions shall be disabled.
b) Each VAV box that is associated with the VAS shall control its local
reheat source to control to the occupied heating setpoint, and shall
modulate box airflow to maintain the space CO2 setpoint for the zone
being served by the VAV box.
3. Unoccupied Mode
a) The BAS shall place the members of the VAV Air System into
Off/Standby mode as determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day
schedule for the system.
b) After the VAV boxes have been commanded to unoccupied, the VAS
shall command the associated ERU to Unoccupied mode. Supply fan
shall be shut down, heating and cooling shall be disabled, outdoor air
damper shall be closed, and all ventilation functions shall be disabled.
A. The Electrical Room Exhaust Fan shall be thermostatically controlled by a wall mounted
thermostat and shall cycle on and off to control temperature setpoint.
A. The unit shall come equipped with manufacturer provided microprocessor controls and
wall-mounted temperature sensor.
B. The unit shall be controlled by the wall-mounted sensor and shall cycle on and off to
control temperature setpoint.
A. The unit heater shall come equipped with unit mounted thermostat and shall cycle on and
off to control temperature setpoint.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Fire dampers.
4. Duct silencers.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
7. Flexible ducts.
8. Flexible connectors.
9. Duct accessory hardware.
1. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors and
panels
2. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents
connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.
3. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
4. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric damper
actuators.
5. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Backdraft dampers
2. Manual-volume dampers
3. Fire dampers
4. Duct silencers
5. Duct-mounted access doors and panels
6. Flexible ducts
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loading,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each
field connection. Detail the following:
C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise
power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and
weights.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with
oiled, exposed matte finish.
C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form;
with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for
concealed ducts.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm)
length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
(900 mm).
B. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and
mounting flange.
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper
blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
C. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing
assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper
assemblies.
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-
(2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include
center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated
duct mounting.
C. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of air stream fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-
inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) or 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) thick as
indicated, and length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
G. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.
H. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 or 212 degrees F (74 or 100 degrees C) rated as
indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall
have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when
tested according to ASTM E 84.
D. Round Units: Casings with sheet metal thickness for diameters listed below:
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch (3-mm) diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet
metal.
F. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not
less than 5 percent compression.
H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise
react to system pressure variations.
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in
quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, curved blades set
3/4 inch (19 mm) o/c; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o/c;
and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
A. General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness,
and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision
panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam
latches.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches
(89 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-)
thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum sheets. Select metal
compatible with connected ducts.
C. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
poly-chloroprene.
2. Tensile Strength: 480-lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp, and 360-lbf/inch (63 N/mm)
in the filling.
D. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated
with a synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and
ozone environment.
B. Flexible Ducts, Un-insulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.
C. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket
enclosing 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner
liner.
D. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg (1500 Pa) positive, 1/2-inch wg (125 Pa) negative.
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch (6-mm), zinc-
plated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and
square-head set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten
band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15910 - 6/7
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass
Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access
panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning,
inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
3.2 ADJUSTING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.3 PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF
THIS SECTION
A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements
are a part of these Specifications and shall be used in conjunction with this Section as a part of
the Contract Documents. Consult them for further instructions pertaining to this work. The
Contractor is bound by the provisions of Division 0 and Division 1.
1.5 DESCRIPTION
A. General: The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in the
specifications, and consist of a peer-to-peer network of digital building control panels and
operator workstation(s). The operator workstation shall be a personal computer (PC) including a
color monitor, mouse and keyboard. The PC shall provide users an interface with the system
though dynamic color graphics of building areas and systems.
B. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for
control of systems defined for control on this project.
C. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the
control system data should be limited by operator password. An operator shall be able to log
onto any workstation of the control system and have access to all designated data.
D. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will operate under
stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of
other controllers, the control system shall continue to independently operate the unaffected
equipment.
E. Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high-speed
network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. A modem or network communications card
shall be provided to for remote access to the system.
Contractor
Manufacturer Name Product Line Contact
Name/Address
Trane Tracer Summit Trane
-
Johnson Controls Metasys Johnson Controls
-
Siemens Apogee Siemens
-
A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and
ordinances of local, state and federal authorities. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with
the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes:
1. National Electric Code (NEC)
2. International Building Code (IBC)
3. International Mechanical Code (IMC)
4. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed.
5. [Optional] ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004 (BACnet)
6. [Optional] ANSI/EIA/CEA-709.1 (LonTalk)
1. Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of [20] dynamic
points with current data displayed within [20] seconds of the request.
2. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within
[30] seconds.
3. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the
operator and the reaction by the device shall be [10] seconds. Analog objects shall start
to adjust within [10] seconds.
4. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over
the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or
workstation will be current, within the prior [60] seconds.
5. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when
it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed [45] seconds.
6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of
running as often as once every [5] seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for
selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.
7. Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops
at a selectable frequency from at least once every [5] seconds. The controller shall scan
and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same
frequency.
8. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within
[5] seconds of each other.
9. Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all
values reported by the specified system.
Table 1
Reporting Accuracy
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification data sheets on
all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project
until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformity with the plan and
specifications. [Six (6)] copies are required. All shop drawings shall be provided to the Owner
electronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats.
B. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall
not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion.
C. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary
to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting
the system to be installed.
a) Building Controllers
b) Custom Application Controllers
c) Application Specific Controllers
d) Operator Interface Computer(s)
e) Portable Operator Workstation
f) Auxiliary Control Devices
g) Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations,
addresses, and cabling
h) Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations.
Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled
i) Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object names
j) Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be specific
for the use of the Control System being provided for this project
k) Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display
E. Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (as-
built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and
include:
1. Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop
drawings. One set of electronic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall
also be provided.
2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists.
3. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual. These shall be as-built versions of the
submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O & M manual
shall include:
F. Training Materials: The Contractor shall provide a course outline and training material for all
training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. The Owner reserves the right to modify
any or all of the training course outline and training materials. Review and approval by Owner
and Engineer shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to first class.
1.11 WARRANTY
1. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a
period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control
System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no
charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the
Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours.
2. At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating
satisfactorily to the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificates certifying that
the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the
terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of
warranty.
3. Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and
firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty
period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation
of such changes.
4. The system provider shall provide a web-accessible system and support on-line resource
that provides the Owner access to a question/answer forum, graphics library, user tips,
upgrades, and manufacturer training schedules.
A. All project-developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These
items include but are not limited to:
1. Project graphic images
2. Record drawings
3. Project database
4. Project-specific application programming code
5. All documentation
PART 2: PRODUCTS
.1 Materials
.2 Communication
.3 Operator Interface
.4 Application and Control Software
.5 Building Controllers
.6 Custom Application Controllers
.7 Application Specific Controllers
.8 Input/Output Interface
.9 Auxiliary Control Devices
.10 Radio Frequency (RF) Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be
applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. The installation shall not be used as a
test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner’s representative in writing.
Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.
2.2 COMMUNICATION
A. This project shall comprise of a network utilizing high-speed BACnet for communications
between Building Controllers and PC Workstations. LonTalk sub-networks shall be used for
communications between Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers and Application
Specific Controllers.
B. The controls Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and
routers necessary for the DDC system internetwork.
C. All Building Controllers shall have a communications port for connections with the operator
interfaces. This may be either a network interface node for connection to the Ethernet network or
an RS-232 port for Point to Point connection.
D. Remote operator interface via a 56K baud modem shall allow for communication with any and all
controllers on this network as described in the following paragraph.
E. Communications services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value
passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows:
2. All database values (i.e., points, software variable, custom program variables) of any one
building controller shall be readable by any other building controller on the internetwork.
This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a
point name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An
operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to perform
internetwork value passing.
A. Operator Interface. Furnish [1] PC based workstations as shown on the system drawings. Each
workstation shall be able to access all information in the system. Workstations shall reside on
the same high-speed network as the building controllers, and also be able to dial into the system.
B. Workstation information access shall use the BACnet Protocol. Communication shall use the
ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Remote communications shall use the
BACnet Point to Point Physical/Data Link Layer Protocol.
D. System Software
E. System Applications. Each workstation shall provide operator interface and off-line storage of
system information. Provide the following applications at each workstation.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 - 9/31
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each workstation shall store on the hard
disk a copy of the current database of each building controller. This database shall be
updated whenever a change is made in any panel in the system. The storage of this
data shall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the event of a database
loss in a building management panel, the first workstation to detect the loss shall
automatically restore the database for that panel.
2. Manual Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password
clearance shall be able to archive the database from any system panel and store on
magnetic media. The operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually
initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system.
3. System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a graphical method of
configuring the system. The user with proper security shall be able to add new devices,
and assign modems to devices. This shall allow for future system changes or additions.
4. On-Line Help and Training. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the
operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all
system functions and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional
help shall be available through the use of hypertext links onscreen.
5. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and
password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable
for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set security levels for
all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator’s
access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and
object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or
mouse activity is detected. This auto logoff time shall be set per operator password. All
system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
6. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all
workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and
controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.
7. Alarm Notification. Alarm messages shall use full language, easily recognized
descriptors for alarm. System shall allow the user to have up to 10 popup windows
appear for incoming alarms. The popup dialog shall allow the user to silence and
acknowledge alarms, view an expanded message or graphic, and add and save
comments for the alarm.
8. Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of
normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits,
states, and reactions for each object in the system.
9. Alarm Reactions. The operator shall be able to determine what actions, if any, are to be
taken, by object, during an alarm. Actions shall include logging, printing, start a custom
control program, displaying messages, dialing out to remote workstations, paging or text
message to a cell phone, forwarding to an e-mail address, providing audible annunciation
or displaying specific system graphics. Each of these actions shall be configurable by
workstation and time of day. An object in alarm that has not been acknowledged within
an operator specified time period shall be re-routed to an alternate operator specified
alarm receipt device. For text messaging, the system shall support TAP protocol
including parities 7-E-1 and 8-n-1, such that if the system fails to dial out/connect with
one parity it will automatically try the other one.
10. Alarm and Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms and
events from any location in the system. The operator shall be able to sort and filter
alarms from events. Alarms shall be sorted in up to 5 color-coded categories based on
Owner preference (V17). Include an alarm count summary for each alarm category on
the system toolbar. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and
clear alarms. All that have not been cleared by the operator shall be archived to the hard
disk on the workstation. Provide a comment field in the event log that allows a user to
add specific comments associated with any alarm.
11. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to define a trend log for any data in the system.
This definition shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time. Trend intervals of 30
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 - 10/31
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
seconds,1, 5, 15, 30, and 60 minutes as well as once a shift (8 hours), once a day, once
a week, and once a month shall be selectable. Each trend shall accommodate up to 64
system objects. The system operator shall be able to determine how many samples are
stored in each trend. Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the Building Controller
panel and be archived on the workstation hard disk. Trend data shall be able to be
viewed and printed from the operator interface software. Trends must be viewable in a
text-based format or graphically. Trends shall also be storable in a tab delimited ASCII
format for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheet packages.
12. Dynamic Graphical Trending. The system shall have the ability to save the data collected
by a trend object and display that collected data in a graphical chart. Trend viewing
capabilities shall include the ability to show up to 10 points on a chart, to include live
and/or historical data. Each data point trend line shall be an individual color, and include
on-graph icons that represent associated events/alarms, manual overrides, and
automated changes that have occurred over the time frame represented on the chart.
Navigation and viewing functions shall include scrolling and zooming of x and y axes, and
a trace display of the associated time stamp, and values for any selected point along the
x-axis. Trend data shall be able to be stored for up to 10 years on the PC workstation.
13. Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator to view, and
edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. These statuses
shall be available by menu, on graphics or through custom programs.
14. Clock Synchronization. The real time clocks in all building controllers and workstations
shall be synchronized on command of an operator. The system shall also be able to
automatically synchronize all system clocks; daily from any operator designated device in
the system. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time if applicable.
15. Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select,
modify, or create reports. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format,
interval, and date. Report data shall be archived on the hard disk for historical reporting.
Provide the ability for the operator to obtain real time logs of designated lists of objects.
Reports and logs shall be stored on the PC hard disk in a format that is readily
accessible by other standard software applications including spreadsheets and word
processing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer. The operator
shall be able to designate reports that shall be printed or stored to disk at selectable
intervals. Provide a means to list and access the last 10 reports viewed by the user.
a) Custom Reports: Provide the capability for the operator to define any system
data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. These reports shall be time
and date stamped and shall contain a report title.
b) Standard Reports. The following standard system reports shall be provided for
this project. These reports shall be readily customized to the project by the
owner.
i. Electrical Meter Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily electrical
consumption and peak electrical demand for each building meter. Provide an
annual (12 month) summary report showing the monthly electrical consumption
and peak demand for each meter.
ii. All Points in Alarm Report: Provide an on demand report showing all current
alarms.
iii. All Points in Override Report: Provide an on demand report showing all overrides
in effect.
iv. Schedule Report: Provide a summary of all schedules including Holiday and
Exception schedules.
v. Commissioning Report: Provide a one time report that lists all equipment with the
unit configuration and present operation.
vi. Weather Data Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily minimum,
maximum and average outdoor air temperature and the number of heating and
cooling degree days for each day. Provide an annual (12 month) report showing
the minimum, maximum and average outdoor air temperature for the month and
the number of heating and cooling degree days for the month.
F. Workstation Applications Editors. Each PC workstation shall support dedicated screens for
editing of all system applications. Provide editors for each application at the PC workstation. The
applications shall be downloaded and executed at the appropriate controller panels.
1. Controller. Provide a full screen editor for each type custom application, and application
specific controller that shall allow the operator to view and change the configuration,
name, control parameters, and system set-points.
2. Scheduling. An editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each
workstation. Provide a monthly calendar for each schedule. Exception schedules and
holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar. Provide a method for allowing several
related objects to follow a schedule. An advance and delay time for each object shall be
adjustable from this master schedule. An operator shall be able to modify the schedule.
Schedules shall be able to be easily copied between objects and/or dates.
3. Manual Control and Override. Provide a means of manually controlling analog and binary
output points. Control overrides shall be performed through a simple, graphical on-off-
auto editor for binary points, and auto-manual selector for analog control. Provide a icon
indicator of override status when a point, unit controller or application has been
overridden manually.
4. Air System Equipment Coordination. Provide editor screens with monitoring and control
functions that group together and coordinates the operation of air handling equipment
and associated VAV boxes as specified in the sequence of operations. For each air
system, the editor pages shall include:
5. Chiller System. A chiller plant control application shall be configured using a full screen
editor and shall provide operating status for the system. The display shall include:
G. Custom Application Programming. Provide the tools to create, modify, and debug custom
application programming. The operator shall be able to create, edit, and download custom
programs at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be
fully operable while custom routines are edited, compiled, and downloaded.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 - 12/31
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software
applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at
the operator workstation.
B. System Security
1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names.
2. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions
as assigned by the system manager.
3. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded.
4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off
following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable.
C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system.
Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and
night economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to [10] events. When a group of
objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each
member. Each schedule shall consist of the following:
1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week.
2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the
year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard
schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance.
Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the
standard schedule for that day of the week.
3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or
holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will
be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday
period.
4. Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start
algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the
equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified
occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates
for zones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide
the ability to modify the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an
early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator
determined time limit.
D. Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to transmit alarms to multiple
associated alarm receivers. Receivers shall include PC Workstations, email addresses, cell
phones and alphanumeric pagers. The alarm message shall include the name of the alarm
location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall
be able to remotely access and operate the system utilizing the system Ethernet
communications, or dial up communications via modem, in the same format and method used on
site as described under the Operator Interface section of this specification.
E. Demand Limiting. The demand limiting program shall monitor building power consumption from
signals generated by a pulse generator (provided by others) mounted at the building power
meter, or from a watt transducer or current transformer attached to the building feeder lines.
1. The demand limiting program shall be based on a predictive sliding window algorithm.
The sliding window duration and sampling interval shall be set equal to that of the local
Electrical Utility.
2. Control system shall be capable of demand limiting by resetting HVAC system setpoints
to reduce load while maintaining a widened band of comfort control in the space.
3. Input capability shall also be provided for an end-of-billing period indication.
F. Maintenance Management. The system shall monitor equipment status and generate
maintenance messages based upon user designated run time, starts, and/or calendar date limits.
G. Chiller Sequencing. Provide applications software to properly sequence the chiller plant to
minimize energy use. This application shall perform the following functions:
1. The chiller plant control application shall have the ability to control up to 25 chillers as
detailed in the sequence of operations.
2. This application shall be able to control both constant and variable flow systems as well
as parallel, series and decoupled piping configurations.
3. The chiller plant control application shall be able to control multiple chiller plants per site.
4. Diagnostics/Protection - The chiller plant application program shall be able to integrate
individual chiller diagnostics into control action decisions.
5. Event Processing - All chiller plant control and status events shall be recorded, at the
operator’s selection, in the building management system event log to facilitate
troubleshooting.
6. Alarm Indications - The chiller plant control status screens shall display chiller plant and
individual chiller alarm messages.
7. Add/Subtract actions - The status screens shall provide information on when the next
chiller add or subtract action will occur. The operator shall have the ability to manually
force a chiller addition or a chiller subtraction.
H. PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and
anti-wind-up shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to
position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, set-point, and PID gains
shall be user-selectable. The set-point shall optionally be chosen to be a reset schedule.
J. Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously
restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is
started, along with the time delay between starts shall be user-selectable.
K. System Calculations. Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g. KW), flow rates (e.g.
L/s [GPM]) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data. Provide an algorithm that
calculates a sliding-window KW demand value. Provide an algorithm that calculates energy
usage and weather data (heating and cooling degree days). These items shall all be available for
daily, previous day, monthly and the previous month.
L. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling. This feature
shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.
A. General. Provide Building Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this
division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.
1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent,
standalone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the global strategies
described in System software section.
2. The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system,
database, and programming requirements.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 - 14/31
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output
communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point
information and allow central monitoring and alarms.
4. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.
5. Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers.
6. The Building Controller shall utilize industry recognized open standard protocols for
communication to unit controllers.
7. The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory
circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:
A. Communications. Each Building Controller shall reside on a BACnet internetwork using the ISO
8802-3 (Ethernet) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Each Building Controller shall also perform
routing to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers. Each Building
Controller shall perform communications to a network of Custom Application and Application
Specific Controllers using LonTalk FTT-10 and LonMark profiles.
B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for
operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].
C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. The Building
Controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates the current operating mode of the
controller. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable. The primary logic board shall be removable
without disconnecting field wiring.
D. Memory. The Building Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the
event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.
E. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal
voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage
A. General. Provide Custom Application Controllers to provide the performance specified in section
1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.
1. The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database,
and programming requirements.
2. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.
3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output
communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point
information and allow central monitoring and alarms.
4. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If
an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined failure
mode, and generate an alarm notification.
B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
1. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type enclosures, and
shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].
2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type
waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 70 C [-40 F to 158 F].
C. A local operator interface shall be provided at building locations where specified in the sequence
of operations or point list. The operator interface shall be provided for interrogating and editing
data. A system security password shall be available to prevent unauthorized use of the keypad
and display.
D. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All low
voltage wiring connections shall be made such that the controller electronics can be removed
and/or replaced without disconnection of field termination wiring.
E. Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a
power loss for at least 72 hours.
F. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal
voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.
A. General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers, which
through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment.
They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the
equipment they are designed to serve.
1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control
functions without being connected to the network.
2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.
B. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
1. Controller used in conditioned ambient spaces shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type rated
enclosures. Controllers located where not to be disturbed by building activity (such as
above ceiling grid), may be provided with plenum-rated enclosures and non-enclosed
wiring connections for plenum cabling. All controllers shall be rated for operation at 0 C
to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].
2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type
waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 65 C [-40 F to 150 F].
C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power and communications. All wiring connections
shall be clearly labeled and made to be field removable.
D. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming
information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days.
E. Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal
voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%.
F. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power
consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.
G. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate using LonTalk. Controllers shall use FTT-10
transceivers. All communications shall follow LonMark profiles. ASCs which do not have a
profile that applies must comply with LonMark standards, utilize SNVTs for all listed points, and
be provided with a XIF file for self-documentation.
A. Hard-wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom, or Application
Specific Controllers.
B. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself,
another point, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall
be protected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause
no damage to the controller.
C. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs
shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control
devices.
D. Pulse accumulation input points. This type of point shall conform to all the requirements of Binary
Input points, and also accept up to 3 pulses per second for pulse accumulation, and shall be
protected against effects of contact bounce and noise.
E. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 ma), or
resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field
configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
F. Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation. Terminal unit and zone control applications may
use 2 outputs for drive-open, drive-close (tri-state) modulating control.
G. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall
provide either a 0-10 Vdc or a 4-20 ma signal as required to provide proper control of the output
device.
1. Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum
with reinforced corner bracing.
2. Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable for
medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.
3. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application.
4. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible
seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for
a maximum leakage rate of 6 CFM per square foot at 4" w.c. differential pressure.
5. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500.
6. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one
damper actuator per section.
1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent
damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.
2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return
mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.
3. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise
spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.
4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a
2-10 VDC or 4-20 ma operating range.
5. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow
manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return
actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this
purpose.
6. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and
shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make
electrical connections.
7. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.
8. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's
rated torque.
D. Control Valves
1. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating service
as scheduled or shown.
2. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to
provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings:
a) Water Valves:
i. Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.
ii. Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow
or 100% of total system (pump) head.
b) Steam Valves: 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.
3. Water Valves:
a) Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for
design conditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating
service.
b) Sizing Criteria:
i. Two-position service: Line size.
ii. Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice the pressure
drop through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between
supply and return mains, or 5 psi, whichever is greater.
iii. Three-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop equal to twice the pressure drop
through the coil exchanger (load), 5 psi maximum.
iv. Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250,
spring loaded, Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two-way
valves to have replaceable composition disc, or stainless steel ball.
v. 2-1/2" valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and
Teflon packing.
c) Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as scheduled on plans or as follows:
i. Heating coils in air handlers - normally open.
ii. Chilled water control valves - normally closed.
iii. Other applications - as scheduled or as required by sequence of operation.
d) Zone valves shall be sized to meet the control application and they shall maintain
their last position in the event of a power failure.
4. Steam Valves:
a) Body and trim materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design
conditions and service. Linear ports for modulating service.
b) Sizing Criteria:
i. Two-position service: pressure drop 10% to 20% of inlet psig.
ii. Modulating service 15 psig or less: pressure drop 80% of inlet psig.
iii. Modulating service 16 to 50 psig: pressure drop 50% of inlet psig.
iv. Modulating service over 50 psig: pressure drop as scheduled on plans.
F. Temperature Sensors
G. Humidity Sensors
1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 80% with accuracy of ±5%
R.H.
2. Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.
3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 95% R.H. It shall be
suitable for ambient conditions of -40 C to 75 C [-40 F to 170 F].
4. Humidity sensor's drift shall not exceed 1% of full scale per year.
1. Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable.
2. Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus
50% greater than calibrated span without damage.
3. Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure
of 150 psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting
brackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service.
4. Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction,
proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure
shall be 3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting
brackets, and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service.
1. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 6m [20 ft]
minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any one
foot section.
2. Low limit shall be manual reset only.
1. Carbon Dioxide sensors shall measure CO2 in PPM in a range of 0-2000 ppm. Accuracy
shall be +/- 3% of reading with stability within 5% over 5 years. Sensors shall be duct or
space mounted as indicated in the sequence of operation.
K. Flow Switches
L. Relays
1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating,
configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application.
2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay.
Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans.
Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1
Type enclosure when not installed in local control panel.
N. Current Switches
1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current.
The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output
requirements of the DDC system.
1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 Type construction with hinged
door,and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies.
2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with
color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped.
Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually
identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control
terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.
3. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to
each local panel.
A. General
1. Provide a wireless zone temperature sensing system for use in Heating, Ventilating, and
Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems. The wireless system shall work with any controller that
accepts a 10k thermistor temperature input.
2. The ambient operating temperature range for the RF wireless transmitter shall be 32 to
122°F (0 to 50°C). The ambient operating temperature range for the RF receiver shall be
-40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C). The ambient storage temperature range for the RF wireless
transmitter and the RF receiver shall be -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C).C. The ambient
operating and storage humidity range shall be 5 to 95% non-condensing.
B. Approved Manufacturers
3. Approved Equal
C. Components
D. Accuracy
2. Temperature sensing and transmission shall occur at least once each 30 seconds under
conditions of rapid space temperature change or if the sensor is programmed with a fixed
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 - 21/31
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
E. Communication
2. Operating range shall be a minimum of 200 feet; open range shall be 2,500 ft (762 m) with
less than 2% packet error rate.
3. Sensor shall include a readily visual on-sensor signal strength meter. Acceptable metering
shall be a minimum of three-level RF signal strength Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
4. Two-way communications shall be used between the zone sensor and controller receiver to
allow channel switching based on varying channel traffic and verification of signal strength at
the zone sensor.
5. One-to-one topology with zone/receiver address set by physical switches or held in non-
volatile memory to ensure operating through system voltage disturbances.
F. Power Requirements
1. Zone Sensor battery life shall provide at least 5 years life under normal operating conditions
and must be readily available for replacement through retail stores.
2. Zone sensor shall include a readily visual indication of battery condition. The battery
indication lights shall flash periodically for a minimum of 5 days to indicate the need for
battery replacement prior to failure. No site survey tools shall be required.
3. Sensor system RF receiver shall operate on 24VAC power, provided by the associated unit
controller transformer.
1. A set of all site survey and installation tools as well as software shall be provided to the
contractor use for system installation and commissioning for the duration of the warranty
period.
2. A set of all site survey and installation tools as well as software shall be provided to the
owner for permanent possession for ongoing system maintenance and trouble shooting.
PART 3: EXECUTION
.1 Examination
.2 Protection
.3 General Workmanship
.4 Field Quality Control
.5 Wiring
.6 Fiber Optic Cable
.7 Installation of Sensors
.8 Flow Switch Installation
.9 Actuators
.10 Warning Labels
.11 Identification of Hardware and Wiring
.12 Controllers
.13 Programming
.14 Cleaning
.15 Training
.16 Acceptance
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and
any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for
resolution before rough-in work is started.
B. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any dis-
crepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution
before rough-in work is started.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and
shall be liable for all damage thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested,
and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall
carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The
Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and
construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.
A. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and
parallel to walls) wherever possible.
B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.
C. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the
NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment
enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for
unobstructed access for service.
D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.
E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and
standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to
local codes and standard practices.
A. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local,
state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section.
B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of
workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and
properly supported.
C. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction
over the work.
3.5 WIRING
A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and
Division 16 of these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in
Division 16, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.
B. Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air
plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that:
C. Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be
sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)
D. All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed
specifically for that purpose.
E. Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing
high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two
(e.g. relays and transformers).
F. Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular
to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m [10 ft] intervals. Such bundled
cable shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 1.5 m [5 ft] intervals or more
often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result.
G. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to
wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within
enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to
devices and terminals.
H. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available,
the Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers.
I. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be
made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.
J. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at
all penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes.
K. Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System
Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC.
L. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also
be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be
located within Class 1 starter enclosures.
M. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling.
Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring.
O. This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated
(as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.
P. Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and
shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall
not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible
metal conduits shall be used.
B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates.
C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by
the wall framing.
D. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air
transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.
E. Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow.
F. Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type.
Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend
shall be supported with a capillary clip.
G. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature
sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells.
H. Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within
mechanical and service rooms.
I. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated
location.
3.8 ACTUATORS
1. To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers,
power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then
tighten the linkage.
2. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates
damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.
3. Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator
manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's
recommendations.
A. Affix labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the DDC System.
Warning label shall indicate the following:
CAUTION
This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning.
Switch disconnect to “Off” position before servicing.
B. Affix labels to motor starters and control panels that are connected to multiple power sources
utilizing separate disconnects. Labels shall indicate the following:
CAUTION
This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate disconnects.
Disconnect all power sources before servicing.
A. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end
within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.
B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item
served.
D. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record
documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does
not remove the label.
3.11 CONTROLLERS
A. Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. A custom application
controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with that system
are assigned to the same controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or
space temperature are exempt from this requirement.
B. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum
of 10% spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not
universal, 10% of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 10% of each type is
required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used.
1. Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, points
database definition, and custom software. No additional Controller boards or point
modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points.
3.12 PROGRAMMING
A. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There
shall be a minimum of 25% of available memory free for future use.
B. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface
without the use of a written point index.
C. Software Programming
1. Provide programming for the system as written in the specifications and adhere to the
sequence strategies provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation
of the system but not specified in this document shall also be provided by the Control
System Contractor. Imbed into any custom-written control programs sufficient comment
statements or inherent flow diagrams to clearly describe each section of the program.
The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations.
D. Operators' Interface
1. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for each major piece of equipment and floor plan in
the building. This includes each Chiller, Air Handler, VAV Terminal, Fan Coil, Boiler, and
Cooling Tower. These standard graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified
in the points list.
2. The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up,
and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this
section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database,
and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation
of the operator interface.
3. As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor will perform a complete test of the
operator interface. Test duration shall be a minimum of 16 hours on-site. Tests shall be
made in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative.
E. Demonstration: A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and
control system shall be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 16 hours on-site
with the Owner and his representatives for a complete functional demonstration of all the system
requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits
acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation.
3.13 CLEANING
A. This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor
shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have
been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction
Manager or General Contractor.
B. At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment,
etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc.
C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint
damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the
adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with
new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
3.14 TRAINING
A. Provide a minimum of 2 classroom training sessions, 4 hours each, throughout the contract
period for personnel designated by the Owner. Computer-based audio-visual training may be
substituted for up to 8 hours of hands on training.
B. Train the designated staff of Owner's representative and Owner to enable them to proficiently
operate the system; create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical
points for the system, and perform routine diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures.
C. Additional training shall be available in courses designed to meet objectives as divided into three
logical groupings; participants may attend one or more of these, depending on the level of
knowledge required:
1. Day-to-day Operators
2. Advanced Operators
3. System Managers/Administrators
D. Provide course outline and materials as per Part 1 of this Section. The instructor(s) shall provide
one copy of training material per student.
F. Classroom training shall be done using a network of working controllers representative of the
installed hardware or at the customer’s site.
G. This training shall be made available in addition to the interactive audio-visual tutorial, provided
with the system.
3.15 ACCEPTANCE
A. The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all
tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer
and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the
Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the
Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.
A. Valve submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, size, and piping configuration to ensure
compatibility with pipe design.
B. All control valves shall be installed so that the stem position is not more than 60 degrees from the
vertical up position.
D. Control valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that
actuators may be serviced and removed without interference from structure or other pipes and/or
equipment.
E. Isolation valves shall be installed such that control valve body may be serviced without draining
the supply/return side piping system. {Note to designer: this must also be shown.} Unions shall
be installed at all connections to screwed type control valves.
F. Provide tags for all control valves indicating service and number. Tags shall be brass, 1-1/2" in
diameter, with 1/4" high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook. Match identification num-
bers as shown on approved controls shop drawings.
A. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility with
sheet metal design.
B. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade or
linkage rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure 1/4" larger than damper
dimensions and shall be square, straight, and level.
C. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely
square and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to
opposite lower corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be equal ±1/8".
D. Follow manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specifically
designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.
E. Install extended shaft or jackshaft per manufacturer's instructions. (Typically, a sticker on the
damper face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of
damper to that blade.)
F. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle
damper after installation to assure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections
must open and close simultaneously.
G. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end.
H. Support duct-work in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight.
I. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening to
prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.
A. Provide complete submittal data to controls system contractor for coordination of duct smoke
detector interface to HVAC systems. This contractor shall provide a dry-contact alarm output in
the same room as the HVAC equipment to be controlled.
END OF SECTION -
PART 1 - GENERAL
E. All units shall conform to Part 15 of the FCC regulations on RFI/EMI emissions.
F. The VFD and any associated hardware are to be "run in" at rated ambient temperature and rated
load on variable speeds at the manufacturers plant prior to shipment to minimize field start-up
problems.
G. After installation the manufacturer's representative of the equipment provided in this section shall
certify in writing to the Owner's representative that the equipment has been assembled and
installed within the guidelines of the manufacturer's written installation instructions and that its
performance meets or exceeds the operating characteristics specified and/or scheduled and that its
emissions are within the limits set by the aforementioned regulations.
H. A Field Service Engineer is to be provided for start up assistance for the drive and its related motor.
Start up assistance shall consist of verifying factory performance standards for the drive and aiding
in establishing reference speed points for control of the motor.
I. Variable frequency drive units shall comply with IEEE 519-1992 for requirements for harmonic
control in electrical power systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010: Mechanical General
Provisions.
B. Submit complete performance and dimensional data along with construction details and wiring
diagrams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Trane
2. Yaskawa
3. Magnetek
4. Square D
A. The VFD’s are to be selected for operation with the motors provided for this project. The drive
system shall provide an input power factor of 95% throughout the entire speed range. The VFD
shall not contribute 5th or 7th harmonic current to the power distribution system or contain the
appropriate filter network to limit those harmonics to not more than 5% of the theoretical value.
B. The VFD’s shall be as per UL 508C (Component listing are not sufficient) pulse width modulating
type for maximum reliability and provide inherent short circuit protection. The VFD shall be capable
of withstanding an output phase to phase, phase to ground short circuit and VFD semi-conductor
short circuit, without causing a failure to the VFD. The drive system shall provide a near unity
power factor. It is to provide operation of the fan and pump motors as scheduled. Units shall be
mounted in a NEMA I enclosure or better. The following equipment and features are to be
incorporated:
1. Fully range minimum and maximum speed adjustment with ability to automatically select
speeds.
2. Adjustable linear acceleration and deceleration, each separately adjustable.
3. Field adjustable or automatic current limit.
4. Inherent short circuit protection.
5. All units shall operate from 4-20 MA or 0-10VAC Signal in automatic mode.
6. Under voltage and over voltage protection.
7. Over temperature protection.
8. Be rated to provide 100% of rated current, minimum 110% breakaway current.
9. The VFD is to be rated for an input line voltage variation of +10% and -5%.
10. The VFD shall include a line reactor.
11. The VFD is to include a door interlocked disconnect switch or circuit breaker. If integral
disconnect is not supplied, the manufacturer shall furnish a separate disconnect with the VFD.
12. The following are to be included in the VFD cabinet:
a. Filtered ventilation louvers or heat sinks.
b. Door mounted analog or digital speed indicator calibrated 0-100%.
c. Power on light.
d. Fault light.
e. Fault reset button.
f. Manual speed potentiometer for operation in the manual mode.
g. Manual-off-automatic switch.
h. Manually switched bypass circuit to bypass power feed around the VFD.
C. Unit to include automatic restart circuitry in the event of a power outage, with no more than a 60
second delay after power is reapplied. Unit shall try at least three re-starts before shut down and
alarm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. The contractor shall assume the responsibility for coordinating the purchased equipment with the
motor served and with the automatic temperature control system, paying specific attention to the
signal sent and received, the ground source and the required speed range.
C. Start up shall be by a factory trained field service engineer representing the manufacturer of the
equipment purchased. Start up shall be done in the presence of the controls contractor and the
engineer.
D. Variable frequency drives shall be supplied by Division 15 and installed and wired by Division 16.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for
heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to
plus 10-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa).
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct
penetrations and fire-damper installations in fire-rated floors, partitions, and walls.
2. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors for
access to concealed ducts.
3. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents
connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation.
5. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
6. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
7. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for automatic volume-
control dampers and operators.
8. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final
adjusting of manual-volume dampers.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or
configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect.
Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed
layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and
installed accessories and devices.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems,"
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system pressure
classifications higher than 2-inch wg (500 Pa). Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work:
1. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct
system.
2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper
maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form
with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for
concealed ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm)
length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
(900 mm).
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner
Standard."
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to air stream to prevent erosion of
glass fibers.
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of
adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric
strips and mastics.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.
2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral
compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with
tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized
butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants,
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other
construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal
thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and
intervals.
C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480
mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq.
m) of un-braced panel area, unless ducts are lined.
A. General: Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of
round duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
C. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
D. Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt-
welded longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-
-Metal and Flexible."
E. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with an outer shell
and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside.
a. Ducts 3 to 8 Inches (75 to 200 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm) with
standard spiral seam construction.
b. Ducts 9 to 42 Inches (225 to 1070 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm)
with single-rib spiral seam construction.
c. Ducts 44 to 60 Inches (1120 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.022 inch (0.55 mm)
with single-rib spiral seam construction.
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thickness specified
for longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess
material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches (75 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm).
b. Ducts 27 to 36 Inches (685 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).
c. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches (940 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg (500 to 2490 Pa):
a. Ducts 3 to 14 Inches (75 to 355 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm).
b. Ducts 15 to 26 Inches (380 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).
c. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches (685 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
5. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust
systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions
do not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness
turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows, 8 Inches (200 mm) and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for
45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only.
Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows
with gored construction.
7. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches (225 through 355 mm): Fabricate gored or
pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a
mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard
diameter elbows with gored construction.
8. Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches (355 mm), and All Flat-Oval Elbows:
Fabricate gored elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches (200 mm) and All Pressures: 0.040
inch (1.0 mm) thick with two-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat-oval duct
specified above.
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches (355 mm) and Pressures through 10-
Inch wg (2490 Pa): 0.022 inch (0.55 mm).
a. Ducts 3 to 34 Inches (75 to 865 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm).
b. Ducts 35 to 58 Inches (890 to 1475 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of
adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated
thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 7/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints
necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm (12.7
m/s).
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals
not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches (75 mm)
from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the air stream with metal nosing that
have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as
specified for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner
distance from duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an overall open
area of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct build-outs installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane
assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated build-outs (metal hat sections) or other build-
out means are optional; when used, secure build-outs to duct wall with bolts, screws,
rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification
indicated.
C. Install round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet (3.7 m), unless interrupted
by fittings.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, unless specifically indicated.
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening
and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct.
Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant.
Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section
"Firestopping."
C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface
area of test section.
D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for
round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure
classifications less than and equal to 2-inches-wg (500 Pa) (both positive and negative
pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 2- to 10-
inches-wg(500 to 2490 Pa).
E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual."
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the
system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall
vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-
control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
3. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers,
registers, and grilles.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the
ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions
and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be
located in a side-wall, ceiling, or floor.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings
for each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to
show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items
installed in ceilings and walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the
Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in
lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features
or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service
and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean
exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and
grilles that have damaged finishes.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration:
C. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
D. Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of propeller unit heaters and suspension system components with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,
fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
A. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical discharge configuration with
radial louver diffuser in draw-through
2.3 MATERIALS
B. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer and manufacturer's standard
paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping.
2.4 COILS
A. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, 0.031-inch (0.78-mm) wall thickness, with mechanically bonded
aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200
psig (1380 kPa) and a maximum entering water temperature of 325 deg F (163 deg C), with manual air
vent. Test for leaks to 375 psig (2690 kPa) underwater.
2.5 FAN
A. Motors, 1/2 hp and Smaller: Shaded-pole Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral
thermal-overload protection.
B. Motors, 3/4 hp and Larger: Totally enclosed with permanently lubricated ball bearings.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
2.8 CONTROLS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before propeller unit
heater installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers).
Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic
Restraints."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match
lighting controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange on each connection.
D. Ground equipment.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit
operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical
connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean propeller unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install new filters in each propeller unit heater within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties and Accessories" for roof curbs and equipment
supports.
2. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for vibration hangers and supports
3. Division 15 Section "Central-Station Air Conditioning Units" for package units that
include fans.
4. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for electronic control devices
5. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operations" for control sequence descriptions.
6. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air- handling systems
testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements and procedures.
7. Division 16 Section "Circuit and Motor Disconnects" for disconnect switches.
C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted
exhaust fans.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections:
1. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following:
C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and
components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA
Regulation 1910.7.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70
"National Electrical Code."
F. The mixed-flow, induced dilution fan shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 210-85
Laboratory Methods of Testing fans. Provide documentation with submission of equipment.
A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into
pad.
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified
in Division 7.
A. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
3. Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance
with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to
bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard
210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory
B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation
at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70
percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.
C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed
pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the
middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan
cabinet.
F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA (L50)) of
200,000, calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA
Standard 11 for roller bearings.
A. General Description: Inline, belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet
guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting
brackets, and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet
flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory-wired to disconnect
located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Drive Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside
of fan housing.
1. Volume Control Damper: Manual operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame.
4. Speed Control: Variable speed switch with on-off control and speed control for 100 to
50 percent of fan air delivery.
2.5 MOTORS
B. Motor Sizes: Minimum sizes and electrical characteristics as indicated. If not indicated, large
enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor
range.
D. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
1. Bases: Adjustable.
2. Bearings: The following features are required:
F. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 16.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of
fans.
A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support
units as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control
devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Controls."
4. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded
steel rods and vibration isolation springs.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air- handling units for service
and maintenance.
1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4
inches larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36, size and location
as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor
slab.
3. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top
edge and corners of pad.
4. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
5. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000-psi compressive strength, and normal weight
aggregate.
6. Clean exposed steel form in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation
Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15 sections. Make final duct
connections with flexible connections.
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory- authorized service
representative to perform the following:
1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including ductwork
and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.
Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust
fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for
air-handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Heat wheels.
2. Packaged energy recovery units.
1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs for mounting rooftop equipment.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control wiring and control
devices connected to energy recovery units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. For installed
products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and
base weights.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain air-to-air energy recovery units through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air-to-air
energy recovery units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Capacity ratings for energy recovery devices shall comply with
ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."
E. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to
recommendations of NRCA.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
B. Manufacturer[s]:
1. Trane Company, Model CDQ
2. Advanced Thermal Technologies.
3. Munters; Cargocaire Division.
D. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved centrifugal fan with restrained, spring isolators and
flexible duct connections.
1. Motor and Drive: Belt driven with adjustable sheaves, motor mounted on adjustable
base, and with permanently lubricated motor bearings.
E. Filters: [1-inch- (25-mm-) thick] [2-inch- (50-mm-) thick] disposable type, in galvanized steel frame,
mounted upstream of unit in both supply and exhaust airstreams.
F. Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits.
Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation.
G. Standalone factory mounted DDC controls including all actuators sensor wiring and control logic.
H. Unit shall be pre-programmed to provide variable air volume control, dehumidification control, CO2
monitoring and ventilation reset control, chilled and hot water control. BAS manufacturer shall
provide all necessary interface capability required to communicate to the BAS front end.
persed throughout the wheel matrix. Because the desiccant is not applied as a glued on surface
coating, it is not susceptible to erosion, abrasion, or delamination of the desiccant. The wheel
matrix shall be rigid and glued layer-to-layer, and not susceptible to sagging or separation of the
layers. The wheel shall be structurally reinforced with a spoking system to minimize wheel def-
lection. Because the product is nonmetallic, it offers complete resistance to corrosion. The media
shall meet the flammability requirements governing this class of products and be UL recognized
components in accordance to UL 1812 and UL1995
5. All cassettes shall include both a circumferential seal as an air block-off around the perimeter,
and an inner diametric seal separating regeneration and supply sides. Seals shall be full contact
nylon brush seals, which minimizes leakage. Seals are factory set and field adjustable and make
intimate contact with the wheel on all surfaces. CDQ cassette, wheel and seal configuration al-
lows for operation at high differential pressures. Seal replacement should not be necessary during
the life of the product.
6. The drive system shall consist of a heavy-duty fractional horsepower A/C gear motor mounted
in the cassette and cooled by the AHU air stream. Motor location shall be as required. All motors
have permanently lubricated bearings. Minimal amp draw will be required and all motors shall
be 115V/1PH/60Hz or 230V/1PH/60Hz. Drive belts shall be high performance v-belt multilink
belts. The multilink belt allows for replacement of individual links(1” each) if a section of belt
becomes worn or breaks. Belts are installed under tension, require no mechanical tensioner, and
do not require adjustment after startup. The rotation speed of the wheel shall not exceed the
scheduled value.
7. The wheel matrix shall be cleanable by vacuuming or pressurized air blowing, or alternatively
with low temperature steam, hot water, light detergent.
8. Cassettes shall be provided with bearings which support rotation of the wheel around a center
shaft driven by a perimeter belt. The bearings shall be internal ball bearings press fitted into the
bored wheel hub for all wheels up to and including 72” diameter. Internal bearings are perma-
nently lubricated, no maintenance bearings which support fixed shaft operation of the wheel as-
sembly. Flanged or pillow block bearings which support rotating shaft operation of the wheel
assembly are used for all units larger than 72” diameter. Outboard bearings are provided with
grease fittings for periodic lubrication. L10 bearing life is greater than 400,000 at design condi-
tions.
9. The wheel cassette shall be capable of continuous operation over ambient temperatures rang-
ing from -40F to 200F at any relative humidity without adversely affecting wheel performance or
life.
10. Performance shall be as predicted by CDQ selection software as scheduled. The performance
shall be based on testing conducted on the wheel cassette installed in the air handler configura-
tion as shown in the AHU drawings. Performance based on stand-alone desiccant wheel cassette
or tests with two independent air streams are unacceptable. Performance data shall be from tests
of a complete unit per-formed by an ISO 9000 certified laboratory. Temperature measurements
shall be taken using instrumentation whose calibration is traceable to NIST standards. Dry bulb
and wet bulb temperature measurements shall be accurate to +/- 0.1 Deg F. Performance predic-
tion for the CDQ air handler shall be available for multiple conditions as required.
11. Warranty : The dehumidification wheel shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years from
date of manufacture (terms and conditions apply). The warranty applies to all parts and compo-
nents in the cassettes with the exception of the motor, which is warranted for a period of eighteen
(18) months.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions and rotation is
from exhaust side to purge section to supply side.
1. Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream,
for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals.
2. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building
side for bypass during startup.
3. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
4. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
downstream, for access to heat exchanger. Access doors and panels are specified in
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
C. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
D. Pipe drains from units and drain pans to nearest floor drain; use Schedule 40 PVC pipe and solvent
welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Duct and fan installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and specialties.
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Adjust seals and purge.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
C. Installation adhesives and sealants must meet California Department of Health Services emissions
standard, with documentation.
E. Coordinate with requirements of Division 1 Section “Construction Indoor Air Quality Management”
including use of minimum MERV 8 filters if system used during construction and installation of
MERV 13 filters prior to occupancy
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration:
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
F. Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
filters.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 CONFIGURATION
A. Vertical Units: An assembly chassis, coil, Plastic drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through
configuration with hydronic four pipe cooling coil and heating coil.
2.3 MATERIALS
C. Drain Pans: Stainless steel or plastic, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be removable
and insulated with polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall be formed to slope
from all directions to drain connection.
1. Vertical Unit Panels: Removable, galvanized steel, with integral bar grilles discharge
grilles and channel-formed edges and with insulation on back of panel.
E. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with
manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -
tested fan-coil unit before shipping].
A. Primary Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 300
psig and a maximum entering water temperature of 275 deg F.
2.5 FAN
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized steel
or thermoplastic material; directly connected to the motor.
A. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral
thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts.
B. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit.
Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
A. Four-Pipe, Valve Control: Vertical units shall be provided with unit-mounted thermostat, with
manual fan-speed switch and three way modulating electric valves. Horizontal units shall be
provided with wireless wall mounting thermostat, with manual fan-speed switch and three way
modulating electric valves.
B. DDC Controller: Factory installed DDC Controller shall modulate the three way valve and stage
the fan speed from low to medium to high to satisfy the space setpoint. DDC controller shall
communicate via Lontalk.
C. Piping Package: Provide factory installed piping package in accordance with the detail drawing
on the plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-
coil unit installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers).
Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to
match lighting controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
D. Ground equipment.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation
and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.
SECTION 15628 - AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints” for chiller
vibration isolation requirements.
2. Division 15 Section “Hydronic Piping” for chiller piping requirements.
3. Division 15 Section “Refrigerant Piping” for chiller piping requirements.
4. Division 15 Section “Chemical Water Treatment” for chemically treating chilled and
condenser water.
5. Division 15 Section “HVAC Controls” for temperature-control devices for chillers.
6. Division 15 Section “Sequence of Operation” for temperature-control sequence for chillers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include refrigerant; rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
1. Design Calculation: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for design
vibration bases.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Details fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slide and rails, and base
weights.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Detailed wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale and coordinated with the following:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements. Determine space reserved for electrical equipment.
4. Access requirements around other work, including working clearance to mechanical controls
and electrical equipment.
D. Product Certificates: Certification of performance according to ARI 550 and those chillers have been
started and function properly.
E. Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 1/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Articles 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASHRAE 15 for chiller design, construction, leak testing, and
installation.
C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, “Pressure
Vessels” for constructing and testing evaporator and condenser pressure vessels. Stamp ASME
label.
B. Store chillers to prevent damage and protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, and construction
debris.
C. Handle chillers according to manufacturer’s written rigging and installation instructions for
unloading, transporting, and setting in final location.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provision of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than five years after date of
Substantial Completion, parts only.
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 2/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 2 PRODUCTS
B. System Description: Chiller shall incorporate Scroll type compressors and consist of mul-
tiple independent refrigerant circuits. Each refrigerant circuit shall consist of an individual
compressor set, evaporator, thermal expansion valve, liquid line solenoid valve, filter drier, fin
and tube condenser, and control system. Each circuit shall be constructed to be independent
of other circuits from a refrigeration and electrical stand-point. The multi-circuit chiller must
be able to produce chilled water even in the event of a failure of one or more refrigerant cir-
cuits.
C. General
1. Chiller Modules shall be ETL listed in accordance with UL Standard 1995, CSA
certified per Standard C22.2#236, and bear the ASME UM stamp on all water-to-
refrigerant heat exchangers.
2. Modules shall ship wired and charged with refrigerant. All modules shall be fac-
tory run tested prior to shipment.
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 3/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
D. Chilled Water Mains: Each module shall include supply and return mains for chilled
water. Grooved end connections are provided for interconnection to four inch standard
(4.5” outside diameter) piping with Victaulic type couplings.
F. Compressor: Each module shall contain two hermetic scroll compressors in a tan-
dem piping arrangement mounted to the module with rubber-in-shear isolators. Each
system also includes high discharge pressure and low suction pressure safety cut-
outs.
G. Condenser Fans: Each module shall contain dual condenser fans for each refrige-
rant circuit. These fans shall be multi-blade vane-axial type made of plastic compo-
site material for quiet operation. Fans shall be direct drive at maximum RPM of
1,150. Fan motors shall all be pressure controlled and suitable for outdoor use. Fan
speed control shall be provided by integral variable frequency drives.
H. Central Control System.
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 4/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
tained including date and time of day of each fault (up to the last 20 occur-
rences).
I. Chiller shall communicate via Bacnet to be compatible with the building management
system.
J. Each refrigerant circuit shall include all refrigerant specialties including a properly sized
refrigerant receiver to provide reliable operation down to 0°F Ambient.
Provide a Pump Module of size and capacity indicated on the drawings and sche-
dules. The Pump Module shall be interconnected though the common chiller header
system and require no additional water connections. Pump Module will become an
integral part of the chiller system. Pump Module shall incorporate dual in-line centri-
trols shall be provided to enable manual selection of lead pump. In addition, in the
event of a loss-of-flow failure of the chilled water system, the Pump Module controls
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 5/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
shall disable the lead pump and automatically start the standby pump. Module shall
Expansion tank shall be welded steel with butyl rubber diaphragm and capable of a
psig. Tank shall be interconnected through the common chiller header system and
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 6/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
Temperature and will have an integral reset based on entering water temper-
ature to provide for efficient operation at part-load conditions.
A. The chiller shall be provided with sound attenuation with the following:
B. Sound levels shall meet the sound levels as listed below and in accordance with the
with the neighborhood noise sound levels as calculated by the owners acoustical
consultant.
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 7/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Supply water for the chilled water circuit shall be analyzed and
treated by a professional water treatment specialist who is familiar with the operating
conditions and materials of construction specified for the chiller’s heat exchangers,
headers and associated piping. Cycles of concentration shall be controlled such that
recirculated water quality for modular chillers using 316 stainless steel brazed plate
heat exchangers and carbon steel headers is maintained within the following para-
meters:
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 EXAMINATION
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 8/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Examine areas to receive chillers for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance and
other conditions affecting chiller performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrections have been corrected.
B. Final chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact location before
roughing-in piping and electrical connections.
4.3 CLEANING
C. Upon completion of installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect unit components.
Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original
finish.
4.4 COMMISSIONING
1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.
F. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions and check
for the following items:
1. No physical damage to unit
2. Unit is level.
3. Chiller vibration isolation and flexible pip connection are installed
4. Clearance has been maintained and piping is installed for easy removal for service and tube
cleaning.
5. Chilled-water pips have been connected to correct ports.
6. Labels and safety instructions are clearly visible.
7. Oil levels are as recommended by manufacturer.
8. Refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak-tested.
9. Shipping skids, blocks, and straps are removed.
10. Refrigerant and pressure relief is vented to outside.
11. Thermometers and pressure gages are installed.
12. Controls and safety interlocks are installed and connected.
13. Pumps are installed, connected, and operational.
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 9/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
J. Check static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup and
shutdown.
4.5 DEMONSTRATION
1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedule for starting up and
shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining chillers.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout.”
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section “Operation and
Maintenance Data.”
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days’ advance notice.
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 10/10
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Breeching
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include materials, dimensions, weights, and
accessories.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of breeching and stacks, including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction elements.
Detail connections to equipment.
D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Engineering report certifying that stacks meet the design wind and seismic loads.
F. Maintenance data for vent fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.
D. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for
fabricated breeching.
E. Comply with SMACNA "Guide for Steel Stack Design and Construction."
F. Comply with AWS D1.1 for welder qualifications, welding details, and workmanship
standards
G. Comply with ASHRAE "Systems and Equipment Handbook," Chapter 31 for "Chimney, Gas
Vent, and Fireplace Systems," for material requirements and design criteria.
H. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
I. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain all Type B vent system components from 1 source and
by a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Metal-Fab
b. Selkirk Metalbestos
c. Van-Packer Company
a. Metal-Fab
b. Selkirk Metalbestos
c. Van-Packer Company
A. Description: Double-wall gas vents, conforming to NFPA 211, Type B. Inner pipe of sheet
aluminum, outer pipe of galvanized-steel sheet, each with the following minimum thickness:
1. Round, 6-Inch (152-mm) Inside Diameter and Smaller: 0.012-inch (0.30-mm) inner
pipe; .187-inch (0.5-mm) outer pipe.
2. Round, 7- to 18-Inch (178- to 457-mm) Inside Diameter: 0.014-inch (0.36-mm) inner
pipe; .0187-inch (0.5-mm) outer pipe.
B. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier,
adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, fire-stop spacers, and
fasteners, fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections.
A. Description: Double-wall metal stacks conforming to NFPA 211, suitable for use with
building heating equipment burning gas, solid, or liquid fuels.
B. Construction: Inner and outer metal shells separated by at least 1-inch (25-mm) airspace,
with positive sealing joints.
E. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier,
adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, fire-stop spacers, and
fasteners fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
C. Support vents at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support the weight of the
vent and all accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes, including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean breeching internally during installation to remove dust and debris. Clean external
surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Closure: Provide at ends of breeching and chimneys that are not completed or
connected to equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Closed System: One bypass feeder on each system, with isolating and drain valves installed
around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated
by test.
2. Performance: Water treatment sized and equipped to treat raw water available at
Project site to sustain the following water characteristics:
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical product
data, rated capacities of selected equipment clearly indicated, water-pressure drops, weights
(shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and
startup instructions
D. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
E. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with specified
requirements.
F. Maintenance data for chemical water treatment to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions and parts list for
each item of equipment, control, and accessory. Include troubleshooting maintenance guide.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article
100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Service Period: Provide chemicals and service program for period of one year from startup
date of equipment, including the following:
A. Furnish the following extra materials, matching products installed, packaged with protective
covering for storage and with identification labels clearly describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bypass (Pot) Feeders: steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel, shutoff valve
on top, air release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and re-circulating shutoff valves on
sides.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:
1. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will
perform field quality control testing.
B. Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform
field quality control testing.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Sample boiler water at 1-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of 5 weeks and
prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic. Where
applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the following standards:
3.5 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris; repair damaged finishes, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
B. Ensure that system is operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Place terminal
control valves in OPEN position during cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each
system.
1. Hot-Water Heating System: Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising system to
design temperature; maintain for a minimum of 12 hours. Remove heat and allow to
cool. Drain and refill with clean water. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperature,
then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.
2. Chilled-Water System: Circulate for 48 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water;
circulate for 24 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system
cleaner is removed.
3. Open System: Flush with clean water for a minimum of one hour. Drain completely
and refill.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Startup Procedures: During boiler system startup, operate boiler water treatment system
(after charging with specified chemicals) to maintain required steady-state characteristics of
feed-water.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide services of supplier's technical representative for half a day to instruct Owner's
personnel in operation, maintenance, and testing procedures of boiler water treatment
system.
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
C. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Contract Closeout."
D. Schedule training with Owner, through the Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following categories of HVAC pumps for hydronic systems:
1. In-line circulators
2. End-suction pumps.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers and pressure gages,
connector plugs, and devices.
2. Division 15 Section "Motors" for pump motors.
3. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for inertia pads, isolation pads, spring supports,
spring hangers, and flexible pipe connectors.
4. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for interlock wiring between
pumps and between pumps and field-installed control devices.
5. Division 16 Sections for power-supply wiring, field installed disconnect-switches,
required electrical devices, and motor controllers.
A. Pump Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system's maximum operating pressure at point
where installed, but not less than specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data including certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models,
weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories. Indicate
pump's operating point on curves.
C. Shop drawings showing pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchors.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiating
between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
F. Maintenance data for pumps to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1. Include startup instructions.
1. ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for piping materials and installation
2. Hydraulic Institute's "Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary & Reciprocating Pumps" for
pump design, manufacture, testing, and installation.
3. UL 778 "Standard for Motor Operated Water Pumps" for construction requirements.
Include UL listing and labeling.
4. NEMA MG 1 "Standard for Motors and Generators" for electric motors. Include NEMA
listing and labeling.
5. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical components and installation.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each category of pumps from 1 source and by a single
manufacturer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each category of pumps from 1 source and by a single
manufacturer. Include responsibility and accountability to answer questions and resolve
problems regarding compatibility, installation, performance, and acceptance of pumps.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profile, connections, and dimensional requirements
of pumps and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Other manufacturers'
pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Substitutions."
C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
D. Extended Storage Longer than 5 Days: Dry internal parts with hot air or vacuum-producing
device. Coat internal parts with light oil, kerosene, or antifreeze after drying. Dismantle
bearings and couplings; dry; coat with acid-free, heavy oil; tag; and store in dry location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. In-Line Circulators:
a. Amtrol, Incorporated
b. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated
c. Dunham-Bush, Incorporated
d. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; Bell & Gossett Division
e. Taco, Incorporated
B. Base-Mounted Pumps: Include pump casings that allow removal and replacement of
impellers without disconnecting piping.
D. Motors: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B, except Design C where
required for high starting torque. Furnish single-, multiple-, or variable-speed motors, with
type of enclosures and electrical characteristics indicated. Include built-in thermal-overload
protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Select each motor to be non-overloading
over full range of pump performance curve.
F. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units
before shipping.
1. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller
than 2-1/2 inches (DN65) and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
4. Seals: Mechanical type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,
ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
5. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust type.
6. Motor Bearings: Oil-lubricated, sleeve type.
7. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
8. Motor: Resiliently mounted to pump casing.
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug in bottom of volute, and
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug in bottom of volute, and
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections. Include integral feet or
other means on volute to support weight of casing and attached piping.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
3. Wearing Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
5. Seals: Mechanical type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,
ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
6. Seals: Stuffing-box type. Include at least 4 rings of graphite-impregnated braided
yarn with bronze lantern ring between center 2 graphite rings, and bronze packing
gland.
7. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
Include flexible-spacer type, with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled
and removed without removing pump or motor, where indicated.
8. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment for
motor sizes of 100 hp (74.6 kW) and less. Include flexible-spacer type, with flange
and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed without removing pump or
motor, for sizes larger than 100 hp (74.6 kW).
9. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment. Include flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and
removed without removing pump or motor.
A. Include the following pump specialty fittings with end connections matching pump and piping,
where indicated:
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check
valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of pumps.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before pump installation.
C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be
installed.
D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3.2 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Install pumps in locations indicated and arranged to provide access for periodic
maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping such that piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation hangers
of sufficient size to support weight of pump independent of piping system.
1. Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges
with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches
(19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check
coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level
and plumb.
3.4 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations, after
grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections
have been made.
C. Adjust alignment of pump and motor shafts for angular and parallel alignment by 1 of 2
methods specified in the HI's Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary & Reciprocating Pumps,
"Instructions for Installation, Operation and Maintenance."
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill base plate
completely with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Install shutoff valve and strainer on pump suction and check valve and shutoff
valve on pump discharge, except where other arrangement is indicated.
B. Connect piping to pumps as indicated. Install valves that are the same size as piping
connecting to pumps.
C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than the diameter of pump
nozzles.
D. Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of in-line circulators
E. Install non-slam check valve and globe valve on discharge side of vertical in-line pumps.
F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of vertical in-line pumps.
H. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.
J. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps and
where indicated. Install between pump casing and valves, except where other arrangement
is indicated.
L. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure gage
tappings where provided.
M. Install temperature and pressure gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping
around each pump.
N. Install flow check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
P. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
A. Check pump suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and
checks before startup:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean
thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction
marked on pump casing.
4. Check that pumps are free to rotate by hand. Pumps for handling hot liquids shall be
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or even
drags slightly until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Check that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power:
1. Prime pumps, opening suction valve, closing drains, and preparing pumps for
operation.
2. Open cooling water supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where
applicable.
3. Open cooling water supply valves if stuffing boxes are water-cooled.
4. Open sealing liquid supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
5. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally kept at
operating temperature.
6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
7. Start motors.
8. Open discharge valves slowly.
9. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper flow to
ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leakage through
stuffing boxes; then tighten glands.
C. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves
open, steps are the same, except that discharge valves are opened sometime before motors
are started
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed requirements for
testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes high-efficiency boilers for heating hot water and accessories used
for heating hot water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results
for compliance with performance requirements before shipping.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NFPA 70, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
B. AGA Compliance: Design certified by AGA; tests and ratings according to AGA
requirements.
C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, "Heating Boilers."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor for the heat
exchanger.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Sealed-Combustion Boilers:
a. A.O. Smith
b. Viessmann
c. Fulton
2.3 CONTROLS
A. All boilers are to come equipped with the following accessories piped and wired at the
factory.
1. Exhaust mufflers
2. Air-supply mufflers
3. McDonnell Miller No. 750-MT-120 probe type low water cut-off with manual reset.
4. ASME safety relief valve (s).
A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IV for low-pressure boilers.
A. The contractor will install at least 2 emergency shut off switch(s) as required by code
authorities. All electrical devices and equipment required to enable the operations of the
switch(s) shall be provided and installed by the contractor. The switch shall shut down all
power to the burners, oil pumps and gas valves. It shall be of design that does not
require manual resetting in the event of a power failure. The locations of the switches
shall be approved by the Owner and the applicable regulatory agencies. A vandalism
resistant pre-alarm cover acceptable to the Owner shall protect such switches. Affix
proper signage to identify said switches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced standards.
C. Support boilers on 4 inch (100-mm) thick concrete base, 4 inches (100-mm) larger on
each side than base of unit. Dowel base to floor on 18-inch (450-mm) centers along
perimeter of base. Cast anchor-bolt inserts through base into floor
E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.
C. Connect hot=water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and
union or flange at each connection.
E. Ground equipment.
F. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.
H. Install piping from safety valves to drip pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.
.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
3.5 CLEANING
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including
chips, scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler
startup until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following:
G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners for maximum operating efficiency.
1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.
2. Check and record performance of factory-provided boiler protection devices and
firing sequences.
3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-
temperature interlocks.
5. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer.
6. Measure and record gas pressure on manifold.
7. Measure and record combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner.
8. Measure and record flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge.
H. Measure and record water flow rate, pressure drops, and temperature rise through each
boiler.
I. Inspect expansion tank, makeup water meter, tank pressure, pressure-reducing valve,
water level, and backflow preventer.
J. Perform the following tests for each firing rate for high/low burners and for 100, 66, and
33 percent load for modulating burners. Adjust boiler combustion efficiency at each firing
rate. Measure and record the following:
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within
building and to point indicated on the contract drawings.
B. The gas system operation pressures are identified on the contract drawings with the
symbols:
The Contractor will select the materials and execution methods as applicable in
accordance with the operation pressures, piping, specialties and accessories indicated on
the contract drawings.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Gas Distribution Systems" for natural gas service piping.
2. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LPG: (Low Pressure Natural Gas Piping) operating pressure of 1-psig or less.
B. MPG (Medium-Pressure Natural Gas Piping) Operating pressure greater than 1-psig, but
not greater than 2-psig.
C. HPG (High Pressure Natural Gas Piping) operating pressure greater than 2-psig, but not
greater than 5-psig.
E. Gas Service: Pipe from gas main or other source to gas point of delivery for building being
served. Piping includes gas service piping, gas valve, service pressure regulator, meter bar
or meter support, and gas meter.
F. Gas Delivery Point: Gas meter or service pressure regulator outlet, or gas service valve if
gas meter is not provided.
B. Approximate values of natural gas supplied for these systems are as follows:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of natural gas specialty and special-duty valve. Include
pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models.
C. Coordination Drawings for natural gas piping, including required clearances and
relationship to other services for same work areas.
D. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.
E. Maintenance data for natural gas specialties and special-duty valves to include in the
operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
A. Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code," for gas piping materials and components;
installations; and inspecting, testing, and purging.
B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring
and electrically operated control devices.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquid from drips in existing
gas piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify gas supplier. Handle
flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises
from end of one day to beginning of next day.
A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Notify each affected user when gas supply will be
turned off.
B. Work Interruptions: Leave gas-piping systems in safe condition when interruptions in work
occur during repairs or alterations to existing gas piping systems.
A. Contractor shall furnish manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all manufactured
equipment and devices, included in its scope
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4. Solenoid Valves:
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E, electric-resistance welded or Type S, seamless; Grade B;
Schedule 40; black.
B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper
A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 standard pattern, with threaded
ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1
B. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and
threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
C. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250.
D. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt-welding type; and ASME B16.11 forged
steel.
H. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.
A. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for joining materials not included in this Section.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Silver Classification BAg-1. Filler metal containing
phosphorus is prohibited.
C. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
D. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.
2.5 VALVES
A. Manual Valves: Conform to standards listed or, where appropriate, to ANSI Z21.15
B. Gas Stops, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: AGA-certified, bronze-body, plug type with bronze
plug, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc and
fluorocarbon elastomer seal, for 2-psig or less natural gas. Include AGA stamp, flat or
square head or lever handle, and threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
C. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 150-psig WOG, bronze body, bronze
plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, with threaded ends conforming
to ASME B1.20.1.
D. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 125-psig WOG, cast-iron body,
bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, with threaded ends
conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
E. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: 125-psig WOG minimum, equivalent to
ASME B16.33, lubricated, straightaway pattern, and cast-iron or ductile-iron body. Include
tapered plug, O-ring seals, square or flat head, and threaded ends conforming to
ASME B1.20.1.
F. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: 125-psig WOG minimum, equivalent to
ASME B16.33, non-lubricated-plug type with poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene (PTFE) lining or
sleeve, straightaway pattern, cast-iron body. Include square or flat head and threaded ends
conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
G. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: AGA-certified, 350-psig non-shock, bronze-body,
butterfly valve with stainless steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal, for 2-psig or less
natural gas. Include AGA stamp, lever handle, and threaded ends conforming to
ASME B1.20.1.
H. Gas Valves, 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or Class 175 WOG, non-
lubricated-plug type with poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene (PTFE) lining or sleeve, semi-steel body,
wrench operated, with flanged ends.
A. Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.21, for operation by appliance automatic shutoff
device. 2-inch NPS and smaller with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1 and 2-
1/2-inch NPS and larger with flanged ends.
1. Operation: Mechanical.
2. Operation: Electrical.
B. Solenoid Valves: Bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body; 120 VAC, 60 Hz, Class B
continuous-duty molded coil; UL labeled and FM approved. Include NEMA ISC 6, Type 4,
and coil enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position is normally
closed. Include threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1 for 2-inch NPS and smaller
and flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.
1. Service Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than natural gas
distribution system service pressure.
2. Line Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system pressure.
3. Appliance Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system
pressure, with capacity and pressure setting matching appliance
4. Gas Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed corrosion-resistant screen
in opening when not connected to vent piping.
C. Strainers: Y pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include stainless-steel screens with
3/64-inch (1.2-mm) perforations, except where other screens are indicated.
D. Quick Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, ANSI Z21.41a, and ANSI Z21.41b convenience
outlets and matching plug connector.
A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for
use in corrosive atmosphere. Coating properties include the following:
1. Applied to pipe and fittings treated with compatible primer before applying tape.
2. Overall Thickness: 20 mils (0.5 mm), synthetic adhesive.
3. Water-Vapor Transmission Rate: Maximum 0.10 gallons/100 square inches (0.59
L/sq. m)
4. Water Absorption: 0.02 percent maximum.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for concrete bases
for gas meters, gas pressure regulators, and specialties.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or section of piping.
Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all
equipment is turned off in affected piping section.
A. Extend natural gas piping and connect to gas distribution system (gas service) piping in
location and size indicated for gas service entrance to building.
1. Gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and gas meter are
specified in Division 2 Section "Gas Distribution Systems."
B. Install shutoff valve, downstream from gas meter, outside building at gas service entrance.
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, where indicated, for gas meters, gas
pressure regulators, and specialties.
A. General: Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings
same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, except
where otherwise indicated.
B. LPG (Low Pressure, 1-psig or Less, Natural Gas Systems): Use the following:
1. 1-Inch NPS and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints or Copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
2. 1-1/4- to 4”-Inch NPS: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints or steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints, or steel pipe,
butt-welding fittings, and welded.
3. 4-Inch NPS and Larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.
1. 1-Inch NPS and Smaller: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints or
Copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
2. 1-1/4-Inch NPS (DN32) and Larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded
joints.
D. Underground Natural Gas Systems, All Pressures: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and
welded joints. Encase gas carrier piping in containment conduits.
E. Underground Containment Conduits: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.
A. Use gas stops for shutoff to appliances with 2-inch NPS or smaller low-pressure gas
supply.
B. Use gas valves for shutoff to appliances with 2-1/2-inch NPS or larger low-pressure gas
supply and all sizes for medium-pressure gas supply.
C. Use gas valves of sizes indicated for gas service piping, meters, mains, and where
indicated.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation requirements.
B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight
conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent
conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap.
3. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to approval
of authorities having jurisdiction. Channels must have cover and be open to space
above cover for ventilation.
4. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from
physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.
5. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in
"Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to
approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
6. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts,
clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or
dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where water may collect. Include outlets
of gas meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not
install where water would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or
capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches
long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip
and floor for removal of plug or cap.
D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, and in floor channels, except where indicated to be exposed to view.
E. Install gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
H. Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged
devices.
J. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, gas pressure regulator, solenoid valve,
and elsewhere as indicated.
K. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with ferrous and brass or bronze end
connections, separated by insulating material, where piping of dissimilar metals is joined, at
outlet from gas meter and, where indicated, for ferrous piping.
L. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger
connections.
M. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of piping expansion and contraction. Install
expansion joints, expansion loops, and pipe guides as indicated.
N. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and
vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with
corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.
O. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gas-tight conduits
extending minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate
vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in
large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar epoxy-polyamide paint
according to SSPC-Paint 16.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
1. Brazed Joints: Make joints with brazing alloy having melting point greater than 1000-
deg F (540-deg C). Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.
A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage. Tag valves with metal tag
indicating piping supplied. Attach tag to valve with metal chain.
1. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for valve
tags.
2. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags.
B. Install gas valve upstream from each gas pressure regulator. Where 2 gas pressure
regulators are installed in series, valve is not required at second regulator.
C. Install pressure relief or pressure-limiting devices so they can be readily operated to
determine if valve is free; test to determine pressure at which they will operate; and
examine for leakage when in closed position.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. 1/2-Inch NPS Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
2. 3/4- and 1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
3. 1-1/4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
4. 1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
5. 2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
6. 4-Inch NPS and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch
C. Install hangers for horizontal drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. 3/8-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
2. 1/2- and 5/8-Inch NPS (DN15 and DN18): Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod
size, 3/8 inch
3. 3/4- and 7/8-Inch NPS (DN20 and DN22): Maximum span, 84 inches, minimum rod
size, 3/8 inch
4. 1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 96 inches minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Install gas piping next to equipment and appliances using gas to allow service and
maintenance.
B. Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions.
Install gas valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance using gas. Install
union or flanged connection downstream from valve. Include flexible connectors when
indicated.
C. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom forming drip, as close as
practical to inlet for appliance using gas.
A. Install aboveground portions of natural gas piping systems that are upstream from
equipment shutoff valves, electrically continuous, and bonded to grounding electrode
according to NFPA 70.
A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to NFPA 54, Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection,
Testing, and Purging" and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are
obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of gas meters, regulators, valves, and specialties.
3.13 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
safety devices.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 3
2. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
3. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Specialties”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed,
and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories, and indicating dimensions,
required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring
connections.
D. Certificates of shop inspection and data report as required by provisions of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide water heaters that are listed and labeled.
1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical
Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
D. ASME Code Compliance: Provide water heaters and safety relief valves that comply
with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and that bear the appropriate code
symbols.
E. ASHRAE Standards: Provide water heaters with performance efficiencies not less than
prescribed in ASHRAE 90A, "Energy Conservation in New Building Design."
F. Design Concept: The drawings indicate types and capacities of water heaters and are
based on specific descriptions and manufacturers indicated. Water heaters having
equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided
that deviations in capacities, dimensions, operation, or other characteristics are minor
and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the
Architect. Burden of proof for equality of water heaters is on the proposer.
G. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” for electrical
components.
1.5 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General: Install water heaters on concrete bases. Set and connect units in accordance
with manufacturers written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level,
firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturers recommended
clearances. Orient so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible.
B. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping; thermometers are specified
in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 15. The
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The
following are specific connection requirements:
3. Install drain as indirect waste to spill into open drain or over floor drain.
a. Install drain valve at low point in water piping, for water heaters not
having tank drain.
B. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division
16. Arrange wiring to allow for unit servicing.
1. Test and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
1. Energize circuits.
2. Adjust operating controls.
3. Adjust hot water outlet temperature setting.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of pumps for permanent installation in plumbing
systems:
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1. ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for piping materials and installation.
2. HI. "Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating
Pumps" for pump design, manufacture, and installation.
3. UL 778 "Standard for Motor Operated Water Pumps" for construction
requirements. Include UL listing and labeling.
4. NEMA MG 1 "Standard for Motors and Generators" for electric motors. Include
NEMA listing and labeling.
5. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical components and installation.
B. Retain shipping flanges, protective covers, and protective coatings during storage.
C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or other foreign matter.
D. Extended Storage Longer Than 5 Days: Dry internal parts with hot air or a
vacuum-producing device. After drying, coat internal parts with light oil, kerosene, or
antifreeze. Dismantle bearings and couplings, dry and coat with an acid-free heavy oil,
and tag and store in a dry location.
A. Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's recommended spare parts for all equipment
provided under this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. In-line recirculating:
A. Plumbing Pumps: Factory assembled and tested, and of construction required for
permanent installation.
B. Motors: NEMA MG 1; Motor shall meet all characteristics indicated on drawings. Include
built-in thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Motors are
non-overloading within full range of pump performance curves.
A. Design:
B. Connections:
1. Mechanical seals:
2. Packing seals:
a. Seal shaft sleeves through stuffing box with teflon-asbestos packing rings,
and locking type throat bushings.
b. Provide lubricant piping connection.
c. Provide galvanized drain pan with NPT connection for drain.
E. Wearing Rings: Bronze, with renewable casing and impeller wearing rings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions with Installer present for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance
of pumps. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations and event of
piping connections prior to pump installation
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install pumps in locations indicated and arrange to provide access for periodic
maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Connect piping to pumps as indicated. Install valves that are same size as
piping connecting to pumps.
B. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, alternating and alarm
operation as required for system application
3.5 COMMISSIONING
B. Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations
and checks before startup:
C. Check that pumps are free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump, if bound or even
drags slightly, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
D. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power:
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valves for proper
flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leakage
through stuffing boxes; then tighten glands.
4. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
Part – 1 GENERAL
B. All fixture and trim shall comply with the International Plumbing Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit plumbing fixture information in an assembled brochure, showing cuts and full
detailed description of each fixture.
A. The manufacturers referenced herein are those in which the specifications and
drawings are based. Equipment by other manufacturers will be considered provided
they are equal in every respect to those listed.
2.2 STOPS
A. Provide lock-shield loose key or screw driver pattern angle stops, straight stops or
stops integral with faucet, with each compression type faucet whether specifically
called for or not, including sinks and lavatories. Locate stops centrally below fixture in
accessible location.
C. Supply from stops not integral with faucet shall be chrome plated copper flexible
tubing or flexible stainless steel with inner core of non-toxic polymer.
D. Supply pipe from wall to valve stop shall be rigid threaded IPS copper alloy pipe, i.e.
red brass pipe nipple.
2.3 ESCUTCHEONS
Heavy type, chrome plated, with set screws. Provide for piping
serving plumbing fixtures and at each wall, ceiling and floor
penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets
and millwork.
2.4 CARRIERS
A. ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, with adjustable gasket faceplate chair carriers for wall hung
closets with auxiliary anchor foot assembly, hanger rod support feet, and rear anchor
tie down.
B. ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, lavatory, chair carrier for thin wall construction steel plate.
All lavatory chair carriers shall be capable of supporting the lavatory with a 250-
pound vertical load applied at the front of the fixture.
C. Where water closets, lavatories or sinks are installed back-to-back and carriers are
specified, provide one carriers to serve both fixtures in lieu of individual carriers. The
drainage fitting of the back to back carrier shall be so constructed that it prevents the
discharge from on fixture from flowing into the opposite fixture.
E. Urinal: UR-1
1. Vitreous China Wall Hung, Wall Hanger, Color Cotton White Outlet
Connection Bolts and Washer. Sloan WES-500 Waterless.
F. Lavatory: L-1
1. Fire Clay Lavatory Undermount, TOTO LT156
2. Faucet Sloan ETF-660
3. Drain: Cast or Wrought Brass with Flat Grid Strainer, Offset Tailpiece, Brass,
Chrome Plated.
4. Stop: Angle Type
5. Trap: Cast copper alloy ( 1-1/2 by 1-1/4) inch P-Trap. Adjustable with
connected elbow and 17 gauge tubing extension to wall. Exposed metal trap
surface and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth
bright finish. Set Trap parallel to the wall.
1. Dayton 23321
2. Faucet Delta 29C2801
N. Shower: Sh-1
1. Bricor B150CH-HH
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 FIXTURES
A. All plumbing fixtures and trim shall be new as manufactured by
firms regularly engaged in the manufactured of plumbing fixtures
and trim of type style and configuration required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use and similar service.
B. Provide protection of all fixtures during construction from damage. Replace all
damaged fixtures as directed by the Architect.
C. Each water supply connection to each fixture and each item of water consuming
equipment shall be equipped with an accessible stop valve.
D. All flush valves shall be quiet diaphragm type with integral screwdriver stops, vacuum
breakers and have non-hold-open water-saving feature.
E. All wall-hung fixtures shall be supported with floor mounted fixture supports designed
and fitted to suit the fixture and building construction.
G. All exposed bolt heads on water closets shall be covered with acorns or covers made
from china, stainless steel, or chrome plated brass.
H. All plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be provided with all necessary stops,
valves, traps, supplies and appurtances required, except where specifically provided
for by another contract.
I. All handicapped fixtures indicated and shown on the plumbing and Architectural
drawings shall comply with ADA.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for portable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and
vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing
fixtures.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be
installed.
3.3 APPLICATION
B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of
type required:
a. Wall-hanging urinals
b. Wall-hanging lavatories and sinks
c. Wall-hanging drinking fountains and electric water coolers
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's
written installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards.
D. Install stop valve in an accessible location on each water supply to each fixture.
E. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap.
F. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished
locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where
required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
G. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
H. Install floor mounted and floor outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
units and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at electric water coolers, and faucets, shower valves, and
flushometers having controls, to provide proper flow and stream.
E. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturer's recommended
cleaning methods and materials.
F. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section
"Project Closeout".
3.6 PROTECTION
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by
the COTR.
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after
units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then
retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.
D. Verify proper operation of condenser fan including obstruction free rotation, cleanliness
and lubrication.
E. Inspect air circulation through condenser coil; remove dirt, lint, and vacuum coil clean.
F. Inspect electrical wiring termination for tightness and/or corrosion including relays, and
aquastats.
G. Adjust factory setting of water adjustment valve to obtain optimum bubbler operation.
4.3 INSPECTIONS
A. Contractor shall coordinate with the Quality Control Engineer before the installation of
plumbing fixtures. The Contractor shall seek the guidance in any installation
procedures he is unfamiliar with.
B. Periodic inspections of the installations of the materials specified in this section shall be
performed and reported in writing to the Contractor, including any deviation from good
installation practice observed.
C. On completion of installation the Quality Control Engineer shall inspect the complete
system and report in writing any installation error, improperly selected devices, or other
fault in the system that could impair the performance of the system.
D. A report shall be submitted by the Contractor to the COTR, including the final report of
the Quality Control Engineer, indicating all materials reported as properly installed or
requiring correction. The Contractor shall also report on steps taken to properly
complete the work.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backflow preventers
2. Water regulators.
3. Balancing valves.
4. Thermostatic water mixing valves.
5. Water tempering valves.
6. Strainers.
7. Outlet boxes.
8. Washer-supply outlets.
9. Hose stations.
10. Key-operated hydrants.
11. Wheel-handle wall hydrants.
12. Trap seal primer valves.
13. Drain valves.
14. Backwater valves.
15. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
16. Sleeve penetration systems.
17. Flashing materials.
18. Clean-outs
19. Floor drains.
20. Roof drains.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, and
pressure gages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights.
Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly
of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:
B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping," for piping
materials and installation.
E. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, “Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for
plastic domestic water piping components. Include marking “NSF-pw" on plastic
potable-water piping and “NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects,
Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
A. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Water Filter Cartridges: Equal to 200 percent of amount installed for each type and
size indicated.
2. Operating Key Handles: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed for each key-
operated hose bibb and hydrant installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or Stainless steel body
with flanged ends.
C. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, with floating disc and
atmospheric vent.
D. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with non-removable and
manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units
attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
1. Pressure Loss: 12-psig (83-kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
G. Double Check Back-flow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test
cocks; and two positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 5-psig (35-kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
1. Pressure Loss: 5-psig (35-kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
1. Pressure Loss: 12-psig (83-kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
K. Hose-Connection Back-flow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least 3-gpm (0.19-
L/s) flow and applications with up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
Include two check valves; intermediate atmospheric vent; and non-removable,
ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet.
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with two readout ports and memory setting
indicator. Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure
meter, and carrying case.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Amtrol, Incorporated
b. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated
c. Armstrong-Yoshitake, Incorporated
d. Flow Design, Incorporated
e. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Division
f. Taco, Incorporated
g. Tour & Andersson, Incorporated
h. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division
2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob,
calibrated nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.
3. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and
threaded ends.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and
flanged or grooved ends.
B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve,
rated for 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with
standard or full-port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, threaded or
solder-joint ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device.
1. Available Manufacturers:
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze
body. Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable
temperature setting, and thermometer.
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Heat-Timer Corporation
2. Holby Valve Company, Incorporated
3. Sparco, Incorporated
4. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division
C. System Water Tempering Valves: Piston or discs controlling both hot- and cold-water
flow, capable of limited anti-scald protection. Include threaded inlets and outlet.
D. Limited-Volume, Water Tempering Valves: Solder-joint inlets and NPS 3/4 (DN 20)
maximum outlet.
2.6 STRAINERS
A. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping.
Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch (1.2-mm) round
perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 1/8- or 3/16-inch- (3.2- or 4.8-mm-) diameter
holes and lift-out handle.
2. Female threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, and flanged ends for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
A. Available Manufacturers:
C. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes: With hot- and cold-water hose connections, drain, and the
following:
A. Available Manufacturers:
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Josam Company
2. Murdock, Incorporated
3. Simmons Manufacturing Company
4. Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company
5. Tyler Pipe; Wade Division
6. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Drainage Products Division
7. Woodford Manufacturing Company
1. Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for
automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed.
2. Box and Cover Finish: Satin chrome plate.
1. Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for
automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed.
2. Box and Cover Finish: Satin chrome plate.
D. Hot and Cold, Non-freeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: With deep flush-mounting
box with cover; hot- and cold-water casings and operating rods to match wall thickness;
concealed outlet; wall clamps; and factory- or field-installed, non-removable and manual
drain-type, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or back-flow
preventer complying with ASSE 1052.
A. Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the
following characteristics:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. E & S Valves
b. Josam Company
c. MIFAB Manufacturing, Incorporated
d. Precision Plumbing Products, Incorporated
e. Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Division
1. Available Manufacturers:
2. Chrome-plated, cast-brass, NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum, lavatory P-trap with
NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap makeup connection.
1. Available Manufacturers:
2. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (DN 20, ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper,
water tubing inlet and manifold with number of NPS 1/2 (DN 15) outlets as
indicated.
3. Cabinet: Steel box with stainless-steel cover.
4. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac
power.
5. Water Hammer Arrester: ASSE 1010.
6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, rated for 400-psig
(2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port,
chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-
covered steel handle.
B. Hose-End Drain Valve: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body, with
NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads
on outlet and cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.
C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig (1380-kPa)
minimum CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with
NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side drain outlet and cap.
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Josam Company
2. Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company
3. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Drainage Products Division
4. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation
B. Horizontal Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, cast-iron body, with removable bronze
swing-check valve and threaded or bolted cover.
C. Drain Outlet Backwater Valves: Cast-iron or bronze body, with removable ball float,
threaded inlet, and threaded or spigot outlet for installation in bottom outlet of floor drain.
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with
pressurized metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or
PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Josam Company
b. Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company
c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Division
d. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Incorporated
B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M
for compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or
solder-joint inlet, of design suitable for pressure of at least 125-psig (860-kPa); integral or
field-installed, non-removable, drain-able hose-connection vacuum breaker; and garden-
hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.
1. Available Manufacturers:
2. Stack Vent Valve: ASSE 1050, designed for installation as terminal on soil, waste,
and vent stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in NPS 2 to NPS 4
(DN 50 to DN 100).
3. Fixture Vent Valve: ASSE 1051, designed for installation on waste piping, instead
of vent connection, for single fixture, in NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50).
D. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m),
0.0938-inch- (2.4-mm-)] thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) from pipe with galvanized steel boot reinforcement, and counter-flashing fitting.
1. Available Manufacturers:
E. Open Drains: Shop or field-fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where
required, increaser fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
F. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected
piping and clean-out trap seal primer valve connection.
G. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and
trap seal primer valve connection.
H. Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semi-open
top with threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot or
threaded outlet larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME A112.1.2 that
will provide fixed air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.
I. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counter-flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extension of vent pipe.
J. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
L. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve,
packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.
M. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron casting, with NPS 4 (DN 100)
outlet; shop-applied bituminous coating; and inlet size to match downspout.
N. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe.
O. Conductor Nozzles: Bronze body with threaded inlet for connected conductor size, and
bronze wall flange with mounting holes.
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron, hub-less pattern, wye-branch
stack fitting with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release
harness in branch. Include PVC protective cap for plug.
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum
weight and thickness, unless otherwise indicated:
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152 (ASTM B 152M), of the following minimum weights and
thickness, unless otherwise indicated:
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and
0.04-inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275)
hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-
mm) minimum thickness.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
2.16 CLEANOUTS
1. Cast iron with straight body for spigot connection or inside caulk with bronze plug.
2. Use No-hub cap for clean-out on No-hub piping.
F. Stack clean-outs: Clean-out tee with cast bronze countersunk threaded plug.
G. Wall clean-outs:
A. Floor Drains, Comply with ASME A112.21.1M, ASME A112.21.1M with ASME A112.14.1,
backwater valve, or ASME A112.3.1 as applicable..
B. FD-1: Cast iron floor drain, two piece body with double drainage flange, invertible non-
puncturing flashing collar, weep holes, bottom outlet and adjustable round extended rim
strainer. Similar to Josam 3000-E1.
C. FD-2: Similar to FD-1 without extended rim strainer with EJ tractor strainer.
A. Roof Drain type designations and sizes indicated on Drawings (RD-1 through RD-36)
A. Circulation pump shall be of the electric motor driven “in-line” type, having a capacity of
not less than indicated on the drawings.
B. Pump shall be of the centrifugal type and shall be designed in accordance with the
standards of the Hydraulic Institute, including latest modifications. Pump shall operate at
a speed not in excess of 1750 rpm and shall be designed for quiet operation. Pump shall
be designed to permit complete servicing without breaking the piping connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install back-flow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems
and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination.
Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid
valve.
E. Install draining-type ground and ground post hydrants with 1 cu. yd. (0.75 cu. m) of
crushed gravel around drain hole.
F. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap with a
minimum slope of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust
valve for proper flow.
G. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide clean-
out deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate
size to remove valve cover for servicing.
I. Install clean-outs in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for
larger drainage piping unless larger clean-out is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and
smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
J. Install clean-out deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor clean-outs for
piping below floors.
K. Install clean-out wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with
finished wall, for clean-outs located in concealed piping.
L. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and clean-out passing through
floors with waterproof membrane.
M. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
N. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-
mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
O. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor
drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area
radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1-percent slope, but not
less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1-percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1-percent slope, but
not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
P. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
T. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball,
gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible
locations. Refer to Division 15 Section “Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check,
gate, and globe valves.
U. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet [and drain
piping from outlet to floor drain].
V. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless
trap is indicated.
W. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations
and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
D. Ground equipment.
F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16
Sections.
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes
are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-
mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m),
0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in
floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches
(250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches (200 mm) around specialty.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter-flashing or commercially
made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure
flashing into cast-iron sleeve having caulking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace
with new units, and retest.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping systems, including
drains and drainage specialties.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 2
2. Division 7
3. Division 9
4. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification."
5. Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
6. Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for plumbing piping products including piping specialties and drains.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit information for all products in accordance with the
requirements of Specification Section 01730.
C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured-in-place concrete slabs, to include proper drain
elevations, installation of flashing, and slope of slab to drains.
D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary and storm sewer systems as necessary to interface
building drains with drainage piping systems.
A. Comply with the provisions of ASME B 31.9 “Building Services Piping" for materials, products
and installation.
1.7 TRAINING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, drains, trap
primers, and vent caps:
a. Josam Company
b. Smith (Jay R) Manufacturing Company
c. Tyler Pipe; Subsidiary of Tyler Corporation
d. Zurn Industries Incorporated; Hydromechanics Division
e. MIFAB Incorporated
A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings.
B. Hub-less Cast Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and
fittings, with neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310. Stainless steel worm-drive
clamps.
A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Heavy weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings. Pipe and
fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside
surfaces.
B. Force-Main Pipe: Ductile iron AWWA C 151, class 50 with mechanical joint.
1. Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends conforming to
AWWA C 110 or AWWA C 153.
2. Encase in polyethylene film.
A. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast-iron, with bolted cover.
Flapper shall provide a maximum 1/4-inch clearance between flapper and seat for air
circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping material.
B. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2-inch connections
matching piping system. Complying with ASSE 1018.
C. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nuts.
D. Clean-out Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk
head.
E. Floor Clean-outs: Cast-iron body and frame, with clean-out plug and adjustable round top as
follows:
1. Nickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns:
a. Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8-inch thick resilient floor finish.
b. Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1-inch thick terrazzo floor finish.
c. Exposed finish type, standard mill finish.
d. Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish.
2. Cast iron Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns:
F. Wall Clean-outs: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass clean-out plug;
stainless steel cover including screws.
G. Flashing Flanges: Cast iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring.
Provide under-deck clamp and sleeve length as required.
H. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron caulking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron
threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks.
1. Cast iron, two-piece body, double drainage flange-flashing collar, weep holes, bottom
outlet, with the following features:
1. Cast-iron, double drainage flange, weep holes, bottom outlet, with the following
features:
1. Cast-iron body, large polypropylene locking dome, clamp ring, with integral gravel
stop, with the following features:
a. Support ring.
b. Adjustable top with wide roof flange.
c. Large sump with anchor flange and bottom outlet
d. Deck clamp assembly.
1. Coated cast iron, sill drain, secured low bronze dome, bronze clamp ring shallow sump
with flashing flange and side outlet threaded connection.
D. Vertical Expansion Joint: Coated cast iron body, packing gland and silicone bronze sleeve
with preformed neoprene packing gasket. Zurn Z-190.
2.8 VALVES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to
installations.
B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain
connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and
specialties are to be installed.
A. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock,
throughout the length of the pipe.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be
laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90-degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference.
Fill unevenness with tampered sand backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the
bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the
foundation.
A. Install hub and spigot, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe with compression gasket joints for
larger than 3-inch drainage and vent pipe.
B. Install hub-less, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for larger than 3 inch drainage
and vent pipe.
A. Install hub-and-spigot, extra heavy weight, cast-iron, soil pipe and fittings with gasket joints
for 15 inches and smaller drainage pipe.
A. Install 4-inch diameter schedule 40, PVC perforated drainage pipe placed within the granular
sub-base.
3.6 INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and
arrangement of the piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted.
D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper
insulation applications.
E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of
the building. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel
removal.
G. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch
and larger shall be sheet metal.
H. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings and
floors, maintain the fire rated integrity.
I. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes,
half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short
quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction
of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn tees where two fixtures are installed
back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on
vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where
different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard
increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is
prohibited.
J. Install underground building drains to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance
with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fitting Handbook. Lay underground building drains
beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
K. Install drains pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 3 inch
smaller, and 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 3 inch to 6 inch.
1. Where noted or required, install at 1/16 inch per foot for piping 8 inch or larger.
L. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Sewer piping is specified in a separate section.
M. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal through foundation wall for watertight installation.
A. Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section “Hangers and
Supports"
A. Contractor shall provide roof drains, floor drains and all specialties as specified or shown,
with all required accessories for a complete installation.
B. Install expansion joints on vertical risers as required by the plumbing code. Special attention
shall be required for roof drains and rain leaders draining the high dome / skylight roof areas.
C. Above Ground Clean-outs: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as
indicated and as required by plumbing code.
D. Clean-outs Covers: Install floor and wall clean-out covers for concealed piping, types as
specified.
E. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and clean-out
passing through waterproof membranes.
F. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks through roof, secure over stack flashing in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of
drains flush with finished floor.
C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper
slope to drain.
D. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer, drain traps shall be deep seal type except as
noted.
E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
A. Install trap primers with piping towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent).
Adjust trap primer for proper flow.
A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof manufacturer's
installation instructions.
B. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
C. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
A. Piping Run-outs to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping run-outs to plumbing fixtures
and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated.
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris,
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
A. For piping located at or above ceiling of electrical rooms, telephone equipment rooms or
rooms with electronic equipment, such as Tracon areas, install pipes inside PVC plastic pipe
sleeve.
B. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item located to drain
equipment for service and repair.
A. Inspections
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it
has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Owner, at least 24 hours prior to the
time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of
the COTR or his representative.
3. Re-inspection: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make
the required corrections, and arrange for re-inspected by the Owner.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Contractor.
B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures
indicated by the Authority, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems. If testing is
performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test segment, complete with
a diagram of the portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all drainage and vent piping until it has been tested
and approved. Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open
jointed drain tile, test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon
completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping
4.3 INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall coordinate with the Quality Control Engineer before the installation of the
drainage and vent systems. The contractor shall seek the guidance in any installation
procedures he is unfamiliar with.
B. Periodic inspections of the installations of the materials specified in this section shall be
performed and reported in writing to the contractor, including any deviation from good
installation practice observed.
C. On completion of installation the Quality Control Engineer shall inspect the complete system
and report in writing any installation error, improperly selected devices, or other fault in the
system that could impair the performance of the system.
D. A report shall be submitted by the Owner, including the final report of the Quality Control
Engineer, indicating all materials reported as properly installed or requiring correction. The
contractor shall also report on steps taken to properly complete the Work.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes potable cold-water, hot water, and circulation hot water piping,
pipefittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 2
2. Division 9
3. Division 15 Section “Valves"
4. Division 15 Section “Meters and Gauges"
5. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification"
6. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Pumps"
7. Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
8. Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports”
9. Division 15 “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for each piping plumbing piping products including specialty and valve
specified.
2. Welder Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with
requirements specified in “Quality Assurance" Article.
3. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements specified
below.
4. Laboratory analysis of water samples taken after disinfecting and flushing the piping
system. Laboratory shall be certified and licensed by the state of Maryland.
5. Test reports specified in Part 4 of this Section.
6. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit information for all products in accordance
with the requirements of specification.
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
A. Contractor shall furnish spare parts for all manufactured equipment or devices.
1.8 TRAINING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Strainers:
a. Josam Company
b. Metraflex Company
c. Smith (Jay R.) Manufacturing Company
3. Hose Bibbs:
a. Nibco, Incorporated
b. Watts Regulator Company
c. Woodford Manufacturing Company
4. Backflow Preventers:
5. Relief Valves:
a. Josam Company
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Incorporated
c. Smith (Jay R.) Manufacturing Company
d. Wade Division, Tyler Pipe
e. Watts Regulator Company
f. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Hydromechanics Division
8. Flexible Connectors
a. Metra-Flex
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C 151 class (52), mechanical joint, with cement mortar lining per
AWWA C 104.
2.3 FITTINGS
B. Galvanized Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125 standard pattern, for
threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.
C. Ductile-Iron Gasketed Fittings: AWWA C110 or AWWA C153, 150-psi rating, with cement
mortar lining and AWWA C111 rubber gaskets.
D. Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B161.1, Class 125, raised ground face, bolt holes spot
faced.
E. Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket
joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, female threaded ends. Threads shall conform
to ASME B1.20.1.
G. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze wire reinforced
protective jacket; minimum 150-psig working pressure, maximum 250 degrees F operating
temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end connections to match
equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
A. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B-32, Lead Free Solder and Anticorrosive Flux.
C. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and design
temperatures and pressures.
A. General-duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in
Division 15 Section “Valves." Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name;
refer to Part 3 Article “Valve Application" for specific uses and applications for each valve
specified.
A. Circuit Setter: Calibrated balance valve, bronze body, brass ball construction with glass and
carbon filled TFE seat rings. Differential read-out ports across valve seat area. EPT inserts
and check valve. 1/4 NPT tapped drain port. Memory stop. Designed for positive shut-off.
C. Manufacturer: ITT Bell & Gossett Model CB, or as acceptable to the Authority.
A. Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure
rated for 250-psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201.
B. Hose Bibbs: Hexagonal shoulder with tee handle, 3/4" I.P. inlet, hose end.
C. Strainers:
1. 3" and larger, cast-iron body, 125-psi flanges, bolted-type with removable non-
corrosive perforated strainer having 1/8-inch perforations.
2. 2-1/2" and smaller, 250-lb iron body, furnished with 20-mesh stainless steel screen,
threaded ends.
D. Hose Connections: Hose connections shall have garden hose thread outlets conforming to
ASME B1.20.7.
E. Vacuum Breakers: Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1011,
with finish to match hose connection.
F. Back-flow Preventers: Standard reduced pressure zone, consisting of two in-line independent
check valves with an intermediate relief valve. Furnished with ball type test cocks and quarter
turn, full port resilient seated bronze ball valve shutoffs:
1. Tested and certified under ASSE Standard No. 1013, AWWA Standard No. C511 and
FCCCHR of USC manual, Section 10.
2. Watts 909 type RPZ
G. Relief Valves: Sizes for relief valves shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Codes for indicated capacity of the appliance for which is installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment with water
connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
A. Install Type L, drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for pipe sizes
4 inches and smaller, above ground, within building
B. Install galvanized steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 5 inches and larger, above
ground, within building.
C. Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with grooved ends or flanged ends within the building.
D. Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with mechanical joints below ground, inside and outside
building.
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and
arrangement of the piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted.
D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper
insulation applications.
E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of
the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance outside
the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel
removal.
G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and
servicing of valves.
H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-
inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple, cap, and chain.
I. Install vents at high points in risers and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting 3/4" ball valve
and short 3/4" threaded nipple and pipe cap and chain.
J. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior wall with sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inches shall be galvanized steel pipe;
pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger shall be galvanized steel sheet metal.
K. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes though fire-rated wall, partitions, ceilings, and floors,
maintain the fire-rated integrity.
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hanger and
Supports."
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual horizontal runs less than
20 feet in length.
2. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
D. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor, where applicable.
A. Solder Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS “Soldering Manual."
B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS “Brazing Manual."
1. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts of piping
specialties before soldering and brazing.
2. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or
C. Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal
seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
2. Align threads at point of assembly.
3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where
dry seal threading is specified).
4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the
pipe is being threaded.
D. Flanged Joints: Align Flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening
to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
A. Extend water distribution piping to connect to water service piping, of size and in location
indicated for service entrance to building. Water service piping is specified in a separate
section of Division 2.
B. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for
watertight installation.
C. Install shutoff valve at service entrance inside building complete with strainer and pressure
gage.
D. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C-600. Pipe below ground inside building
and to a point 5 feet outside of building shall have restrained joints.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where
specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where
branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere
as indicated. For sectional valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves. For sectional
valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on each
supply to each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches and
smaller, use gate or ball valves. For shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or
butterfly valves.
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to drain
equipment completely for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at
low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to drain distribution-piping system
completely. For drain valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves. For drain valves
2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
D. Check Valves: Install check valves on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as
indicated.
E. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot water re-circulating loop, discharge side of each pump,
and elsewhere as indicated.
A. Back-flow Preventers: All water supply lines shall be designed and equipped with back-flow
preventers as mandated by the Rules and Regulations of the Board of Health of Maryland.
A. Piping Run-outs to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping run-outs to fixtures of sizes
indicated, but in no case smaller than required by plumbing code.
B. Plumbing Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical
equipment and fixtures as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.
Provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2-1/2 inches and larger, use
flanges instead of unions.
1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have
been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.
2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure proscribed by the Authority. If a method is
not prescribed by the Authority follow the procedure described below:
a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at the points of outlet.
b. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least
50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof
B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities and submit to the Owner for
approval.
3.13 COORDINATION
A. For balancing the Hot Water Circulating System refer to Division 15 “Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing".
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has
been inspected and approved by the Owner.
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Owner at least 24 hours prior to the
time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of
the Owner.
a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before being
concealed or closed in after system before concealed or closed in after system
is roughed in and prior to setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to
observe the tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the
requirements of the plumbing code.
3. Re-inspection: Whenever the Owner finds that the piping system will not pass the test
or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports for the Owner review and approval.
1. Test all water distribution piping systems for leaks and defects. If testing is performed
in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the
portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, water distribution piping until it has been
tested and approved. (Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved).
3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50-psig above the
operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system
materials. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in
test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
4. Repair all leaks and defects with new materials and required corrective action.
5. Prepare reports for all required tests, including corrective actions and submit to Owner.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies standpipe and sprinkler systems for buildings and structures.
B. Products specified in this Section with installation include sprinkler cabinets with spare sprinklers
and sprinkler wrenches. Deliver to the Owner's maintenance personnel.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Section are nominal pipe size (NPS) specified in inches. Tube sizes are
standard tube size specified in inches.
B. Working plans as used in this Section refer to documents prepared pursuant to requirements in
NFPA 13 and 14 for obtaining preliminary approval of authority having jurisdiction, Contractor
shall be responsible for developing installation plans and calculation for approval of the Fire
Marshall.
C. Other definitions for fire protection systems are included in referenced NFPA standards.
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: System with automatic sprinklers attached to piping system
containing water and connected to water supply so that water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened by fire.
B. Sprinkler System Protection Limits: All spaces. Include closets, toilet and locker room areas,
each landing of each stair, and special applications areas.
C. Standpipe Systems: Systems that are wet type have water supply valve open and pressure
maintained at all times and include branches extending from standpipes to sprinkler zone valves.
Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler 15326 - 1/19
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL
CONSTRUCTION
D. Class I, Standpipe and Sprinkler System: Arrangement of piping, valves, hose connections, and
accessories for use by persons trained in use of heavy fire streams. Hose valves are 2-1/2-inch
size.
A. Contractor shall design and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction for a complete fire
protection system specified.
B. Minimum Pipe Sizes: Not smaller than sizes indicated for connection to water supply piping and
standpipes.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for conducting fire hydrant flow tests as required to obtain
hydraulic data needed to prepare design for hydraulically calculated systems.
a. Light Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. area.
b. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. area.
c. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authority having jurisdiction.
E. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum
working pressure ratings except where indicated otherwise.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Product data for fire protection system components. Include the following:
1. Back-flow preventers
2. Valves
3. Specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
4. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
5. Fire department connections. Include type of fire department connection; number, size, type,
and arrangement of inlets; size and direction of outlet; and finish.
6. Hose valves. Include size, type, and finish.
7. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,
finish, and other data.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings showing layouts of systems shall contain sufficient plans, elevations,
sections, details, and schematics to describe work clearly. They shall be minimum scale of
1/4" = 1'-0". Provide larger scale details as necessary. Show elements of reflected ceiling
plans, exposed ductwork, walls, partitions, diffusers, registers, grilles, fire dampers, sleeves
and other aspects of construction as necessary for coordination.
2. Highlight all firewalls and smoke partitions for appropriate coordination.
3. Shop drawings showing manufacturer's engineering and product data shall contain detailed
dimensional drawings, accurate and complete description of materials and construction,
manufacturer's published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance
data, alone, is not acceptable), electrical requirements, and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall
clearly indicate location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field
terminations, and other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. Sprinkler work layout, including sprinkler head type, dimensioned location and sizes of
piping, heads, guards, flushing connections, drains, test stations, alarm valves, and all
other accessories as required by NFPA #13 Chapter 6.
b. Hydraulic calculations, including piping data and municipal flow test results shall be
per applicable NFPA Standards and Owner's Insurer. Chapter 6 of NFPA #13 shall be
the minimum requirement.
c. Equipment Cuts for:
D. Coordination Drawings:
E. Working Plans:
1. Contractor shall be responsible for determining exact number of sprinkler heads, and type as
well as other required components including wiring but not limited to electrical services.
Submit required number of sets to authority having jurisdiction for review, comment, and
approval. Include system hydraulic calculations where applicable. Working drawings shall be
signed and sealed by registered engineer licensed in the District of Columbia.
2. Licensed engineer's sprinkler system drawings specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to
authority having jurisdiction. Include system hydraulic calculations.
3. Licensed engineer's installation report specified in “Field Quality Control” Article.
4. Test reports and certificates as described in NFPA 13. Include “Contractor's Material &
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping” and “Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for
Underground Piping.”
F. Maintenance data for each type of fire protection specialty specified, for inclusion in “Operating
and Maintenance Manual” specified in Division 1 Section “Project Closeout.”
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory and FM Approval Guide
and that conform to other requirements indicated.
C. Listing and Labeling: Equipment, specialties, and accessories that are listed and labeled.
D. Comply with requirements of authority having jurisdiction for submittals, approvals, materials,
hose threads, installation, inspections, and testing.
E. Comply with requirements of Owner's insurance underwriter for submittals, approvals, materials,
installation, inspections, and testing.
F. Sprinkler Contractor's Licensed Engineer: Submit design drawings, design calculations, and
installation inspection reports. Include seal and signature of registered engineer licensed in
jurisdiction where Project is located, certifying compliance with specifications.
G. Installer's Qualifications: Firms qualified to install and alter fire protection piping, equipment,
specialties, and accessories, and repair and service equipment. A qualified firm is one that is
experienced (minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project) in such work,
familiar with precautions required, and in compliance with the requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction. Submit evidence of qualifications to the Architect upon request. Refer to Division 1
Section “Reference Standards and Definitions” for definition of “Installer.”
H. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with
the following:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
3. Back-flow Preventers:
6. Sprinklers:
7. Hose Valves:
A. Refer to “Sprinkler System Piping Applications” and “Standpipe System Piping Applications” for
identification of systems where pipe and fitting materials specified below are used.
B. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C115, ductile-iron barrel with iron-alloy threaded flanges, 250-psig
(1725-kPa) minimum working pressure rating, and AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 in sizes 6- inches and smaller and Schedule 30 in sizes 8-
inches and larger, black and galvanized, plain and threaded ends, for welded, threaded, cut-groove,
and rolled-groove joints.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, Schedule 10 through 5-inch sizes and NFPA 13 specified wall thickness
for 6-inch through 10-inch sizes, with plain ends, black and galvanized, for rolled-groove and welded
joints.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, thread-able light wall, black and galvanized, for threaded joints.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795, black and galvanized, for joints listed and for use with fittings for
plain-end steel pipe.
A. Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 250, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
C. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 250 standard pattern with threads
conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
D. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300 standard pattern with threads
according to ASME B1.20.1.
F. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, seamless or welded; ASME B16.9, butt-welding type; or
ASME B16.11, socket-welding type for welded joints.
H. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Pipe: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12
ductile iron or ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable iron, with grooves or shoulders designed to
accept grooved couplings.
J. Cast-Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24 Class 300 raised ground face with bolt holes spot
faced.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for joining materials
not included in this Section.
B. Flanged Joints for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Ductile-Iron or Cast Iron Fittings: AWWA C115
ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts.
D. Couplings for Grooved-End Steel Pipe and Grooved-End Ferrous Fittings: UL 213, AWWA C606,
ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron housing, with enamel finish. Include
synthetic-rubber gasket with central-cavity, pressure-responsive design; ASTM A 183
carbon-steel bolts and nuts; and locking pin, toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check
valves.
1. Option: Valves for use with grooved piping may be grooved type.
B. Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: UL 262, cast-bronze, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside
screw and yoke, rising stem.
C. Indicating Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Butterfly or ball type, bronze body with threaded
ends, and integral indicating device.
1. Indicator: Visual.
2. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts AC, pre-wired, single-circuit, and supervisory switch.
3. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts AC, pre-wired, 2-circuit, and supervisory switch.
D. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge, outside
screw and yoke, rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends.
E. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger for Use with Indicator Posts: UL 262, iron body, bronze
mounted, solid wedge disc, non-rising stem with operating nut and flanged ends.
F. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with
bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring and flanged ends.
G. Butterfly Check Valves, 4 Inches and Larger: UL 213, split-clapper style, cast-iron body with
rubber seal, bronze alloy discs, stainless steel spring and hinge pin.
A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 175-psig working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical
installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and
single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm
switch, pressure gages, precision retarding chamber, and fill line attachment with strainer.
1. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves, separate from main drain piping.
C. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, 3/4-inch size, spring-loaded, ball check
device with threaded ends.
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with electrical contractor for all electrical
wiring to fire alarm control.
A. General: ASSE standard back-flow preventers of size indicated for maximum flow rate
indicated and maximum pressure loss indicated.
B. Double Check Valve Back-flow Preventer: ASSE 1048 consisting of OS&Y gate valves on inlet
and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve with
ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous
pressure application.
2.10 SPRINKLERS
a. Use 212 degrees F rating for sprinkler heads in mechanical equipment rooms.
b. Use 212 degrees F rating for sprinkler heads in elevator machine rooms.
3. In no case use heads rated less than 50 degrees F higher than anticipated ambient
temperature.
4. Sprinklers UL listed.
5. Metallic fusible link type.
6. Quick response type.
7. Head application:
1. Pendant design.
2. Satin chrome finish with escutcheon plate.
3. Provide extended escutcheon where necessary due to surface mounted light fixtures.
K. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for following sprinkler mounting
applications: Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
L. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
M. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space for minimum of 6 spare
sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench, suitable for wall mounting. Include number of sprinklers
required by NFPA 13 and 1 wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and
wrench for each style sprinkler on Project.
A. Sprinkler Alarm Test Fittings: Ductile-iron housing with 1-1/2-inch (40 mm) inlet and outlet,
integral test valves, combination orifice and sight glass, and threaded or locking-lug ends.
A. General: UL 668, 300-psig minimum rating, brass, nonadjustable type, hose valve for connection
of fire hose. Include 90-degree angle pattern design, female NPS inlet and male hose outlet,
and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Size or 2-1/2 inches as indicated. Hose valve threads are
according to NFPA 1963 and match local fire department threads.
A. Flush, Wall-Type Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body; NH-standard thread
inlets according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads; and threaded NPS
outlet. Include lugged cap, gasket, and chain; lugged swivel connection, extension pipe nipples,
and clappers for each hose connection inlet; and wall escutcheon plate with marking “AUTO
SPKR & STANDPIPE."
A. Alarm Devices: Types and sizes that will match piping and equipment connections.
C. Water flow Indicators: UL 346, electrical-supervision type, vane-type water flow detector, rated to
250-psig, and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include 2 SPDT (single-pole,
double-throw) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere, 125
volts AC. (7 A, 125 V AC) and 0.25 ampere, 24 volts DC.; complete with factory-set,
D. Pressure Switches: UL 753, water flow switch with retard, electrical-supervision type, SPDT
(single-pole, double-throw), normally closed contacts, designed to operate on rising pressure and
signal water flow.
G. Alarm Bell:
1. 175-psi iron body mechanical alarm device with 8 inch diameter gong, 5 inch water
motor.
2. Drive shaft length compatible with wall thickness encountered.
3. Red hood finish with nameplate.
A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inch diameter dial with dial range of 0-250-psig.
C. Inspector's Tests: Inspectors alarm tests module style 718 or 719 test master by Victaulic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction,
framing for cabinets, and other conditions where cabinets are to be installed.
A. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications on pipe and fittings products.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved-End Pipe and Grooved-End Fitting Joints: Use grooved-end fittings and grooved
couplings that are made by the same manufacturer and that are listed for use together. Groove
pipe and assemble joints with grooved coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both piping
materials.
A. Connect fire protection piping to water supply piping of size and in location indicated on
contract drawings.
B. Install shutoff valve, back-flow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories
indicated at connection to water supply piping.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved “working plans" for sprinkler piping require written approval
from authority with jurisdiction. File written approval with the Architect prior to deviating
from approved “working plans."
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipe 2 inches and smaller. Unions are not required
on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved couplings.
E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch and
larger connections.
F. Install “Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized
and located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain headers adjacent to standpipes
when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipe.
J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves,
and where indicated. Drain to or outside building.
L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13. Install according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
1. Install hanger at support spacings and locations for steel piping joined with grooved
mechanical couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for rigid
systems.
2. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than 1/4 inch and with soft metal-
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit
removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Valves" for installation of general-duty valves. Install fire-protection
specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14,
manufacturer's written instructions, and the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install fire-protection service valves supervised-open, located to control sources of
water supply except from fire department connections. Where there is more than 1 control valve,
provide permanently marked identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
C. Install check valve in each water supply connection. Install back-flow preventers instead of check
valves in potable water supply sources.
D. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including
bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection.
A. Install back-flow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Comply with plumbing code
and authority with jurisdiction. Install air-gap fitting on units with atmospheric vent connection
and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install bypass around back-flow
preventer.
D. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent dry-type, and sidewall dry-type sprinklers.
B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of 2' x 2' acoustical panels and tiles. Install
sprinkler a minimum of 1'-0" from edge of 2' x 4' acoustical panels and tiles.
C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use
dry-type sprinklers heads, water supplied from heated space.
A. Hose Outlet Valves: Install 2-1/2 inch hose outlet valves at each standpipe outlet for hose
connections for use by fire department.
B. Install hose valves in cabinets at angle required for connection of fire hose.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains and where
indicated. Drain outside building.
3.12 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
B. Connect water supplies to standpipe and sprinkler systems. Include back-flow preventers.
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures specified. Then retest
to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory
finish with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited.
3.15 COMMISSIONING
1. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories have been installed
correctly and operate correctly.
2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
3. Check that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified have
been replaced with new, correct type of sprinklers.
4. Check that sprinklers are correct type, have correct finish and temperature ratings, and
have guards where required for applications.
5. Check that potable water supplies have correct type of back-flow preventer.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semi-rigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation;
insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing
compounds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch- (300-mm-) square sections of
each sample material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type
of field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
1.5 COORDINATION
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may
begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation
d. Schuller International, Incorporated
e. Rubatex Corporation
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket
manufactured from Kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o/c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm): Space 16
inches (400 mm) o/c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly
against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular
ducts and plenums.
d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13 mm) staples, 1-inch
(25 mm) o/c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
7. Overlap un-faced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams
and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18
inches (450 mm) o/c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 6-inch- (150-mm) wide strips of the same material used to insulate the
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o/c.
10. Apply vapor retardant mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation end joints and 16 inches (400-mm) o/c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space 116
inches (400 mm) o/c each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly
against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular
ducts and plenums.
d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13 mm) staples, 1-inch
(25 mm) o/c, and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible
to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct
elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 6-inch (150-mm) wide strips of the same material used to insulate the
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o/c.
8. Apply vapor-retardant mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
A. Insulation material and thickness is specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thickness for systems listed below are specified at the end of this Section.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment
3.4 FINISHES
A. Glass- Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified
in Division 9 Section “Painting.”
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer’s recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow for visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.5 SCHEDULES
Insulation
Thickness (Inches)
Duct Type Insulation Type Notes
Insulation Insulation
Piping and Thickness and And Jacket*
Equipment Pipe Size - Inches Inches Type
* Letter designation references field applied jackets only. See paragraph 2.2 Materials
for Factory Jackets.
1 Rigid Fiberglass
2 Blanket Fiberglass
3 Calcium Silicate
4 Foamed Plastic
5 Flexible Elastomeric
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements;
field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type
of insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field-applied jackets.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports.”
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of
piping that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corporation
4. Polyolefin Insulation:
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with
the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied,
all-purpose, vapor-retardant jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to un-faced glass-fiber
insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding
lagging cloth to un-faced glass-fiber insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 1.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retardant mastic
where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming
insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retardant mastic.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched
staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o/c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retardant mastic.
A. Insulation materials and thickness are specified in schedules at the end of the Section
15081.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
A. Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified inspection agency to perform field quality-
control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine
compliance with requirements.
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Provisions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Vibration Isolators
2. Isolation Bases
3. Equipment Connectors
A. The materials and systems specified in this section shall all be purchased by the Mechanical
Contractor, from a single vibration isolation materials manufacturer, to assure single responsibility
for the performance of all isolation materials used.
B. The vibration isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection of spring
rates to accomplish the specified minimum static deflections for all spring and pad type isolators
based on the weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.
C. The vibration isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the structural steel beam
bases and concrete inertia bases to support mechanical equipment scheduled to receive a
supplementary base.
1.4 APPLICATION
A. This work in general includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means
of noise and vibration isolators.
2. All piping over 1 inch outside diameter located in mechanical equipment rooms, and for a
minimum of fifty (50) feet or 100 pipe diameters, whichever is greater, from connection to
vibration isolated mechanical or electrical equipment shall be isolated from the building
structure by means of noise and vibration isolation hangers. All piping in the building that is
connected to vibration isolated equipment shall be noise isolated at connections to the
building structure.
3. All piping vertical risers shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and
vibration isolation guides and supports.
4. All piping and ductwork shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid connections.
Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of piping or
ductwork and maintain a minimum of 3/4 inch and maximum of 1-1/4 inch clearance around
the outside surfaces. This clearance space shall be tightly packed with 1.58 P.C.F. fiberglass,
and caulked airtight, after installation of piping and ductwork.
A. The isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection of spring rates to
accomplish the specified minimum static deflections, for all spring and pad type isolators, based on
the weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.
B. The isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the structural design of steel beam
bases, and concrete inertia bases, to support mechanical equipment scheduled to receive a
supplementary base.
C. The Contractor shall furnish a complete set of approved shop drawings, of all mechanical and
electrical equipment to receive vibration isolation devices, to the vibration isolation materials
manufacturer based upon which the selection of vibration isolators and design of supplementary
bases will be completed. The shop drawings to be furnished shall include operating weight of the
equipment to be isolated and the distribution of weight to support points.
D. The Contractor shall furnish a complete layout of piping and ductwork to be isolated, including
vertical risers, showing size or weight and support points of the piping and ductwork system, to the
vibration isolation materials manufacturer, for selection and layout of isolation hangers.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are required and shall include product data noting calculations, materials, sizes,
dimensions, and load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.
B. Vibration isolation shop drawings shall show isolator locations, and load on each isolator, deletion,
compressed spring height, solid spring height, spring diameters and color-coding.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 7 Section “Roof Accessories.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Vibration Isolators:
B. Vibration Bases:
1. Metraflex Company
2. Mercer Rubber Company
3. Flex-Hose Company, Incorporated
4. Flex-weld, Incorporated (Keflex)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Vibration Isolators:
a. Spring type isolators shall be laterally stable with housing and complete with 1/4"
neoprene acoustical friction pads between the base-plate and the support. All mountings
shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters
shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs
shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. A
housing shall be used that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when
height is removed. The installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum
clearance of 1/2" shall be maintained around retraining bolts and between the housing
and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of
contact during normal operations. Mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped
galvanized.
a. Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in
series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes
through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be
large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing thru a 30-degree arc before contacting
the hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to
solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
B. Isolation Bases:
a. All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10th of the
longest dimensions of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14" provided that the
deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the
manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to
provide a base clearance of one inch.
a. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit
over the curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded aluminum top member
shall overlap the bottom member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The
aluminum members shall house cadmium plated springs having a 1" minimum deflection
with 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the
spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient
snubbers in the corners with a minimum clearance of 1/4" so as not to interfere with the
spring action except in high winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed
cell sponge materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible duct-like
EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum members. Foam or
other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept
to a minimum. Submittals shall include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed
spring height and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details.
1. Pipe connectors shall be constructed of type 321 stainless steel corrugated hose and type 304
stainless steel-braid with steel flanges. Pipe connectors shall be rated for a working pressure
of 150-psi at 70 degrees F, and maximum operating temperature of 850 degrees F.
2. Connectors 1/2 inch I.D. through 2 inches I.D. shall be provided with N.P.T. nipples with
malleable iron ferrules with wrench flats.
3. Connectors 2-1/2 inch I.D. and larger shall be provided with 150 pound welded forged steel
fixed flanges.
4. Overall length and face to face dimensions shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
standards and recommendations, but no shorter than 18". Installation shall comply with the
manufacturer's instructions, including all required anchors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of vibration isolation, piping connections, and inertia bases shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendation.
B. Rigid connections between vibrating equipment and the building shall not be permitted.
3.3 INSPECTION
A. The local representative of the vibration isolation equipment manufacturer shall conduct periodic
inspections of the installation of equipment herein specified, and shall report in writing to the
Contractor any deviations from good installation practice observed.
B. The contractor shall submit a report to the Contracting Officer including the manufacturer's
representatives’ final report indicating all isolation reported as properly installed or requiring
correction, and include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly complete the isolation
work.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal
operation.
D. Air Compressor:
E. Terminal Boxes:
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping systems for hot water heating, makeup water, blow-down drain
lines, and condensate drain piping. Piping materials and equipment specified in this
Section include the following:
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping” for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
3. Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for general piping
materials and installation methods.
4. Division 15 Section “Valves” for gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves.
5. Division 15 Section “Meters and Gages” for thermometers, flow meters, and
pressure gages.
6. Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports” for pipe supports.
7. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification” for labeling and identifying hydronic
systems
8. Division 15 Section “HVAC Pumps” for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
systems.
9. Division 15 Section “Control Systems Equipment” for temperature-control valves and
sensors
10. Division 15 Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for hydronic system adjusting
and balancing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed,
and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation instructions for each
hydronic specialty and special-duty valve specified
1. Submit flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves,
based on manufacturer's testing.
C. Shop Drawings detailing pipe anchors, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides,
and expansion joints and loops.
D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with performance
requirements specified in Part 3 of this Section.
E. Maintenance data for hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in the
operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
1. ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” for materials, products, and installation.
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
2. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
3. Welding Standards: Qualify welding processes and operators according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of piping with equipment and with other installations
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and form-work requirements are specified in Division 3
Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations in exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for fire-stopping specified in Division 7 Section
“Fire-stopping” for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish a sufficient quantity of chemicals for initial system startup and
for preventive maintenance for one year from Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Amtrol, Incorporated
b. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated
c. Flow Design, Incorporated
d. Gerand Engineering Company
e. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Bell & Gossett
f. Taco, Incorporated
3. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
a. Amtrol, Incorporated
b. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated
c. Grinnell Supply Sales Company
d. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Handling Division
a. Amtrol, Incorporated
b. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated
c. Conbraco Industries, Incorporated
d. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT McDonnell & Miller
a. Griswold Controls
6. Compression Tanks:
a. Amtrol, Incorporated
b. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Bell & Gossett
d. Taco, Incorporated
a. Amtrol, Incorporated
b. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated
8. Air Separators:
a. Amtrol, Incorporated
b. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Bell & Gossett
d. Taco, Incorporated
A. General: Refer to Part 3 “Pipe Applications” Article for identifying where the following
materials are used.
D. Steel Pipe, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedule 40, plain ends.
E. Steel Pipe, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS (DN65 to DN300): ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-
resistance welded), Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, carbon steel,
seamless for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller and electric-resistance welded for 2-
1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger.
F. Chlorinated Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441, Schedules 40 and 80,
plain ends.
G. Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends.
H. Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe: ASTM D 2310, Type I (filament-wound pipe),
Grade 1 (glass-fiber-reinforced, epoxy-resin pipe), Class A (no liner).
2.3 FITTINGS
C. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.
F. Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, bolt
holes spot faced.
H. Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and
gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
I. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47
(ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B
fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed
to accept grooved end couplings.
L. Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for
Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.
M. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing
protective jacket; 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working pressure, 250-degrees F (121
degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded
end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch (20-mm)
misalignment.
N. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body, steel flanges drilled
to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250
degrees F (121 degrees C) and pressures up to 150-psig (1035-kPa).
O. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working pressure, steel pipe
fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit
rods, flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
C. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe
being welded.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.5 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section “Valves.”
B. Refer to Part 3 “Valve Applications” Article for specific uses and applications for each valve
specified.
of valve opening. Valves 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller shall have threaded connections
and 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) valves shall have flanged connections.
E. Safety Relief Valves: Brass or bronze body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working
parts; to suit system pressure and heat capacity; according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section IV.
F. Brass, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) cold working pressure (CWP),
250 degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature, brass housing, stainless-
steel operating parts; for soldered, threaded, or compression connections. Factory
set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while
compensating for system operating-pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves
for flow measuring equipment. Provide metal identification tag with chain for each valve,
factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and flow rate.
G. Cast Iron, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Class 150, cast-iron housing, stainless steel
operating parts; threaded connections for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, flanged
connections for 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger. Factory set to automatically control flow
rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating-
pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment.
Provide metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone
identification, valve model number, and flow rate.
A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working
pressure, 225 degrees F (107 degrees C) operating temperature; manually operated with
screwdriver or thumbscrew; with 1/8-inch NPS (DN6) discharge connection and 1/2-inch
NPS (DN15) inlet connection.
B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure, 240 degrees F (116
degrees C) operating temperature; with 1/4-inch NPS (DN8) discharge connection and 1/2-
inch NPS (DN15) inlet connection.
C. Compression Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 375
degrees F (191 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Provide taps in bottom of
tank for tank fitting; taps in end of tank for gage glass. Factory test tank with taps fabricated
and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
Furnish with the following fittings and accessories:
1. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug,
and stainless steel ball check, 100-gal. (379-L) unit only; sized for compression-tank
diameter. Design tank fittings for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 250-
degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature.
2. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig (860-kPa) working
pressure and 240 degrees F (116 degrees C) maximum operating temperature;
designed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system.
3. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) diameter
gage glass, and slotted metal glass guard.
D. Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig (860-kPa) working
pressure, 375 degrees F (191 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Separate air
charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by a flexible diaphragm
securely sealed into tank. Provide taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting, and drain
fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel
saddles. Fabricate and test tank with taps and supports, and label according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
E. Air Separators: Welded black steel, ASME construction and labeled for 125-psig (860-kPa)
minimum working pressure and 375-degrees F (191 degrees C) maximum operating
temperature. Separators shall have perforated stainless steel air collector tube designed to
direct released air into compression tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections, threaded
connections for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, with flanged connections for 1-1/2-inch
NPS (DN40) and larger, threaded blow-down connection. Provide units in sizes for full-
system flow capacity.
F. Chemical Feeder: Bypass-type chemical feeders of 5-gal. (19-L) capacity, welded steel
construction; 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; complete with fill funnel and inlet, outlet,
and drain valves.
G. Diverting Fittings: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 degrees F (121 degrees C)
maximum operating temperature; cast-iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper
with soldered ends. Indicate flow direction on fitting.
H. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126,
Class B), flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, threaded connections for 2-
inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket,
and bottom drain connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Hot Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-
temper copper tubing with soldered joints or steel pipe with threaded joints. Below ground
or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper tube with soldered joints.
Use a minimum number of joints below ground and within slabs.
B. Hot Water: Above ground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered
joints. Below ground or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper tube
with soldered joints. Use a minimum number of joints below ground and within slabs.
C. Hot Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: RTR pipe with mechanical joints.
D. Hot Water, 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.
E. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints
or Schedule 40 PVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:
D. Install calibrated plug valves on the outlet of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere
as required to facilitate system balancing.
E. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required
for system drainage
F. Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required for flow direction
control.
G. Install safety relief valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe discharge to floor without valves. Comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for installation
requirements.
H. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required for
system pressure regulation.
A. Install piping according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
C. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-
inch NPS (DN20) ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) threaded nipple and cap.
E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
F. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main with takeoff out bottom of
main, except for up-feed risers with takeoff out top of main line.
G. Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final
connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not
required at flanged connections.
H. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and
larger connections.
I. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except in-line
pumps) and other vibration-producing equipment.
J. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, pressure-
regulating valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch
NPS (DN20) nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 2-inch NPS (DN50)
and larger.
A. General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section
“Hangers and Supports.” Conform to requirements below for maximum spacing of
supports.
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping runs less than 20 feet
(6 m) in length.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6
m) or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:
1. 3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm)
2. 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm)
3. 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
4. 2-Inch NPS (DN50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
5. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
6. 3-Inch NPS (DN80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
7. 4-Inch NPS (DN100): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.3 m), minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
(13 mm)
8. 6-Inch NPS (DN150): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.2 m), minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
(13 mm)
9. 8-Inch NPS (DN200): Maximum span, 19 feet (5.8 m), minimum rod size, 5/8 inch
(16 mm)
10. 10-Inch NPS (DN250): Maximum span, 20 feet (6.1 m), minimum rod size, 3/4 inch
(19 mm)
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following minimum rod sizes and
maximum spacing:
1. 3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm)
2. 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm)
3. 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
4. 2-Inch NPS (DN50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
5. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
6. 3-Inch NPS (DN80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space pipe hangers according to pipe manufacturer's
recommendations for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers
with the least practical number of rigid anchor points.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint
construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded,
welded, and flanged joints in steel piping; and solvent-welded joints for PVC and CPVC
piping.
C. Heat-Fusion Joints in RTR Pipe: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping system, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere
as required for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents at high points in system, heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as
required for system air venting. Do not install above finished ceilings.
C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent
upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.
D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Run piping to compression tank with a 2
percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units 2-inch NPS (DN50) and
larger.
E. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Run piping to
compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blow-down piping with
gate valve; extend to nearest drain.
F. Install shot-type chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated in upright
position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above floor. Install feeder in
bypass line, off main using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between
bypass connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.
G. Install compression tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank.
Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish
proper water level in tank.
H. Install diaphragm-type compression tanks on floor as indicated. Vent and purge air from
hydronic system, and charge tank with proper air charge to suit system design
requirements.
A. Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as equipment connections.
C. Install by-pass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one by-pass is required.
A. Testing Preparation: Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, un-insulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to
test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from
testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment that is not subjected to test pressure from piping. If a valve is
used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test
pressure without damage to valve. Flanged joints where blinds are inserted to
isolate equipment need not be tested.
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure,
to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure
during test.
1. Use ambient temperature water as testing medium, except where there is risk of
damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workers and
compatible with piping system components.
2. Use vents installed at the high points of system to release trapped air while filling
system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of liquid.
3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test
pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and
that low-pressure filling lines are disconnected.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Check to verify that stress
due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of
specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times “SE” value in Appendix A of
ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, “Building Services Piping.”
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing,
or replacing components as appropriate and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no
leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
A. Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
B. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace strainer
screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic-piping system, but before balancing, remove
disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
C. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has
been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
3.10 COMMISSIONING
B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is
completely full of water.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment.
1. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for materials for attaching hangers and
supports to building structure.
2. Division 13 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers.
3. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints” for
vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and
thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple
piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and
characteristics of components and fabrication details.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Pipe Hangers:
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-
treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-
treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and
galvanized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Specification Sections.
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 degrees F
(49 to 232 degrees C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)
of insulation.
3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow
off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
4. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes,
NPS 1/2 to NPS.
5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
7. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
8. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to
retain pipe.
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4
to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500).
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building steel structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.
C. Heavy Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size
or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for
individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space
attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers,
and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed. Fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings
at top of inserts.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048
inch (1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06
inch (1.52 mm) thick.
A. All equipment, ducts, pipes, motors, should be supported by way of building steel
structure.
C. Grout: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that
cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems and water meters
installed outside the building.
1. Division 2 Section “Water Distribution” for water meters outside the building.
2. Mechanical equipment Sections that specify meters and gages as part of factory-
fabricated equipment.
C. Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each
meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings,
and location for each meter and gage.
E. Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include data for the following:
1. Flow-measuring systems.
2. Flow meters
3. Thermal-energy flow meters.
4. Water meters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter, glass lens.
A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for
attaching thermometer.
1. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches (50 mm), but not less than
thickness of exterior insulation.
2. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches (50 mm), but not less than
thickness of insulation lining.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter glass lens.
A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings,
and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Expansion Joints
B. Guides
C. Anchors
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions.
B. Expansion joint shop drawing data shall include maximum allowable temperature and pressure
rating and maximum expansion compensation. Provide a five-year warranty and service guarantee
and five year leak free warranty.
C. Submit Pipe expansion joint schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location,
and features for each required expansion joint.
D. Submit thrust force and expansion calculations for all piping systems. Calculations shall be
certified by a registered structural engineer.
E. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of pipe expansion joint, pipe alignment guide, and
anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component
assembly.
F. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Maintenance data for each type pipe expansion joint specified to include in the "Operating and
Maintenance Manuals" specified in the Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."
1.6 INSPECTION
A. Provide any additional anchors or means of compensating for expansion and contraction as
required by actual field conditions and as necessary to protect piping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Expansion Joints:
B. Guides:
A. Expansion joints in hot water and chilled water piping based on Metraflex TYPC dual weld end
internally, externally guided joint with connections.
D. Slip to be Schedule 80 seamless steel with chromium over nickel plate on ground surface.
E. Externally mounted ram to permit injection of semi-plastic packing material into packing chamber
while under pressure.
H. Joints to be single type with base suitable for use as intermediate anchor.
I. Service connection.
J. Fully packed with sealing rings at front and rear of stuffing box and semi-plastic Teflon derived
packing between sealing rings.
K. Arranged to permit removal of packing, with line pressure off, without removing joint or section of
piping from line.
M. Include all necessary external pipe alignment guides to ensure only axial motions.
N. Provide packing nut extension to allow accessibility for tightening after installation.
2.3 GUIDES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Expansion Joints:
1. Provide expansion joints where required to control expansion and contraction of piping per
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Manufacturer of expansion joints shall review piping layout, location of anchors and guides to
ensure compatibility with expansion joints.
B. Guides:
1. Install piping guides per expansion joint manufacturer's recommendations to constrain pipe
movement to an axial plane.
2. Bolt spider guide to piping per manufacturer's recommendations and before insulation is
installed.
3. After insulation is applied to guide, weld the body of the pipe guide to the mounting plate or
rigid structure.
C. Anchors
1. Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
2. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping
and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1.
3.2 TESTING
A. Expansion Joints:
1. Test expansion joint for adequacy of travel and freedom of movement. Verify joint and
installation acceptable.
2. Provide one (1) year warranty on expansion joint parts and labor.
3. After start-up, pack joints as required to stop leakage.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list
indicating valve and its application.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing,
disassembling, and repairing.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1
for power piping.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use hand
wheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Gate Valves:
2. Ball Valves:
3. Plug Valves:
a. Grinnell Corporation
b. NIBCO Incorporated
c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated
d. Victaulic Company of America
4. Globe Valves:
5. Butterfly Valves:
a. Cla-Val Company
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division
c. Hammond Valve Corporation
d. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Company
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated
f. NIBCO Incorporated
g. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The)
h. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated
i. Victaulic Company of America
a. Cla-Val Company
b. Hammond Valve Corporation
c. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated
d. NIBCO Incorporated
e. Red-White Valve Corporation
f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated
g. Tyler Pipe
h. Victaulic Company of America
8. Lift Check Valves:
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.
D. Operators: Use specified operators and hand wheels, except provide the following special
operator features:
VALVES 15100 - 3/9
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
H. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.
1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point
below 840 degrees F (450 degrees C) for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421
degrees F (216 degrees C) for ball valves.
A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa)
cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-
bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, Teflon-
impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and
with aluminum or malleable-iron hand wheel.
B. Gate Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside
screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged
end connections; and with cast-iron hand wheel.
A. Ball Valves, 4 Inches (DN100) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa)
CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball,
standard port for 1/2-inch (DN15) valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch
(DN20) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals;
threaded or soldered end connections:
A. Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi (1200-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet,
cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or Teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections:
A. Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa)
CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed
bonnet, rubber, bronze, or Teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, Teflon-impregnated packing
with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron
hand wheel.
B. Globe Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze
seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with
cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron hand wheel.
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi (1035-kPa) maximum
pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel
stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, wafer, lug, or grooved style:
3. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches (DN200) to 24 Inches (DN600): Gear operator with
position indicator.
A. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi
(1380-kPa) CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition
seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-
kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze disc, flanged
or grooved end connections.
C. Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body,
bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.
D. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components),
horizontal or vertical pattern, lift-type, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel
holder threaded or soldered end connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping
and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition
suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or below the center of the pipe.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches (1500 mm) above finished floor
elevation.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to
a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve.
Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the
solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry
seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe
is being threaded.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets
as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts
gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for
proper shutoff and retention.
1. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide
threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and
butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve
applications and arrangements.
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with stem extension.
3. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or
Teflon disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.
7. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.
1. Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with stem extension and memory
stop.
3. Plug Valves: Viton or Teflon packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze
disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or epoxy-coated ductile
iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat.
7. Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be
Class 150 with bronze seat ring.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their
installation:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment markers.
3. Equipment signs.
4. Access panel and door markers.
5. Pipe markers.
6. Duct markers.
7. Stencils.
8. Valve tags.
9. Valve schedules.
10. Warning tags.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted
copies) to include in maintenance manuals.
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems,” for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
1.4 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Data:
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves;
4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, engraved laminated plastic,
with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch
(3.2-mm) center hole for attachment.
2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for
each application length.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe
markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and larger: Either full-band
or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required
for label.
5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick with
pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6 Inches (150
mm): 3/4-inch (19 mm) minimum.
A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of
airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter
height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4-inch (19 mm)
for access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar
operational instructions.
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers, with numbering scheme approved by
Architect. Provide 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.
A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations
for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more
than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is
Installer's option.
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located
where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include
nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:
B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and
markers may be omitted if both are indicated.
1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches
(1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
c. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
d. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
e. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
f. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
g. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
h. Tanks and pressure vessels.
i. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar
equipment.
D. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.
2. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches
(1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and
identify units.
4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
b. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
c. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
d. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
e. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
f. Tanks and pressure vessels.
g. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar
equipment.
E. Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of laminated-
plastic equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is
needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required
identification.
A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with
flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6 Inches (150 mm): Pre-tensioned
pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.
2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6-inches (150 mm): Self-adhesive
pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, 3/4 inch (19 mm) 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at both ends of pipe
marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6-inches (150 mm) and larger: Shaped pipe
markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6-inches (150 mm) and larger: Self-adhesive
pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) wide, lapped at least 3 inches (75 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and
covering full circumference of pipe.
C. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums;
and exterior non-concealed locations as follows:
A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:
B. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow,
may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering
larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance
from normal location of required identification.
C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum
intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves;
faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices
and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a
valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme
and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
2. Valve-Tag Color:
3. Letter Color:
a. Cold Water: White.
b. Hot Water: Black.
c. Fire Protection: White.
d. Condensate: White
e. Hydronic Hot Water: Black
A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually
blocked by other work.
3.9 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
B. Field-Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an
integral component of motorized equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide
nameplate data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; mounting
arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground
lug locations; and information on coatings or finishes.
B. Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and
details including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the
following:
a. The term “withstand” means “the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.”
B. Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from
a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options for Field-Installed Motors: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and
dimensional requirements of motors and are based on the specific system indicated.
Refer to Division 1 Section “Product Requirements.”
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors
that are:
a. Multi-speed controllers.
b. Reduced-voltage controllers.
2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for
use throughout speed range without overheating.
3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control
sequence.
B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and
motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of
sliding rails for belt tensioning.
C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to
which motor is connected.
E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip-proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 degrees F (40 degrees C) and at
altitude of 3300 feet (1005 m) above sea level.
A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor
application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft; sealed, pre-lubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to
NEMA MG 1:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and
sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align
with load transfer link.
1. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and
speed at motor design load.
2. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.
3. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.15.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
100%
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other
Division 15 Sections:
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and
duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, un-excavated spaces, crawl
spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and
mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and
weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical
contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations
within unheated shelters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification materials
and devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for
mechanical materials and equipment.
D. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and
materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space
requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and coordination of installations are important
to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following:
1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement
2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation
3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including space for
disassembly required for periodic maintenance
4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details
5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations
6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations
7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases
8. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building during
construction
9. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their
relationship to other penetrations and installations
10. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets, light fixtures,
communication system components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted items
E. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material
and device.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices.
B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions, capacities, and
ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are
increased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these
increases. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet
design and commissioning requirements
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to
allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other
structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Schedule installation of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate
installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building.
E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services.
Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are concealed
behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors.”
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are applied to
surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to, the following:
1. Dielectric Unions:
2. Dielectric Flanges:
a. Calpico, Incorporated
b. Central Plastics Company
4. Dielectric Couplings:
a. Calpico, Incorporated
b. Lochinvar Corporation
5. Dielectric Nipples:
a. Calpico, Incorporated
b. Metraflex Company
c. Thunderline/Link-Seal
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Section for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless
thickness or specific material is indicated
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent lead
content
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and
chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel bolts and
nuts.
A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic
action and stop corrosion.
B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous with threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end types
and matching piping system materials.
D. Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure
at 180 degrees F (82 degrees C).
E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-
kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-
kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
G. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded
ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 degrees F
(107 degrees C).
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe connections.
Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated,
and ends according to the following:
B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid.
Include copper tube ends or bronze flanged ends; braze welded to hose.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe with Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless steel, inner tubing
covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
D. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of NP fabric,
molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating at
220 degrees F (104 degrees C). Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and
integral water-stop, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping
ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Under-deck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
5. PVC: Manufactured, permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
6. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
7. PE: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup shaped, smooth outer surface, with nailing flange for
attaching to wooden forms.
B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to conceal protruding
fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with setscrew
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as
referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection is
Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently fastened
to equipment.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power
characteristics, labels of tested compliance, and similar essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible location.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with
recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4-inch- (30-mm-)
high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) high letters for access door signs and similar
operational instructions
D. Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid, snap on, color-coded,
complying with ASME A13.1.
F. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following
color code:
a. Direction of airflow
b. Duct service
c. Duct origin
d. Duct destination
e. Design cubic feet per meter (liters per second)
H. Plastic Equipment Markers: Color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following color code:
8. Size: Approximately 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100-mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; and
4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
I. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical
identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated for
proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification that
indicates individual system number and service such as “Boiler No. 3,” “Air Supply No. 1H,” or
“Standpipe F12.”
2.9 GROUT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Division 15
piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location
and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated,
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Conceal piping in interior and exterior locations except in equipment rooms and service areas.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are
prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient
space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch (25-mm) clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wallboard partitions, and
suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with setscrew, and polished chrome-plated finish. Use
split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Un-insulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with setscrew.
3. Un-insulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated
finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with setscrew or spring clips.
O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE removable sleeves.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet
areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor
slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS (DN150).
b. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS (DN150).
c. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS (DN150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-
board partitions.
d. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure
flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2
inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim” for flashing.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation, using elastomeric joint sealant. Refer to Division 7 Section “Joint Sealant” for materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve
seals. Size sleeve to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve to provide for
installation of mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber-sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve to provide for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve to allow for installation of mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals in accordance with the manufacturers written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber-sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire-stopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping”
for materials.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
V. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping
specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Soldering Manual,” Chapter “The Soldering of
Pipe and Tube”; or CDA's “Copper Tube Handbook.”
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's “Brazing Handbook,” Chapter “Pipe and Tube.”
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full
and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe,
fittings, and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal threading
is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, “Recommended Practices and Procedures
for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe,” using qualified processes and welding operators according to
“Quality Assurance” Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and
thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by
sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as
possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque
wrench.
8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
b. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
c. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
d. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
e. PVC Non-pressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
f. PVC to ABS Non-pressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement according to
ASTM D 3138.
9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and manufacturers written instructions.
X. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded pipe connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar
metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar
metals.
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in
exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend
grease fittings to accessible locations.
F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts if
possible.
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) high lettering for distances up to 72 inches
(1800 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering
two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units,
inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of
hazards and improper operations.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or provide
stenciled signs and arrows, showing duct system service and direction of flow.
1. Location: In each space, if ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system, locate signs
near points where ducts enter into space and at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m).
D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction.
A. Refer to Division 9 Section “Painting” for painting materials, surface preparation, and application.
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Interior, Ferrous Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over enamel
undercoat and primer.
2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over
galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Support: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over enamel
undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rust-
inhibiting metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over
galvanized metal primer
6. Exterior, Ferrous Support: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rust-
inhibiting metal primer.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures
to match original factory finish.
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in
both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting
templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psig (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-
strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place
Concrete.”
A. Cut, fit, and erect miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support
and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
A. Cut, fit, and erect wood grounds, nailing strips, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical
materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical
installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, non-shrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for disposition of excavated material from cylinder well
hole.
C. See Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for finish flooring in elevator cars.
D. Unit Prices: Rock excavation for cylinder well holes will be paid for under the unit price
indicated in the Contract and as specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating
service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure,
relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate
variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on
building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.
1. Effective peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is less than 0.10
(seismic risk zones 0 and 1) .
B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section [4.10 in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."] [407 in ICC A117.1.]
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Pump mounted on oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in
prime-painted steel enclosure lined with 1-inch- thick, glass-fiber insulation
board.
E. Protective Cylinder Casing: PVC or HDPE pipe casing complying with ASME A17.1, of
sufficient size to provide not less than 1-inch clearance from cylinder and extending
above pit floor. Provide means to monitor casing effectiveness to comply with
ASME A17.1.
F. Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and
counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or
polymer-coated, nonlubricated guides.
C. Security Feature: Security feature shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more
microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance.
Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined
adjustable time, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced
kinetic energy.
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where
required by ASME A17.1.
2. Enameled-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from
cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction.
4. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction.
5. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the
following:
A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit
until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs.
B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car control stations. Mount in
return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1
and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station
and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice
communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when
system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is
contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery
backup power supply.
E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located
above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to
passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served.
H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival
and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
I. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button
stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.9 ELEVATORS
A. Elevator Description:
1. Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, single-acting, dual cylinder.
2. Rated Speed: 100 fpm.
3. Operation System: Single automatic operation.
4. Auxiliary Operations:
a. Standby-powered lowering.
b. Automatic dispatching of loaded car.
5. Car Enclosures:
6. Hoistway Entrances:
a. Width: 42 inches .
b. Height: 96 inches.
c. Type: Single-speed side sliding.
d. Fire-Protection Rating: 2 hours.
e. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
f. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with
frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
b. Provide blanket hooks and one complete set(s) of full-height protective
blankets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation for Cylinder: Drill well hole in elevator pit to accommodate installation of
cylinder; comply with applicable requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
C. Install cylinder in protective casing within well hole. Before installing protective casing,
remove water and debris from well hole and provide permanent waterproof seal at
bottom of well casing.
1. Align cylinders and fill space around protective casing with fine sand.
D. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel.
Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between protective casing and pit
floor with 4 inches of nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
E. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel.
Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to
maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment
and avoid overstressing guides.
F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. RELATED SECTIONS
1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements.
2. Section 06400 “Interior Woodwork Refinishing” for restoration of existing
furniture.
3. Section 06402 “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for mahogany custom built
furniture.
4. Section 11101 “Visual Display Surfaces” for marker boards, EQ-4.
5. Section 11510 “Library Equipment” for book trucks and book return carts; EQ-6
and EQ-7.
6. Section 11511 “Library Book and Media Depository” for through-wall drop
system.
7. Refer to Equipment Schedule on Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1. Seating Layout: Show seating layout, aisle widths, row-lettering and chair-
numbering scheme, chair widths, and chair spacing in each row.
D. Samples: For each seating component and for each color and texture required.
F. Maintenance Data.
G. Warranty.
A. Upholstery Fabric Source Limitations: Obtain fabric of a single dye lot for each color
and pattern of fabric required.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of electrical wiring and devices with seating layout to ensure
that floor junction boxes for electrical devices are accurately located to allow
connection without exposed conduit.
1.5 WARRANTIES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Furniture Schedule and Equipment Schedule on Drawing Sheet A-5.51 for
quantity, location and color.
A. Mobile Pedestal Filing Cabinets: HON “Embark” Series with “M” pull.
2.5 CHAIRS
A. Ergonomic Chairs:
1. Manufacturer: Herman Miller “Aeron Chairs.”
2. Style: Work Chair.
3. Seat & Back Textile: “Waves Pellicle.”
a. Color: “Carbon.”
4. Armrest Material: Plastic.
5. Frame: Steel.
6. Recycled Content: 62%
a. Post Consumer: 41%
b. Pre Consumer: 21%
C. Upholstered Chairs:
1. Manufacturer and Product: Lee Industries; #3088-01 Chair.
2. Upholstery Material: European, full grain, aniline dyed cowhide.
a. Manufacturer: Teddy & Arthur Edelman, Limited; “Dream Cow.”
b. Colors:
1) Brownie DRC20.
2) Cola DRC15.
3) Soft Green DRC03.
2.6 TABLES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
E. Maintenance data.
A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in
the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
Sections 302 and 303 in ICC A117.1.
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Recycled Content:
C. Recessed Frames:
1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for
maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically
and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with
hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.
C. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with
manufacturer's standard protective coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat
tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action;
coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide
clearance between door and mat.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of
plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring.
Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial
Completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Kitchen cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops and backsplashes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 12355 “Institutional Casework”: Coordinate PLM-3 and PLM-4 with this
section. Plastic laminate for kitchen casework in Meeting Room closet will match
plastic laminate for Meeting Room casework.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Cabinet hardware.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4.2: For adhesives, documentation
indicating that products meet the testing and product requirements of the Section
01353 “LEED Requirements.”
C. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and
attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and
backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINETS
A. Basis of Design Product: The design for cabinets is based on Merillat “Essentials
Rutland II”. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a
comparable product by one of the following:
F. Face Frames: 5/8-inch- thick particleboard with plastic laminate on exposed and
semiexposed surfaces.
A. General:
1. Adhesives and Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Do not use products
that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Adhesives: Use adhesives that comply with the product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
3. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide products that comply with the
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
4. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.
5. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content.
6. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea
formaldehyde.
7. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde.
8. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.
B. Exposed Materials:
4. PVC Edge Molding: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm
thick at doors and drawer fronts, and 1 mm thick elsewhere.
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size,
style, material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top
with backsplash), backsplash, and endsplash style:
1. Front: Rolled.
2. Cove: Applied (backsplash rests on top forming seam at inside corner).
3. Backsplash: Square edge.
4. Endsplash: Square edge.
1. Grade: HGS.
2. Provide through-color plastic laminate.
3. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL.
4. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged,
touch sanded.
E. Adhesives: Use adhesives that comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings, are aligned, and
are uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C. Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less
than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less
than 24 inches o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum
board.
F. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and
operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as
recommended by manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinets of stock design.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Wall shelving.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 12356 “Kitchen Casework”: Coordinate PLM-3 and PLM-4 with this
section. Plastic laminate for kitchen casework in Meeting Room closet will match
plastic laminate for Meeting Room casework.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
D. Samples: For cabinet finishes and for each type of top material indicated.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with requirements for modular
cabinets in AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."
1.5 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for
softwood.
C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, either veneer core or particleboard core unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to
particleboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.
C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, self-
closing.
G. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: Mortise type, 5-pin tumbler, complying with
BHMA A156.11, Grade 1.
2.6 COUNTERTOPS
A. Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform
plane free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where
manufactured wood casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe
for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16
inch of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to masonry or framing, wood blocking, or
reinforcements in walls and partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. Bolt
adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining
doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
C. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms
within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, or framing,
blocking, or reinforcements in walls or partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a
tolerance of 1/16 inch.
D. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or
bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
A. Field Jointing: Where possible make in the same manner as shop jointing, using
dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare
edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not
required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.
B. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more
fasteners at each front, end, and back.
C. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or
another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material
manufacturer.
B. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.
C. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
E. Maintenance data.
F. Warranty.
1.4 WARRANTY
1. Failures include, but are not limited to deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and
other materials beyond normal wear.
2. Limited Warranty Period: Life of building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. General Features:
a. Weather-resistant.
b. Theft-deterrence.
c. Wording:
1) “BOOK RETURN” on faceplate.
2. Exterior Materials and Features
a. Material: 16 gage stainless steel exterior faceplate, depository doors and
cover plate. #4 finish.
b. Features:
1) Built-in weather shroud and door flap.
2) Depository Doors: Flush mounted spring loaded doors which open
inward and down. Doors are field replaceable.
3. Interior Materials and Features:
a. Materials:
1) Chute Housing: 20 gage stainless steel
2) Entry Chute: 16 gage stainless steel.
3) Interior Trim: 16 gage stainless steel.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY
A. Deliver library equipment to the site in an undamaged condition and protect against
damage.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EA 1.4: For appliances, documentation indicating that
products are ENERGY STAR rated.
D. Maintenance data.
D. Energy Ratings: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR
product labeling program.
1.4 WARRANTY
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
11451 - 1/3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each residential appliance is based on
the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the
named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers
specified.
A. Microwave Oven:
a. Hotpoint.
b. KitchenAid.
c. Maytag.
2. Basis-of-Design Product: GE “Profile” Countertop Microwave Oven, Model
#PEB1590SMSS or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Hotpoint.
b. KitchenAid.
c. Maytag.
3. Oven Capacity: 1.5 cu. ft..
4. Exhaust Fan: Nonvented, recirculating-type with charcoal filter.
A. Refrigerator/Freezer:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE “Profile” Energy Star Side by Side Refrigerator,
Model #PSFW3YGXSS or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Hotpoint.
b. KitchenAid.
c. Maytag.
2. Type: Freestanding, side-by-side refrigerator/freezer.
3. Storage Capacity:
a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: 14.55 cu. ft..
b. Freezer Volume: 8.61 cu. ft..
4. Front Panel: Stainless-steel door front and lower access panel.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
11451 - 2/3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been
completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate
equipment.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
11451 - 3/3
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590
Washington, DC 100% Final Construction
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
B. Related sections:
1. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications: Metal rods, chains, bracing, fasteners and other
support components for suspending projection screens.
2. Section 06105 – Miscellaneous Carpentry: Wood blocking for installation of projection
screens.
3. Section 09250 – Gypsum Board Assemblies: Suspended gypsum board ceilings to
contain recessed projection screens.
4. Section 16400 – Electrical supply, conduit, and wiring for motorized projection screens.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Source limitation: Obtain projection screens from single manufacturer as a complete unit
including necessary mounting hardware, motor, controls, limit switches, and accessories.
B. Motorized projection screens shall be certified for use in the United States and Canada by
Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Inc. and shall bear UL label.
A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces
where screens will be installed is substantially complete and installation of screens is ready to
begin.
B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with labels intact.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
B. Manufacturers of equivalent products submitted and approved in accordance with Section 01630
– Product Substitution Procedures.
A. Type: Electrically operated projection screen for ceiling installation consisting of case, screen,
motor, controls, electric brake, limit switches, mounting accessories, and other components
necessary for complete installation.
B. Method of installation: Recessed ceiling mounted with 3/8 diameter threaded steel suspension
rods.
C. Screen case:
1. Extruded aluminum housing with white paint finish and stamped steel end caps suitable
for installation in return air plenums. Bottom closure panel forms slot for passage of
viewing surface and is removable for access to operating mechanism and viewing
surface. Bottom perimeter flange provides trim for gypsum board ceiling.
2. Housing is symmetrical allowing for left and right hand motor locations and for viewing
surface to unroll off front or back of roller.
3. Housing designed with internal junction box and plug-in wiring connections to allow
housing to be installed and connected to building power supply separately from motor
and viewing surface.
D. Roller: Factory installed 3 inches diameter steel or aluminum tube mounted on zinc plated
brackets with double row radial ball bearings. Roller mounted on vibration insulators.
E. Viewing surface securely attached to roller at top and at bottom to weighted dowel. Provide each
side of viewing surface with black masking borders and tab-guide cable tensioning system to
maintain even lateral tension and to hold surface flat. Top of screen masked by 12” (30 cm)
black drop.
A. Material: Matt white vinyl surface laminated on woven fiberglass base and surface is washable,
flame resistant, and mildew resistant; Fiberglass Matt White Surface as manufactured by
Draper, Inc.
2.4 MOTOR
A. Type: 110-120 VAC, 60 HZ, 3 wire, instantly reversible, lifetime lubricated, and equipped with
internal thermal overload protector, electric brake, and pre-set accessible limit switches.
2.5 CONTROLS
A. Provide 1 control stations to lower, raise, stop and reverse projection screen at any point.
B. Single station control: 3-position rocker switch with cover plate, accepting 110V current, and
operating by sustained contact.
C. Low voltage control: Control station without switches for interface with master control system.
Wiring from switches or receivers to low voltage control unit to be 24 V.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with ceiling construction and related
components penetrating or above ceilings such as lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment,
ductwork, and fire-suppression system.
B. Coordinate requirements for blocking, structural supports, and bracing to ensure adequate means
for installation of screens.
C. Coordinate requirements for power supply conduit, and wiring required for projection screen
motors and controls.
D. Coordinate interface and installation of screen and masking controls with provision of video
projector/projector control system.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install projection screens and controls at locations and heights indicated on drawings.
C. Install screens securely to supporting substrate so that screens are level and back of case is
plumb.
A. Test motorized projection screens to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure, and other
operating components are functional. Ensure that screen is level and viewing surface plumb
when extended. Correct deficiencies.
3.4 PROTECTING
A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage from construction operations. If damage
occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in
their original, undamaged condition.
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. General: Comply with all Contract Documents, including Divisions 0, 1, and 15 of the general
contract specifications.
B. Statement of Work: the work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to the
following:
1. Provide and install complete and operational Audiovisual System(s) as outlined in these
specifications and related drawings and documentation requirements as set forth in this
documentation.
2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all wiring, plates, connections, and
miscellaneous equipment for complete and operational System(s) even if specified in
this or other related documents or not.
D. All facilities, materials, equipment, transportation, and necessary labor for a complete and
operational Audiovisual System(s).
F. Definitions:
1. “Contractor” – Installer who has been awarded the contract to perform the work.
2. The term “shall” is mandatory, the term “will” is informative, and the term “should” is
advisory.
3. “Provide and install” – To supply, install, and connect up complete and ready for safe
and regular operation.
4. “Indicated”, “shown”, or “noted” – As indicated, shown, or noted on drawings or
specifications.
5. “Equivalent”, “similar”, or “equal” – Of base bid manufacturer, equal in materials, size,
color, design, and efficiency of specified product, conforming to base bid
manufacturers.
A. The Contractor shall provide Audiovisual System(s) compatible with the Owner’s
communications systems (i.e. telephone, video, and computer systems) and operations.
B. The Contractor shall provide equipment that, where required, shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., local codes, the National Electrical Code
and any other governing codes. Such items shall bear a label or mark indicating their
conformance to the above requirements.
C. The Contractor shall provide complete and operational system(s) configured and installed for
user-friendly operation and low maintenance. On-site factory technical support shall be
provided if necessary, to assure performance.
D. The Contractor shall restore finish hardware to original condition including painting, ceiling
modifications, and attachments.
E. Work shall be in compliance with all applicable standards listed above and all governing
codes and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and the Contract Documents.
F. Coordinate exact location and installation of the equipment, power, conduit, and raceway
systems with the Owner and electrical contractor.
A. The following is a basic system(s) description and is not intended to be exhaustive in nature
and is not complete for proper installation or operation of system(s). The AV specification
and the AV drawings need to be fully reviewed together to ensure that the design intent and
list of design intent equipment is completely covered.
1. The Public Meeting Room is an easy to operate audio visual system with a recessed,
ceiling mounted, front projection screen at the front of the room. The system will include
A. Conduits:
1. Review all conduit runs, junction boxes, and electrical outlets provided and installed by
the electrical contractor and provide fit-up drawings based on these.
2. Verify and inspect rough-in of all necessary conduits and outlets.
3. Provide a written acceptance of all field conditions or a list of any discrepancies within
ten (10) working days from Notice to Proceed.
A. The Contractor shall carefully control handling and installation of all items which are not
immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware or
equipment losses before, during, and after installation. The Contractor is responsible for all
items until Final Acceptance.
B. The Contractor shall, prior to installation, protect exposed surfaces with material which is
easily removed without marring finishes.
C. The Contractor shall, without cost to the Owner, replace any products damaged during
storage or handling.
A. The Contractor shall submit a schedule to the Owner for approval. The schedule shall show
sequence of work, etc. from time of Notice to Proceed to final sign off of project. This
schedule shall be submitted on Microsoft Project, both paper and electronic format, with
submittals.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the installation of the system(s) to
be compatible with the work of the other trades. The Contractor shall attend weekly progress
meetings and provide continuous on-site project management.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange with the Owner a mutually
acceptable time for Acceptance Testing, based upon the dates provided in the Solicitation.
D. The Contractor shall provide operating personnel with extensive training for each system
type and room type as outlined in Section 1.03.
A. A pre-bid site visit will be utilized to allow the contractor to see the current jobsite conditions.
This meeting will be scheduled in advance with the Owner.
C. Provide a list of five (5) references with locations, names of contacts, and contact phone
information with brief system descriptions and dollar amounts for each reference.
References shall be no more than three (3) years old.
D. A detailed equipment list in Microsoft Excel format (both hard copy and disk) showing Item
Number, Item Description, Manufacturer, Part Number, Quantity, Heat (BTU/hr.), Power
(Watts), Weight, and Price. Include manufacturer’s specification sheets for each piece
submitted. This shall be generated from this document and related drawings.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
1. A complete list of all products to be incorporated within the work with all quantities
listed. Each product shall be listed with specification section references in Excel format.
2. Complete functional diagrams of each system required for a complete and operational
system with descriptive narratives of any deviations from the specified system design.
3. All shop drawings as defined in the section.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shall not be smaller than 24”x36” and shall be sized as appropriate for thorough
understanding of system(s).
2. Shall be scaled appropriately but not less than 1/8” =1’.
3. Shall show detailed schematic wiring diagrams showing interconnection of Contractor-
provided components and fabricated products, wiring and cabling diagrams depicting
cable types, and device designators. Each component shall have a unique designator
and use same designator throughout the project.
4. Shall show location of all equipment in racks, consoles, or on tables, with complete
dimensions, wire routing, and cabling within housing.
5. Shall show all A.C. power outlet locations and terminal strip locations within each
equipment rack.
6. Shall show plans and sections of the building and adjacent grounds with the location of
all installed equipment such as loudspeakers, racks, consoles, plates/panels, antennas,
(etc.).
7. Shall show patch panel layouts and labeling strips, including color schemes, as
necessary.
8. Shall show full fabrication detail of custom enclosures and millwork indicating
dimensions, material, finish, and openings for equipment.
9. Shall show all speaker mounting details including hardware types and load capacity.
Structural information with design calculations and a copy of the PE’s certifications for
each item/drawing.
10. Shall provide complete drawings for all fabricated plates and panels. Drawings shall
include dimensional locations of components, component type, engraving information,
plate color information, and a complete bill of materials for each plate.
11. Shall show complete labeling schemes for all cabling and equipment components for
project. Include font size and styles along with a sample cable label and equipment
label. All labeling shall be consistent within the project scope.
12. Shall show a complete wire schedule showing source and destination and indicating
conduit location and sizing. Provide conduit sizing and layout with at least a 20%
oversize for project utilization for future system growth.
13. Shall show a complete conduit riser and associated conduit plans for a complete
conduit system. Include a Junction Box schedule showing type, size, mounting style,
and location of each box.
C. Submittal Format:
1. Each submittal shall be in three-ring binders no larger than 3” spines and sized for
150% of material enclosed. Use multiple volumes if necessary.
2. Arrange product data in alphanumeric order.
3. Separate major groupings with labeled binder tabs.
4. Index product data sheets by manufacturer and model or part number.
5. Each submittal shall include a unique numbering scheme and be numbered in
consecutive order.
6. Reference addendum or change order numbers as applicable.
A. Verify conditions on the job site applicable to this work. Notify Owner’s Representative in
writing of discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions promptly upon discovery.
B. If conditions exist on the jobsite which make it impossible to install work as shown on the
drawings or detailed in the specifications, recommend solutions and submit drawings
showing how the work may be installed to the Consultant and Owner for approval.
A. Upon completion of installation and Contractor commissioning (as outlined in Section 3), the
Consultant shall perform system(s) inspection and testing.
B. To assist the Consultant, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of one person for
inspection and two persons for testing who are familiar with all aspects of the system(s).
C. The process of testing the system(s) may necessitate moving and adjusting certain
components such as speaker aiming and transformer tap values.
D. Testing will include operation of each system and any components deemed necessary.
Provide required test equipment, tools, and materials required to perform necessary repairs
and/or adjustments.
E. In the event that further adjustments or work is required during testing, the Contractor shall
continue his work until the system(s) is (are) acceptable at no addition to the contract price.
If approval is delayed due the defective equipment, and/or failure of equipment or installation
to meet the requirements of this specification, the Contractor shall pay for additional time
and expenses of the Owner at the rate specified by the Owner.
F. All Control Systems shall be fully tested prior to Final Testing. Once the Control
Programming is “finalized” all source code, programming, and touch panel software shall be
“burned” on to a CD ROM and delivered to the owner. All Control System programming
(including source, files, touch panel design), and DSP is the property of the owner.
1.11 WARRANTY
B. During the warranty period, no charges shall be made for any labor, equipment, or
transportation to maintain performance and functions.
C. The Contractor shall respond with remedy to a trouble call within twenty-four (24) hours after
receipt of such a call, and shall provide a 24-hour service phone number. Downtime for
system(s) shall be no longer than a 24-hour period. All replacement parts/components shall
be of equal or higher level for service.
E. At least one routine inspection and adjustment visits will be scheduled for the first year.
Submit reports to the Owner.
F. Provide a separate price for an optional yearly service contract for five (5) years, to begin at
the end of the initial warranty and service contract. Provide details on coverage and options.
G. The Contractor shall be present at the first use of the system (scheduled by the owner), and
(one) additional event as requested by the owner.
B. Develop an instructional course based on the use of the system(s) and manufacturers’
recommendations. Provide a minimum of six (6) hours of instruction. Arrange course so that
operational and maintenance classes are separate.
C. Submit an outline of the course with sample instructional aids for approval thirty (30) days
prior to scheduled instruction sessions.
D. The Contractor shall be present at first system use and one (1) additional event as
requested by the Owner.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Electronic component models shall be commercially available for a least one (1) year prior to
bid, or be approved by the Owner.
A. All equipment shall be professional grade and rated for continuous duty. Basic guidelines
have been prepared with manufacturer names, makes, and model numbers included as
minimum performance requirements. These must be satisfied, unless a variance (separate
document) is submitted and approved by the Owner.
B. System(s) shall be installed and configured for simplicity of operation, with user-friendly
controls.
C. Product quantity is as required for complete and operable system(s). If any quantities are
given, the Audiovisual System Contractor shall provide at least the given amount. Some of
the product listed under this section may not be required to fulfill the work as outlined.
D. Regardless of the length or completeness of the descriptive paragraphs listed herein, each
device shall meet published manufacturer’s specifications.
E. Remove all manufacturer’s nameplates or logos from product, such as found on speaker(s),
within the public sight lines or spaces.
F. Paint all wall and ceiling mounted speaker grilles and enclosures as directed by the
Architect.
G. The Contractor is responsible for providing a fully operational turnkey system. The following
equipment list and attached drawings are for design intent purposes. It is the responsibility
of the AV contractor to review the AV specification and drawing package to ensure that the
design intent, quantities and equipment is captured in the bids proposal.
A. CD/MP3 Player
B. CD Record Deck
C. Wireless Microphone
E. Automixer
F. DSP
I. Amplifier
J. Speaker
L. Rack
A. DVD Player
1. 32” LCD.
2. 2000:1 Contrast ratio.
3. 500 cd/m2 brightness.
4. 1366 x 768 native resolution.
5. Built-in expansion slots.
6. Inputs: DVI-D, Analog D-sub, 5 BNC (RGBHV), Composite (Shared RCA and BNC), S-
Video, HDMI, Component BNC.
C. UTP Receiver
1. 32” LCD.
2. 2000:1 Contrast ratio.
3. 500 cd/m2 brightness.
4. 1366 x 768 native resolution.
5. Built-in expansion slots.
6. Inputs: DVI-D, Analog D-sub, 5 BNC (RGBHV), Composite (Shared RCA and BNC), S-
Video, HDMI, Component BNC.
7. RS-232 control.
8. TV tuner.
9. Power conditioner.
10. Tilt wall mount.
11. Attached speakers.
12. Custom enclosure w/ceiling mount (mahogany finish)
13. Acceptable product:
a) NEC LCD3215 (provide one)
b) NEC SP4020-4620 (provide one)
c) Furman AC-215 (provide one)
d) Chief MTR6045 (provide one)
e) Forbes AV Custom 8938 – ceiling mount (provide one)
B. UTP Receiver
A. DVD Player
1. 32” LCD.
2. 2000:1 Contrast ratio.
3. 500 cd/m2 brightness.
4. 1366 x 768 native resolution.
5. Built-in expansion slots.
6. Inputs: DVI-D, Analog D-sub, 5 BNC (RGBHV), Composite (Shared RCA and BNC), S-
Video, HDMI, Component BNC.
7. RS-232 control.
8. TV tuner.
9. Power conditioner.
10. Tilt wall mount.
11. Acceptable product:
a) NEC LCD3215 (provide one)
b) Furman AC-215 (provide one)
c) Chief MTR6045 (provide one)
D. UTP Transmitter
E. UTP Receiver
F. Rack
A. Amplifier
B. Matrix Processor:
D. Speakers
E. Rack
A. Provide plates and panels as described in the drawings and as required for fully operable
system(s).
B. Custom plates shall be 1/8” thick aluminum, standard EIA sizes, brushed black anodized
finished unless otherwise noted.
D. Lettering shall be in all caps and numbers engraved with a color contrasting to the base
material with a minimum size of 0.25”.
1. Empty Conduit and outlet box system complying with sections 16050 and 16820
2. Not less than ¾” conduit size and larger conduit sizes as indicated.
G. Outlet Boxes:
1. 1 gang box – 2-1/8 inches deep by 2-1/8 inches high with 1 gang ring.
2. 3 gang box – 2-1/8 inches deep by 2-1/8 inches high with 1 gang ring
3. 12” x 12” NEMA Type 1 enclosure
4. 24” x 24” NEMA Type 1 enclosure
5. Others as required or per manufacturer’s recommendation
H. Cover Plates
2. Type: Unless otherwise indicated, floor boxes shall be fully adjustable, UL listed, CUL
listed, scrub water approved and not less than 480 in3 in volume. Adjustment leveling
feet shall provide 1/8 inch (minimum) vertical or angular (tilting) adjustment.
3. Cover Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, cover plates for floor boxes shall be made of
heavy steel not less than 11-gauge thick and each shall be provided with a 0.25 inch
aluminum ring (SLP-type) or flange permanently attached to the adjusting ring.
B. Shielded cables located in raceways shall have aluminum foil shield with drain wire.
C. Where speaker cables are run exposed in return plenum space, provide plenum rated cable.
D. Where cables are routed through cable tray, provide tray rated cable of equal gauge.
1. Microphone level cables: No. 22 shielded jacketed – West Penn 452 with gray jacket.
2. Line level cables: No. 22 shielded jacketed – West Penn 452 with gray jacket.
3. Constant voltage speakers: amplifier to zone: Min No. 14 gauge – West Penn 226.
4. Constant voltage speakers: plenum rated amplifier to zone: No. 14 gauge jacketed-
West Penn 25266.
5. Constant voltage speakers: within zone No. 16 gauge jacketed – West Penn 225.
6. Constant voltage speakers: within zone plenum No. 16 gauge jacketed – West Penn
252225.
7. Communication outlet cables: No. 20 shielded – Belden 83559 Plenum.
8. Ethersound cables (runs under 105m): No. 24 – Belden 1304A.
9. Control cables: No. 20 shielded – Belden 83559 Bladen.
10. Communication outlet cables: No. 22 shielded – Belden 83559 Plenum.
11. RGB video cable: Belden 1406B, 1407B, 1417B as required.
12. RGB riser: Belden 7710A, 7711A, 7712A, 7713B as required.
13. RGB plenum rated: Belden 1824A, 1825A, 1826A as required.
14. SVHS cables: Belden 1808A as required.
15. Precision video cable: Gepco VSD200ITS Plenum as required.
16. RGB sync cable: West Penn wire WP6355as required.
17. Loudspeaker cable: No. 10 THHN provide different colors for each pass band type,
supply plenum as required.
18. Antenna cable: RG-59 minimum refer to manufacturer’s specification and
recommendations as required.
A. Where specific equipment is described, it is not the intention to discriminate against the
products of other manufacturers, but rather to establish a standard of quality. All proposed
substitutions should be submitted as alternates with complete data.
C. Items designated “no substitutions” will be specified item only. Submission of items other
than specified shall not be considered.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Provide shaft locks or security covers on non-user operated equipment having front panel
access.
D. Install XLR-type connectors wired as follows: Pin 2 High, Pin 3 Low, and Pin 1 Shield.
E. Mount all equipment, speakers, plates and panels, plumb and level.
F. Permanently install all equipment to be firmly mounted and held in place. Provide necessary
equipment supports to hold and support loads with at least a 5:1 safety factor.
G. Raceway
1. Install raceway and outlet box system continuous from outlet to junction box and to
equipment location with no more than four (4) quarter bends (360 degrees total).
2. Install raceway from outlet boxes to cable ladder in corridor as indicated. Bush and
ream conduit ends and terminate with insulated bushings. Clamp conduit to ladder as
required for proper support. Provide fittings.
3. Install raceway from outlet boxes to accessible ceiling spaces. Bush and ream conduit
ends and terminate with insulated brushings.
4. Where cable tray/ladder is not utilized, make continuous runs from box to box with
isolation from building systems as required.
H. Floor Boxes
4. Knockouts: Open only knockouts which will be used for a conduit. Install tight fitting
knockout closers in holes from which conduits have been removed.
12. Care for Insulation: Replace any thermal insulation cut or damaged during installation
of boxes.
13. Floor Box Adjustment: Adjust floor boxes and covers so that cover plates are flush with
the finished floor around the entire circumference.
14. Carpet Plates: In carpeted areas, install a carpet plate at each floor box.
B. Provide adequate ventilation fans to maintain a rack temperature of less than 92 degrees
Fahrenheit.
C. Provide rear support for housing mounted equipment greater than 15” deep.
E. Fill all empty spaces with blank panels, sizing as required, painted to match housing.
F. Locate operator useable equipment and patch panels at an appropriate operating height.
G. Key all door locks for each housing type (front, rear) alike.
H. Looking at the equipment racks from the rear of the racks, install all AC power and ground
cabling on the left and audio and video cabling on the right.
I. Provide lights mounted in the top of each rack to illuminate the interior for service or
maintenance. Lights shall be individually switch-able and placed so as to provide maximum
illumination throughout the rack.
3.3 LABELING
A. Provide, for each piece of rack-mounted equipment, an engraved lamicoid label and attach
to the front of the equipment. Install in a plumb, level, and permanent manner. Provide rear
mounted labeling for all rack-mounted equipment.
B. Provide engraved label over each user-operated control that describes the function or
purpose of the control. Adjust size of label to appropriate size for location.
C. Provide custom project plates at the top of each equipment rack designating consultant and
installation contractor (see rack elevations for details).
D. Provide each terminal strip with a unique descriptor and numerical designator for each strip.
Show strip information on the drawings.
E. Provide logical and legible cable and wiring labels permanently attached for easy
identification to each cable on both ends.
F. Label on cables shall be adhesive style striping covered with clear, heat shrink tubing, sized
appropriately for the cable.
H. Each cable type shall be labeled starting with different destinations (i.e. mic series “Mxxx”,
speaker series “Sxxx”, etc.).
I. Locate the cable designator at the origination and the destination of each circuit. Locate
cable designator within 2” of connection point.
1. All products are installed in a proper and safe manner per the manufacturers’
instructions.
2. Insulation and shrink tubing are present where required.
3. Dust, debris, solder, splatter, etc. is removed.
4. Cable is dressed, routed, and labels and all connections are consistent with regard to
polarity.
5. All labeling has been provided and installed.
6. All products are neat, clean, unmarred and securely fastened.
7. All debris has been cleaned and removed from the site.
8. All electronic devices are properly grounded.
B. Perform the following test. Record all results in the final project manual.
1. Test each AC power outlet for proper connections for hot, neutral and ground.
2. Measure and record the DC resistance for the technical ground in the equipment racks
and console. Resistance should be 0.15 ohms or less.
3. Measure the impedance of each speaker line from the amplifier rack.
E. Speaker Polarity:
1. Use an electronic polarity checker to test each reinforcement speaker. All speakers
should have the same relative polarity.
1. Adjust each active device to have unity gain from the console output to the input of the
amplifiers.
2. With all amplifiers turned off, connect a sine wave and pink noise to an input of the
console. Using a RMS voltmeter, adjust the scale to an output between -10 and 0dBu.
Once level has been established, it should remain unchanged throughout the testing.
1. Adjust the delay speakers to ensure proper synchronization between the main speakers
and the delayed speakers.
2. Using TEF20 or SMARRT Live measure and adjust the arrival times of each speaker to
be fully synchronized.
1. Adjust the gain of each amplifier to provide consistent and appropriate levels throughout
the seating areas/facilities.
2. With the console and other electronic devices feeding the amplifiers adjusted as
described above, adjust the output of the console to be -10dB on the output VU meter.
3. Adjust the appropriate amplifiers to achieve 85dBA in the area covered by one of the
speakers. Use a calibrated sound level meter to make the adjustments.
4. If the speaker is utilizing an active crossover, mute the individual bandpass sections to
adjust each section independently.
5. Start with the speaker closest to the stage area or the booth location as appropriate.
Once that speaker has been adjusted to the above criteria, repeat this procedure for
each speaker cabinet.
6. Amplifiers should be set to provide an average of 85dBA plus or minus 1.5dB
throughout each seating section.
1. Adjust the level of the 70 volt systems to achieve a volume level appropriate for their
location and intended use.
1. Using a microphone, portable signal generator, or CD player, send signal from every
microphone input to the console. Check every connection location in the facility.
2. Verify video signal presence at each component input with test equipment and verify
the proper signal and uniform strength.
3. Verify that the receptacle under test appears at the correct position on the patch bay
and is operating properly.
4. In a similar manner, check any other inputs or tielines, as appropriate.
1. Insertion Gain.
2. Line Time Waveform Distortion.
3. Short time Waveform Distortion (2T pulse).
4. Chrominance-Luminance Gain Inequality.
5. Gain/Frequency Distortion, Differential Gain and Phase
L. Notification:
1. Once all of the above is complete, the system(s) is (are) ready for inspection. Formally
notify the Owner at least seven (7) days prior to desired inspection date.
2. Final adjustments and equalization will be conducted at the time of inspection.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
The above manufacturer is pre-approved by the Owner as meeting the quality, features
and components required. Other manufacturers offering products which are equal to
or exceed these requirements may submit product information for approval.
B. Plumbness of shelving units: 1/8” maximum deviation between level of bottom shelf
and canopy top, measured on the edge of any upright in any direction.
C. Resistance of shelving units to lateral loads: 1/4” maximum deflection from vertical
under a horizontal force of 100# at top of upright. Permanent set after load is removed
shall not be more than 1/8 of an inch.
D. Deflection of uprights under load: Maximum deflection of upright in any direction with
all shelves evenly spaced and all shelves on one side of the range evenly loaded at
50# per lineal shelf foot shall not exceed 1.00” at top of upright. Permanent set after
lad is removed shall not be more that 1/8 of an inch.
E. Shelf loading and deflection: Shelves shall support loads of 50# per lineal shelf foot
without deflection in excess of 3/16” and without permanent set after load is removed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
D. Maintenance data.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain library stack system and all components through one
source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
1. Failures include, but are not limited to deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and
other materials beyond normal wear.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Furnish 5 percent of amount of shelf units installed for each size and type indicated,
but no fewer than 10 units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Steel Bracket Library Shelving: Shelving consisting of two upright support columns per
section, with adjustable shelves cantilever-hung by brackets on one or both sides of
uprights, and complying with ANSI Z39.73.
1. Upright Posts: Vertical upright columns, minimum 14 gauge steel, 2” deep with a
1-1/4” face with 1/2” return flanges. The uprights are fully welded to a tubular top
spreader and a channel bottom spreader. The uprights shall have shelf
attachment slots on 1 inch increments the entire length of the uprights. Uprights
shall include location indicators the length of upright on 6” centers.
2. Spreaders: Top spreader shall be a minimum of 14 gauge steel tube 2-1/2” tall
and 1” wide. The bottom spreader channel shall be minimum 16 gauge channel.
C. Base Supports: The support shall be minimum of 14 gauge steel and provide lateral
unit stability.
D. Leveler Kits: Single and double faced as required, with 3/8-1i6 UNC cage nuts and
levelers held by the base support.
E. Base Shelves: One-piece shelves with integral back stops, 18 gauge cold-rolled steel,
designed to fit snugly around upright columns, with kick plate 3 inches high. Provide
sloped units unless indicated otherwise. Provide 2 brackets per base shelf.
G. Shelf End Brackets: Minimum 16 gauge steel of a depth not less that that of the shelf
on which they are used, and shall extend not less than 6” above the top surface of the
shelf. The upper front corner shall have a minimum radius of 1”. Shelf brackets shall
have a minimum of two hooks at the top for engaging into the upright posts and one
safety lug to prevent accidental dislodgement at the bottom.
H. End Panels and Canopy Tops: Wood end panels and canopy tops are covered in
Section 06410 – Architectural Wood Casework.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Findable Book Supports: Unattached book support, 6 inches high, with cork pad on
bottom, for use on shelf surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Level library stack units with integral adjustable leveling devices to a tolerance of 1/8
inch in 96 inches for level and plumb.
D. Install shelves at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, at equal spacing in each unit.
Insure that ADA clearance requirements are met.
3.3 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Maintenance data.
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
5. Materials: Molded plastic reservoir with stainless steel inner spring and spot.
Chrome-plated brass housing.
6. Lockset: Tumbler type.
7. Refill Indicator: Window type.
B. Diaper-Changing Station#14:
3. Mounting: Semirecessed, with unit projecting not more than 1 inch from wall
when closed.
4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin), exterior shell with
rounded plastic corners; HDPE interior in manufacturer's standard color .
6. Liner Dispenser: Built in.
B. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that
prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without
removing coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
C. Seismic Performance: Metal storage shelving shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 .
1. Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.5 .
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For customized metal storage shelving. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work. Include installation details of
connectors, lateral bracing, and special bracing.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
G. Product certificates.
H. Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
C. Posts: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel of thickness required for load-carrying capacity
per shelf and number of shelves; in manufacturer's standard open-box shape; with
perforations at 1-1/2 inches o.c. to receive beam-to-post connectors.
1. Add-On Shelf Posts: Fabricated from hot-rolled steel, T-shape; perforated to
match main posts and of same thickness.
2. Post Base: Cold-rolled steel floor plate, drilled for floor anchors.
E. Flat Metal Shelves: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet of thickness required
for load-carrying capacity per shelf. Fabricate backs and sides of shelves with box-
formed edges, with corners lapped and welded.
G. Accessories:
1. Tie Plates: Cold-rolled steel, finished to match posts; designed for joining posts
of adjacent shelving units.
2. Supports: Back-to-wall type that bolt to posts; as required for shelving unit
stability.
2.3 FABRICATION
B. Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid, with posts plumb and true and
shelves flat and free of dents or distortion. Fabricate connections to form a rigid
structure, free of buckling and warping.
1. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive hardware, fasteners,
and similar items.
C. Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Form backs of shelving units up to
48 inches wide from one piece.
D. Form edges and corners free of sharp edges or rough areas. Remove burrs.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to develop strength, minimize distortion, and
maintain the corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed locations, finish welds
and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour
of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Weld before finishing components
to greatest extent possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine walls and ceilings to which metal storage shelving will be attached for
properly located blocking, grounds, or other solid backing for attachment of support
fasteners.
B. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, true, and with shelves flat and
free of dents or distortion. Make connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling
and warping.
1. Install exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible.
2. Install braces, straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to
support shelf loading and as required for stability.
3. Adjust post-base bolt leveler to achieve level and plumb installation.
4. Anchor shelving units to floor with floor anchors through floor plate. Shim floor
plate to achieve level and plumb installation.
5. Install seismic restraints.
6. Connect side-to-side shelving units together.
7. Install shelves in each shelving unit at spacing indicated on Drawings or, if not
indicated, at equal spacing.
a. Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Install beams with beam-to-post
connectors fully engaged in post perforations.
C. Accessories:
1. Install finished end panels and trim at exposed ends of shelving units.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust metal storage shelving so that connectors and other components engage
accurately and securely.
B. Replace metal storage shelving that has been damaged or has deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for
fire extinguishers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to
ensure fit and function.
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and
mounting bracket indicated.
2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
a. Orientation: Vertical .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
E. Maintenance data.
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm
thick, Class 1 (clear) .
D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of
trim indicated.
1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at
outer edge (backbend).
J. Accessories:
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER ."
K. Finishes:
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame,
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and
weld joints and grind smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed
cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet
and trim style.
B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices operate properly.
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
E. Maintenance data.
1.4 WARRANTY
1. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,
suitable for exposed applications.
C. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-
locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
D. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.
F. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed
into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend
at horizontal edges.
1. Doors less than 12 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-
thickness steel sheet.
2. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or
stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors.
3. Sound-Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard, designed to stiffen doors
and reduce sound levels when doors are closed, of die-formed metal with full
perimeter flange and sound-dampening material; welded to inner face of doors.
4. Door Style: Louvered vents at top and bottom.
G. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-
installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when
door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees.
1. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, full height.
H. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either
built-in combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated;
pry and vandal resistant.
1. Latch Hooks: Equip doors less than 48 inches high with two latch hooks;
fabricated from 0.105-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to
full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.
2. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism
and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and
incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door
is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching
mechanism.
J. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Triple-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook.
K. Accessories:
a. Height: 4 inches .
2. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and
free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp
edges and burrs.
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for
complete installation.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom,
and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld
frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
G. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in
lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to
match lockers.
H. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch- wide edge dimension, and designed for
concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers;
finished to match lockers.
I. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners,
except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished
to match lockers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures
accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice
plates.
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two
aluminum rivets.
3. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed
ends of nonrecessed metal lockers.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
2. Wall vents (brick vents).
B. See Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.
C. See Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without
permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver
blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on 90 mph wind speed, B exposure and
1.15 importance factor.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles,
and spacing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds
concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes
bolted connections between frame members necessary.
B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which
screens are attached.
C. Louver Screening:
1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
2. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with
adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,
as indicated.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that
cannot be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new
units.
E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete,
masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy
coating of bituminous paint.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Unit Shower fabricated from gel coat fiberglass with integral plywood backing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For shower unit. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
E. Product certificates.
F. Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Accessories:
1. Grab bars:
2. Curtain Rod
3. Curtain: Weighted.
4. Handheld Shower:
5. Collapsible Water Retainer:
6. Drain: caulkless.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Curtains: Install curtains to specified length and verify that they hang vertically without
stress points or diagonal folds.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Curtain Adjustment: After hanging curtains, test and adjust each track or rod to
produce unencumbered, smooth operation. Steam and dress down curtains as
required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free installation. Remove and replace curtains
that are stained or soiled or that have stress points or diagonal folds.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
D. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
E. Product certificates.
F. Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 with 45-lb density, made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde.
C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure
laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-
formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground
smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections.
1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-
impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1
inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters.
2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars
mounted on units.
3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading)
at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.
E. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; stainless steel.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
2.4 FABRICATION
B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging
doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a
minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels
and walls.
C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than two
brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall
anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at
walls.
3.2 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Markerboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Marker Pens: Set of 4 dry-erase maker pens (black, red, blue and green) with
magnetic organizer.
E. Mounting Hardware:
1. Edge Grips: Four, round, brushed stainless steel.
2. 3/16 inch toggle bolts.
A. Markerboard Assemblies: Laminate glass face sheet to steel material under heat and
pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound
coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair
installation of visual display surfaces onto wall surfaces.
B. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated
on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide clips, backing
materials, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of encapsulation coatings
on the following existing interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Wood.
6. Gypsum board.
7. Plaster.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC
content.
A. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color
and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. VOC Content: Less than 0.0001 pounds per gallon (0.1 g/l).
D. Nonflammable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,
grease.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the
following substrates:
1. Interior Substrates:
a. Exposed wood panel products.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For interior primers, stains, and transparent
finishes, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
D. Product List: Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI
Approved Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and finish systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each finish system indicated and each color
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each type of finish system and substrate.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix)
as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each
material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
2.3 STAINS
2.4 VARNISHES
2.5 LACQUERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
B. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage
by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave
in an undamaged condition.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following new and existing interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Wood.
3. Gypsum board.
4. Plaster.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
D. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC
content.
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color
and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix)
as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each
material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that
comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint
base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these
requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or
finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more
than 250 g/L.
4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
7. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
8. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
9. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more
than 250 g/L.
10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0
percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #138 (Gloss Level 2).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Wood: 15 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
4. Plaster: 12 percent.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
A. Examine areas to be repainted, or refinished and conditions under which paint or finish
is to be applied. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
1. Where existing finishes are indicated to be removed, verify that finishes, under-
coats, and adhesives have been completely removed, exposing bare substrates
free of films or coatings.
C. Removing Paint:
1. For limited paint removal, use abrasive methods, including scraping and sanding.
Use hand tools. Avoid gouging substrates. Use mechanical abrasive methods
such as orbital sanders and belt sanders only with approval in each case. Do not
use rotary sanders, sandblasting, or water-blasting.
2. Chemicals formulated for the purpose, such as solvent based strippers and
caustic strippers, may be used for total paint removal. Use care and follow
manufacturer's direction exactly. Protect workers and others against harm,
including vapor inhalation, fire, eye damage, chemical poisoning from skin
contact with chemicals, and other dangers associated with use of chemicals.
Dispose of lead residue and other harmful substances properly.
3. Grind smooth and sand as necessary to remove shoulders at edges of sound
paint
to prevent flaws from photographing through new paint. Where manufacturer
recommends, feather paint edges using drywall joint compound or other method
paint manufacturer recommends.
4. Where existing surfaces to be painted, repainted, finished, or refinished are
glossy, roughen the surface by sanding or other accepted method that will
produce a surface tooth sufficient to properly receive new paint or finish.
5. Existing surfaces indicated to be cleaned but not painted, finished, repainted, or
prefinished:
a. Remove soiling, stains, dirt, grease, oil, and other unsightly
contaminants. Use detergents and cleaning compounds that are
compatible with surfaces and that will not damage existing finishes.
Materials and methods used are subject to approval. Refinish surfaces
damaged by using incorrect products or improperly using cleaning as
agents, at no additional cost.
6. Scrub existing paint to be repainted using household cleaner and water. Rinse
thoroughly and allow to dry before painting.
7. Water Stained Surfaces: Prime each such interior surface, and the interior finish
surface applied as directly to exterior walls, indicated to be painted. Use an oil
1. Apply every coat indicated, other than primer coat, to every surface to be
covered, including previously painted surfaces indicated to be painted or
finished, even when the existing paint is sound.
2. When stain, dirt, or undercoats show through final coat of paint, correct defects
and cover surface with additional coats until paint or coating, film is uniform
finish, color, appearance, and cover-age, at no additional costs to the Owner.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms
and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for
field painting.
E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following exterior substrates:
1. Steel.
2. Wood.
3. Plastic trim fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color
and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix)
as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each
material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
A. Steel Substrates:
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
5. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For carpet and installation adhesives,
documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
A. Maintenance data.
A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
1.9 WARRANTY
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber,
edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge,
and delamination.
3. Warranty Period: Lifetime Commercial Limited
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
G. Gauge: 1/12
G. Gauge: 1/10
G. Gauge: 1/10,
1. Use adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesives that comply with the product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances,
and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color,
pattern, and potential defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation,"
and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.
E. Installation: Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation
instructions for the following:
F. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for
seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay
of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
H. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or
seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
I. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
K. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15,
"Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using
cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
N. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor
Installations."
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts,
locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture,
cabinets, and cutouts.
D. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of
each color and pattern of floor covering required.
E. Maintenance data.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches wide.
B. MCT-1:
1. Product: Marmoleum Real.
2. Thickness: 2.5 mm
3. Color: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.
C. MCT-2:
1. Product: Marmoleum Fresco.
2. Thickness:2.0 mm
3. Color: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor
covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical
methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation.
B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds,
and nosings.
C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
A. Unroll sheet floorings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor
coverings.
B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor
coverings before applying liquid floor polish.
C. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to
disappear, cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient molding accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product Data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
content.
2. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for
regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each
regionally manufactured material
3. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate
VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Resilient Base:
D. Height: 4 inches.
I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
C. Material: Vinyl.
E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height
required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to
minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with
tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
D. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
E. Maintenance data.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Recycled Content:
1. Pre-Consumer: 10% minimum.
F. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering
manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same
sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend
floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
C. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile
surfaces before applying manufacturer’s recommended liquid floor polish.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of cork flooring. Include cork flooring layouts, edges,
columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
D. Samples: Full-size units of each shade, pattern, and finish of cork flooring required.
E. Maintenance data.
A. Product Certificates: For cork floating floor system, from manufacturer, certifying that
MDF core contains no urea-formaldehyde resins.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Cork Floor Tile: Composed of 100 percent natural cork bark and recycled cork
granules and set in a natural or synthetic, flexible resin matrix; homogeneous and
uniform in composition throughout the tile thickness.
B. Provide cork floor tile made with adhesives and binders that do not contain urea-
formaldehyde resins.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by cork flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by cork flooring
manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install cork flooring until materials are same temperature as space where they
are to be installed.
1. Move cork flooring products and installation materials into spaces where they will
be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation.
A. Comply with cork flooring manufacturer's written instructions for installing cork flooring.
B. Mix floor tiles from each carton together to ensure uniform distribution of shade.
D. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
G. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
H. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend
floor tiles to center of door openings.
I. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting cork
flooring.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
D. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
F. Research/evaluation reports.
G. Maintenance data.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed
component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Recycled Content: Provide acoustical tiles with recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content
constitutes a minimum of 40 percent by weight.
1. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average
recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design
requirements.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M,
Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.
F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic
design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type
and form as follows:
1. Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; Pattern F.
E. NRC: Not less than 0.55, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per
manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at
borders.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from
contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only
where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss
obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other
equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling
plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes
or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires
at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for
attachment of hanger wires.
1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor
into concrete slabs.
2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling
area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. Screw attach moldings
to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from
ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with
one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings
and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile
joints are closed by double lap of material.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ceramic tile.
2. Stone thresholds.
3. Waterproof membrane.
4. Tile backing panels.
5. Metal edge strips.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Samples:
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile
and for each color and finish required.
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 10 percent of
amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with
ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. General:
1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following:
8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard
shapes:
2.2 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies
with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application
indicated.
f. Jamo Inc.
g. Laticrete International, Inc.
h. MAPEI Corporation.
i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
k. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
l. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added.
3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that
comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series
exposed-edge material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness
tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with
thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically
recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at
Project site before installing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation
methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108
Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA
installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of
setting and grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Tile floors in wet areas.
b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.
c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint
alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work
and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile
work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint
widths unless otherwise indicated.
E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
2. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch.
3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions
indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including
control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during
installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after
installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly
above them.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent
floor unless otherwise indicated.
1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above
adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).
I. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or
other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.
J. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and
manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland
cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written
instructions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Drive, West
Conshohocken, PA 19428, (610) 832-9585 or FAX (610) 832-9555.
1.3 SUMMARY
D. Unit Prices:Plaster trim replacement to be provided under unit prices are described in
Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,
and other information specified.
D. Schedule of Work: Submit a schedule of spaces that require ornamental plaster, and
a list of ornamental plaster items or areas that require repair or replacement in each
of the affected spaces. Indicate procedures to be used, and time requirements.
E. Restoration program for each phase of the cleaning and repair process, including
protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations.
Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to
be used for each phase of the cleaning and repair work.
1. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any
phase of restoration and cleaning work, provide a written description, including
evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program
to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced plaster cleaning and repair firm that
has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for
cleaning work and 1 for repair/replication work.
2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that plaster
restoration and cleaning are in progress.
C. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use
materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under
same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.
4. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be
prepared.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of plaster
restoration and cleaning.
E. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for plaster replacement from a single source
for each type of material required to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and
texture.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship marble units and accessories strapped together in
suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.
C. Store gypsum materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Keep the room temperature above 55oF until the plaster/joint compound has set.
2. Provide ample ventilation as the plaster dries.
1.8 REFERENCES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. MANUFACTURERS
704/536-0023
B. MATERIALS
1) Gypsum neat plaster such as "Red Top Gypsum Plaster", "Red Top Two-
Purpose Plaster (United States Gypsum Association), "Two-Way
Hardwall Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal.
2) Gypsum molding plaster, ASTM C59; for crown moldings such as "USG
Molding Plaster" (United States Gypsum Association), "Super-White
Molding Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal.
3) Gypsum casting plaster, ASTM C59; for ornamental plaster such as "USG
No. 1 Casting Plaster" (United States Gypsum Association), or approved
equal.
c. Finishing Hydrated Limes: ASTM C206; Type S, such as "Ivory Finish Lime",
"Snowdrift Finish Lime" (United States Gypsum Association", or approved
equal.
g. Plaster Molds: Urethane rubber liquid mold material that can produce
detailed impressions (Perma Flex Mold Co.), or approved equal.
h. Reinforcing Fibers: Sisal hemp fibers, or polypropylene fibers, not more than
2" long (Plastic Tooling Co.), or approved equal.
C. MIXES
1. Plaster Base Coat Compositions: Comply with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's
directions for gypsum plaster base coat proportions for three-coat work:
2. Scratch Coat: High strength gypsum gauging plaster with job-mixed sand.
3. Brown Coat: High strength gypsum gauging plaster with job-mixed sand.
D. For Finish Coat: Proportion casting plaster and molding plaster to comply with the
manufacturer's instructions. Proportion gypsum gauging plaster to comply with
ASTM C842; 1 part plaster and 2 parts lime.
A. MANUFACTURERS
c. Smooth-On, Inc.
1000 Valley Road
Gillette, NJ 07933
908/647-5800
a. Cementex Co.
336 Canal St.
New York, NY 10013
212/741-1770
3. Plaster:
B. MATERIALS
1. Plaster of Paris: "Kal-Kote Finishing Plaster" (Gold Bond, National Gypsum Co.),
"Red Top Molding Plaster (U.S. Gypsum Association), or approved equal.
4. Paper towels
5. Plywood
C. EQUIPMENT
D. MIXES
2. 7 parts plaster
3. 4 parts water
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. EXAMINATION
1. Examine surfaces to receive ornamental plaster and conditions under which the
ornamental plaster will be installed. Proceed with the ornamental plaster work
only when substrate surfaces and conditions comply with referenced standards,
to ensure satisfactory installations.
B. PREPARATION
1. Surface Preparation:
2. Make a template from sheets of metal (brass) cut full-scale in shapes to match
existing; use to screed or form gypsum plaster to desired shapes and contours.
3. Coat metal sheet with layout dye - a blue dye that makes the scribed pattern
easier to follow.
4. When the dye is dry, scribe, cut and carefully file the template to remove any
roughness or other imperfections that might be transferred to the finished work.
5. Use a sled to guide the template as it is pushed through the plastic mass. Basic
parts of the sled include a "slipper-board" and the board to which the template is
nailed.
a. For bench work the sled is guided by the table edge. Bench-run molds are
installed on the job with mechanical fasteners or adhesively attached with
gypsum plaster.
b. For run-in-place work, a guide strip is attached to the wall or ceiling and forms
one edge of the pattern; after work is completed the guide strip is removed.
a. Follow procedures described above, except scribe the center line of the
circular shape on the template.
b. Center a pivot plate to this line and attach to the template board.
7. Mix Plaster: Use special plaster designed and manufactured for ornamental
plaster work.
a. NOTE: Mix the plaster a little below normal consistency for the first mix, then
allow the mix to "cream" a bit before placing it on the bench in front of the
template. For run-in-place work a slightly stiffer consistency is desirable.
b. Sift plaster into water evenly. Do not drop handsful of plaster into the water
at one time.
c. Allow to soak 2 minutes undisturbed, then mix thoroughly. Stir from bottom,
forcing material to top. Take care to avoid beating air into mix. Proper mixing
forces air out of mix.
b. For bench work, some plaster should be allowed to lap over the end of the
bench to act as an anchor and prevent the mold from loosening from the
bench before work is completed.
c. Press small lumps of modeling clay onto the bench before the plaster is
placed to provide a grip for the plaster and help hold it in place.
11. For Circular Shapes (Turning): Like run work, turning can be done in the shop or
run-in-place.
b. For run-in-place work, position the center post accurately at the center of the
circular shape to be formed and securely attach or brace to the structural
supports.
1) NOTE: THE CENTER POST SHOULD HAVE A RUNNING THREAD,
WITH A DOUBLE NUT FOR HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT. THE PIVOT
POINT MUST BE ABSOLUTELY RIGID AND SET HIGHER THAN THE
TOP OF THE PATTERN TO BE MADE, SO THAT THE TEMPLATE WILL
SCREED CLEARLY AS IT ROTATES AROUND THE PIVOT POINT.
12. Duplicate plaster molds by taking impressions from existing plaster molds; create
new rubber molds from these impressions and cast plaster into these molds.
13. Remove plaster molds after plaster has cured, following plaster manufacturer's
instructions.
14. Strip and clean existing decoration to produce a clean, sharp mold.
D. ADJUSTING/CLEANING
A. PREPARATION
1. Surface Preparation:
B. ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
b. Patch the fragment or fill in any damaged portions of the pattern using
spackle or other patching compound.
f. When the rubber has cured, apply a second latex coating (the number of
coats required is dictated by the size of the original and the depth of the
relief); Cure as above.
a. The purpose of the mother is to support the mold when it is filled with wet
plaster.
b. Fill any undercuts in the latex mold with wet paper towels; Lay a thin layer of
wet paper towels over the entire surface of the rubber mold.
c. Build a frame around the mold to pour the mother into; The mother should be
at least 1/2 inch thick at the highest point of the mold.
d. Separate the mother from the rubber mold as soon as the plaster has set (in
less than an hour).
e. Wash the interior of the mold with soap and water and remove any residual
byproducts left from the curing process.
a. Add 7 parts by volume of plaster to 4 parts water; Use cold water to retard the
set-up time.
a. Before pouring plaster into mold, fill the mold with water and then pour water
out (this will moisten the walls and ensure penetration of the plaster into all
crevices).
b. Add plaster and cheesecloth or burlap strips for strength; Jog the plaster-filled
mold gently to nudge plaster into all the indentations.
c. Level the plaster; Plaster should be hard enough to remove from the mold in
30 minutes; Allow 24 hours to air dry before installing.
6. Install the plaster casting using a thin coat of plaster of paris as an adhesive;
Hold the piece in place for a few minutes until the plaster sets; A mastic adhesive
or epoxy or gypsum board joint cement are other good adhesives for light pieces.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Shaft-wall enclosures.
2. Stair enclosures.
3. Horizontal enclosures.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed
statement of VOC content.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than 25 percent.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless
otherwise indicated.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes
specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-
wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end
members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
1. Depth: As indicated.
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated.
F. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
G. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in
depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or
ceiling runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive
materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates
fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.
B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for
installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-
resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating
indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
3.2 INSTALLATION
1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing
indicated.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.
1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of
door frame.
2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide
galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 gypsum
board face-layer panel.
D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity
of assemblies where required to enclose rods.
H. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-
wall assemblies.
I. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly
where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install
acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft
and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with
ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are
more stringent.
1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels
in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws
fastened to shaft-wall framing.
2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at
24 inches o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing.
K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board
panels to substrates, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100
sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable
to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
B. Type X:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability
properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish
materials specified .
B. Joint Tape:
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping
compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from
glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged,
and mold damaged.
B. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce
a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-
resistant panels.
C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to
produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to
ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect].
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not
intended for tape.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control joints, and
reveals and trim; include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and
attachments to other work.
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch length for each trim accessory.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish and on
rigid backing.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of
VOC content.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement that indicates costs for each product having recycled
content.
3. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site,
provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material
A. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including gypsum base
for veneer plaster, joint reinforcing tape, and embedding material, from a single
manufacturer.
D. Mockups: Provide a full-thickness finish mockup for each type and finish of gypsum
veneer plaster and substrate to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select representative surfaces and conditions for application of each
type of gypsum veneer plaster and substrate.
2. Provide mockups of partitions in sizes of at least 100 sq. ft..
3. Apply gypsum veneer plaster, according to requirements for the completed Work,
after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
b. USG Corporation:
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and
with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Clean surfaces to remove dust, loose particles, grease, oil, incompatible curing
compounds, form-release agents, and other foreign matter and deposits that
could impair bond with gypsum veneer plaster.
2. Apply bonding agent on dry and cured concrete substrates.
A. Bonding Agent: Apply bonding agent on dry existing plaster according to gypsum
veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer
plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster:
a. Base Coat: Trowel apply base coat over substrate to uniform thickness of
1/16 to 3/32 inch. Fill all voids and imperfections.
b. Finish Coat: Trowel apply finish-coat plaster over base-coat plaster to
uniform thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.
2. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts only metal door frames, windows, and other
units, groove finish coat to eliminate spalling.
3. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if paper facing has degraded from
exposure to sunlight. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to
restore bonding capability to degraded paper facing according to manufacturer's
written recommendations and as approved by Architect.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Do not omit gypsum veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture,
furnishings, and similar removable items. Omit veneer plaster in the following areas
where it will be concealed from view in the completed Work unless otherwise indicated
or required to maintain fire-resistance and STC ratings:
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed gypsum veneer plaster from damage from weather, condensation,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace gypsum veneer plaster that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
1. Indications that gypsum base panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but
are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that gypsum base panels are mold damaged include, but are not
limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 1---GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Patching hairline cracks in plaster with reinforcing tape and joint compound.
4. Resecuring a sagging suspended plaster ceiling by lifting the sag with heavy gauge
wire.
a. Common causes of sagging plaster include:
1) Wood shrinkage and weight of plaster pull the ceiling away from the
joists.
2) Lath pulling loose from the ceiling.
3) Broken vertical ties.
C. Allowances: Quantity allowances for marble restoration and cleaning are specified in
Division 1 Section "Allowances."
D. Unit Prices: marble restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are
described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
D. Restoration program for each phase of the cleaning and repair process, including
protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations.
Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to
be used for each phase of the cleaning and repair work.
1. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any
phase of restoration and cleaning work, provide a written description, including
evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program
to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced plaster cleaning and repair firm that
has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for
cleaning work and 1 for repair/replication work.
2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that plaster
restoration and cleaning are in progress.
C. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials
and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather
conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.
F. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for plaster cleaning and repair from a single
source for each type of material required to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern,
and texture.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship marble units and accessories strapped together in
suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.
C. Store gypsum materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Keep the room temperature above 55oF until the plaster/joint compound has set.
2. Provide ample ventilation as the plaster dries.
1.3 REFERENCES
C. U.S. Gypsum Association, 810 First Street NE, #510 Washington, DC 20002 202/289-
5440
PART 2---PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
E. Sika Corporation
2.2 PRODUCTS
4. filled adhesive
a. glass microballoons
b. lime
c. coke
d. Rohm and Haas acrylic resin
e. Rhoplex MC-76
f. Rhoplex LC-67
g. gel thickener
2.3 EQUIPMENT
1. Joint knife
2. Sponge or heavy-nap cloth
3. Crack widener or triangular can opener
4. Stiff bristle brushes
5. Hawk
6. Slicker (flexible straight-edge)
7. Plasterer's trowel
8. Margin trowel
9. Mortarboard and mudpan
10. Pointing trowel
PART 3---EXECUTION
A. Examination
B. Application
1. Slightly widen the crack with a sharp, pointed tool like a crack widener or a
triangular can opener.
2. Brush or vacuum surface to remove dust and debris.
3. Apply joint compound with a wide joint knife; Butter the compound into the crack,
spreading it about 3 inches on either side of the crack.
4. Center mesh reinforcing tape over the crack, and force the tape down into the bed
of the joint compound with the knife; Remove any excess compound by wiping with
the joint knife.
5. When the tape is bedded, cover surface with a thin layer of compound and smooth
as much as possible by working with the joint knife.
6. When the first coat has dried (at least 24 hours), smooth out any ridges by "wet
sanding" with a damp sponge or a heavy-nap cloth folded flat or wrapped around a
suitable block.
7. Apply a second thin coat of joint compound and feather the edge at least 1 inch
beyond the first coat.
8. After the second coat has dried, wet-sand lightly and apply a thin finishing coat.
9. Lightly sand the surface again, and clean off the area with damp sponge.
10. After the surface has dried, brush off any plaster residue or dust.
11. For gaps between plaster surfaces and surrounding woodwork, apply acrylic latex
caulk using a caulking gun.
A. Examination
1. Determine the extent of unsound plaster and evaluate work requirements and
causes before proceeding. Signs of damaged plaster in need of replacing include:
a) Holes
b) Water Stains: Brownish rings on the plaster, especially the ceilings, indicate
that the plaster has been wet. If the water was stopped quickly, the surface
may only need to be sealed with pigmented shellac to prevent the stain from
bleeding through the new paint or wallpaper. However, if the leak continued for
a long period, the plaster may need to be replaced, and will often have a
powdery appearance.
c) Chipping, flaking and delamination of plaster due to water infiltration.
B. Application
1. Removing Deteriorated Plaster:
a) Use plaster washers to re-secure weakly-keyed areas of otherwise sound
plaster to the wall or ceiling.
b) Wear a dust mask, goggles and gloves and pull loose plaster from the walls
with your hands or a flat prybar.
c) To remove sound plaster, drill holes in the line of cut with a carbide drill bit;
Holding the chisel at a shallow angle, carefully cut directly from hole to hole
with a cold chisel; Cut the resulting plaster free from the lath by chipping the
keys from the side.
d) Cut the plaster back to the studs, if necessary, and re-secure the lath with
drywall nails.
e) Knock any plaster stuck between the lath back into the wall cavity.
f) Vacuum all dust, loose plaster, and other debris from the hole with a shop-vac,
or brush it out with a stiff bristle brush.
a) Install metal lath over the wood lath (metal lath lessens the likelihood of
cracking caused by the old wood lath drawing too much moisture out of the
plaster).
b) If 2 hands are necessary to secure new metal lath, drive a finishing nail into an
exposed stud; take a piece of lath slightly larger than the hole and hang it on
the nail; with both hands now free, cut the lath to shape with tin snips.
c) Use tie wire to secure the metal lath over the wood lath.
d) To make a tie wire, bend a 6 inch long piece of wire into an elongated "U" and
pull it around the old wood lath; space the tie wires every 6 inches.
e) To secure the lath at studs, drive 1 inch drywall screws between the lath into
the stud.
f) Provide reinforcing rod at areas unsuited for expanded metal lath.
j) Fold in the lime putty and mix until all of the ingredients are stirred up.
A. Application
1. Scrape loose or damaged finish plaster and peeling paint from surface with chisel
or joint knife. Remove material where required to enlarge cracks, chips, holes, etc.
to at least 1/2 inch across and undercut to improve bonding of new material.
3. Moisten the surface by lightly spraying a fine mist of clean water from a spray
bottle.
4. Apply skim finish coat over low areas to bring entire finished surface out flush with
the projecting firm and sound layers of adjacent plaster or paint. Form plaster as
required to match original configuration and design or ornamental plaster.
A. Application
5. Using heavy-gauge wire, sling the nailers from the bolts through the rafters; Double
the wire and wrap it around the lag bolt.
6. Bring it down, threading it between the lath and the nailer in a void near a plaster
key, and wrap it back around the nailer; Twist it tightly around itself.
A. Examination
1. Before proceeding with steps to remove efflorescence, examine the plaster and
substrate material for potential sources of moisture and make repairs as required:
a. Determine the age of the structure: Efflorescence on older buildings is typically
caused by the presence of soluble salts in the construction combined with
moisture.
b. Determine the location of the efflorescence: Examination may show where the
water is entering.
c. If possible, examine the condition of the back-up material:
1) Examine the wall for open gaps or cracks in joints and around openings
that could allow water to enter the building.
a) Are joints properly caulked or sealed?
b) Are flashings and drips in good condition?
c) Are there open or eroded mortar joints in copings or in sills?
2) Carefully note the condition and profile of the mortar joints.
3) Repair cracks in masonry and/or repoint as necessary before proceeding
with the cleaning operations.
d. Examine wall sections and details of construction: Carefully examine roof and
wall junctures and flashing details for possible sources of moisture entry.
e. Examine laboratory test reports on the materials: The problem may stem from
the composition or misuse of the material.
B. Application
1. Carefully remove any surface deposits using a stiff fiber bristle brush only.
2. Wipe the surface with a clean, damp cloth.
A. Examination
1. Before proceeding with steps to conceal water stains, examine the plaster and
substrate material for potential sources of moisture and make repairs as required.
a. Look for signs of water infiltration: Examination may show where the water is
entering.
b. If possible, examine the condition of the back-up material:
1) Examine the wall for open gaps or cracks in joints and around openings
that could allow water to enter the building.
2) Repair cracks in masonry and/or repoint as necessary before proceeding
with the cleaning operations.
c. Examine wall sections and details of construction: Carefully examine roof and
wall junctures and flashing details for possible sources of moisture entry.
B. Application
1. After source of moisture has been eliminated, allow the surface to thoroughly dry out.
2. Carefully remove any surface deposits and loose paint using a stiff fiber bristle brush
only. Fill cracks and holes as required.
3. Wipe the surface with a clean, damp cloth.
4. Apply white-pigmented shellac over the stained area using a brush, roller or airless
sprayer. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
a. Depending on the severity of the stain, multiple coats may be required. If so,
allow the first coat to thoroughly dry (typically 45 minutes) before proceeding
with additional coats.
b. If using a brush or roller, apply additional coats in the same direction as the
first coat.
b. If the surface is to be repainted with a high-hiding paint, spot-priming only the
stained areas is acceptable. However, if a high-hiding paint is NOT used to
finish the surface, spot-priming is NOT RECOMMENDED, as primed areas
may appear shiny through the paint finish. (Note: Many ceiling paints have
little hiding strength). In such cases, the entire wall or ceiling surface should
be primed with the white-pigmented shellac before repainting to produce a
more uniform final appearance.
5. Prime and repaint the entire surface with oil or latex paint as required.
3.10 ADJUSTING/CLEANING
A. Upon completion of this work, all floors, walls and other adjacent surfaces that are
stained, marred, or otherwise damaged by work in this procedure shall be cleaned and
repaired and all work and the adjacent areas shall be left in a clean and perfect
condition.
B. All completed work shall be adequately protected from damage by subsequent building
operations and effects of weather. Protection shall be by methods recommended by the
manufacturer of installed materials.
C. Clean all affected surfaces of room and furnishings to their prior condition.
D. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster
from door frames, windows, and other surfaces that are not to be plastered. Repair
floors, walls, and other surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged
during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused
materials, containers, and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following
applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring,
etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content
of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating,
unless otherwise indicated.
A. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall
attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth
required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated
by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring
members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in
12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and
transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions
are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts
penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door
frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb
studs.
2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills
of openings to match framing required above door heads.
3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent
to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally
along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs,
place studs 6 inches o.c.
C. Z-Furring Members:
D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes guidance on replacing cracked, broken or missing panes of glass,
replacing cracked or missing window putty and cleaning glazing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. A window glass is in proper condition when it is set securely and tightly into the window
frame, is properly caulked, and is not scratched, cracked, or broken.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals for this Section to be submitted with submittals for the following Sections:
1. Division 8, Door and Window Sections.
2. Section 08800, “Glazing.”
3. Section 08990, “Glazing Repair.”
B. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and
use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with
requirements.
C. LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352
including:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide
product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured
materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material
A. For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. For Glass:
1. Advanced Coating Technology
2. AFG Industries, Inc.
3. Cardinal IG
4. Environmental Glass Products
5. Falconer Glass Industries
6. Ford Glass Division
7. Guardian Industries Corp.
8. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
9. LOF Glass, Inc.
10. Pilkington Sales (North America) Limited (wire glass)
11. PPG Industries, Inc.
12. Saint-Gobain/Euroglass
13. Spectrum Glass Prod. Div., H. H. Robertson Co.
14. Viracon, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
G. Ammonia
2.3 EQUIPMENT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Inspect glazing putty on both sides of pane for cracked, loose, or missing sections which
allow water to attack the metal components, especially at the joints.
C. Examine the condition of the metal window components for corrosion, loose connections,
etc.
1. Verify glass rattle or movement in the glazing system.
2. Verify that glass stops intact.
D. Inspect all surfaces which are to receive glass and/or glazing sealant for any defects or
condition which will interfere with, or prevent a satisfactory installation.
F. Verify the glass type in each window type prior to the installation of new glass.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Prior to reglazing, remove all oil, dirt, rust and other materials from the glass and the
metal framing members using solvents such as toluol or xylol or using other rust
removal techniques.
2. Prime and clean all glazing rabbets prior to glazing.
3. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction so that it will not be
damaged by corrosive action.
A. Remove existing glazing compound using one of the following four methods:
1. A hammer and chisel (at the risk of adjacent glazing).
2. A soldering iron wrapped in foil or heat plate (can soften the compound to ease
removal).
3. Chemicals such as a paint remover, mineral spirits or muriatic acid.
4. Linseed oil (if the putty is linseed oil based - which most are).
D. Cut new glass 1/8" smaller in length and width, than the opening.
1. Practice cutting on an unusable piece of glass first.
2. Make sure the working surface is perfectly clean and do not press too hard with the
glass cutter.
a. Old window glass is often quite thin, and also contains impurities and irregular
internal tensions.
b. Pressure from the wheel cutter on even a tiny piece of dirt can cause the pane to
split or "run" in all the directions.
3. Cut straight pieces, use a straight edge as a guide.
a. Score the piece with one firm, even stroke of a sharp glass cutter dipped in oil.
b. Tap along the line to break it off. Plastic glass-cutter's pliers can also be used to
break the glass with a quick, downward snap.
E. Apply a small bead of glazing compound around the groove to cushion the new glass and
then install glass spaced evenly on all sides.
F. Replace glazier's points 4" to 6" apart around perimeter, tap them halfway in.
G. Form glazing compound into a 3/8" diameter rope and press around perimeter of new glass.
Using a putty knife, triangulate the surface of the compound. Hold the knife at a 45 degree
angle and align compound with the muntin on the interior.
H. Allow the compound to dry for a week, then paint accordingly with a 1/16" moisture seal
extending onto the surface of the glass.
3.4 ADJUSTING/CLEANING
A. After the installation of each light, remove all markings and labels from the glass.
B. Wash the glass on both sides with a mild solution of soapy water.
NOTE: IN NO CASE SHALL ALKALINE OR ABRASIVE AGENTS BE USED TO CLEAN GLASS.
CARE SHALL BE TAKEN DURING CLEANING TO AVOID SCRATCHING OF GLASS SURFACES
BY USING GRITTY MATERIALS OR DRY CLOTHS.
C. Rinse thoroughly with clean, clear water or as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
E. Clean and trim excess glazing compound from glass, frames and sash promptly after
installation.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to
this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Glazed entrances.
4. Interior borrowed lites.
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type,
tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to
and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of
current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the
weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision
glass; 12 inches square.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and
location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark
glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate
manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which
glass complies.
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Glass Types: Provide glass to match existing glass. Exterior glazing to have uniform
color appearance. Apply glass film on new and existing glass.
C. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-
treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated,
provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed
to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is
indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless
otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
B. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat
glass; 5/16-inch total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in
16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and
with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of
insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more
than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
D. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by
testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they
are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to
continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary
sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in
combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85,
plus or minus 5.
D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side walking).
A. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Clear [float glass] [heat-strengthened float glass] [fully tempered
float glass].
A. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Clear laminated glass with two plies of [float glass] [heat-
strengthened float glass] [fully tempered float glass] [ultraclear float glass] [ultraclear
heat-strengthened float glass] [ultraclear fully tempered float glass].
1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: [3.0 mm] [4.0 mm] [5.0 mm] [6.0 mm] [As
indicated] <Insert thickness designation>.
2. Interlayer Thickness: [0.030 inch] [0.060 inch] [0.090 inch].
3. Provide safety glazing labeling.
B. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Low-e-coated, laminated vision glass with two plies of clear
[float glass] [heat-strengthened float glass] [fully tempered float glass].
1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: [3.0 mm] [4.0 mm] [5.0 mm] [6.0 mm] [As
indicated] <Insert thickness designation>.
2. Interlayer Thickness: [0.030 inch] [0.060 inch] [0.090 inch].
3. Low-E Coating: [Pyrolytic on second] [Pyrolytic on third] [Sputtered on
second] [Sputtered on third] [Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third]
surface.
4. Visible Light Transmittance: <Insert value> percent minimum.
5. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: <Insert value> maximum.
6. Summer Daytime U-Factor: <Insert value> maximum.
7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: <Insert value> maximum.
8. Provide safety glazing labeling.
A. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: 45-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise
limitation.
B. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: 60-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise
limitation.
C. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: 90-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise
limitation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin
course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges
are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch
tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to
jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads
and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by
inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward
centers of openings.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely
in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting
blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses
in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact
with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for
buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing
by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is
damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For automatic door operators. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
E. Product certificates.
G. Maintenance data.
H. Sample warranty.
1.5 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated, complying with standards indicated below:
UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation
devices.
D. Hinges: See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for type of hinge for each door that
door operator shall accommodate.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Opening Force:
a. If Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided,
not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more
than 15 lbf required to fully open door.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door
from closing or opening.
D. Operation: Power-assisted opening that reduces force to open door and power-
assisted spring closing. Pushing or pulling on door activates the operator. Provide
time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by
BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator shall function as manual
door closer, with or without electrical power.
G. Features:
H. Exposed Finish: Finish exposed components with finish matching door hardware .
a. Mounting:
1) Interior: Recess mounted, semiflush in wall
2) Exterior: Recess mounted in exterior wall.
C. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits,
provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked,
latched, or bolted.
2.6 FABRICATION
B. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and
moisture occurring or migrating within operator enclosure to the exterior.
C. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are
required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match
operator.
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that full-height finger guards are installed at each door with pivot hinges where
door has a clearance at hinge side greater than 1/4 inch and less than 3/4 inch with
door in any position.
3.2 INSTALLATION
D. Adjusting: Adjust automatic door operators to function smoothly and for weathertight
closure, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of
applicable BHMA standards.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 – Standard for Accessibility and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2003
E. BHMA A156.5 – Standard for Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products; 2001
H. BHMA A156.8 – Standard for Door Controls-Overhead Stops and Holders; 2000
O. BHMA A156.29 – Standard for Exit Locks, Exit Locks with Exit Alarms, Exit Alarms and
Alarms for Exits; 2001
P. DHI A115 Series – Specification for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware;
Door and Hardware Institute; current edition
Q. DHI (LOCS) – Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 1990
R. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association; 2007
S. NFPA 101 – Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire
Protection Agency; 2006
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit six (6) copies of the hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated
by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the
Door and Hardware Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned
for correction before checking. The hardware schedule shall clearly indicate the
architect’s hardware set and manufacturer of each proposed item. The schedule
shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware
Consultant, who shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and
correctness of the hardware schedule.
2. Provide two (2) copies of illustrations from the manufacturers catalogs and data
in brochure form.
3. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and
surrounding conditions. Indicate unsuitable items and proposed substitutions in
the hardware schedule.
4. Furnish hardware samples for design and finish as requested by the architect.
These samples may remain part of the project as long as product is protected
from damage and remain in new condition.
5. Provide a keying schedule using keyset symbols referenced in the Door and
Hardware Institute manual “Keying Systems and Nomenclature”. The keying
schedule shall be indexed by door number, keyset and hardware heading
number and shall include cross keying instructions and special stamping
instructions.
6. Provide a complete and detailed system of operating and elevation diagrams
specifically developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except
openings where only magnetic hold-opens and door position switches are
specified. Provide these diagrams with the hardware schedule submittal, for
approval. The following shall be included:
a. System schematic
b. Point to point wiring diagram
c. Riser diagram
d. Elevation of each door
e. Detail interface between electrified hardware and associated trades
C. Maintenance Data:
1. Submit three (3) sets of operating and maintenance manuals containing the
following information:
a. Complete information in the care, maintenance, lubrication, adjustment
and preservation of finishes.
b. Data on repair and replacement parts.
c. Catalog pages for each product.
d. Name, address and phone number of the local representative for each
manufacturer.
D. Keys:
1. Deliver with identifying tags to the Owner by security shipment direct from the
hardware supplier.
E. Warranty:
1. Submit manufacturers written warranty and assure that forms have been
completed in the Owners name and registered with the manufacturer.
E. Six (6) months after substantial completion of the project a factory representative of the
provided material shall perform a jobsite walk through. This will be done to determine if
products are performing as recommended by the manufacturer and meet all fire and life
safety requirements. Deficiencies due to installation shall be corrected by the general
contractor and defective material shall be replaced by the hardware distributor.
A. Conform to applicable code for requirements pertaining to fire rated doors and frames.
B. All Hardware on Fire Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
A. Convene one (1) month prior to commencing work of this section with the owner to
establish final keying and masterkey groups.
C. The general contractor shall arrange a meeting with the architect and owner to
establish security requirements for this project. This meeting shall be conducted prior to
erection of interior and exterior partitions to establish wire runs and location of junction
boxes and power supplies.
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door
number and hardware item code to match the hardware schedule.
B. Deliver, store and handle packaged hardware to prevent damage to finishes and
deterioration in the product due to the elements.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with other trades directly affected involving the manufacture or
fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.
B. Furnish two (2) complete sets of templates for door and frame preparation with copies
of the final approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules
as soon as possible to the hollow metal, wood door and aluminum door (if applicable)
fabricators so as not to delay production.
D. The general contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all Electrical System
rough-in and connections to electrified door hardware.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The warranty period shall be one (1) year from the date of substantial completion for all
items of hardware unless noted otherwise.
B. The warranty period for exit devices shall be five (5) years from the date of substantial
completion.
C. The warranty period for manual door closers shall be ten (10) years from the date of
substantial completion.
D. All manufacturers screws and attachments supplied with each hardware item must be
installed to maintain the warranty.
A. Provide special wrenches and tools as applicable to each different or special hardware
component.
C. Furnish three (3) dozen extra screws and other fasteners of each size, type and finish
used with the hardware items provided. These screws and fasteners are to be
delivered to the hardware installer for use during installation. All extra screws and
fasteners and all special installation tools furnished with the hardware shall be turned
over to the owner at the completion of the project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Hinges:
1. McKinney Products Company (MC)
2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BM)
3. Lawrence Brothers (LA)
D. Exit Devices:
1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 80 Series (SA)
2. Corbin Russwin ED5000 Series (CR)
3. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware 7100 Series (YA)
E. Push/Pulls:
1. McKinney Products Company (MC)
2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI)
3. Trimco (TR)
I. Manual Bolts:
1. McKinney Products Company (MC)
2. Door Controls International (DC)
3. Trimco (TR)
J. Protection Plates:
1. McKinney Products Company (MC)
2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI)
3. Trimco (TR)
K. Door Stops:
1. McKinney Products Company (MC)
2. Door Controls International (DC)
3. Trimco (TR)
L. Thresholds:
1. McKinney Products Company (MW)
2. Pemko Manufacturing Company (PE)
3. Zero International (ZE)
N. Key Cabinet:
1. Telkee (TE)
2. Aladin (AD)
3. Lund (LU)
2.03 HINGES
A. Provide hinges as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions:
1. Provide non-removable pin (NRP) feature, utilizing a pointed set screw, at
exterior openings and where listed in the hardware sets.
2. Screws shall be flat-head Phillips finished to match the hinge.
3. Drill 5/32 inch hole and use No. 12 x 1-1/4 inch steel threaded to the head wood
screws provided by the manufacturer for wood doors.
2.04 PIVOTS
A. Provide pivots as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions:
1. Pivot sets shall be selected based upon the weight of the door.
2. Intermediate pivots shall allow for vertical door adjustment with shims at bottom
arm.
3. Pivots tested and approved for use for fire rated doors shall have a steel base
material plated to the specified finish. Where non-rated or 20 minute rated doors
are listed, provide pivots of cast brass or bronze.
4. Provide pivots of the same manufacturer as the floor closer to insure visible
components match in appearance and adjustability.
A. Provide lock functions and trim as specified in the hardware sets, with the following
provisions:
1. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches.
2. Locks shall have field adjustable, beveled armored front, with a 1/8 inch
thickness minimum.
3. Cylinders shall be manufacturers restricted keyway, six pin.
4. Latchbolt shall be solid one-piece ¾ inch throw anti-friction stainless steel.
5. Deadbolt shall be a full one inch throw made of stainless steel and have two (2)
hardened steel roller inserts.
6. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim
but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf.
A. Provide exit device series and functions as specified in the hardware sets, with the
following provisions:
1. All exit devices shall be UL listed for panic. Exit devices for labeled doors shall
be UL listed as “Fire Exit Hardware”.
2. Where lever trim is specified, provide lever design to match lockset levers. Exit
device lever trim shall withstand 1000 inch pounds of torque without allowing
access and be free-wheeling where listed.
3. Provide cylinders for exit devices with locking trim and cylinder dogging.
Cylinders shall be manufacturers restricted keyway, six pin.
4. All exit devices shall be heavy duty push rail and cast chassis type construction.
Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of stainless steel, brass
or bronze not less than .072 inches thick. Painted or anodized aluminum shall
not be considered heavy duty and are not acceptable.
5. All exit devices shall be provided with flush end caps as designated in the
hardware sets as prefix (43).
6. Provide protective lexan touchpad on the exit device push rail to prevent
scratches and serve as a visible guide to the user.
7. Provide cylinder dogging feature for all non-rated exit devices.
2.07 KEYING
B. All locks and cylinders to be construction masterkeyed using the lost ball method.
E. All cylinders to be furnished with the manufacturers standard six pin tumbler.
H. All keys to be stamped with the keyset symbol and “DO NOT DUPLICATE”
I. Provide a factory issued bitting list indicating the key cut numbers corresponding with
the keyset symbol.
J. Provide a key control system BHMA grade 1 including key holding hooks, labels, two
sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key gathering envelopes and temporary
and permanent markers. Contain system in a metal cabinet with baked enamel finish
and locking hardware. The general contractor shall verify that the key cabinet is
installed per the owners location.
1. Furnish a wall mounted cabinet with hinged panel door equipped with key
holding panels and pin tumbler cylinder door lock.
2. Furnish key holding capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks and
cylinders.
K. The hardware supplier shall review the key system with the owners representative after
all of the operating keys have been tested in all cylinders by the general contractor, and
the construction masterkeying is voided.
2.08 CLOSERS
B. Heavy duty arms shall be provided with cast iron heavy duty soffit brackets. Stamped
bracket material will not be acceptable.
C. Provide drop plates, brackets or adaptors for door and frame as required to suit
conditions.
D. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, interior of exterior doors and stair side of
stairway doors, unless noted otherwise.
G. Closing speed, latching speed and back-check shall be controlled be separate key
operated valves. All valves to be captivated.
H. Closer covers shall be of high impact plastic material of flame retardant grade, secured
by machine screws. Projection of the closer body from the door shall not exceed 2-3/16
inches.
A. Provide floor closers as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions:
1. Floor closers shall be furnished with a rust proof cycolac cement case. Furnish
four machine screws for attachment.
2. Floor closers shall have a helical torsion spring with adjustable spring power.
Double acting closers shall have adjustable independent springs and closing
speed valves for each direction of door swing. Compression springs will not be
acceptable.
3. Floor closers shall have independent adjustment valves for closing speed, latch
speed, back check and delayed action. All features shall be adjustable without
removing the door or threshold. Separate and independent piston and cylinder
for hydraulic back check shall be provided. Dual action valves are not
acceptable.
4. Provide non-hold open units unless otherwise listed in the hardware sets. Where
hold open units are required, furnish closers designed for specific degree of
opening built into the spindle assembly and at same point as the dead stop.
Where hold open is listed, provide one of the following:
a. AHO – Automatically holds open at the specified degree.
b. SHO – Selective hold open may be switched ON/OFF by a separate
valve
5. Provide floor closers with permanent solid one-piece non-removable spindles
that allow vertical adjustment of the door. Provide specific size extended one
piece spindles to match the undercut of the door.
6. For exterior doors, provide floor closers with built-in dead stop and installed with
overhead stop; coordinated to provide simultaneous cushion and dead stop at
the top and bottom of the door. Closers, pivots and overhead stops shall be of
the same manufacturer to assure proper templating and door coordination.
7. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
disabled (PH prefix), provide units complying to ICC/ANSI A117.1, or other
governing codes and standards, with provisions for opening force and delayed
action closing.
8. Exterior doors shall be provided with sealed cement cases.
9. Provide floor closers of the same manufacturer as pivot sets to insure visible
components match in appearance and adjustability.
10. Floor closers shall have the capability of being shimmed without removing the
door.
11. Proved one 185 “Quickspotter” or similar device for each two floor closers
furnished.
A. Kickplates shall be .050 gauge and two (2) inches less the door width at single
openings, and one (1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, unless otherwise
specified. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as
shown in the hardware sets.
B. Mop plates shall be .050 gauge and one (1) inch less the door width at single openings
and one (1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, unless otherwise specified.
C. Push/Pull plates shall be stainless steel and beveled on all four (4) edges, unless
otherwise noted.
E. Provide all protection plates with countersunk screw holes and pan head machine or
self tapping screws.
A. Provide overhead stops and holders as specified in the hardware sets, with the
following provisions:
1. All overhead stops and holders shall be provided with extruded bronze
channels and arms.
2. All overhead stops and holders shall be provided with metal end caps
finished to match the channel.
A. Provide thresholds as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions:
1. Refer to drawings for special details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners.
2. Where thresholds are indicated to be used with floor closers or pivots, they shall
be provided by the same manufacturer. Thresholds shall be fluted on ramp
portion.
3. Provide machine screws and expansion bolts for all thresholds at concrete
floors.
4. Provide self-tapping fasteners for weatherstripping and door seals being applied
to hollow metal frames.
5. Where thresholds are specified at openings exposed to pools or high corrosive
areas stainless steel or zinc plated fasteners shall be provided.
A. All hardware for doors listed as existing to remain on the door schedule or in the
hardware sets will remain. The general contractor shall clean and adjust these items for
proper alignment and operation.
B. The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware specified for existing doors
and frames will work with the existing hardware preparations. Lack of verification, that
requires additional work to the existing doors and frames or additional material, will be
the responsibility of the general contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as
instructed by the manufacturer.
B. The general contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather
elements prior to installing interior hardware. Examine hardware before installation to
ensure it is free from defects.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
C. Install hardware on fire rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.
D. Set units level. Plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment to
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
E. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical openings in full bed of butyl-rubber or
polyisobutylene mastic sealant forming a tight seal between threshold and surface to
which it is set.
F. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to centerline of hardware item:
1. For steel doors and frames and wood doors comply with DHI Recommended
Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames.
2. Hardware locations for steel and wood doors shall be the same.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilation equipment, and to comply with referenced accessibility
requirements.
SET #1
Doors: 000A
SET #2
Doors: 001A
SET #3
SET #3.1
SET #4
Doors: 003A
SET #5
Doors: 005A
SET #6
Doors: 007A
SET #7
SET #8
SET #9
Doors: 011A
SET #10
Doors: 012A
SET #11
SET #12
Doors: 017A
SET #13
Doors: 018A
SET #14
SET #15
SET #15.1
Doors: 203A
SET #16
Doors: 022A
SET #17
Doors: 023A
SET #18
Doors: 024A
SET #19
Doors: 024B
SET #20
Doors: 026A
SET #21
Doors: 103A
SET #22
Doors: 103B
SET #23
Doors: 104A
Exit devices must be set in the dogged position before automatic door operator is
activated
Key switch to be used to activate and deactivate the automatic door operator
SET #24
Doors: 104B
SET #25
SET #26
Doors: S2A
SET #27
Doors: 207A
SET #27.1
Doors: 208A
SET #28
SET #29
SET #30
Doors: 301A
SET #31
Doors: 309A
SET #32
Doors: S1B
Exit device must be set in the dogged position before automatic door operator is
activated
Key switch to be used to activate and deactivate the automatic door operator
SET #33
Doors: T1A
SET #34
Doors: T2A
SET #35
Doors: 027A
Opening List
000A 1
001A 2
002A 3
003A 4
005A 5
007A 6
007B 7
008A 8
009A 8
010A 8
011A 9
012A 10
013A 7
015A 11
016A 11
017A 12
018A 13
019A 14
020A 15
022A 16
023A 17
024A 18
024B 19
025A 14
026A 20
027A 35
103A 21
103B 22
104A 23
104B 24
203A 15.1
204A 15
205A 15
206A 15
207A 27
208A 27.1
300A 29
301A 30
305A 29
306A 3.1
309A 31
310A 3
311A 3.1
S1A 25
S1B 32
S1C 25
S1D 25
S2A 26
S2B 28
S2C 28
T1A 33
T2A 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 1 Section "Unit
Prices."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: See Division 1 Section "Special Procedures for Historic Treatment" for other
definitions.
C. Window: Includes window frame and sash, unless otherwise indicated by the context.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site,
provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material
2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end
result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.
C. Shop Drawings: For repair and replacement of historic wood windows and
components. Show location and extent of replacement work, with enlarged details of
replacement parts indicating materials, profiles, joinery, reinforcing, method of splicing
into or attaching to existing wood window, accessory items, and finishes.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. Prepare mockups so
they are inconspicuous or reversible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
D. Window Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for base material and finish
requirements indicated.
1. Wood Species: Match wood species of exterior window trim and frame parts .
2. Wood Window Members and Trim: Match profiles and detail of existing window
members and trim.
3. Glazing Stops: Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing
system indicated.
4. Exposed Hardware: [Reuse] [Match] existing exposed window hardware.
5. Weather Stripping: Full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each
operable sash.
1. Weather Seals: Elastomeric preformed seal with integral barrier fin or fins of
semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material.
B. Cleaning Materials:
C. Adhesives: Wood adhesives for exterior exposure, with minimum 15- to 45-minute
cure at 70 deg F, in gunnable and liquid formulations as recommended by adhesive
manufacturer for each type of repair.
E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of
aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel complying with
requirements in ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (Severe) service condition.
A. Factory-Finished Windows: Alkyd finish system consisting of primer and two finish
coats on exposed exterior and interior wood surfaces.
1. Finish Coats: Match intermediate coat and topcoat products used for adjacent,
repaired wood windows, as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting Restoration."
.
2. Color and Gloss: Match colors indicated on Drawings .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
B. Clean existing wood windows of mildew, algae, moss, plant material, loose paint,
grease, dirt, and other debris by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent
solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. After cleaning, rinse thoroughly with
fresh water. Allow to dry before repairing or painting.
B. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use only the
gentlest mechanical methods, such as scraping and natural-fiber bristle brushing, that
will not abrade wood substrate, reducing clarity of detail. Do not use abrasive methods
such as sanding, wire brushing, or power tools except as indicated as part of the
historic treatment program and as approved by Architect.
C. Repair and Refinish Existing Hardware: Dismantle window hardware; repair and
refinish it to match finish samples.
D. Repair Wood Windows: Match existing materials and features, retaining as much
original material as possible to perform repairs.
E. Replace Wood Window Units: Where indicated, duplicate and replace units with
salvaged, sound, original wood or with new wood matching existing wood. Use
surviving prototypes to create patterns for duplicate replacements.
F. Protection of Openings: Where sash or windows are indicated for removal, cover
resultant openings with temporary enclosures so that openings are weathertight during
repair period.
G. Identify removed windows, sash, and members with numbering system corresponding
to window locations to ensure reinstallation in same location. Key windows, sash, and
members to Drawings showing location of each removed unit. Permanently stamp
units in a location that will be concealed after reinstallation.
3.3 GLAZING
A. Remove cracked and damaged glass and glazing materials from openings and prepare
surfaces for reglazing.
C. Remove glass and glazing from openings and prepare surfaces for reglazing.
D. Reinstall glass with indicated glazing system and according to Division 8 Section
"Glazing."
E. Disposal of Removed Glass: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of it
unless otherwise indicated.
A. General: Patch wood members that are damaged and exhibit depressions, holes, or
similar voids, and that have limited rotted or decayed wood.
B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces either before applying wood
consolidant or after removing rotted or decayed wood.
C. Apply wood-patching compound to fill depressions, nicks, cracks, and other voids
created by removed or missing wood.
A. General: Replace parts of or entire wood window members at locations scheduled and
where damage is too extensive to patch .
1. Mill new and existing glazed members to accommodate new glass thickness.
2. Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing system indicated.
3. Provide glazing stops to match contour of sash frames.
A. General: Replace existing wood window and sash units with new custom-fabricated
units to match existing at locations scheduled and where damage is too extensive to
repair .
C. Mill glazed members to accommodate glass thickness. Glaze units prior to installation.
D. Install units level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding movement,
anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing,
trim, and other adjacent construction.
E. Set sill members in bed of sealant for weathertight construction unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Weather Stripping: Install full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each
operable sash.
H. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
I. Disposal of Removed Units: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of
them unless otherwise indicated.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from
basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to
ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof
heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site,
provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material
G. Maintenance data.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.5 WARRANTY
2. Warranty Period:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a
moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints,
blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2
inches wide; water-repellent preservative treated.
2.3 WINDOW
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and
glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator
framing.
B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash
and ventilator.
C. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied.
D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units,
complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow
for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal
expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates
capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
E. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8
Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash
and ventilator frames.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for
installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to
wall flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight
construction.
E. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight
fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight
closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or
damaged during construction period.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
A. General Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the following:
H. Maintenance data.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain all-glass systems from single source from single
manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, with strength and durability characteristics of not
less than Alloy 6063-T5.
1. Stainless-Steel Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
A. Fitting Configuration:
A. General: Heavy-duty entrance door hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types
recommended by manufacturer for all-glass entrance systems indicated. For exposed
parts, match metal and finish of patch fittings .
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings
before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after
tempering.
1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that
when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or
lite.
B. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest
extent possible.
A. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.
E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate
indicated.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
D. Product certificates.
E. Operation and maintenance data: Furnish complete manuals describing the materials,
devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining the doors under
this section. Include manufacturer's brochures and parts lists describing the actual
materials used in the product.
F. Product Test Reports: Submit copy of manufacturer’s actual burn test report clearly
detailing the description of product, fire endurance method, test results and test
conclusions of actual burn test as conducted and witnessed by UL or WH.
C. Testing: Provide documentation from a certified testing agency that the fire door
operator and self closing governor mechanism has been tested for a minimum of
50,000 cycles and 500 trip tests.
D. Manufacturer Requirements: Door manufacturer shall have been in the business of and
have experience in manufacturing the type of product covered under this specification
section as well as giving credible service for a minimum of five (5) years. Provide list of
at least ten (10) completed projects which include the products covered under this
section.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Door Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and
installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in
materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects
shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. General: Each unit shall consist of an interlocking single folding panel curtain
suspended from stainless steel head track system. Curtain shall be designed to travel
in a horizontal plane, smoothly and without binding. Curtain shall be driven to the open
and close position by a positive action sprocket drive chain system designed and built
by the door manufacturer.
1. Panels: Shall be fabricated of interlocking 18 gauge stainless steel panels with
an approximate cross section not greater than 7" wide.
D. Leading Edge: Each curtain shall be furnished of a stainless steel member of tubular
design to provide stiffness, limit deflection of curtain and provide for a tight fitting
closure.
E. Perimeter Smoke Seals: Provided UL classified perimeter smoke seals and sweeps.
F. Head Track System: Shall be fabricated of not less than 1/8" thick stainless steel
formed shape with removable pan and integral positive action drive chain system.
Overall track width shall not be greater than 9”.
H. Electric Motor Operator: Each door shall be provided with a compact power unit
designed and built by the door manufacturer. Operators shall be equipped with an
adjustable screw-type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High
efficiency planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a
centrifugal governor, spring-set solenoid-operated brake and a fail-safe magnetic
release device, completely housed to protect against damage, dust, and moisture.
Operator is to be NEMA type 1 enclosure. An efficient overload protection device,
which will break the power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings
shall be integral with the unit.
1. Motor: Shall be totally enclosed, intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball
bearing type with a class A or better insulation. Horsepower of motor is to be ½
hp minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size which ever is greater.
2. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with
mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 24 volt control circuit.
3. Reducer: Planetary gear type, 90% efficiency minimum, 77:1 reduction.
4. Brake: Double shoe type, continuous duty, solenoid activated, integral within the
operators housing.
5. Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station.
I. Self-Closing Mechanism: The fire door shall be designed with a centrifugal governor as
an integral part of the operator's construction. The automatic release mechanism shall
be triggered by a smoke detector or fire alarm. When triggered the door is released
and begins to close due to the captured counterbalance unit force. The speed of the
door shall be governed by a centrifugal governor, designed to match the normal
operating speed of the door, at a rate of not greater than 9" per second or less than 6"
per second. The fire door shall self-close under it’s own power, battery back-up
systems to achieve self closing are not acceptable.
J. Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device
shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When
power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarm, the
door shall begin to self-close. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent
the fire door from closing for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have
lapsed, the fire door shall self-close without the aid of electricity or battery back-up
systems. Once power has been restored the automatic reset time delay as well as the
fire door shall reset.
K. Safety Edge: Each fire door shall be designed with a radio activated obstruction
sensing safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during
the closing operation, the door shall stop, reverse and return to the open
position.
L. Easy Trip Test Feature: Each fire door shall be designed so that it may be trip-tested
simply by cutting power to the operator. By turning the power switch off, the door shall
self-close without the aid or electricity or battery back-up systems. Once the fire door
has satisfactorily closed, it shall be reset simply by turning the power back on. No
ladders or tools shall be needed to reset the door or the time delay unit.
M. Finish:
1. After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt. Steel
components shall receive two coats of rust inhibitive primer. Stainless steel
components shall be of stainless steel type 304 with number 4 polish finish.
A. Stainless Steel Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to
remove dirt. Steel components shall receive two coats of rust inhibitive primer.
Stainless steel components shall be of stainless steel type 304 with number 4 polish
finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify
architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and
timely completion of work.
B. Verify dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify Architect in any instance
where dimensions vary.
C. Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not
to delay job progress.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of door
manufacturer.
B. Install door assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb,
level, straight and true.
D. Install wiring in accordance with applicable local codes and the National Electrical
Code Standard. Materials shall be UL listed.
E. Install fire doors according to NFPA 80 and manufacturer's written instructions for type
of door operation indicated and fire-protection rating required.
F. Drill necessary holes cleanly, with no broken areas or spalls, for installation of
fasteners in concrete or masonry. Remove and replace damaged masonry as
directed.
A. Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation
until accepted by owner.
B. Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way.
C. Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and
methods.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of coiling grille and accessory.
B. LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352
including:
C. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or
detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
E. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Grille Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and
installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in
materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects
shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Grille Curtain: ST1 pattern consisting of 5/16" diameter solid galvanized steel rods,
encased by 3/8” stainless steel tubular spacers 4-1/2” long. The vertical links are made
of 1/16” x 5/8” stainless steel and are set in a staggered pattern. The vertical spacing
shall be 9” while the horizontal spacing is 2”.
C. Bottom Bar: Stainless steel tubular section of not less than 1½” x 3" formed to fit
curtain and finished to match grille curtain.
D. Guides: Each guide assembly shall be fabricated of a minimum 3" x 3" steel angle or
support tube with a 2” x 3” stainless steel inner guide angle and a 3” x 3” stainless steel
outer guide angle. Guides shall be shall be finished to match grille curtain.
E. Mounting Brackets: Hot rolled 3/16” steel plate. Brackets shall be provided to house
both ends of the counterbalance assembly.
H. Electric Motor Operator: Grille shall be provided with a compact power unit designed
and built by the grille manufacturer. Operator shall be equipped with an adjustable
screw-type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High efficiency
planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a centrifugal
governor, spring-set solenoid operated brake and a fail safe magnetic release device,
completely housed to protect against damage, dust and moisture. Operator is to be
NEMA type 1 enclosure. An efficient overload protection device, which will break the
power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings shall be integral with
the unit.
1. Motor: Shall be totally, intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type
with a class A or better insulation. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start,
polyphase shall be squirrel cage induction. Horsepower of motor is to be ½ hp
minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size, which ever is greater.
2. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with
mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 10 amp continuous rating and 24 volt
control circuit.
3. Reducer: Planetary gear type, 90% efficiency minimum, 77:1 reduction.
4. Brake: Double shoe type, continuous duty, solenoid activated, integral within the
operator's housing.
5. Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station marked open,
close and stop.
J. Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device
shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When
power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarm, the
grille shall begin to self-open. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent
the grille from opening for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have lapsed,
the grille shall self-open without the aid of electricity or battery back-up systems. Once
power has been restored the automatic reset time delay as well as the grille shall reset
themselves.
K. Safety Edge: Each grille shall be designed with a radio activated obstruction sensing
safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during the closing
operation, the grille shall stop, reverse and return to the fully open position.
L. Easy Trip Test Feature: Each grille shall be designed so that it may be trip-tested
simply by cutting power to the operator. By turning the power switch off, the grille shall
self-open without the aid or electricity or battery back-up systems. Once the grille has
satisfactorily opened, it shall be reset simply by turning the power back on. No ladders
or tools shall be needed to reset the grille or the time delay unit.
M. Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt.
1. Steel components: Two coats of rust inhibitive primer.
2. Stainless steel components: Stainless steel type 304 with number 4 polish finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify
architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and
timely completion of work.
B. Verify all dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify the architect in any
instance where dimensions vary.
C. Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not
to delay job progress.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of the
grille manufacturer.
B. Install grille assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb,
level, straight and true.
D. Install wiring in accordance with applicable local codes and the National Electrical
Code Standard. Materials shall be UL listed.
E. Test grille opening sequence when activated by the building's fire alarm system. Reset
grille after successful test.
A. Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation
until accepted by owner.
B. Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way.
C. Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and
methods.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings .
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
E. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data
pertinent to installation.
A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are
identical to assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following
test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain
access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in
the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
C. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from
steel sheet.
4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal
with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch .
5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
6. Hinges: Concealed-pin type.
7. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by ring turn with interior release.
9. Lock: Self-latching device with mortise cylinder lock.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units
ready for installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth,
flat surfaces without blemishes.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to
types of supports indicated.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane
when closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face
panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces to receive finish material.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Unit Prices: Door refinishing to be provided under unit prices are described in
Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site,
provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material
2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end
result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
D. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of
restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on
other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for
this Project.
E. Samples:
B. Mock-Ups: Prior to beginning work, the Contractor shall prepare examples of each
type of hardware to be cleaned for the Architect’s approval.
A. Coordinating Work: Coordinate hardware cleaning so that it will not conflict with the
work of other trades.
A. The intent of refinishing is to restore the color, finish and overall surface uniformity of
the historic doors, consistent with the original design intent. A like new appearance is
neither expected nor desired.
A. Existing Conditions: Determine that surfaces to which finishes are to be applied are
even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects affecting proper application.
Correct or report defective surfaces to Contracting Officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Commercial Stripper such as "Kwick Superfast paint and Varnish Remover" (Klean
Strip, Inc.), "Rock Miracle" (Pyrock Chemical Co.), or approved equal.
B. Stain: Penetrating, permanent oil-based stain such as "Oil Stain" (Sherwin Williams), or
approved equal, colored to match existing interior and exterior wood.
I. Alternative Solvent: A mixture of 75% toluene, 24% acetone and 1% butyl acetate.
J. Acetone (C3H6O): A volatile fragrant flammable liquid ketone used chiefly as a solvent
and in organic synthesis. Other chemical or common names include Dimethyl ketone;
Propanone
K. Detergent containing trisodium phosphate, such as "Spic n' Span", or approved equal.
O. Bronze wool
R. Tack rag
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Inspect the work for any serious defects or conditions which
would interfere or prevent a satisfactory application of materials under this Section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Remove all non-original door louvers, panels and transom panels
taking care not to damage the remainder of the door, frame or paneling.
B. Replace the non-original elements with new wood which matches the species of the
original wood and which matches the detailing of the original millwork.
C. Hardware: Remove existing hardware, door numbers, and other applied elements, and
store for reinstallation.
G. Protection:
1. Make sure work area is well-ventilated and wear protective clothing and rubber
gloves. Do not allow smoking in the work area.
2. Place a fire extinguisher for Class B fires at entrances for emergency use.
3. Change clothes as often as necessary to be effective in cleaning.
4. Daily, dispose of all used solutions, finishing products, solvent residue and soiled
rags in sealed noncombustible containers to prevent a fire hazard.
5. Protect all surfaces adjacent to wood being refinished.
6. Maintain a healthy level of air circulation within the space being treated.
Regularly employ and maintain exhaust fans or other air moving devices to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
7. Curtain off areas being treated from other trades and occupants to prevent fumes
from reaching other parts of the building.
8. Wear appropriate safety devices such as respirators fitted with the correct
cartridge, gloves, and other protective clothing.
3.3 APPLICATION
1. Wet steel wool with solvent and rub over the door to remove varnish build-up and
smooth out checked surface. Replace soiled steel wool frequently with clean and
continue with wiping process until a smooth, even-colored surface is achieved.
Use no water on wood surface under any circumstances.
2. Work only one 4' square area at a time. Work area should be within a
comfortable arms reach.
3. If solvent affects the stained color of the wood, discontinue use and use an
alternative solvent mixture as listed in Section 2.02 Materials.
B. Allow surface to dry thoroughly; no less than 24 hours -OR- Apply commercial stripper
following manufacturer's instructions.
D. Lightly sand the surface with 220 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper as needed to remove
carbon soiling and finish damage not removed by solvent application.
E. Wipe surface with a tack rag to remove traces of bronze wool, sand and dust prior to
applying new finishes.
H. Fill deep scratches and gouges with shellac burn sticks tinted to match the wood stain.
1. Make sure that surface is clean, level and free of defects. Promptly report to the
Architect any unanticipated conditions which may affect the quality of the finish.
2. Brush or spray apply 3 coats of varnish to produce a uniform sheen and
appearance.
3. Allow each coat to dry for at least 4 hours.
J. Lightly sand with #400 grit silicone carbon paper or rub with fine steel wool between
coats. Vacuum surface and wipe with a dry tack rag to remove all grit and dust prior to
applying next finish coat.
K. After curing, lightly rub surface with fine steel wool to replicate original finish.
3.4 ADJUSTING/CLEANING
A. Adjust door to assure proper operation. Replace or rehang doors which are hinge
bound and do not swing or operate freely. Replace worn hinge pins with replicates.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind
of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data.
D. Samples: Representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and
solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished
doors.
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on
testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible.
B. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201,
for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and
permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other
requirements specified. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites with wet-use adhesives.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood
products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins.
A. Exterior Stile and Rail Wood Doors; Types A, D & F: Exterior doors complying with
AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other requirements
specified.
2. Grade: Premium.
3. Finish: Opaque.
A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors; Types A, C, D and G: Interior doors complying with
AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other requirements
specified.
2. Grade: Premium.
3. Finish: Transparent.
4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple, plain sawed/sliced.
5. Door Construction for Transparent Finish:
a. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, edge- and end-glued clear lumber.
6. Glass: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick, complying with
Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors; Type A: Fire-rated (90-minute rating) doors
complying with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other
requirements specified.
2. Grade: Premium.
3. Finish: Transparent .
4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple, plain sawed/cliced.
5. Interior Fire-Rated Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch- thick, edged and veneered
mineral-core stiles and rails and 1-1/8-inch- thick, veneered mineral-core raised
panels.
6. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with
improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting.
B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform
clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated:
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering.
Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only
to extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with
one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.
E. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated,
complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's
standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in
place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.
F. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials,
finish, and quality of construction.
G. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent
preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with
manufacturer's standard metal flashing.
H. Prehung Doors: Provide stile and rail doors as prehung units including doors, frames,
weather stripping, and hardware.
1. Provide wood door frames, other than fire-rated wood door frames, that comply
with Division 6 Section " Interior Architectural Woodwork."
2. Provide hardware, including weather stripping and thresholds, that complies with
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
2.5 FINISHING
1. Grade: Premium.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire-rated wood door frames level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent
materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
C. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, [WDMA I.S.6,
"Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors,"] [AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards,"] [WI's "Manual of Millwork,"] [WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for
Architectural Stile and Rail Doors,"] and other requirements specified.
D. Field-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after
fitting and machining.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind
of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of
hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by
a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as
close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood
products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.
E. Mineral-Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of
referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection
rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability
approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to
eliminate through-bolting hardware.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with
improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only
by mullions.
7. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then
entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do
not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated
doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and
mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering
unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4
inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire rated door and framing systems for installation as full vision fire rated doors
and windows.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section “Structural Steel Framing:” Steel attachment members
2. Section “Metal Fabrications:” Steel attachment members inserts and anchors
3. Section “Air Barriers:” Perimeter air, water and vapor seal between the work of
this section and adjacent construction
4. Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” Flashing between this work and other
work
5. Section “Firestopping:” Firestops between work of this section and other fire
resistive assemblies.
6. Section “Door Hardware:” Door hardware other than that provided by the work of
this section
7. Section “Automatic Door Operators” opener for door to comply with ADA and
Local Authority opening force requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Fire Rating -- Window Assembly: Capable of providing a fire rating for 60 minutes.
C. Opening Applications in fire rated partitions or area separation walls and corridors
where opening protection is specified to provide 60 minute rating.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product
descriptions and technical data.
C. Shop Drawings: Show doors, frames, hardware and steel frame components as
shown on drawings and schedules. Detail any need for on-site fabrication on shop
drawings.
E. Samples for Initial Color Selection: For steel frames with factory-applied powder coat
color finishes.
1. Duplicate copies of manufacturer's powder coating color charts showing the full
range of colors available.
G. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on drawings for glazed openings
in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and
location.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain framing system, glazing and
glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method
indicated.
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed
mechanical joints and must not require job site fabrication.
E. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed
mechanical joints and must not require job site fabrication.
F. Listings and Labels - Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by
Underwriter Laboratory maintaining a current listing or certification. Label assemblies
accordance with limits of manufacturer’s listing.
A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to the work of this
section.
A. Deliver, store and handle under provisions specified by manufacturer. For details on
storage and product handling, please contact Technical Glass Products and request
information on storage and product handling.
C. Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities.
A. Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication of frame units. If field measurements will
not be available in a timely manner coordinate planned measurements with the work of
other sections.
1. Note whether field or planned dimensions were used in the creation of the shop
drawings.
B. Coordinate the work of this section with others effected including but not limited to:
other interior components and door hardware beyond that provided by this section.
1.10 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Frame System for Door: “Heat Barrier Series Frame System” by TGP; fire-rated steel
frame system as manufactured and supplied by Technical Glass Products, 8107
Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 (800-426-0279) fax (800-451-9857) e-mail
sales@fireglass.com web site http://www.fireglass.com.
D. Substitutions: Substitutions for Glazing Material and Frame System not permitted.
E. Logo: Each piece of fire-rated glazing shall be labeled with a permanent logo including
name of product, manufacture, testing laboratory (UL® only), fire rating period, safety
glazing standards, and date of manufacture.
F. Performance: Glass must be rated to stop fire from either direction and must meet all
testing requirements including the required hose-stream test (where fire-rating exceeds
20 minutes).
2.4 FABRICATION
C. Factory prepares steel door assemblies for field mounting of hardware when
necessary.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C. Provide high traffic areas or areas requiring a door motion force of greater than 20
pounds with power assisted hardware for use with manufacturer’s frame system.
D. Operating hardware for Fireframes® Heat Barrierr Series Single Outswing Doors with Exit
Device. Each to have the following.
Item Description Manufacturer Finish
*
3 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass PTM
Products
1 Exit Device F5300 Rim Dorma 630
1 Lever Trim Rectangular lever handles Technical Glass 630
Products
1 Cylinder ANSI Mortise Schlage C Technical Glass 626
Keyway Products
1 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied Dorma 689
Closer
1 Auto door Bottom 420APKL Smoke Seal Pemko MA
1 Weather Seal Perimeter Gasket Technical Glass
Products
Balance of hardware by others
* FINISH LEGEND:
PTM Painted to match frame
MA Mill Finish Aluminum
689 Aluminum Paint
630 Satin Stainless Steel
626 Satin Chrome Plated
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and members to which the work of this section attaches or adjoins
prior to frame installation.
C. Notify Architect of any conditions which jeopardize the integrity of the proposed fire wall
and door system.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire window and door by a specialty contractor with appropriate experience
qualifications; and in strict accordance with the reviewed shop drawings.
C. Install glazing in strict accordance with fire resistant glazing material manufacturer’s
specifications.
1. Field cutting or tampering is not permissible.
E. Install plumb and true. Limit out of plumb or true to 1/8 inch in 10’-0” in any dimension.
B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door function and hardware for smooth operation. Coordinate with other
hardware suppliers for function and use of any other attached hardware.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating
substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days
before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.
Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal
thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed
applications.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-
mil dry film thickness per coat.
A. Jamb Anchors:
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick,
and as follows:
A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8
inch high unless otherwise indicated.
B. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as
frames.
C. Terminated Stops: Where indicated, terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a
[45] [90]-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover
opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth
and flush with frame.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
2.7 FABRICATION
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment
plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make
smooth, flush, and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to
be grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four
spot welds per anchor.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as
follows:
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as
follows:
D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated.
Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
hollow metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that
each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
doors and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing
and type of installation indicated.
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
B. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair
paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside
the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.
F. Warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside
the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and
joint substrates.
1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for
joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is
deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come
in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
a. Pecora Corporation.
b. USG Corporation.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or
primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs
below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air
pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
1. Joint Locations:
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints in dimension stone cladding.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and stone.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows and elevator entrances.
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
c. Other joints as indicated.
1. Joint Location:
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For penetration firestopping, including printed
statement of VOC content and chemical components.
C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration
firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.
1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
F. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits
for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are
needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those
components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by
qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components
of firestopping.
D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following
results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings
and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels
will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use
mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of
permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the
following information on labels:
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes SFRMs applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind
other construction when the Work is completed.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of sprayed fire-resistive material for each construction
and fire-resistance rating, applicable fire-resistive design designations of a qualified
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
minimum thicknesses.
E. Research/evaluation reports.
1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable
classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing
requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-
resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats,
tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final
application.
3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing
and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in
C. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency
to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.
1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced
fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.
2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience,
has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.
F. Mockups: Apply mockups to [verify selections made under sample submittals] [and to
set quality standards for materials and execution].
1. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 100 sq. ft. of surface for each product
indicated.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use
natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive
material dries thoroughly.
C. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in
other Sections to comply with the following requirements:
1.5 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for average and individual densities, or greater if
required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI
Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design
indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch, per
ASTM E 605:
3. Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory
testing of 0.75-inch minimum thickness of SFRM.
4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum
thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as
specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft..
5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive
product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:
D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and
finish required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive
material manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories,
corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to
receive SFRM.
E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer
of SFRM.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A
substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and
related materials and construction are specified.
2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill
scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible
encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-
resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire
exposure.
3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support
sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related
work are completed.
E. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials
during application.
H. Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance
ratings and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for
conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate
in position required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use
anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach
accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment of lath and fabric to
substrate.
I. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where
required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM
manufacturer for material and application indicated.
J. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be
protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install
body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.
L. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM
over which they are applied.
M. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater
thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article.
1. SFRM.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report
whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-
resistance design.
1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or
partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq.
in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605.
2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of
structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for
structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for
joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns
per ASTM E 605.
3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency
and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of
construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical
Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For
each 10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion
from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of
construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736.
D. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for
cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.
E. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results
indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as
specified above.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing.
2. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
4. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
5. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including
plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between
shop- and field-assembled work.
1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing
and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion
joints, expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and
connections to adjoining work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.
D. Maintenance data.
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on
Drawings.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including built-in gutter fascia fascia trim,
approximately 10 feet long, including supporting construction cleats, seams,
attachments, underlayment, and accessories.
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper.
1. Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: Mill.
A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete
sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of
primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder:
1. For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and
trim and remain watertight.
2.4 REGLETS
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing
indicated with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
1. Material: Copper, 16 oz./sq. ft. .
2. Finish: Mill .
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to
design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item
indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back
to form hems.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners
are not allowed on faces exposed to view.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for
intended use.[ Rivet joints where necessary for strength.]
G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer.[ Rivet joints where necessary for strength.]
A. Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, with riveted and soldered joints,
complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required.
Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and
accessories from same metal as gutters unless otherwise indicated.
1. Accessories: Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and
hardware cloth screen .
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top
edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and built-in
overflows. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .
A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .
D. Eave, Rake, Ridge, and Hip Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar
flashings to extend 1 inch beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-
inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage.
Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that
completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall
remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing
and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous
coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or
install a course of polyethylene sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24
inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used
or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less
than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws metal decking
F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-
tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning
where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.
1. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper.
G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for
strength.
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage
system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate
installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped joints sealed with
sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures
and seal watertight with sealant.
1. Install felt underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at
eaves and under felt underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides a minimum of 2
inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end
laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails.
Install slip sheet over felt underlayment.
2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50
feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with
fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and
bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch
below gutter discharge.
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate
at staggered 3-inch centers.
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of
wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and
louvers.
D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and
similar flashings to extend 1 inch beyond wall openings.
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing
and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Slate shingles.
2. Underlayment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples:
1. Slate Shingle: Full size, of each color, size, texture, and shape.
2. Ridge Cap : 12 inches long.
C. Sample warranty.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each color of slate shingle from single quarry capable of
producing slate of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace
slate roofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Slate Shingles: ASTM C 406, Grade S1; heavy texture roofing slate; hard, dense, and
sound; chamfered edges, with nail holes machine punched or drilled and countersunk.
No broken or cracked slates, no broken exposed corners, and no broken corners on
covered ends that could sacrifice nailing strength or laying of a watertight roof.
1. Basis of Design: Black Diamond Slate; “Dover Black.”
B. Starter Slate: Slate shingles with chamfered nail holes front-side punched.
A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
C. Slating Nails: ASTM F 1667, copper, smooth shanked, wire nails; 0.135-inch minimum
thickness; sharp pointed; with 3/8-inch- minimum diameter flat head; of sufficient length
to penetrate a minimum of 3/4 inch into sheathing.
1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal
as flashing.
D. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section " Miscellaneous
Carpentry."
A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the
eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum
of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten
with felt underlayment nails.
B. Double-Layer Felt Underlayment, where required: Install on roof deck parallel with and
starting at the eaves. Install a 19-inch- wide starter course at eaves and completely
cover with full-width second course. Install succeeding courses lapping previous
courses 19 inches in shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches. Stagger end
laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment
nails.
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with
low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable.
Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than
3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches, staggered 24 inches between courses.
Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.
1. Lap roof-deck felt underlayment over first layer of valley felt underlayment at
least 6 inches.
A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
B. Install first and succeeding shingle courses with chamfered face up. Install full-width
first course at rake edge.
D. Maintain uniform exposure of shingle courses [between eaves and ridge] [midway
between eaves and ridge and increase head lap of succeeding shingle courses to
ensure uniform exposure on remaining shingle courses].
E. Extend shingle starter course and first course 2 inches over fasciae at eaves.
F. Extend shingle starter course and succeeding courses 1 inch over fasciae at rakes.
G. Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections
through roof.
H. Hang slate with two slating nails for each shingle with nail heads lightly touching slate.
Do not drive nails home drawing slates downward or leave nail head protruding enough
to interfere with overlapping shingle above.
1. Install and anchor wood nailer strips of thicknesses to match abutting courses of
slate shingles, terminating nailer strip 3 to 4 inches from the eave. Cover with felt
underlayment strip, extending to underlying slate but concealed by ridge slate.
2. Anchor ridge slate to supporting wood nailer strip with two nails for each slate
shingle without nails penetrating underlying slate.
1. Install and anchor wood nailer strips of thickness to match abutting courses of
slate shingles. Cover nailer strip with felt underlayment strip, extending on to
underlying slate but concealed by hip slate. Anchor hip slate to nailer strip with
two nails located in upper third of hip-slate length.
2. Notch starter shingle and first shingle course at hip to fit around nailer strips so
no wood is exposed at ridge eave.
3. Lay hip slate in bed of asphalt roofing cement or butyl sealant.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins
with adjoining construction.
1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
C. Product certificates.
D. Qualification data.
B. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall
assembly , 150 sq. ft. , incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding,
window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface
preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and
penetrations of air barrier membrane.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
a. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area
at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
c. Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
d. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F ; ASTM D 1970.
e. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement;
ASTM C 836.
f. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154.
g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour
immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D 570.
h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms ; ASTM E 96, Water Method.
I. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, 2BC415 to 3BC620, minimum 50- to 65-
mil- thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives
and lap sealant with galvanized steel termination bars and fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than
24 hours.
D. Apply and firmly adhere modified bituminous sheets horizontally over area to receive
air barrier sheets. Accurately align sheets and maintain a uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum
lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure
airtight installation.
E. Apply continuous modified bituminous sheets over modified bituminous strips bridging
substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.
F. Install air barrier sheets and auxiliary materials to form a seal with adjacent
construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier.
G. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane
air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing
and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers,
exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings using
accessory materials .
H. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply elastomeric flashing sheet so that a minimum of 3
inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact
over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
I. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.
J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten
fishmouths and blisters. Patch with air barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond
repaired areas in all directions.
K. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing
agency.
L. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates and reapply air barrier components.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for
compliance with requirements.
1. Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air
leakage according to ASTM E 1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or
depressurization .
D. Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and retest as specified above.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of
construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as
required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed to these
conditions for more than 30 days.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
2. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
3. Loose-fill insulation.
4. Vapor retarders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each
product having recycled content.
D. Research/evaluation reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths
that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated
for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic
spaces at vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support
unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of
insulation to flanges of metal studs.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction
.
b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity .
1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard
Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at
perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal
framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and
window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder
tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt
joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other
solid substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-
retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarders.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Product certificates.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for
regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each
regionally manufactured material
A. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains,
and other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed.
Proceed only after substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have
been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal
inserts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. Water Permeability: Maximum zero for water at 30 feet when tested according
to CE CRD-C 48.
3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
E. Polymer Admixture for Protective Topping: Polymer bonding agent and admixture
designed to improve adhesion to prepared substrates and not to create a vapor barrier.
F. Water: Potable.
2.3 MIXES
B. Protective Topping: Measure, batch, and mix portland cement and sand in the
proportion of 1:3 and water. Blend together with mechanical mixer to required
consistency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect other work from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and application of
waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to ensure adequate ambient temperatures
and ventilation conditions for application.
3.2 APPLICATION
1. Saturate surface with water for several hours prior to application and maintain
damp condition until applying waterproofing. Remove standing water.
2. Apply waterproofing to surfaces indicated on Drawings.
3. Number of Coats: Number required for specified water permeability .
4. Application Method: Brush . Apply to ensure that each coat fills voids and is in
full contact with substrate or previous coat.
5. Dampen surface between coats.
C. Curing: Moist-cure waterproofing for three days immediately after final coat has set,
followed by air drying, unless otherwise recommended in writing by manufacturer.
E. Protective Topping: Apply 1-inch- thick, protective topping over floor surfaces.
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
A. General: Provide a waterproofing system that prevents the passage of liquid water
under hydrostatic pressure and complies with physical requirements as
demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency of
manufacturer’s current waterproofing formulations and system design.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Field Sample: Apply waterproofing system field sample to 100 sq./ft. (9.3 sq./m.) of
deck or wall to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment,
thickness, texture, and standard of workmanship.
1. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when field sample
will be prepared.
2. If Architect determines that field sample, does not meet requirements; reapply
waterproofing until field sample is approved.
3. Retain and maintain approved field sample during construction in an
undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed waterproofing.
An undamaged field sample may become part of the completed Work.
C. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
A. Protect all adjacent areas not to be waterproofed. Where necessary, apply masking
to prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever membrane abuts to
other finish surfaces.
B. Perform work only when existing and forecast weather conditions are within
manufacturer’s recommendations for the material and application method used.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents, and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Resistance to Acids:
Acetic 30%
Sulfuric and Hydrochloric 13%
*See curings, protection and cleaning sections for further explanation.
A. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil reinforced modified asphalt sheet good with double-sided
adhesive.
Ecodrain-E Properties
CORE HDPE
Color Brown
Weight ASTM D 3776 1.90 oz/ft²
Compressive Strength ASTM D 1621 5,200 lbs/ft²
Thickness ASTM D 1777 0.31 in.
Composite System
Water Flow Rate (V) ASTM D 4716 5.1 gal/min/ft
Water Flow Rate (H) ASTM D 4716
Roll Size ASTM D 4716 6.0 ft x 65.5 ft, 8.0 ft x 65.5 ft
Roll Weight ASTM D 4716 60 lbs, 73 lbs
*Note: These depths are approximate guidelines and appropriate drainage panel determination
may require consultation with soils engineer to determine soil type, soil compaction and seismic
activity.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will
be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or over
spray affecting other construction.
C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration
of waterproofing fluids.
D. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating
contaminants from concrete.
E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
grout joints, tie holes, and other voids with ECOLINE-T, hydraulic cement, or rapid-
set grout.
B. Apply two coats ECOLINE-R (30-mil wet) and embed polyester reinforcing strip in
preparation coat and apply a second coat over embedded polyester reinforcing strip
ensuring its complete saturation and covering.
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898
and waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 prior to coating surfaces.
G. Verify film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).
B. Secure ECOSHIELD-E10 protection course seams with ECOTAPE and attach with
adhesive strips, shot pins or as recommended by manufacturer.
A. Membrane may be checked for coverage with a lightly oiled, needle nose depth
gauge, taking four (4) readings over a one square inch area, every 500 square feet.
Record the minimum reading. Mark the test area for repair.
B. Test areas are to be patched over with ECOLINE-S or R to a 60-mil minimum dry
thickness, extending a minimum of one inch (1”) beyond the test perimeter.
B. Take care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and
curing.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of
waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for
substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners,
tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
D. Special warranties.
1.5 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade
or low viscosity.
G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled
at 9-inch centers.
2.3 INSULATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and
overspray affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and
other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, holes, and other voids.
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt
from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
F. Bridge and cover isolation joints expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and
deck-to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips.
1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second
sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.
G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to
ASTM D 6135.
H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and
penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to
ASTM D 6135.
3.2 APPLICATION
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more
than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align
sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap
and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point of decks to ensure
that side laps shed water.
E. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and
contraction joints.
G. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with
requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing
extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.
I. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately.
J. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall
or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or
mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of
geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels
during subsequent construction.
A. Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4
inch of projections and penetrations.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
A. General: Provide a waterproofing system that prevents the passage of liquid water
under hydrostatic pressure and complies with physical requirements as
demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency of
manufacturer’s current waterproofing formulations and system design.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Field Sample: Apply waterproofing system field sample to 100 sq./ft. (9.3 sq./m.) of
deck or wall to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment,
thickness, texture, and standard of workmanship.
1. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when field sample
will be prepared.
2. If Architect determines that field sample, does not meet requirements; reapply
waterproofing until field sample is approved.
3. Retain and maintain approved field sample during construction in an
undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed waterproofing.
An undamaged field sample may become part of the completed Work.
C. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
A. Protect all adjacent areas not to be waterproofed. Where necessary, apply masking
to prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever membrane abuts to
other finish surfaces.
B. Perform work only when existing and for-cast weather conditions are within
manufacturer’s recommendations for the material and application method used.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents, and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil reinforced modified asphalt sheet good with double-sided
adhesive.
C. Joint Detailing Sealant Mastic: ECOLINE-T, a high viscosity polymer modified water
based asphalt material.
Ecoshield-E Properties
8-mil 10-mil 15-mil
Puncture Resistance ASTM D 1709 876 g 1593 g. 1898 g.
Tensile Strength ASTM E 154 24.59 lbs. MD 34.6 lbs. MD 39.7 lbs. MD
Tear Resistance ASTM D 4533 3.48 lbs. 5.98 lbs. 8.74 lbs.
Low Temperature Impact ASTM D 1790 Resistant to -105°C Resistant to -105 C Resistant to -105 C
Water Vapor Trans. Rate ASTM E 96 .00711 g/ft/hr .00621 g./ft./hr. .00585 g./ft./hr.
Perm Rating ASTM E 96 0.0143 0.0133 0.0123
Chemical or Environmental Resistance Excellent Excellent Excellent
Methane Gas Modified ASTM D 1434 0 0 0
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will
be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or over
spray affecting other construction.
C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration
of waterproofing fluids.
D. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating
contaminants from concrete.
E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
grout joints, tie holes, and other voids with ECOLINE-T, hydraulic cement, or rapid-
set grout.
B. Apply two coats of ECOLINE-T (30 mil each) and embed a joint reinforcing strip in
preparation coat and apply a second coat over embedded joint reinforcing strip
ensuring its complete saturation and covering.
1. Terminations should be treated 6 inches on each side for both vertical and
horizontal.
2. Penetrations should be treated in a 6inch radius around penetration and 3
inches onto penetrating object.
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898
and waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 prior to coating surfaces.
B. Less than 1/16 in. - Apply two coats of ECOLINE-T waterproofing, 6 inches on each
side of joint or crack and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat and
apply a second coat over embedded joint reinforcing strip ensuring to complete
saturation and covering.
C. Greater then 1/16 in. – Rout joint or crack, install backer-rod and sealant to bring
flush to surface. Apply a coat of ECOLINE-T or R to joint or crack, 6 in. on each
side, embed a joint reinforcement strip and apply a second coat, where indicated or
required according to waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. Apply a base spray coat of ECOLINE-S or three 27 mil (wet) coats of ECOLINE-R,
to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film
thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum dry film thickness of 50 mils (1.25
mm) at any point.
G. Lay 3’ wide, polyester on and into the base coat of the membrane overlapping it
3”,(a light tack coat of ECOLINE-R or ECOLINE-S may be used around the edges of
the polyester to temporarily hold it in place).
H. Apply a second spray coat of ECOLINE-S or three 27-mil (wet) coats of ECOLINE-R
to obtain a composite reinforced membrane with average dry film thickness of 120
mils and a nominal thickness of 100 mils.
A. Membrane may be checked for coverage with a lightly oiled, needle nose depth
gauge, taking four (4) readings over a one square inch area, every 500 square feet.
Record the minimum reading. Mark the test area for repair.
B. Test areas are to be patched over with ECOLINE-S to an 80-mil minimum dry
thickness, extending a minimum of one-inch (1”) beyond the test perimeter.
B. Take care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages, curing
and subsequent construction.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Installed fiberglass fabrications and fastening systems shall meet applicable building
code requirements and withstand:
1. 70 mph.
2. 10 lbs/sq/inch live load with deflection limited to 1/360 of span.
3. Self supporting dead load with deflection limited to 1/360 of span.
4. 10 psf snow load.
C. Installed products shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative wind pressure
without structural failure, cracking, permanent distortion or displacement.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of cornice, large-scale details, finishes, joint treatment,
attachment devices, and other components. Include dimensioned plans and
elevations.
1. Include sequence of erection.
C. Samples: 12 inch long full-size sample of GFRP cornice showing finish, color and
texture.
A. Transport and handle units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses or damage.
1. Type “E” random chopped fibers.
B. Store units level on a clean and dry surface in an area protected from weather, soil
contact and damage, preferably in an upright position.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 MATERIALS
2.3 ACCESSORIES
2.4 FABRICATION
C. Joints in components shall be matched at the factory and numbered for field
installation. Components shall be fabricated to minimize exposed fasteners.
E. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Part Location: +/- 1/16 inch.
2. Length: +/- 1/8 inch.
3. Gel Coat Thickness: =/- 2.5 mils.
A. General: Finish cornice at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and
polishing until after installation.
B. Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of cornice.
C. Gel Coat:
1. Thickness: .015 inches to 0.25 inches.
2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
3. Sheen: Gloss, 80-100 gloss units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Prior to manufacturing: Check dimensions and conditions not shown on Drawings for
inclusion by manufacturer’s shop drawings.
B. Prior to installation: Check job site dimensions. Contact Architect and Construction
Manager if there are any discrepancies between design and field dimensions. Do not
proceed until discrepancies are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Lift units carefully and without damage with suitable devices at points indicated by
manufacturer.
B. Install cornice level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 96 inches.
C. Fasten units with screws (through the face of from the back), bolting or welding as
shown on shop drawings.
1. Provide temporary supports to maintain units in place.
3.3 REPAIRS
A. Repairs will be permitted provided structural adequacy of unit and appearance are not
impaired, as approved by Architect and Construction Manager.
B. Blend and mix patching materials and repair cured patches to match color, texture and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces.
C. Remove and replace damaged units when repairs do not comply with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled units with detergent and water using soft brushes and sponges. Rinse
with clean water. Prevent damage to surfaces and adjacent materials.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate dimensions, edge configurations, cutouts, and relationship to
adjacent construction.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
D. Samples:
1. For each type of product indicated.
a. Submit minimum 4 by 4 inch (101 by 101 mm) sample in
specified gloss.
b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of
inconspicuous seam.
c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation.
2. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for Work.
E. Manufacturer Certificates:
1. Compliance Certificate: Signed by manufacturer, indicating compliance
with specified performance requirements.
pre-consumer.)
2. Credit MR 5.1, Regional Materials: 10 percent manufactured
regionally.
3. Credit EQ 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants.
4. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating[ chemical composition and] VOC
content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated
according to
1.4 REFERENCES
D. ASTM C 642 - Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in
Hardened Concrete.
F. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient
of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal
Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.
A. Do not deliver components to project site until products are ready for
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.3 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.4 PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Co-ordinate with the work of Division 16 for the installation of power and data.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing plans, elevations, sections, and details
indicating all materials and dimensions.
1. Show layout pattern, fabrication details and attachment methods.
2. Indicate juncture with adjacent materials.
3. Indicate all fixtures and equipment to be incorporated.
D. Samples: Submit samples of material, color, and finish. Submit additional samples
until all products are approved.
1. Stained and varnished door and drawer fronts for veneers and solid stock, actual
size.
2. 12" x 12" sample of stained and varnished drawer box and cabinet interior.
3. 12" x 12" sample of countertop material showing leading edge and back splash.
4. An actual example of each accessory or items of hardware.
C. Qualifications
1. The cabinetmaker shall be certified by the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
2. The contractor shall have demonstrated experience and the ability to furnish
adequate supervision, equipment and production capacity. The firm shall be a
member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
3. The field superintendent shall have demonstrated experience producing the
work.
4. The installer shall be a qualified journeyman. Apprentices may work under the
direction of a journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to initiating the work, convene a meeting with the
general contractor, manufacturer, installer, owner's representative, and architect in
attendance.
B. All materials shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer’s sealed packages with
labels intact and seals unbroken.
1. Do not deliver custom cabinets to building until "wet work" such as concrete,
plaster and gypsum wallboard work has been completed and cured.
C. Store materials above ground and in original protective packages. Store in a dry
place with adequate air circulation. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions to pre-
vent damage due to moisture, temperature, and contaminants.
B. The work area shall be enclosed, provide properly regulated heat and ventilation.
1. Acceptable temperature range is 50°F to 90°F.
2. Maximum humidity is 80%.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Hardwood Plywood:
1. Grade: AWI Premium Grade except as amended by more stringent require-
ments herein
2. Core: Veneer
3. Face Species: Maple
4. Adhesive: As recommended for application
5. Components:
a. Door and Drawer Fronts: Maple
b. Drawer Construction: Maple
c. Ends and Backs: Maple
2.04 HARDWARE
A. Drawer slides shall be manufactured by Accuride. The number and style shall be
confirmed by the cabinetmaker.
1. Drawers 24" or less in width: model number 7437.
2. Drawers 24" to 42" in width: model number 3640.
B. Drawer pulls:
1. Manufacturer: Amerock
2. Model: #BP865
3. Finish: oil rubbed bronze
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Bronze Grommets:
1. Manufacturer: Mockett
2. Model: 2-1/2” MM Series
3. Finish: Antique Bronze
C. Shelf Supports:
1. Manufacturer: K & V
2. Model: #256
3. Finish: Brown
2.06 FABRICATION
B. Shop-assemble cabinetry for delivery to the site in easily handled units and sized to
pass through existing openings.
C. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece
for full length only.
D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
E. Provide cutouts for fixtures and fittings. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges.
2.07 FINISHING
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. Use wood filler that
matches surrounding surfaces and that is recommended for applied finishes.
C. Finish work in the factory in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Premium.
1. AWI Finish System: TR-6
a. 1 coat transparent stain to match Architect’s sample
b. 3 coats polyurethane
c. semi-gloss sheen
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect the work of other trades and the installation
conditions. Confirm that the conditions meet the installation requirements. Notify the
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the Work.
1. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
2. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are
placed and ready to receive this work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved. Be-
ginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
B. Confirm that sufficient materials are stored on site to complete the space.
3.03 INSTALLATION
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C. Scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not
use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
F. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter
tops.
G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
H. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs
of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
A. During the execution of the work keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly con-
dition. At the end of each working day, remove all refuse and dispose of it properly.
B. Upon completion of this portion of the work. Adjust moving or operating parts to
function smoothly and correctly. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fit-
tings, and fixtures.
C. Repair or replace or otherwise restore to new condition all items damaged by work of
this section.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-
scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
B. Samples:
1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut,
finished on one side and one edge.
C. LEED Submittals:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 MATERIALS
C. Wood Products:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with
adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fire-
retardant-treated, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
2.5 FABRICATION
1. For transparent-finished trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered
construction. Do not glue for width.
2. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
3. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of
installation require field assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in
Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
Shim as required with concealed shims.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-
length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent
possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if
any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish
same as wood base if finished.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For lumber for exterior wood stain finish , for each finish system and color,
with one-half of exposed surface finished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 MATERIALS
2.3 FABRICATION
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Wood Species: Maple.
D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
E. Shop Priming: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of wood primer
specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in
contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.
1. Grade: Premium .
2. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in
contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.
3. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.
4. Sheen: Semigloss 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with same grade specified in Part 2 for
type of woodwork involved.
C. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair
damaged finish at cuts.
F. Install trim with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from
maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints
and stagger in adjacent and related members.
G. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or
before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where
exposed.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUMMARY
B. Specifications for the repair of woodwork shall include all work, materials and equip-
ment required to:
1. Carefully remove required woodwork and securely reinstall it to its original place
and position. Use experienced riggers for the removal and transportation of
woodwork.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Drive, West
Conshohocken, PA 19428, (610) 832-9585 or FAX (610) 832-9555.
A. Coordinate the work in this specification with appropriate work of other specifications
to ensure proper scheduling for fabrication and installation of the work specified
herein.
B. Verify all dimensions in the field before fabrication of all architectural woodwork to
assure proper fit.
D. Unit Prices: Interior woodwork refinishing to be provided under unit prices are
described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site,
provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material
2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end
result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.
D. Each type of refinished and repaired woodwork in the form of samples 2 linear feet
long.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,
and other information specified.
F. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection
of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe
in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used
for each phase of the restoration work.
G. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of
restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use
on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their
effectiveness for this Project.
I. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for refinishing and
repair work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on
other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness
for this Project.
B. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for
refinishing work and 1 for repair work.
D. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use
materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under
same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.
F. Woodwork Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of material
indicated to be patched, refinished, or repaired. Erect sample panels of an existing
woodwork, unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate the quality of materials and
workmanship.
G. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse
reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect.Notify
Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared.
K. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for woodwork refinishing and repair from a
single source for each type of material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS
2. Replacement Wood: Match species, grade, grain pattern, and other special
characteristics of woodwork.
a. Screws:
1) Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and as rec-
ommended by RHPO.
b. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and as rec-
ommended by RHPO.
c. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for
secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors
and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for cor-
rosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for
drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage.
4. Fire-Retardant Materials:
1) Mill lumber after treatment, within limits set for wood removal that does
not affect listed fire performance characteristics, using a woodworking
plant certified by testing and inspection agency.
6) Discard treated lumber that does not comply with requirements of refer-
enced woodworking standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, dis-
colored, or otherwise damaged or defective lumber.
B. FABRICATION
nents only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fit-
ting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
4. Wood Surrounds and Trim: Fabricate to profiles required in single lengths for
jamb and head conditions. Provisions for securing through face of trim shall in-
clude plugs to match surface.
A. MATERIALS
1. Wood Stain
2. Floor Varnish
3. Shellac
4. Alcohol
6. Floor Wax
8. Wood Filler
9. Steel Wool
1. MANUFACTURERS
C. MATERIALS
1. NOTE: Chemical products are sometimes sold under a common name. This
usually means that the substance is not as pure as the same chemical sold un-
der its chemical name. The grade of purity of common name substances, how-
ever, is usually adequate for stain removal work, and these products should be
purchased when available, as they may be less expensive.
3. Mineral Spirits:
d. Safety Precautions:
3) If any chemical is splashed onto the skin, wash immediately with soap
and water.
OR-
4. Turpentine:
9. Paste wax (non-yellowing) such as "Butcher's Paste Wax" (Butcher Polish Com-
pany), or approved equal.
D. EQUIPMENT
6. Orbital Sander
A. MANUFACTURERS
B. MATERIALS
1. Wood Filler: Paste wood filler shall be blended silica in aromatic mineral spirits
solvent with an alkyd resin base, color as required to match original stain (Mo-
hawk Finishing Products, Inc.), or approved equal.
2. NOTE: USE OF WOOD FILLER WITH LINSEED OIL VEHICLE MAY CAUSE
WHITE SPOTS IN LACQUER FINISH COAT OR INHIBIT ITS PROPER
DRYING.
3. Sanding Sealer: Lacquer based sanding sealer, formulated for brushing, com-
posed of the following products (Mohawk Finishing Products), or approved equal.
4. Note: Amounts of products listed below make one (1) gallon of sanding sealer.
The ratio of constituents shall remain constant if a greater quantity is required.
a. Product Amount
b. #610-160 High solids sanding sealer 50 oz.
c. #650-010 Lacquer thinner 12 oz.
d. #502-000 Solar lux retarder 2 oz.
5. Wood stain: Solvent (aromatic) reducible, pigmented wiping surface stain with an
alkyd binder, color matched to original stain, such as (Mohawk Finishing Prod-
ucts, Inc.), or approved equal.
6. Lacquer
7. Tack Rags
10. Vegetable Oil Soap: Potassium soap of vegetable oil containing no acids, abra-
sives, caustics or solvents, such as "Murphy's Oil Soap" (Murphy-Phoenix Com-
pany), OR approved equal.
C. EQUIPMENT
A. MATERIALS
b. Replacement Wood: Match species, grade, grain pattern, and other special
characteristics of existing woodwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. EXAMINATION
B. PREPARATION
1. Protection:
a. Protect adjacent surfaces with polyethylene covers during wood removal op-
erations.
2. Surface Preparation:
4. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates,
well ahead of time substrates are to be built.
1. General:
a. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for type
of woodwork involved.
b. Carefully remove at locations indicated any damaged or deteriorated
woodwork. Unless indicated otherwise, replace the entire length of the
existing damaged piece to the next butt joint.
c. For partial replacement of existing pieces, use a neat, well-fitted level cut with
grain aligned in transparent finish wood.
a. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as
required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for
plumb and level; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surface,
1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
c. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible,
using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the
greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply with Quality Standards for join-
ery.
1) Reuse salvage material as required. Use only trim that can be reinstalled
and refinished to an acceptable condition consistent with the existing trim
to remain.
2) Where salvage material will not match existing, remove and replace with
new to replicate existing.
D. ADJUSTING/CLEANING
1. Upon completion of this work, all floors, walls and other adjacent surfaces
stained, marred, otherwise damaged by work under this section shall be cleaned
and repaired and all work and the adjacent areas shall be left in a clean and per-
fect condition.
E. PROTECTION
A. PREPARATION
1. Protection: Mask all adjacent surfaces and protect other exposed surfaces in the
work area.
2. Surface Preparation:
d. Fill any split in existing wood and sand smooth prior to sealer application.
1. General:
a. Coat wood with denatured alcohol. Apply with soft cloth. Scrape up residue
as quickly as possible. Repeat application of alcohol until all shellac is re-
moved.
b. Sand smooth.
d. Apply mixture of shellac and alcohol with soft cloth and allow to dry overnight.
e. Apply liberal amount of paste wax with soft cloth and allow to dry.
b. Apply liberal amount of paste wax with soft cloth and allow to dry.
a. Remove existing finish by sanding two or three times until bare wood is ex-
posed.
C. ADJUSTING/CLEANING
d. Using a broad knife or scrapper, remove paint and stripper from the surface.
e. Safely dispose of paint and stripper residue. Follow EPA regulations for dis-
posal of lead-base paint.
1) Wet steel wool with solvent and rub over the wood surface to remove
varnish buildup and to smooth out any checks in the surface.
2) Replace steel wool frequently with clean, and continue the wiping process
until a smooth surface is achieved.
g. Wipe wood with a clean cloth soaked in mineral spirits to remove chemical
residue.
h. Allow to dry and dry-brush loose material from the surface using a short fiber
bristle brush.
a. Sand the floor with an orbital sander to remove stains, old finish and indenta-
tions in the wood. Sand in direction of wood grain.
1. NOTE: Some sophisticated modern waxes, formulated for long wear and for
high production commercial use, require special strippers that most often are not
appropriate for historic materials because the ingredients cannot be readily de-
tected. Some silicon waxes can only be removed by abrasion.
a. Dampen small area of floor with turpentine or mineral spirits, or apply wax
remover evenly over the floor following manufacturer's instructions.
b. Using a 16" electric floor machine, scrub lightly with a piece of 000 steel wool
or nylon web scrubbing pad. Change steel wool or pads as they become
clogged with old wax.
d. Continue cleaning in this manner until all of the old wax has been removed.
Allow floor to dry, approximately 15-20 minutes after the last area has been
cleaned.
e. Apply wax and buff as described 06200-01-P. Apply two or more thin coats
rather than one thick coat. Buff after each coat.
3. Fill scratches, gouges and dents with wood filler.
4. Apply a high quality paste wood filler with a brush to all open grain wood species
(i.e., Oak) before staining.
5. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits and wipe the paste off across the grain
of the wood to enable the filler to remain in the grain depressions.
6. Allow the filler to fully dry before applying the stain or varnish.
a. On a SAMPLE area 12 inches square, brush apply oil stain or universal stain.
b. Allow the stain to penetrate the wood for at least 5-10 minutes.
c. Remove excess stain with a clean, lint-free cloth. Rub the wood parallel to
the grain.
e. Brush apply one coat of alkyd or urethane-base satin varnish. Varnish should
be thin, but not watery.
g. When dry, buff the surface with 000 steel wool and dry-brush with a fiber bris-
tle brush to remove any
h. metal particles left behind from the steel wool. A tack rag may also be used
to remove dust from the surface.
k. Buff the surface with 000 steel wool and dry-brush with a fiber bristle brush to
remove any metal particles left behind from the steel wool.
l. If sample is approved by RHPO, follow the same procedures for all remaining
wood.
1) After buffing the final coat of varnish, apply one coat of non-yellowing
paste wax
A. PREPARATION
1. Surface Preparation:
2. Fill all gouges and scratches with compatible surface putty color matched to
stain. Sand smooth.
1. Staining Procedures:
b. Apply stain to all bare wood surfaces with a stiff flat bristle brush.
c. Allow stain to set as required for proper color match as determined by testing
process.
d. Wipe off excess stain by rubbing parallel to the grain with a soft, dry cloth.
e. Apply one (1) coat of sanding sealer rub with 0000 steel wool and wipe with a
tack rag. (May not be required, test during preparation of sample areas.)
f. Finish Coating:
2) Rub with 0000 steel wool and wipe with a tack rag.
5) Sand with 4/0 to 6/0 paper, only if necessary to remove defects and level
surface for next coat.
6) Before adding the next coat, vacuum and wipe the surface with a dry tack
rag in order to remove all grit and dust.
A. PREPARATION
1. Surface Preparation:
b. Back prime woodwork on all surfaces which will be concealed with one coat
of wood primer. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of
Back prime coat before installation of woodwork.
2. For partial replacement of existing pieces, use a neat, well-fitted level cut with
grain aligned in transparent finished wood.
a. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as re-
quired using
b. concealed shims.
d. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible,
using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the
greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply with Quality Standards for join-
ery.
C. ADJUSTING/CLEANING
1. Upon completion of this work, all floors, walls, and other adjacent surfaces that
are stained, marred, or otherwise damaged by work under this section shall be
cleaned and repaired and all work and the adjacent areas shall be left in a clean
and perfect condition.
4. Clean woodwork: Dust and damp wipe woodwork with a soft cloth dampened in
clean water; dry rub with soft cloth to maintain the polish, rubbing along the grain
of the wood.
a. Stains may be cleaned by prompt damp wiping with cloth dampened in clear
water or rubbing with cloth dampened in solvent. Dry the wood with a soft
cloth.
b. White spots may be removed by rubbing them with a small amount of linseed
oil.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. See Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not
specified in this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and glues used at Project site,
including printed statement of VOC content.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 PANELING
2. Face Veneer Species and Cut: [Rotary-cut white birch] [Plain-sliced red oak]
[Plain-sliced hickory] .
3. Veneer Matching: [Random match] [Selected for similar color and grain].
4. Thickness: [1/8 inch] [5/32 inch] [5 mm] [1/4 inch] [5/16 inch] [7/16 inch].
B. MDO Paneling:
1. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge.
2.3 SHELVING
1. Use wood glue that has a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.
Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
A. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable
variations in grain character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 1/4-inch gap to
be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Install with uniform tight joints
between panels.
A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch less than width of shelves and sand
exposed ends smooth.
B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set
below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches o.c.
C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more
than 36 inches o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use
toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.
D. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed
and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of
VOC content.
1. Preservative-treated plywood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry
or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.6 FASTENERS
1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion-protective
coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to
ASTM B 117.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
C. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match
spacing of structural support elements.
1. Subflooring:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at
expansion- or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to
sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Seal other
penetrations and openings.
1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at
flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
2. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of
openings.
3. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.
4. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from
wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade
stamp on end or back of each piece.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is
not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be
treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl
spaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
B. Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Utility shelving.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with
19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of
eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or
2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and
any of the following species and grades:
2.7 FASTENERS
C. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material
being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with
requirements for attaching other construction.
C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-
treated lumber.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If,
despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered
borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered
label.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Unit Prices: Ornamental metal cleaning to be provided under unit prices are described
in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site,
provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material
2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end
result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
E. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration and cleaning process, including
protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations.
Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to
be used for each phase of the restoration and cleaning work.
1. Product Data
2. Work Plan
3. Materials
The names, quantity represented, and intended use for proprietary brands of ma-
terials proposed to be substituted for the specified materials when the required
quantity of a particular batch is 200 liters 50 gallons or less.
Manufacturer's current printed product description, material safety data sheets
(MSDS) and technical data sheets for each product. Detailed mixing, thinning
and application instructions, minimum and maximum application temperature,
and curing and drying times shall be provided for each product submitted.
4. Qualifications
A statement certified by the Contractor attesting that the experience and qualifi-
cations of the workers (journeymen) comply with the specifications.
5. Certificates
Certificate stating that products proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of
the local Air Pollution Control Districts having jurisdiction over the geographical
area in which the project is located.
4. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any
phase of restoration and cleaning work, provide a written description, including
evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program
to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: one
for cleaning work and one for repair work.
2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that metal
restoration and cleaning are in progress.
C. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials
and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather
conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. Test adjacent non-metallic mate-
rials for possible reaction with cleaning and paint stripping materials.
D. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for metal restoration from a single source for
each type of material required to ensure a match of quality.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship marble units and accessories strapped together in
suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.
ALL CLEANING REMOVES SOME SURFACE METAL AND PATINA. THEREFORE, USE
CAUTION, AS EXCESSIVE CLEANING CAN REMOVE THE TEXTURE AND FINISH OF THE
METAL.
1.6 REFERENCES
A. The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the work shall provide for safe
conduct of the work, careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be sal-
vaged, protection of property which is to remain undisturbed, and coordination with
other work in progress. The work plan shall include a Safety and Health plan describ-
ing procedures for handling monitoring, and disposition of VOCs and other hazardous
and toxic materials. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the meth-
ods and equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operations.
The Contractor shall test the materials designated by the Contracting Officer.
A. Paint removers, solvents, and other chemicals used for surface preparation shall be in
sealed containers that legibly show the designated name, formula or specification
number, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's formulation number, manufac-
turer's directions including any warnings and special precautions, and name of manu-
facturer. Such materials shall be furnished in containers not larger than 20 liters; 5
gallons; they shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written directions;
and as a minimum stored off the ground, under cover, with sufficient ventilation to pre-
vent the buildup of flammable vapors and at temperatures between 4 and 35 degrees
C. 40 and 95 degrees F.
A Work shall comply with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity
Hazard Analysis as specified in the CONTRACT CLAUSES. The Activity Hazard
Analysis shall include analyses of the potential impact of surface preparation opera-
tions on personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone. Refer to
Division 1 “Safety and Health”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
PART 2---PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. GAF Corporation
1361 Alps Road
Wayne, NJ 07470
201/628-4127
C. ProSoCo, Inc.
755 Minnesota Avenue
P.O. Box 1578
Kansas City, KS 66117
800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700
2.2 PRODUCTS
NOTE: Chemical products are sometimes sold under a common name. This usually means
that the substance is not as pure as the same chemical sold under its chemical name. The
grade of purity of common name substances, however, is usually adequate for stain removal
work, and these products should be purchased when available, as they tend to be less expen-
sive. Common names are indicated below by an asterisk (*).
A. Mild detergent
-OR-
B. Household Ammonia:
1. Other chemical or common names include Ammonium Hydroxide; Ammonia wa-
ter*; Aqua ammonia*.
-OR-
2. Mild Commercial Brass Cleaner (most brass cleaners will both clean and polish)
such as "Simichrome", "Wenol", "Flitz" (Flitz International, Ltd.), or approved
equal.
F. Protective Lacquer: Clear non-yellowing for protection of the finished metal surface.
G. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Liquid, film forming, strippable masking material for
protecting glass, and polished stone surfaces from damaging effect of acidic and alka-
line cleaners, such as "Sure Klean Acid Stop," (ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved equal.
2.3 MATERIALS
2.4 EQUIPMENT
A. Buckets, molded rubber or plastic, such as the "Fortex" molded rubber pail - 12 or 14
quart size, or Rubbermaid
B. Washing brushes: Available from local janitorial supply houses or hardware stores
1. Tampico fiber set in a hardwood block
2. "Whitewash brush" - ideal for most purposes
3. "Parts washing" brush - useful for small areas and crevices
D. Garden hose
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians,
motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured
by such contact.
2. Do not clean metal during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to
unprotected surfaces.
3. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property.
4. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that
prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to
landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.
5. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of
entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during
course of marble restoration work.
6. Provide ventilation to eliminate the spread of fumes to unaffected spaces.
7. Protect unpainted metal from contact with alkali chemical cleaners by covering
them either with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and
waterproof masking tape.
C. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a
liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply
liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Before proceeding with steps to clean brass, examine the surface(s) to determine the
extent of the work required. Look for:
1. Broken, cracked, missing, distorted or loose parts.
2. Coating failures such as chips, losses, peeling, cracks, bubbling and wear. Cor-
rosion - caused by moisture, deicing salts, acids, soils, gypsum plasters, magne-
sium oxychloride cements, ashes, clinkers and sulfur components.
NOTE: Water washing alone will remove most common dirt and grime; however, at times
supplemental materials will be needed to remove the deposits.
1. For Bronze: Add BTA to wash water to make a 1 to 3% solution of BTA to water.
B. Beginning at the top and gradually working down, scrub the metal surface lightly with the
fiber brush to remove any superficial deposits. Take care to avoid scratching or other-
wise damaging the protective coating.
E. For tenacious mineral deposits or exudations of core material, treat locally with gentle
abrasion using very fine bronze wool. Exercise great care to avoid damaging the coating
and patina.
C. Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc. Brass-plate is a thin layer of brass bonded to
steel. Solid brass is more durable than brass-plate and, therefore, can withstand more
rigorous methods of cleaning.
D. Brass may be unfinished or lacquered. Architectural brass hardware and trim is gen-
erally maintained in a highly polished, "bright" finish.
1. Unfinished brass MUST be polished frequently in order to maintain its luster. All pol-
ishing,
however, removes some brass.
2. Lacquered brass will usually last about 10 years and does NOT require frequent pol-
ishing.
3. Lacquer protects the brass finish from deterioration, though some brilliance of its sur-
face characteristics is sacrificed. Removal and reapplication of the lacquer, however, will
not harm the brass surface.
1. Clean with mild detergent or ammonia and a soft cloth. DO NOT USE ABRASIVES.
Wear plastic gloves to prevent getting fingerprints on the surface.
2. Rinse thoroughly and dry with a clean, soft cloth. DO NOT BUFF BRASS-PLATE;
THE PLATING WILL COME OFF.
1. Use a mild commercial polish such as "Simichrome", "Wenol", "Flitz" (Flitz Interna-
tional, Ltd.), or approved equal.
2. Wipe down cleaned and polished piece with lacquer thinner to remove all traces of
cleaning solutions and polish.
A. Brush apply chemical cleaner to ornamental metal surface in the concentration recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
B. Agitate surface with either steel wool or synthetic cleaning pad. Follow direction of grain
in metal. Do not scratch or abrade surface.
C. Thoroughly sponge or cloth rinse surface with clean water to remove chemical cleaner
and loosened dirt.
D. Machine or hand polish metal where indicated with buffing wheel or soft cloth using pol-
ishing compound typically recommended as standard industry practice and as approved
by the RHPO.
F. Wipe surface completely dry with clean soft cloths. Do not touch cleaned ornamental
metal surfaces.
A. Methods used for preparation of historic wood and metal surfaces for painting shall be the
gentlest possible to achieve the desired results. Historic substrate materials shall not be
damaged or marred in the process of surface preparations. Samples of the existing paint
finishes shall be collected and analyzed for the purpose of documentation or matching.
Material and application requirements for paints are covered in Section 09900 PAINTING,
GENERAL.
3.7 VENTILATION
A. Interior work zones having a volume of 280 cubic meters 10,000 cubic feet or less shall
be ventilated at a minimum of 2 air exchanges per hour. Ventilation in larger work zones
shall be maintained by means of mechanical exhaust. Solvent vapors shall be exhausted
outdoors, away from air intakes and workers. Return air inlets in the work zone shall be
temporarily sealed before start of work until the prepared surfaces have dried. Operators
and personnel in the vicinity of paint removal processes involving chemicals or mechani-
cal action (sanding or blasting) shall wear respirators.
A. Items not to be painted which are in contact with or adjacent to painted surfaces shall be
removed or protected prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Items re-
moved prior to painting shall be replaced when painting is completed. Following comple-
tion of painting, workers skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Sur-
faces contaminated by preparation materials shall be restored to original condition.
A. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of grease, dirt, dust and other foreign mat-
ter before application of paint or surface treatments. After cleaning, surfaces shall exhibit
a surface disfigurement rating of 7 or greater when evaluated in accordance with ASTM D
3274. Dirt and surface contaminants shall be cleaned by brush with solutions of water
and detergent or trisodium phosphate, then rinsed clean with water and let dry. Surfaces
on which mildew or other microbiological growth is present shall be cleaned with a deter-
gent solution containing household bleach. Oil and grease shall be removed with clean
cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning solvents shall be of
low toxicity with a flashpoint in excess of 38 degrees C. 100 degrees F. Cleaning shall be
programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on newly prepared or newly
painted surfaces.
A. Existing paint shall be tested for adhesion to substrate per ASTM D 3359, Test Method A
and shall obtain a rating of 4 or better in order to be considered sound. Existing paint
meeting this requirement may be considered a satisfactory base for repainting.
C. Lead Paint
After cleaning and removal of deteriorated paint, edges of remaining chipped paint shall be
feather-edged and sanded smooth. Damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes,
cracks, chips, and spalls shall be repaired with suitable material to match adjacent undam-
aged areas. Slick surfaces shall be roughened. Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned per
Spec section ____. Chalk shall be removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D
4214, the chalk resistance rating is no less than 8. New, proposed coatings shall be com-
patible with existing coatings. If existing surfaces are glossy, the gloss shall be reduced.
A. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter. Programs for preparation of metal
shall be per SSPC PA Guide 5. Grease, oil, and other soluble contaminants shall be re-
moved by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP 1. Surfaces shall be free from soils and corro-
sion; e.g. grease, oil, solder flux, welding flux, weld spatter, sand, rust, scale, and other
contaminants that might interfere with the application of the new finish. Cleaning meth-
ods shall be the gentlest possible to achieve the desired result. Metals which are soft,
thin, or exhibit fine detail shall not be abrasively cleaned. Evidence of corrosion or con-
tamination on a previously cleaned surface shall be cause for recleaning prior to painting.
B. Ferrous Surfaces
Ferrous surfaces that contain loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances
shall be cleaned mechanically with hand tools according to SSPC SP 2, power tools ac-
cording to SSPC SP 3 or by blast cleaning according to [SSPC SP 5/NACE 1], [SSPC SP
6/NACE 3], [SSPC SP 7/NACE 4], [SSPC SP 10/NACE 2]. Shop-coated ferrous surfaces
shall be protected from corrosion by treating and touching up corroded areas immediately
upon detection.
Galvanized, aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal sur-
faces shall be solvent-cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 1.
1. Aluminum
Aluminum surfaces shall be treated per ASTM D 1730 or ASTM D 1731. Steel wool,
steel brushes and uninhibited caustic etching solutions, such as sodium hydroxide,
shall not be used on aluminum.
2. Zinc
Zinc surfaces including zinc-coated substrates, shall be cleaned prior to painting as
follows: degrease, soak in a mild and inhibited alkaline cleaner, rinse with clean over-
flowing water, clean anodically in an acid (e.g. 0.25 to 0.75 percent sulfuric acid), and
rinse with clean overflowing water.
3.14 TIMING
Surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, and otherwise prepared for painting shall
be given a coat of the specified first coat as soon as practical after such pretreatment has
been completed, but prior to any deterioration of the prepared surface. Unless otherwise
directed, the first coat primer shall be applied within 48 hours of surface preparation.
3.16 ADJUSTING/CLEANING
A. During the work, remove from the site discarded cleaning and coating materials, rub-
bish, cans and rags at end of each work day.
B. Upon completion of coating work, remove all protective coverings and coatings, and
clean window glass and other coating-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings
by proper methods as recommended by coating manufacturer, using care not to dam-
age adjacent surfaces.
C. Cloths, cotton waste and other debris that might constitute a fire hazard shall be
placed in closed metal containers and removed at the end of each day. Containers
shall be removed from the site or destroyed in an approved manner. Preparation ma-
terials and other deposits on adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left
clean and ready for painting.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes architectural joint systems for building interiors and exteriors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Provide placement drawings, including line diagrams and details, and
a tabular schedule of architectural joint systems.
A. Product Options: Drawings are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 for
sheet and plate.
B. Moisture Barriers:
B. Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement characteristics:
2.5 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
B. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's recommended repair grout.
C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing
joint systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing
architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems.
1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due
to ambient temperature at time of installation.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal
without buckling of frames.
4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
5. Support underside of frames continuously to prevent vertical deflection when in
service.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3
inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1. See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube railings
associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair.
2. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal
stairs.
3. See Division 5 Section “Monumental Stairs and Railings” for railings associated
with monumental stairs.
4. See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for
new cast iron historic railings.
B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
2. Infill of Guards:
1. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and
methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
2. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail,
infill area, and anchorage system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 FASTENERS
B. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: [Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying
with MPI#26] [Water-based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134].
E. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI#77 and compatible with primer and
topcoat.
2.6 FABRICATION
F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;
maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
G. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after
fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and
levels and free of rack.
B. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
grout.
C. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post
for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with grout.
D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for
this purpose.
F. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used.
1. Use type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage].
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
G. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
H. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as
used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted
surfaces.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1. See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube railings
associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair.
2. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal
stairs.
3. See Division 5 Section “Monumental Stairs and Railings” for railings associated
with monumental stairs.
4. See Division 5 Section “Ornamental Railings” for railings associated with exterior
ornamental pipe and tube railings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Drive,
West Conshohocken, PA 19428, (610) 832-9585 or FAX (610) 832-9555.
B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), 1000 - 16th Street, NW,
Washington, DC 20036.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. For cold-formed structural steel: AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members".
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by using
metals that are compatible with one another. In some instances the corrosion can be
prevented by inserting a plastic insulator between the dissimilar materials.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and
installation of handrails and railings to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and
over-stressing of components, connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
D. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of
Work.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and
material from a single manufacturer.
and extent to that indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-
service performance.
D. Restoration Specialist: Work must be performed by a firm having not less than 5
years successful experience in comparable restoration projects and employing
personnel skilled in the restoration processes and operations indicated.
A. Storage and Protection: Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location,
away from uncured concrete and masonry, protected against damage of any kind.
Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting; allow for air
circulation inside the covering.
A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other
construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field
measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay
of Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. NOTE: Provide metal forms and types that comply with requirements of referenced
standards and that are free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the
finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated complying with the
following requirements:
C. For exterior installations and as required, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized
coating per ASTM A 53.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
C. Paint:
D. Fasteners:
1. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the
type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for
anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable of
withstanding design loadings.
a. For steel railings and fittings use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B
633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
2. For copper alloy railings provide fasteners fabricated from same base metal as
railing components or from type 304.
3. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
a. Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials
joined.
b. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing
components and for their attachment to other work except where exposed
fasteners are unavoidable.
4. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where
this represents manufacturer's standard splicing method.
H. Provide inserts and the anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railing
systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of
I. For existing cast iron posts to be reset in concrete: Examine existing anchors to
determine if suitable for reuse. Do not reuse unless in good condition. Provide new
anchors where necessary of same configurations as existing.
J. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut
edges.
L. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish
hardware, screws, and similar items.
M. For handrails and railing systems that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from
condensation or other sources, provide weepholes or other means for evacuation of
entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members.
Q. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate filler of thickness and size indicated or required
to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads
through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses.
Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and over-
stressing of substrate.
R. Finishes:
1. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to
application and designations of finishes.
2. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are not acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved
samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations
in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of
approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
S. Galvanized Finish:
2. For exterior steel railings and handrails formed from steel tubing with galvanized
finish, galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous
components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General:
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installation of handrails and railings. Set handrails and railing accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from
rack. TAKE CARE SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE ADJACENT HISTORIC MATERIALS,
SUCH AS MARBLE, GRANITE, OR LIMESTONE.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that
have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field
connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
C. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with
rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
F. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment
at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by
structural loads. MATCH ORIGINAL LOCATION AND SPACING TO AVOID
GHOST MARKS.
H. Railing Connections:
1. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components by welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent
contact or use manufacturer's standard fitting designed for this purpose.
J. Anchoring Posts:
1. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into
concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between
post and sleeve solid with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.
a. Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout: Exterior anchors, if in good condition, may be
reused
b. if suitable. To be set in new concrete stairs.
L. Cover interior anchorage joint with a flange of the same metal as post; attach to post
by welding after placement of anchoring material.
M. Leave exterior anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and
leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. For installations exposed on exterior
or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout manufacturer's
directions.
N. For steel railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
P. Anchor rail ends to metal surfaces with required flanges. Weld flanges to rail ends,
and bolt flanges to metal surfaces.
1. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with
not less than 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall
surface.
S. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction. Use type of
bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
T. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and
either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lab bolt, as applicable.
U. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads.
V. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing
or concealed anchors using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support
structural loads.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during cleaning period
by use of temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove
protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.
field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new
units.
PART 1 GENERAL
D. Handrails.
E. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with
metal stairs.
F. See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube
railings associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair.
G. See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for
new cast iron historic railings.
1.3 REFERENCES
C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Specification for Design of Cold
E. Cantilevered Stairs: Support stair at top and bottom landings only without
intermediate columns or hangers.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.8 SCHEDULING
B. Allow sufficient time for fabrication, delivery, and erection of stair after
building structure is in place and field dimensions are taken.
C. Allow sufficient time for closing in of building after delivery of stair and for
installation of finishes and related work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel:
1. Shapes, Plate, and Bar: ASTM A 36.
2. Sheet: ASTM A569 or ASTM A 570.
3. Pipe: Welded and seamless steel pipe. ASTM A 53.
4. Tubing: Cold formed. ASTM A 500; hot rolled, ASTM a 501.
5. Iron Castings: Malleable ASTM A 47.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
2.5 FABRICATION
C. Fit and fabricate assembled sections in largest practical sizes, for handling
through building openings.
D. Grind exposed edges flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease
exposed edges to small uniform radius.
E. Stair Components:
H. Cladding:
1. General: Provide cladding with smooth, flat surfaces free from
damage or disfiguration, of premium quality workmanship.
2. Material: Use material thickness that will provide required appearance
as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Attachment: Provide sub-framing, retainers, and supports as required
for proper installation of cladding without exposed fasteners.
4. Locations: Clad exposed surfaces of stringers, railing base members
and fascia at floor openings.
2.6 FINISHES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) for full height of stair.
B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3000 mm).
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Decorative Grilles.
B. Related Sections:
2. Division 5 Section “Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates” for ornamental fences.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishing materials.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each
product having recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for
regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each
regionally manufactured material
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate materials, finishes,
fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Extruded Shapes, Bronze: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural
bronze).
B. Castings, Brass: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C85200 (high-copper yellow brass).
2.2 FASTENERS
B. Provide Phillips and tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
A. Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true
curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp,
well-defined lines and arris.
B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that
will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
C. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects
that impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to
remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks.
B. Fabricate decorative grilles from perforated brass sheet or plate of thickness, size, and
pattern indicated.
1. Drawings indicate perforated metal patterns required and are based on products
of one manufacturer. Perforated metal patterns produced by other manufacturers
may be considered, provided deviations are minor and do not change design
concept as judged solely by Architect.
A. Basis of Design: Alumina Railing Products, Inc, “TC06 2-5/8 inch bronze decorative
cap.”
1. Refer to Detail 15 on Drawing Sheet AS-0.03.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Finish designations for copper alloys comply with the system established for
designating copper-alloy finish systems defined in NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual
for Architectural and Metal Products."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to
in-place construction.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where
indicated, uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers.
D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return
items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete
refinishing, or provide new units as required.
E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.
F. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation.
Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other
work.
G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings for railings associated with new cast-in-place stairs
and interior exit stair.
B. Related Sections:
1. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal
stairs.
2. See Division 5 Section “Monumental Stairs and Railings” for railings associated
with monumental stairs.
3. See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for
new cast iron historic railings.
4. See Division 5 Section “Ornamental Railings” for railings associated with exterior
ornamental pipe and tube railings.
B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
2. Infill of Guards:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and
finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content
of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),
unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal
alloy welded.
F. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
H. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
I. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: [Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying
with MPI#26] [Water based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134].
J. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and
topcoat.
K. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to
a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or
rough areas on exposed surfaces.
B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of
adjoining surfaces.
E. Form changes in direction [by bending] [or] [by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings].
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after
fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established
lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by
mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch
in 12 feet.
B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into [preset metal pipe sleeves] [formed or
core-drilled holes] and grouting annular space.
E. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction.
F. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.
G. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets[, except where end flanges are used]. Use
type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt]
[predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage].
H. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-
treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate
backing members.
4. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or
to concealed steel reinforcements.
5. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel
framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as
used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted
surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.
3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
B. Related Sections:
1. See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube railings
associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair.
2. See Division 5 Section “Monumental Stairs and Railings” for railings associated
with monumental stairs.
3. See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for
new cast iron historic railings.
4. See Division 5 Section “Ornamental Railings” for railings associated with exterior
ornamental pipe and tube railings.
C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached
to metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in
addition to loads specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch,
whichever is less.
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
D. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 .
1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include
statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for
regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each
regionally manufactured material
3. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of
each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content
of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content is not less than 20 percent.
A. Abrasive Nosings:
1. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Granite State Casting Co.
b. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc.
c. Wooster Products Inc.
B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as
standard with manufacturer.
C. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into
exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor
stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces
slope to drain.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
B. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels.
2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous
framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements .
3. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.
4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide
hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below.
5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts
designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube,
post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated
loads.
1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch-
square posts.
2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- square pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear.
G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching
to other work.
1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.
H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material,
to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes. Size fillers to suit wall finish
thicknesses.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning ."
D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance
Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation,
measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into
concrete unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete.
F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for
concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt .
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used
for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without
blemishes.
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content
of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content is not less than 20 percent.
C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches o.c.
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed
to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive adjacent construction.
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to
concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced
not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup
masonry and concrete.
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to
cast-in-place concrete.
A. General:
1. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 12 inches apart.
2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Rungs: 1-inch- diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung.
6. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
1. Thickness: As indicated.
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or
concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items
supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each
unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in
concrete.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and
measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before
packing with grout.
C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as
used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted
surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed
metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical
fasteners.
1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation. This includes but not limited to roof framing.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Qualification data.
G. Research/evaluation reports.
A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency
indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.
D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification
for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-
Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."
1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design."
2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of
grade and coating weight as follows:
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated,
punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel
studs.
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated,
punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as
steel studs.
A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths
indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according
to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 , threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and
carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C .
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with
minimum water required for placement and hydration.
D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim
track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform
bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the
top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and
with connections securely fastened.
D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads
comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces
and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has
been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's
standard punched openings.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to
a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately
and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:
B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch
between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of
studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls
or warped surfaces and similar configurations.
D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where
studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously
reinforce track to transfer loads.
G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above
openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required
to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web
stiffeners, or gusset plates.
1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as
indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly
distribute loads.
2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor
tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same
as full-height wall studs.
I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches. Fasten at each stud
intersection.
2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness
indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs.
Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or
flanges.
3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten
to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at
ends of bracing and anchor to structure.
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely
anchor to supporting structure as indicated.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to[ top and] bottom track, unless otherwise indicated.
Space studs as follows:
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls
or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but
not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within
12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet
straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of
width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and
secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness
indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs.
Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or
flanges.
4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners,
clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a
complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system.
A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten
track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop
Drawings.
B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final
position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.
1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.
2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist
hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows:
D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting
joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.
E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section
located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist
reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings.
F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist
intersection as follows:
H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure
pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to
provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to
other construction.
D. Product certificates.
E. Welding certificates.
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised
pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and
Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the
minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33,
G90 zinc coating.
2. Profile Depth: 3 inches.
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply
with requirements indicated.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of
33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and
finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not
stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to deck.
F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding
work.
H. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 2
inches.
I. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to
supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures
to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open
ends of ribs and sides of deck.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
3.3 REPAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each
product having recycled content.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 360.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436,
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-
finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55,
weldable].
1. Configuration: Hooked.
2. Finish: Plain .
1. Finish: Plain .
1. Finish: Plain .
2.3 PRIMER
B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I , zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
2.4 GROUT
2.5 FABRICATION
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale
and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following
specifications and standards:
A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply
with the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of
bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom
surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with
edge of plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids
remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply
with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of
temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according
to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's
option:
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply
with the Contract Documents.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Allowances: Quantity allowances for clay masonry restoration and cleaning are
specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."
C. Unit Prices: Clay masonry restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices
are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi (690 to 2750 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).
B. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi (2750 to 5500 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4
L/s).
C. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi (5500 to 8250 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site,
provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material
2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end
result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
E. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of
surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in
detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for
each phase of the restoration work.
1. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any
phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of
successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to
demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
1. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning
work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other
comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness
for this Project.
1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for
cleaning work and 1 for repair work.
2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that clay
masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress.
C. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials
and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather
conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship masonry units and accessories strapped together in
suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.
C. Store materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
A. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above
and will remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.
A. Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion
of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Equipment:
1. Equipment for removing effluorescence:
a. Garden hose and nozzle
b. Stiff bristle brushes (nonmetallic)
c. Wood or plastic scrapers
2. Equipment for removing dissolved salts:
a. Plastic sheeting
b. Poultice Equipment:
1) Plasterer's float or broad trowel
2) Galvanized wire mesh
3) Galvanized staples
4) Pliers
5) Plastic sacks
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
B. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance
and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of
masonry restoration work.
1. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them
with a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof
masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.
2. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar
joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing
masonry.
B. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold
width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Work from bottom to top of the
building for each scaffold drop.
C. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.
1. Use natural-fiber brushes only.
D. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure
indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning
methods do not damage masonry.
E. For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an
angle of 25 to 50 degrees.
F. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature
between 140 and 160 deg F (60 and 71 deg C) at flow rates indicated.
G. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage
of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even
effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.
A. Before proceeding with steps to remove efflorescence, first decide the cause and
extent of the problem and make repairs as required:
B. Determine the location of the efflorescence. Examination may show where the water is
entering.
D. Examine the wall for open gaps or cracks in joints and around openings that could
allow water to enter the building.
F. Repair cracks in masonry and/or repoint as necessary before proceeding with the
cleaning operations.
G. Examine wall sections and details of construction: Carefully examine roof and wall
junctures and flashing details for possible sources of moisture entry.
H. Examine laboratory test reports on the materials. The problem may stem from the
composition or misuse of the material.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Dry brush the surface with a stiff bristle (nonmetallic) brush, or wash it with clean, clear
water from a garden hose, supplemented by scrubbing with a stiff bristle brush if
necessary.
a. Mist the water evenly over the masonry surface at 18 gallons per hour from
fine spray heads mounted to a boom.
b. The length of time it takes to fully saturate the wall will depend on the type
of masonry, and its porosity (typically 72 hours).
c. Collect water run-off and drain safely away from the building during the
cleaning process.
2. When the wall is thoroughly saturated, mix filler material with enough distilled
water to form a soft, sticky paste. Mix by hand or use a small mechanical mixer.
Add the clay to the water, not water to clay.
3. Apply the poultice to the saturated wall in a single layer (no more than 1 inch
thick) using a plasterer's float or broad trowel.
4. To help bond the clay to the wall surface, press a light-gauge galvanized wire
mesh into the poultice and tack it carefully into joints with galvanized staples.
5. Protect the treated area from direct sun or rain with tarpaulins as needed.
6. Allow the poultice to remain in place about 1 month. As the poultice dries, the
clay will eventually lighten in color, crack, shrink and detach from the wall.
7. Remove the staples using pliers and roll up the clay and wire mesh.
8. Discard materials safely from the site. Thoroughly rinse the treated area with
clean, clear water and allow to dry.
9. Repeat the cycle of wetting and poulticing as needed to reduce the salts to an
acceptable level; Repointing may be required at the end of the desalination
treatment.
OR:
3.6 ADJUSTING/CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the masonry cleaning work, clean window glass and spattered
adjacent surface. Select 1 of 3 subparagraphs below.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
C. Allowances: Quantity allowances for marble restoration and cleaning are specified in
Division 1 Section "Allowances."
D. Unit Prices: marble restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are
described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site,
provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material
2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end
result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.
1. Each type of mortar for pointing and marble rebuilding and repair in the form of
sample mortar strips, 6 inches (150 mm) long by 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, set in
aluminum or plastic channels.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
E. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration and cleaning process, including
protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations.
Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to
be used for each phase of the restoration and cleaning work.
1. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any
phase of restoration and cleaning work, provide a written description, including
evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program
to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for
cleaning work and 1 for repair work.
2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that marble
restoration and cleaning are in progress.
C. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials
and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather
conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.
b. Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample
cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.
F. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for marble restoration from a single source for
each type of material required to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship marble units and accessories strapped together in
suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.
C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
A. Do not repoint mortar joints unless air temperature is between and 40 and 80 deg F (4
and 27 deg C) and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for marble repair
and mortar-joint pointing:
1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), heat mortar ingredients,
marble repair materials, and existing walls to produce temperatures between 40
and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).
2. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and
4 deg C), cover completed Work with weather-resistant, insulating blankets for 48
hours after repair and pointing.
3. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F (minus 4 deg C), provide
enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within
the enclosure for 48 hours after repair and pointing.
D. Clean marble surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and
will remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.
E. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of
surrounding marble and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in
contact with exposed marble and other surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Materials
1. Baking soda or some other alkaline cleaner to be used to form the
poultice paste: Available from hardware store.
2. Liquid laundry bleach for making the paste
3. Mineral water
4. Plastic sheeting
5. Clean dry towels for blotting the area after treatment
b. Equipment
1. Glass or ceramic container for mixing the solution
2. Wooden utensil for stirring the ingredients
3. Wood or plastic spatula
4. Masking tape
a. Manufacturers
1. ProSoCo, Inc.
755 Minnesota Avenue
P.O. Box 1578
3. Dirt on marble:
a. Manufacturers:
1. BASF-Wyandotte Corporation
Chemical Specialties Division
1609 Biddle
Wyandotte, MI 48192
313/246-6100
2. ProSoCo, Inc.
755 Minnesota Avenue
P.O. Box 1578
Kansas City, KS 66117
800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700
3. Eastern Marble Supply Company
P.O. Box 392
Scotch Plains, NJ 07076
908/789-6400
b. Materials
1. Liquid Marble Cleaner: A water-soluble non-acidic chemical cleaner
manufactured specifically for restorative type cleaning of polished and
honed marble surfaces. Cleaner shall contain no abrasives, grease,lye,
or other caustic or corrosive ingredients, such as "Sure Klean Liquid
Marble Cleaner" (ProSoCo, Inc.) or approved equal.
-OR-
Cleaning Detergent: A mildly alkaline phosphorous-free biodegradable
liquid soap.
-OR-
Household ammonia and distilled water
2. Cleaning Compound for Buffing a Honed Finish: An abrasive cleaning
compound, containing no caustic or harsh fillers, manufactured specifi-
cally for restorative type cleaning of honed marble surfaces such as
"Wyandotte Detergent" (BASF-Wyandotte Corporation) or approved
equal.
-OR-
Polishing Agent for Buffing a Polished Finish: A finely ground buffing
powder manufactured specifically for restorative type polishing of pol-
ished marble surfaces, such as "Marbalite #52" (Eastern Marble Supply
Company) or approved equal.
c. Equipment
1. Buffing pads for Polished Finish: Fiber brush pads manufactured spe-
cifically for restorative type polishing of polished marble surfaces
-OR-
Buffing Pads for Honed Finish: Synthetic pads manufactured specifi-
cally for restorative type cleaning of honed marble surfaces
2. Soft natural bristle brushes (DO NOT USE WIRE BRUSHES OR
STEEL WOOL)
3. Circular buffing machine (for floors)
-OR-
Hand-held buffing machine (for surfaces other than floors)
4. Mop and bucket (non-metallic)
5. Sponges
6. Clean, dry cloths
1. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory
performance in marble mortars.
F. Water: Potable.
B. Warm Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F (60 to 71 deg C).
1. Pointing Mortar: 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts colored-
or natural-mortar aggregate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians,
motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured
by such contact.
2. Do not clean marble during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions
to unprotected surfaces.
3. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property.
4. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that
prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to
landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.
5. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of
entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during
course of marble restoration work.
C. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a
liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply
liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.
A. EXAMINATION
1. Examine the marble CAREFULLY to determine the cause of staining before pro-
ceeding with any cleaning operation.
11. Remove the poultice with a wooden or plastic spatula to avoid scratching the sur-
face.
12. Thoroughly rinse the treated area with mineral water, blot, and allow to dry com-
pletely.
13. If there is residual staining, repeat the procedure.
A. Examination
1. Examine the marble surface CAREFULLY to determine the cause of staining
before proceeding with any cleaning operation.
B. Application
1. Thoroughly rinse the stained area with clean, clear water.
2. Apply a thixotropic paste of methylene chloride paint stripper to the surface and
allow to dry; follow manufacturer's instructions.
3. Remove dried paste with a wooden spatula.
4. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water and allow to dry.
5. Repeat the process as necessary to sufficiently remove the stain.
A. Preparation
1. Protection: Prevent chemical cleaning and stain removal solutions from coming
into contact with other surfaces which could be damaged by such contact.
2. Surface Preparation:
a. Prior to cleaning, remove cellophane tape, masking tape, etc. from surface.
B. Application
NOTE: Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner which results in uniform
coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, interstices and which produces
an even effect without streaking or damage to marble surfaces. CLEAN TO ACHIEVE
A DESIRED (NOT NEW) APPEARANCE.
1. Cleaning Honed Marble:
a. Machine buff with a cleaning compound (see Materials, Section 2.02 B.
above):
1) Thoroughly wet honed marble surface with hot water.
2) Sprinkle cleaning compound onto surface.
3) Buff surfaces using a large circular buffing machine with a synthetic pad
for floors or a hand-held machine for other surfaces to lift dirt build-up.
4) Treat edges and corners of surfaces not accessible with the hand-held
machine.
5) Thoroughly rinse surfaces with clean, clear water to remove loosened dirt
and standing water. Change rinse water frequently and repeat rinsing as
required to completely remove water and dirt residue from surface.
6) Repeat process as to achieve the desired appearance.
7) Dry surfaces with clean, dry cloths or dry mop floors after rinsing to pre-
vent streaking.
-OR-
A. Examination
1. Examine the marble surface CAREFULLY to determine the extent of loose and
missing joints before proceeding with any raking and repointing operation.
1. Rake out loose mortar from joints to depths not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or not
less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar.
2. Remove mortar from marble surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals
with square backs and to expose marble for contact with pointing mortar. Brush,
vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.
3. Do not spall edges of marble or widen joints. Replace damaged marble.
a. Cut out old mortar by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval
based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality-control
program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without
damaging marble. Quality-control program shall include provisions for
supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue.
1. Rinse marble surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time
rinsing application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run
off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water.
2. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was
removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater
than 3/8 inch (9 mm) until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer
thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the next layer.
3. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of
joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by
brushing.
4. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for at least 72 hours.
5. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing marble, allow mortar to
harden at least 14 days before beginning cleaning work.
A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed marble surfaces of excess
mortar and foreign matter; use stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes and clean water, spray
applied at a low pressure.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes the following:
a. Removing plant growth.
b. Repairing stonework, including replacing damaged units.
c. Cleaning exposed stone surfaces.
d. Repointing mortar joints.
e. Stone consolidation treatment.
2. Related Sections include the following:
a. Division 4 Section "Clay Masonry Restoration and Cleaning."
b. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in restored stone
construction.
3. Allowances: Quantity allowances for stone restoration and cleaning are specified in
Division 1 Section "Allowances."
4. Unit Prices: Stone restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are
described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.02 DEFINITIONS
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide
product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured
materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured
material
2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end result,
submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.
1. Each new exposed material to be used for replacing existing materials. Include in
each set of samples the full range of colors and textures to be expected in the
completed Work.
a. 12-by-12-inch minimum stone samples.
2. Each type of mortar for pointing and stone rebuilding and repair in the form of sample
mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.
a. Each type of repair anchor.
b. Each type of adhesive.
c. Each type of chemical cleaner.
3. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,
and other information specified.
4. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection
of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe
in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used
for each phase of the restoration work.
a. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any
phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of
successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to
demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
b. Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of
surrounding materials on building and Project site, and control of runoff during
operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used.
c. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning
work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other
comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for
this Project.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced stone restoration and cleaning firm that
has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for
cleaning work and 1 for repair work.
2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced
full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that stone restoration and
cleaning are in progress
3. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing
masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful
results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation
and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost
4. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use
materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under
same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.
a. Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect.
b. Stonework Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of
stone material indicated to be patched, rebuilt, or replaced. Erect sample panels
into an existing wall, unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate the quality of
materials and workmanship.
c. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 25 sq. ft. in area for each type of stone
and surface condition.
1) Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible
adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a
deleterious effect.
2) Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample
cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.
3) Repointing: Prepare 2 separate sample areas approximately 36 inches high
by 72 inches wide for each type of repointing required; one for demonstrating
methods and quality of workmanship expected in removing mortar from joints
and the other for demonstrating quality of materials and workmanship
expected in pointing mortar joints.
4) Stone Consolidation Treatment: Demonstrate materials and methods to be
used on a sample panel approximately 4 sq. ft. in area.
5) Insert other mockups as required.
6) Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will
be prepared.
7) Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of stone
restoration and cleaning.
8) Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
5. Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in
performing the type of tests indicated and approved by Architect to perform
preconstruction tests.
a. Preconstruction Stone Tests: Test stone according to ASTM C 97 for absorption
and bulk specific gravity, ASTM C 99 for modulus of rupture, and ASTM C 170 for
compressive strength.
b. Test each proposed type of replacement stone.
6. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for stone restoration from a single source for
each type of material required (stone, cement, sand, etc.) to ensure a match of
quality, color, pattern, and texture.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship stone and accessories strapped together in suitable
packs or pallets or in crates or heavy-duty containers.
C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
D. Store aggregates, covered and in a dry location, where grading and other required
characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
E. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature
requirements for storage.
A. Do not repoint mortar joints or repair stone unless air temperature is between 40 and
80 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for stone repair and
mortar-joint pointing:
1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, stone repair
materials, and existing walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F.
a. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F, cover completed
Work with weather-resistant, insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair and
pointing.
b. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F, provide enclosure and heat
to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 48 hours after
repair and pointing.
D. Apply stone consolidation treatment only when surface and air temperatures are
between 50 and 90 deg F and rain is not expected within 24 hours.
E. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of
surrounding stone and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in contact
with exposed stone and other surfaces.
1. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
A. Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion
of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cast Stone: Provide cast building stone of variety, color, finish, size, and shape to
match existing stone.
B. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested
according to ASTM C 114.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Portland cement for use with limestone shall contain not more
than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
3. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar
color indicated.
a. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges.
b. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible.
c. If known, indicate source of sand and size and gradation.
5. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory
performance in stone mortars.
6. Factory-Mixed Patching Mortar: Cement-based vapor-permeable mortar, custom-
manufactured for patching stone and formulated to match stone in color and texture.
7. Water: Potable.
E. Stone Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, to match existing anchors in
size and type. Fabricate anchors and dowels from Type 304 stainless steel.
2.06 MORTAR
B. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together
before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this
dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until
reaching mortar of the desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final
mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
C. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not
adjust proportions without Architect's approval.
1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to-
cement ratio of 1:10 by weight.
2. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:
a. Pointing Mortar for Stone: 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts
colored- or natural-mortar aggregate.
b. Pointing Mortar for Stone: 1 part white portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts
colored- or natural-mortar aggregate
c. Rebuilding Mortar: 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts colored-
or natural-mortar aggregate.
d. Rebuilding Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N,
unless otherwise indicated, with cementitious material limited to portland cement
and lime.
e. Patching Mortar for Stone: Provide mix composed of white and gray cement
combined with lime and selected aggregates to produce a color matching the
color of existing stone. Proportion mix with 2 parts cement, 2 parts lime, and 6
parts aggregate.
B. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Unpolished Stone: Unless otherwise indicated, dilute with
water to produce a hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than
that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
1. Use only on unpolished granite, unpolished dolomite marbles, and siliceous
sandstone.
2. Acidic Cleaner for Polished Stone: Dilute with water to a concentration
demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage the polished
surface, but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting
building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products.
A. Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, stone that has deteriorated, shifted, or
is damaged beyond repair.
B. Support and protect remaining stonework that surrounds removal area. Maintain
flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.
C. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from salvaged stone and stone surrounding
removed units to prepare for resetting.
D. Replace removed stone with salvaged stone, where possible, or with new stone
matching existing stone, including size. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting
and set units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Rake out mortar used for laying stone before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in
repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing stone.
A. Carefully remove loose stone fragments in areas to be repaired. Reuse only pieces of
spalled stone that are in sound condition.
B. Remove soil, loose stone particles, mortar, and other debris or foreign material from the
surfaces to be bonded on both the fragment and the building stone from which fragment
was removed by cleaning with a stiff-fiber brush.
A. Cut out deteriorated stone and adjacent stone that has begun to deteriorate. Remove
additional stone so patch will not have feathered edges and will be at least 1/4 inch thick.
B. Remove loose particles, soil, debris, oil, and other contaminants from existing stone
units at locations indicated by cleaning with a stiff-fiber brush.
-OR-
D. Brush-coat stone surfaces with a slurry coat of patching mortar complying with
manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Place patching mortar in layers no thicker than 2 inches. Roughen surface of each layer
to provide a key for the next layer.
F. Build patch up 1/4 inch above surrounding stone and carve surface to match adjoining
stone after mortar has hardened.
G. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until mortar has set.
H. Unacceptable patches are those with hairline cracks or that show separation from stone
at edges, and those that do not match adjoining stone in color or texture. Remove
patches and refill to provide patches free of these defects.
A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold
width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Work from bottom to top of the
building for each scaffold drop.
B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each stone material and location.
1. Use natural-fiber brushes only.
C. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure
indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning
methods do not damage stonework.
1. Equip units with pressure gages.
D. For chemical cleaner spray application, use a low-pressure tank or chemical pump
suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with a cone-shaped spray tip.
E. For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle
of 25 to 50 degrees.
1. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining
temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated.
2. For steam application, use a steam generator capable of delivering live steam at
nozzle.
F. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of
all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even
effect without streaking or damaging stone surfaces
G. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from stone
surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and
allowing to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil or debris from
open joints to whatever depth they occur.
1. Apply ammonium sulfamate or another acceptable root-killing material to plant roots
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply materials to plants
that are to remain.
H. Water Application Methods: Where water application methods are indicated, comply
with the following:
1. Prolonged Spraying: Soak stone surfaces by applying water continuously and
uniformly to a limited area for the time indicated. Apply water at low pressures and
low volumes in multiple fine sprays using perforated hoses or multiple spray nozzles.
Erect a protective enclosure constructed of polyethylene sheeting to cover area
being sprayed.
I. Spray Applications: Spray apply water to stone surfaces to comply with requirements
indicated for location, purpose, water temperature, pressure, volume, and equipment.
Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of stone
and apply water from side to side in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and
an even effect.
1. Steam Wash: Apply steam to stone surfaces at pressures not exceeding 80 psi.
Hold nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of stone and apply steam from side to side
or in direction of tooling in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and an
even effect.
K. Spray Application: Apply chemical cleaners at pressures not exceeding 50 psi, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Reapplying Chemical Cleaners: Do not apply chemical cleaners to same stone
surfaces more than twice. If additional cleaning is required, use a steam wash.
2. Bottom to top rinsing helps ensure a thorough and uniform rinse; rinse water leaving
bottom of wall while top is being rinsed will only be clear if entire wall is thoroughly
rinsed. Also, entire wall will be wet when rinsing is completed, resulting in more
uniform drying and less streaking.
3. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each
treated area at each stage or scaffold setting.
B. Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean stone with a mild acidic cleaner applied as
follows:
1. Wet stone with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.
2. Apply cleaner to stone. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below:
a. As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
3. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil.
C. Non-acidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: Clean stonework with a Non-acidic gel cleaner
applied as follows:
1. Wet stone with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.
2. Apply Non-acidic gel cleaner in a 1/8-inch thickness by brush, working into joints and
crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be uniformly
covered with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout area being
cleaned.
3. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below:
a. As established by mockup.
4. Remove bulk of Non-acidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for disposal.
5. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil.
a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.
6. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.
E. Two-Part Limestone Chemical Cleaning: Clean limestone with 2-part limestone cleaner
applied as follows:
1. Wet stone with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.
2. Apply alkaline prewash cleaner to stone by brush or roller. Let cleaner remain on
surface for period recommended by cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. A specific time should be inserted in subparagraph above as determined by
preliminary testing. Time will vary depending on temperature and relative humidity.
4. Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and
soil.
5. Apply an afterwash acid neutralizer to stone, while surface is still wet, using low-
pressure spray equipment, a deep-nap roller, or a soft-fiber brush. Let neutralizer
F. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paint Remover: Remove paint from stonework as follows:
1. Apply paint remover to dry, painted stonework with brushes.
2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer.
3. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and paint residue.
a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.
4. Apply an acidic cleaner to stonework, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure
spray equipment or a soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period
recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil.
a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.
G. Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Remove paint from stonework as
follows:
1. Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted stonework with natural-fiber cleaning
brush, deep-nap roller, or large paint brush.
2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer.
Agitate periodically with a stiff-fiber brush.
3. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and paint residue.
4. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.
B. Apply in cycles (repeated applications) to small sections of stonework, not more than
100 sq. ft. in area. Each cycle shall consist of 3 successive saturating applications,
applied at 5- to 15-minute intervals, depending on drying conditions.
C. Apply by low-pressure spray to the point of rejection in each application. Apply from
bottom of section to top.
D. Apply 3 cycles, allowing treated surface to dry for 60 to 90 minutes between cycles.
F. Allow treated surfaces to dry for at least 21 days before repointing, patching, or applying
water repellents or sealants.
A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed stonework surfaces of excess
mortar and foreign matter; use stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes and clean water, spray
applied at a low pressure.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Allowances: Quantity allowances for clay masonry restoration and cleaning are
specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."
C. Unit Prices: Clay masonry restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices
are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
1. Each type of mortar for pointing and masonry rebuilding and repair in the form of
sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic
channels.
2. Each type of repair anchor.
3. Each type of chemical cleaner.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
D. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of
surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in
detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for
each phase of the restoration work.
1. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any
phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of
successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to
demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
1. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning
work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other
comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness
for this Project.
1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for
cleaning work and 1 for repair work.
2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that clay
masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress.
D. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials
and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather
conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.
G. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for masonry restoration from a single source for
each type of material required (face brick, cement, sand, etc.) to ensure a match of
quality, color, pattern, and texture.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship masonry units and accessories strapped together in
suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.
C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
D. Store aggregates, covered and in a dry location, where grading and other required
characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
A. Do not repoint mortar joints or repair masonry unless air temperature is between and
40 and 80 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair
and mortar-joint pointing:
1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, masonry repair
materials, and existing masonry walls to produce temperatures between 40 and
120 deg F.
2. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F, cover completed
Work with weather-resistant, insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair and
pointing.
3. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F, provide enclosure and heat
to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 48 hours after
repair and pointing.
D. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will
remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.
E. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of
surrounding masonry and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in
contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.
A. Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion
of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2. ProSoCo, Inc.
755 Minnesota Avenue
P.O. Box 1578
Kansas City, KS 66117
800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700
5. GAF Corporation
1361 Alps Road
Wayne, NJ 07470
201/628-4127
6. Ashland Chemical
4550 N. East Expressway
Doraville, GA 30340
404/448-7010
1. Terra Cotta:
6. Acidic Cleaner:
16. Filler material such as attapulgite clay, kaolin, fuller's earth, talc, chalk, cotton
pads, acid-free paper. (Do not use chalk or iron-containing clay with an acid sol-
vent as their chemical reaction will cancel the effectiveness of the acid).
A. Face Brick and Accessories: Provide face brick and accessories, including specially
molded, ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration
work.
1. Provide units with color, surface texture, size, and shape to match existing brick
work and with physical properties not less than those determined from
preconstruction testing of selected existing units.
2. Provide units with color, surface texture, and physical properties to match
Architect's sample. Match existing units in size and shape.
B. Building Brick: Provide building brick complying with ASTM C 62, of same vertical
dimension as face brick, for masonry work concealed from view.
C. Terra Cotta: Provide new terra cotta units to match existing terra cotta units in
compressive strength, color, gloss, surface texture, thickness and composition of
surface glaze, composition of body, profile, and dimensions.
1. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory
performance in masonry mortars.
F. Water: Potable.
B. Masonry Repair Anchors, Spiral Type: Type 304 stainless-steel spiral rods designed to
anchor to backing and veneer. Anchors are flexible in plane of veneer but rigid
perpendicular to it.
C. Brushes: Natural fiber bristle only. The use of wire brushes or steel wool is not
permitted.
D. Wood spatula
A. Preparing Lime Putty: Slake quicklime and prepare lime putty according to appendix to
ASTM C 5 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Pointing Mortar for Brick: 1 part portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts
colored- or natural-mortar aggregate.
2. Rebuilding Mortar: Same as pointing mortar.
3. Rebuilding Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N,
unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material content limited to portland
cement and lime.
B. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Brick: Unless otherwise indicated, dilute with water to
produce a hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than that
recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
C. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Terra Cotta: Dilute with water to a concentration
demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage terra cotta surface,
but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians,
motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured
by such contact.
C. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a
liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply
liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.
A. Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, bricks that are damaged, spalled, or
deteriorated. Cut out full units from joint to joint and in a manner to permit replacement
with full-size units without damaging surrounding masonry.
B. Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area. Maintain
flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.
D. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from salvaged brick by cleaning with brushes
and water. Store brick for reuse.
E. Clean remaining brick at edges of removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose
particles in preparation for replacement.
F. Install new or salvaged brick to replace removed brick. Fit replacement units into
bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven
saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
G. Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends
with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet clay bricks that have
ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 g per 30 sq. in. per min.
Use wetting methods that ensure units are nearly saturated but surface dry when laid.
Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing units.
A. Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, terra cotta units that are damaged,
spalled, or deteriorated. Cut out full units from joint to joint and in a manner to permit
replacement with full-size units without damaging surrounding masonry.
B. Support and protect remaining masonry that was supported by removed units.
C. Remove mortar, dust, and loose particles from existing masonry surrounding removed
units in preparation for replacement. Clean with stiff-fiber brushes or by flushing with
water and compressed air.
D. Set replacement units in a full bed of mortar with both horizontal and vertical joints of
same width as existing units. Replace existing anchors with new anchors that match
existing anchors in size and type.
1. Embed anchors in and fill voids behind units with grout to match existing
construction.
E. Point new mortar joints to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry,
and rake out mortar used for laying terra cotta units before mortar sets.
B. Recess anchors at least 5/8 inch from surface of mortar joint and fill recess with
pointing mortar.
A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold
width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Work from bottom to top of the
building for each scaffold drop.
B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.
4. For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at
an angle of 25 to 50 degrees.
5. For high-pressure water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that
disperses water at an angle of at least 40 degrees.
6. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining
temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated.
7. For steam application, use a steam generator capable of delivering live steam at
nozzle.
C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage
of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even
effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.
D. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from
masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at
roots and allowing to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and
debris from open masonry joints to whatever depth they occur.
E. Water Application Methods: Where water application methods are indicated, comply
with the following:
G. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each
treated area at each stage or scaffold setting.
A. Cold-Water Wash: Clean brick masonry with cold water applied as follows:
1. Low-pressure spray.
B. Warm-Water Wash: Clean brick masonry with warm water applied as follows:
1. Low-pressure spray.
C. Detergent Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a detergent solution applied as follows:
6. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup.
D. Non-acidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a non-acidic liquid
cleaner applied as follows:
4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.
E. Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a mild acidic cleaner applied
as follows:
4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.
F. Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with an acidic cleaner applied as
follows:
4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.
G. Non-acidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a non-acidic gel cleaner
applied as follows:
6. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.
H. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paint Remover: Remove paint from masonry surfaces as
follows:
5. Apply an acidic cleaner to masonry, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure
spray equipment or a soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period
recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil.
I. Adhesive Removal:
J. Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Remove paint from masonry
surfaces as follows:
B. Examine the surrounding area for signs of what may have been used to create the
graffiti (i.e. spray cans or other debris).
1. Wash the area with a solution of trisodium phosphate (TSP) and water. Apply with
a non-metallic brush.
2. When the paint has softened, scrape off as much as possible with a wooden
scraper.
3. Wash the area again using a non-ionic detergent and water.
4. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water.
A. Surface Preparation:
B. Application:
1. Prewet wall with clean, clear water immediately before applying ferrous-based stain
remover.
2. Apply ferrous-based stain remover with natural fiber bristle brush. Allow to dwell on
the surface for three to five minutes.
3. Rinse all traces of chemical and residue with pressurized cold water. Repeat proce-
dure if necessary. Rinse water pressure shall not exceed 300 psi, and shall be
sprayed through nozzles fitted with 15 to 20 wide nozzle tips. Nozzles shall be held
perpendicular to the surface at a working distance of 1.5 to 2.5 feet. All pressure
pumps shall be equipped with working pressure gauges.
4. Repeat procedure if necessary to remove all traces of ferrous stain.
A. Warm-Water Wash: Clean terra cotta with warm water applied as follows:
1. Low-pressure spray.
B. Steam Cleaning: Remove soil from terra cotta by applying live steam.
C. Non-acidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: Clean terra cotta with non-acidic gel cleaner
applied as follows:
a. As established by mockup.
8. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.
D. Non-acidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning: Clean terra cotta with a non-acidic liquid cleaner
applied as follows:
E. Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean terra cotta with a mild acidic cleaner applied as
follows:
2. Apply cleaner to terra cotta. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated
below:
4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.
F. Two-Part Chemical Cleaning: At locations indicated, clean terra cotta with 2-part
system using chemical cleaners applied as follows:
1. Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths, but not
less than 1/2 inch or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered
mortar.
2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals
with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar.
Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.
3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace damaged masonry
units.
a. Cut out old mortar by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval
based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality-control
1. Rinse masonry-joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles.
Time rinsing application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated
or run off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water.
2. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was
removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater
than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly
and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the next layer.
3. After joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in
3 layers with first and second layers each filling about two-fifths of joint depth;
third layer, the remaining one-fifth. Fully compact each layer and allow to
become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have
rounded edges, slightly recess final layer from face. Take care not to spread
mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge mortar.
4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of
joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by
brushing.
5. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for at least 72 hours.
6. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to
harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work.
A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess
mortar and foreign matter; use stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes and clean water, spray
applied at a low pressure.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include test data indicating compliance
with physical properties specified.
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Samples:
A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIMESTONE
2.2 BLUESTONE
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to
ASTM C 114.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry
mortar.
E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime or masonry
cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.
2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
3. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound
stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
G. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
H. Water: Potable.
A. Materials:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2.
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, [Type 304] [Type 316].
B. Wire Veneer Anchors: Wire ties formed from W1.7 or 0.148-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized
or stainless-steel wire.
C. Corrugated-Metal Veneer Anchors: Not less than 0.030-inch- thick by 7/8-inch- wide hot-dip
galvanized or stainless]steel sheet with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and
an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch.
D. Adjustable, Screw-Attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal
anchor section that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to plane of wall.
a. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; D/A 213 or D/A 210 with D/A 700-708.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10, DW-10HS or DW-10-X.
d. Wire-Bond; 1004, Type III or RJ-711.
E. Seismic Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section
designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in stone masonry mortar joint.
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing[, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where
indicated,] complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:
1. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft.
weight or 0.0135 inch thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0216
inch thick elsewhere.
B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: [5-oz./sq. ft.] [7-oz./sq. ft.] copper sheet bonded with
asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed
in masonry.
A. Cementitious Dampproofing: Cementitious formulations that are recommended by ILI and that
are nonstaining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to veneer anchors
and attachments.
C. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity.
a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7
inches deep.
b. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch thick and 10 inches wide, with dimpled surface
designed to catch mortar droppings.
c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.
d. Sheets or strips not less than 3/4 inch thick and installed to full height of cavity with
additional strips 4 inches high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth of
cavity.
D. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with
ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying
with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.
E. Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933, fabricated into 2-by-2-inch mesh with minimum 0.0625-inch-
diameter, galvanized-steel wire.
B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a
consistency similar to that of thick cream.
1. For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part
or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose
damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.
F. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Unit Masonry: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 7 parts loose
damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.
G. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on
Drawings. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.
1. Sawed-bed, range ashlar with uniform course heights and uniform lengths as indicated
on Drawings.
D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to
match approved samples and mockups.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning
stone installation.
1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces.
2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces.
B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements
relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for
intended use.
C. Arrange stones in range ashlar pattern with course heights as indicated, uniform lengths, and
uniform joint widths, with offset between vertical joints as indicated.
D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended
appearance.
E. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor
variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4
inch at narrowest points or more than 3/8 inch at widest points.
G. Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to
downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
1. At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a minimum of 4
inches, and insert in reglet. Reglets are specified Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
2. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of
metal drip edge.
3. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top
of metal flashing termination.
4. Cut flexible flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
1. Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 12 inches above finish-grade
elevations.
2. Stone Extending below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces below
grade.
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control
joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or
more.
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or
more.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet
or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
A. Anchor stone masonry to concrete with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless otherwise
indicated. Secure anchors by inserting dovetailed ends into dovetail slots in concrete.
B. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated. Connect
anchors to masonry joint reinforcement by inserting pintles into eyes of masonry joint
reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.
C. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated. Connect
anchors to masonry joint reinforcement with vertical rods inserted through anchors and through
eyes of masonry joint reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.
D. Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less than 1-
1/2 inches, through stone masonry and with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
1. Install continuous wire reinforcement in horizontal joints and attach to seismic veneer
anchors as stone is set.
E. Space anchors to provide not less than 1 anchor per 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional
anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not exceeding
12 inches.
F. Space anchors not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally. Install
additional anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches.
G. Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors
into mortar joints as stone is set.
H. Fill space between back of stone masonry and weather-resistant sheathing paper with mortar
as stone is set.
I. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch. Rake joints to uniform
depths with square bottoms and clean sides.
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing
thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Note No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution.
6. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
7. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone
Handbook."
A. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil-
contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles
for unit masonry.
3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured
reglets installed in masonry joints.
1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 67
for compressive strength.
2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to
ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.
3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
4. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 780 for compressive strength.
5. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 1019.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5.1: For products and materials required to
comply with requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance
from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or
recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each
regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.
C. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete
Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored
mortar.
E. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units
include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance
with requirements.
F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength,
ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to
comply with compressive strength requirement.
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches
long by 48 inches high by full thickness.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage
of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements
for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119,
by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
A. Regional Materials: Provide CMUs that have been manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or
recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement
joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam
CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.
2.4 BRICK
A. Regional Materials: Provide brick that has been manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well
as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise
expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with
exposed surfaces finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would
result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
A. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime that
have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500
miles of Project site.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
mortar color indicated.
D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only
pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
G. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from masonry cement and mortar
pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing the No. 16 sieve.
2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
J. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use
as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by
manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's colors.
L. Color: Pointing mortar to match existing façade mortar color after façade cleaning.
M. Water: Potable.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
Grade 60.
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type
with single pair of side rods.
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from
materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least
halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of
wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.
C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches
wide.
D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that
allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry
face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane
of wall.
1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and
attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized
after fabrication .
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry
face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
3. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations
having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch
made from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with
dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to
within 1 inch of masonry face.
F. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6
inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows
rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
G. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24
inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise
indicated.
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" and Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"" and as follows:
1. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into
wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees[ and
hemmed].
2. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into
wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on
itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant
backer rod.
3. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:[ As specified in Division 7 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."]
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing
sheets to each other and to substrates.
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from [neoprene] [urethane] [or] [PVC].
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not
degrade within the wall cavity.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly
blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, [Proportion] [Property]
Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless
another type is indicated.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product[ or select and proportion pigments
with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored
cement products].
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions
of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 .
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures similar to existing façade.
C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30
sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at time of laying.
3.2 TOLERANCES
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more
than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2
inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals,
and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch
in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
6. Match horizontal lines of existing building watertable.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/8 inch.
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns,
and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and,
where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern matching
existing building façade.
C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed
joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course
on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting
course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed
joints or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes
(other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover
of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum
of 6 inches.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces
structural steel or concrete to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and
structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of
mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to
structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36
inches o.c. horizontally.
A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with seismic masonry-
veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:
2. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not
less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of
sheathing.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties
up and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24
inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. of wall
area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not
exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that
could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall
flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with
mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as
recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not
less than 2 inches to form end dams.
3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal drip edge.
4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall.
Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:
D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for
cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
E. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified
weep/vent products to form vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.
Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches .
A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage special inspectors to perform tests and
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work
areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to
comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for
compressive strength.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140
for compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided,
according to ASTM C 780.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes.
2. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Notes 20.
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste and other masonry
waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
2. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate
VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
C. Qualification data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
5. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2500 psi at 28 days when tested according
to ASTM C472.
C. Water: Potable, free from impurities, and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with
underlayment according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
D. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
F. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
D. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate,
including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
A. Slump Test: Underlayment mix shall be tested for slump as it's being pumped using a 2
inch by 4 inch cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8 inches plus or minus 1 inch
diameter.
B. Field Samples: At least one set of 3 molded cube samples shall be taken from each
day's pour during the underlayment application. Test in accordance with modified
ASTM C 472.
A. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in
writing by underlayment manufacturer.
B. Sealing: Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods according to underlayment
manufacturer. Any floor areas where the surface has been damaged shall be cleaned
and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. Use sealer to seal underlayment
prior to installation of glue down floor goods. Where floor goods manufacturers require
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction
period.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content.
2. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing portland
cement replacements and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain
portland cement replacements.
D. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement and formwork. Material test reports and
certificates.
B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class [I] [II] zinc coated
after fabrication and bending.
2. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M, epoxy coated, with less
than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture
bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual
of Standard Practice."
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type,
brand, and source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I and II . Supplement with one of the
following:
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397,
not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or
pressure-sensitive joint tape.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
D. Water: Potable.
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag,
and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would
otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be
applied, until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired,
at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on
concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into
concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface
and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that
no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams
or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide
construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed
surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or
quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still
plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps,
and elsewhere as indicated.
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for
hot-weather protection during curing.
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during
curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after
initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's
approval.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plants.
2. Planting soils.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves,
twigs, and detritus.
D. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
G. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface
soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and
perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
H. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where
the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the
stem or trunk.
I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
J. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
K. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In
undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban
environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Product certificates.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit WE1.1: For plant materials that are native and adaptive.
B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, Contractor shall furnish soil analysis and a written
report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil
amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,
viable plants.
b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide
additional recommendations for corrective action.
C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable
requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
A. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack
root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from
sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not
bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide
protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery
and handling.
D. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.
E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If
planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate
aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep
roots moist.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in
materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of
adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond
Contractor's control.
b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: 12 months from date of planting completion.
2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Six months from date of
planting completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form,
shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings
and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or
root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated
when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald,
injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which
shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.
B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture,
with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
2.4 FERTILIZERS
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent
potassium, by weight.
2.6 MULCHES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Remove stones larger
than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.
B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-
degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom
leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away
from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil
to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as planting soil.
A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.
B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break.
C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent
finish grades.
4. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before
placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural
and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders;
remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural
character.
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in
even rows with triangular spacing.
D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around
plants to hold water.
E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery
from transplanting shock.
B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and
pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.
D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before
each application is performed.
E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors
and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or
replace damaged plantings.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Seeding.
2. Sodding.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves,
twigs, and detritus.
C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface
soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and
perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
I. Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project
site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as
urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Product certificates.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit WE1.1: For native or adaptive plant materials.
B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, Contractor shall furnish soil analysis and a written
report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil
amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,
viable plants.
b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide
additional recommendations for corrective action.
A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened
containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and
indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.
B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for
Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in
TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24
hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.
A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape
Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is
planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following
periods:
1. Seeded Turf: Native Turf Mix: 120 days from date of planting completion.
a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or
if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed
Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
1-800-873-3321
A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified], including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and
insects], complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline
Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture,
strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium
carbonate equivalent and as follows:
1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of
75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve.
C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10
percent sulfur.
F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent
passing through No. 50 sieve.
H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water
absorption capacity by weight.
2.5 FERTILIZERS
A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of [4] percent nitrogen and
20 percent phosphoric acid.
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent
potassium, by weight.
A. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic
material content. Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources; do not obtain
from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil.
Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete
slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth. Have soil tested to determine the amount of soil
amendments and fertilizer quantities needed. Mix soil with the following soil amendments and
fertilizers to produce planting soil:
9. Slow-Release Fertilizer.
2.7 MULCHES
A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of
wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
2.8 PESTICIDES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones
larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.
2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers
according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till
soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.
3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other
extraneous matter.
4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's
property.
C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove
ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be
planted in the immediate future.
D. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry
before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
E. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded
or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.2 SEEDING
A. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by
sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not seed against
existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread
uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches] in loose
thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.
1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment.
E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch] within 24
hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness
of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth.
3.3 SODDING
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or
muddy.
B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch
or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to
subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade,
eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor
cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting,
water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2
inches below sod.
A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and
performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and
replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials
and installation the same as those used in the original installation.
B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height
appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than
1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.
C. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before
each application is performed.
1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand
of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage
exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches .
2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-
colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and
surface irregularities.
B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue
maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Seating.
2. Bicycle racks.
3. Trash receptacles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Maintenance Data.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit: MRc4 and MRc5: Recycled Content and Local /Regional
Materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.2 SEATING
2. Size: 72”
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Victor Stanley ; BK-
6 or a comparable product.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs,
barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.
B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize
field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements
are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
B. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing plumb or at correct angle and aligned
and at correct height and spacing.
C. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to
depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and fill annular space
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and
placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts.
After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Decorative wrought iron fences.
2. Swing gates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Shop Drawings: For gates and fence. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Wrought Iron:
C. Bars (Pickets): Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M,
Grade 1010.
A. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer for Steel: Complying with MPI #20 and compatible with
coating specified to be applied over it.
B. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and
topcoat.
C. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
A. Grounding Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for
No. 4 AWG and larger.
A. Decorative Steel Fences: Fences made from steel bars and shapes.
J. Finish for Steel Items Other than Bar Grating Infill: High-performance coating.
A. Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square steel tubing as indicated
on Drawings.
B. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers
for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for
pairs of gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock
accessible from both sides of gate.
B. Powder Coating: 2-coat finish consisting of epoxy primer and TGIC polyester topcoat,
with a minimum total dry film thickness of not less than 8 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening infill panels to posts.
C. Post Excavation: Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a
depth of not less than 24 inches plus 3 inches for each foot or fraction of a foot that
fence height exceeds 4 feet.
D. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into existing stone wall.
A. Re-install gates level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach
hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in
concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where
necessary.
a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening.
Bond metal gates to gate posts.
B. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until
the top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG
conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location.
C. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate
frame.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
D. LEED Submittals:
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Solid Concrete Pavers for Porous Paving: Solid interlocking paving units of shapes that provide
openings between units, complying with ASTM C 936, resistant to freezing and thawing when
tested according to ASTM C 67, and made from normal-weight aggregates.
A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with STM D 448 for
Size No. 57 For size No. 2
B. Graded Aggregate for Base Course: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8
C. Graded Aggregate for Leveling Course: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.
D. Graded Aggregate for Porous Paver Fill: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be
structurally unsound or visible in finished work.
B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment[ or a block splitter] to provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly.
Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
C. Tolerances:
1. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit
offset from flush.
2. Variation from Level or Indicated Slope: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 24 inches and 1/4
inch in 10 feet or a maximum of 1/2 inch.
D. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density.
B. Place drainage geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12
inches.
C. Place aggregate Open graded base compact to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum
laboratory density, and screed to depth indicated.
D. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 2 to 2-1/2 inches, taking care that moisture
content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted.
A. Set unit pavers on leveling course, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have
lugs or spacer bars to control spacing, place pavers hand tight against lugs or spacer bars. If
pavers do not have lugs or spacer bars, place pavers with a 1/16-inch- minimum and 1/8-inch-
maximum joint width.
B. Compact pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to
5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
C. Place graded aggregate fill immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Spread and
screed aggregate fill level with tops of pavers.
D. Remove and replace pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or
that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same
manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MRc4 and MRc5: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer
recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled
content.
A. Mockups: Build mockups for each form and pattern of unit paver.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting
beds.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements for Mortar and Grout: Heat materials to provide mortar and grout
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Protect unit paver work against freezing for 24 hours
after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902, Class SX, Type I , Application PX.
Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Brick shall match the brick specified for the building façade and
walls. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the name of product and
samples as follows:
B. Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a temporary
protective coating that is compatible with brick, mortar, and grout products.
A. Rough-Stone Pavers: Rectangular paving stones, with split faces and edges, made from
granite complying with ASTM C 615.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Edge Restraints: Painted steel edging 3/16 inch thick by 4 inches high with loops pressed
from or welded to face to receive stakes at 36 inches o.c., and steel stakes 15 inches long for
each loop.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
2. Color: Black
B. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
C. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
D. Latex Additive: Water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type
specifically recommended by manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed,
and not containing a retarder.
E. Water: Potable.
A. Polymer-Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7, sanded grout; in color to match grout of the building and
walls.
B. Grout Colors: to match the grout color of the building and walls.
C. Water: Potable.
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions.
Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.
B. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement or cement and sand with water to a creamy
consistency.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification.
D. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Comply with written instructions of latex-
additive manufacturer to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive
pavers.
E. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Mix portland cement, sand, and latex
additive to comply with written instructions of latex-additive manufacturer.
F. Polymer-Modified Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit
adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.
D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24
inches and 1/4 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install
joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing
setting bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not
exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat.
C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat immediately after applying bond coat. Spread and screed to
subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar that can be covered with pavers before initial set. Cut
back and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set before placing pavers.
E. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute
when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time
of laying.
F. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers, apply
uniform 1/16-inch- thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each paver.
G. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of
realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
H. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 1/2-inch nominal joint width with variations not exceeding plus or
minus 1/16 inch.
1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
2. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard.
J. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days, unless otherwise recommended
by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
K. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
SECTION 02764
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint-sealant
samples in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of
material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product
manufacturer.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and
compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
D. Product Testing: Contractor shall obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in
"Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing of current sealant products
within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the Work.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
3. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost.
4. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
5. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
1. Available Products:
A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter
and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and
width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill
remainder of joint opening under sealant.
D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density
required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
2.5 PRIMERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-
sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
surfaces.
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations
indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the
original work.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Paver sub base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit SSc7.1, MRc4 and MRc5: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer
recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled
content.
2. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a
replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements. For each
design mixture submitted, include an equivalent concrete mixture that does not contain
portland cement replacements, to determine amount of portland cement replaced.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures
when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Recycled Content: Provide steel reinforcement with an average recycled content of steel so
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than
25 percent.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
G. Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars; zinc coated (galvanized) after
fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating. Cut bars true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.
H. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar
supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast
concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and
source throughout Project:
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from
a single source.
B. Water: Potable.
A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled
HDPE, or commingled postconsumer and postindustrial recycled rubber or plastic; UV
stabilized].
1. Color: Gray].
2. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch in diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
3. Adhesive: As recommended by wheel stop manufacturer for application to concrete
pavement.
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, with the following properties:
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M]. Furnish batch certificates for each batch
discharged and used in the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of
excess yielding.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required
lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms
can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at
locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving
terminates at isolation joints.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel
reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of
their work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete.
Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, placing, and
consolidating concrete.
E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
G. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven
floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular
texture.
1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished
concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
B. Securely attach wheel stops to paving with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels located at
one-quarter to one-third points. Install dowels in drilled holes in the paving and bond dowels to
wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint
unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep
paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior non-pressure storm sewer piping and related components from
the property line to the building, with the following components.
1. Cleanouts.
2. Precast concrete manholes.
B. All materials, installation, and quality assurance for water lines and appurtenances installed in
the DC right-of-way/public space and on private property shall be in accordance with the
standards, specifications, and applicable permits of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer
Authority (DC WASA) and the District of Columbia Department of Transportation (DC DOT).
The DC WASA and DC DOT standards and specifications are not covered in this specification
section – refer to applicable DC WASA and DC DOT publications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For manholes and catch basins. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and manhole frames and covers and catch basin frames and grates.
C. Field quality-control test reports. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.
B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints.
A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 10 (DN 250) and Smaller: AASHTO M 252M,
Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.
A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN 375) and Smaller: ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 1785
Schedule 40.
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining
underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Sleeve Materials:
1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
C. Ring-Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell
of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.
2.6 CLEANOUTS
A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and
round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot
connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.
2.7 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile or ASTM A 48, Class 35 gray iron,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:
B. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 aximum
water-cementitious materials ratio.
A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
1. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for
walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral
floor.
2. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless flat-slab-top type is indicated.
3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural
loading. Include 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch-
diameter flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space
between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where
specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of
pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Install piping with 24-inch minimum cover.
3. Install piping below frost line.
4. Install ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41.
5. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
F. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials
and Methods." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's
written instructions.
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use Schedule 40
PVC for cleanouts assembly. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
Set tops flush with finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's storm building drains specified
in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."
1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove
section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye
fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi.
A. General: Coordinate work with the DC WASA inspector and DCRA Plumbing Inspector for
required tests and inspections. At a minimum, Contractor shall perform the following tests for
on-site work.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder
of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 5 of 6
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Air Tests: Test storm drainage according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:
D. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
E. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP;
corrugated, for coupled joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete
footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions
indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide.
B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile
filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.
D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
sections with tape.
E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation
subdrainage.
F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of
pipe to perform tests.
G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side
away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade.
H. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter
fabric.
I. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping
edges at least 4 inches.
J. Place backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth
layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish
elevations and slope away from building.
A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted
but before drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6
inches between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to
required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.
B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile
filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.
D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
sections with tape.
E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab
subdrainage.
F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of
pipe to perform tests.
G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of
bottom of slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile
filter fabric.
A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated,
with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material.
Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written
instructions and other requirements indicated.
B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes
and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
A. Join perforated PE pipe and fittings with couplings according to ASTM D 3212 with
loose banded, coupled, or push-on joints.
B. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with
special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with
and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes.
A. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 2 Section "Storm
Drainage."
1. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from piping to top of slab. Locate
cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so
cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.
2. Use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser
extensions to cleanout flush with top of slab.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1. After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to
ensure free flow before backfilling.
2. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results
are satisfactory.
B. Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as
work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is
completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work
stops.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior non-pressure sanitary sewer piping and related components from
the property line to the building, with the following components.
1. Cleanouts.
2. Precast concrete manholes.
B. All materials, installation, and quality assurance for water lines and appurtenances installed in
the DC right-of-way/public space and on private property shall be in accordance with the
standards, specifications, and applicable permits of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer
Authority (DC WASA) and the District of Columbia Department of Transportation (DC DOT).
The DC WASA and DC DOT standards and specifications are not covered in this specification
section – refer to applicable DC WASA and DC DOT publications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.
A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining
underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Sleeve Materials:
1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 1 of 6
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
C. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell
of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and
round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot
connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.
2.5 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced
concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile or ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35
gray iron, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious
materials ratio.
C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement
design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include
channels and benches in manholes.
1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of
vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,
uniform radius and slope.
D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58
maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space
between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping
layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of
pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover.
3. Install piping below frost line.
4. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
F. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of
incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials
and Methods." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-
gasket joints.
2. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.
D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use Schedule 40
PVC pipe and fittings for cleanout assemblies. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of
flow in sewer pipe.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Coordinate work with the DC WASA inspector and DCRA Plumbing Inspector for
required tests and inspections. At a minimum, Contractor shall perform the following tests for
on-site work.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder
of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction and the following:
D. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
E. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for
domestic water building services, fire-services for buildings, and water mains.
B. All materials, installation, and quality assurance for water lines and appurtenances installed in
the DC right-of-way/public space and on private property shall be in accordance with the
standards, specifications, and applicable permits of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer
Authority (DC WASA) and the District of Columbia Department of Transportation (DC DOT).
The DC WASA and DC DOT standards and specifications are not covered in this specification
section – refer to applicable DC WASA and DC DOT publications.
C. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for
installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Regulatory Requirements:
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-
service-main products.
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve
and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.
E. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic
water.
1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Architect's written
permission.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main and work in the DC right-of-way/public space with the DC
WASA inspector.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for commonly used
joining materials.
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications.
B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
A. See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for piping-system
common requirements.
A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in
water main.
B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company
and of size and in location indicated.
D. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
G. Sleeves are specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods and
15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
H. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.
Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.
A. See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and
AWWA M41.
2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.
3. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials,
with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities -
Basic Materials and Methods" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.
B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches.
Include anchorages for the following piping systems:
C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed
ferrous anchorage devices.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
A. General: Coordinate work with the DC WASA inspector and DCRA Plumbing Inspector for
required tests and inspections. At a minimum, Contractor shall perform the following tests for
on-site work.
B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks
have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to
stabilize system. Use only potable water.
C. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between
increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase
again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts
(1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat
test until leakage is within allowed limits.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for
underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.
Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.10 CLEANING
1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have
been altered, extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty
water does not appear at points of outlet.
3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
AWWA C651 or do as follows:
a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm
of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine
solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3
hours.
c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine
remains in water coming from system.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for design and installation of a micropile foundation
system.
B. The work consists of furnishing all necessary engineering and design services,
supervision, labor, materials, and equipment to perform any work necessary to install
and test micropiles for the project, as shown on the design drawings. The micropile
contractor shall install a micropile system meeting the load capacities indicated on the
drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Working Drawings: Signed and sealed drawings indicating materials and procedures
to be used in completion of the work. Drawings shall include at a minimum:
1. Detailed description of construction procedures proposed, including a schedule.
2. Pile numbering system, and layout directions.
3. Design load of micropiles.
4. Type and size of reinforcing steel to be provided.
5. Minimum total bond length.
6. Total micropile length.
7. Grouting volumes and maximum pressures.
8. Micropile top attachment
9. Micropile cutoff attachment
C. Shop drawings for structural steel, including all pile components, including the
following:
1. Corrosion protection system
2. Pile top attachment
3. Bond length details
4. Mill test reports for reinforcing steel
5. Representative coupon tests for steel pipe used as permanent casing
2. Admixtures.
3. Procedures for mixing
4. Procedures for placing
5. Certified test reports verifying capacity of mix designs
B. Referenced Standards
1. ASCE 20-96, “Standard Guidelines for the Design and Installation of Pile
Foundations.”
2. API RP 138-1, “Recommended Practice – Standard Procedure for Field Testing
Water Based Drilling Fluids.”
3. ASTM documents as referenced under materials section.
C. Allowable Tolerances
1. Centerline of piling shall not be more than 3” from indicated plan location.
2. Pile hole alignment shall be within 2% of design alignment.
3. Top elevation of pile shall be within 1” of design vertical elevation.
4. Centerline of core reinforcing shall be not more than ¾” from centerline of piling.
A. Steel Reinforcement and casings: Deliver, store, and handle steel to prevent bending,
damage, and/or corrosion.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil,
and other contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Steel Pipe Casings shall be supplied in accordance with ASTM A252 Grade 3, with
minimum yield strength as indicated in the design submittal and minimum 15%
elongation.
B. Plates and shapes for pile top attachment shall conform to ASTM A36 or ASTM A572-
50.
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type,
brand, and source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.
2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C989 Grade 100 or 120.
a. GGBS used in grout mix must also be present in mix tested and submitted
under section 1.3D. Substitution of GGBS for Portland Cement may not
exceed 30% by weight.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Centralizers – fabricated from plastic, steel or similar material not detrimental to the
reinforcing steel. Wood bar spacers shall not be utilized. Centralizers must permit free
flow of grout without misalignment of the reinforcing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
B. Drilling equipment and methods shall be suitable for drilling through conditions
anticipated on site with minimal disturbance to those conditions or any overlying or
adjacent structures or services. Boreholes must be provided open to the defined
nominal diameter for their full length prior to placing grout and reinforcement. If soils
encountered on site do not permit uncased installation, provide hole support as
required.
C. Hole support may consist of any of the following, subject to design and installation by
the Contractor:
1. Steel pipe casings, permanent or temporary
2. Grout injection through hollow stem auger
3. Hole stabilizing drilling fluid, certified to have no adverse effect on geotechnical
bond development and no potential effect on local groundwater.
D. Schedule project work to prevent damage to piles where grout has not achieved final
set.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials
that would reduce bond to concrete.
C. Central reinforcing steel with physical centralizers shall be lowered into the stabilized
drill holes to desired depth with no difficulty. Partially inserted bars shall not be driven
or forced into the hole.
D. Bar centralizers shall be placed at 10’ maximum vertical spacing along the bars.
Uppermost centralizer shall be maximum 5’ from the top of the micropile. No micropile
reinforcing shall be installed with less than 3 centralizers, regardless of bar length.
A. Before placing concrete, verify hole integrity and reinforcement are as anticipated, and
hardware for pile top connection is on hand. Perform all inspections required prior to
placement of concrete. Flush hole with water and/or air to remove drill cuttings and
loose debris prior to concreting.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement
unless approved by on-site testing agency.
C. Contractor shall provide systems and equipment to measure grout quality, quantity,
and pumping pressure during grouting operations. Grout pump shall be equipped with
a pressure gauge capable of measuring a minimum of 150 psi. Grouting equipment
shall be sized to enable placement of a full pile in one continuous operation.
D. Inject grout from the lowest point of the drill hole by tremie until clean, pure grout flows
from the top of the pile. Grout may be pumped through tubes, augers, or drill rods. All
grouting operations must ensure complete continuity of the grout column. Grout
pressures shall be controlled to prevent excessive heave in cohesive soils or fracturing
of soil formations.
E. The use of compressed air to directly pressurize the fluid grout is not permitted.
F. Grout within piles shall be allowed to attain minimum design strength prior to loading.
G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing
actions, or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for
three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within
the temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture
designs.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Installation records: Testing agency shall prepare records of all installed piles,
including the following minimum information:
1. Pile drilling duration and observations
2. Information on soil and rock encountered, including description of strata and
water.
3. Approximate final tip elevation.
4. Cut-off elevation.
5. Design Loads
6. Description of any unusual installation behavior or conditions
7. Any deviations from intended parameters or procedures.
8. Grout pressures attained
9. Grout quantities pumped
10. Pile materials and dimensions
C. As-built drawings showing location of piles, depth and inclination, and details of
composition shall be submitted within 14 calendar days of the project completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Bait-station system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label
for termiticide products.
B. Product certificates.
B. Install bait-station system during construction to determine areas of termite activity and
after construction, including landscaping, is completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
A. Place bait stations according to the EPA-Registered Label for the product and
manufacturer's written instructions, in the following areas that are conducive to termite
feeding and activity:
B. Inspect and service bait stations from time of their application until Substantial
Completion unless extended by continuing service agreement, according to the EPA-
Registered Label for product and manufacturer's written instructions for termite
management system and bait products.
1. Service Frequency: Inspect bait stations not less than once every three
month(s).
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses, and
exterior plants.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving.
6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits
for buried utility structures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 1 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders
of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of
100 blows/2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to
ASTM D 1586.
I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a
cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
M. Geotechnical Engineer: a licensed soils engineer contracted by the Contractor and approved by
the Owner.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 2 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Disconnect and abandon private utility laterals on site indicated to be abandoned.
C. Utility service shut-off, disconnection, capping and sealing, temporary service, removal,
alteration, and abandonment shall be coordinated with the utility provider and shall be
performed in accordance with the utility provider’s regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials, approved by the Geotechnical Engineer, when
sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GC, GM, SW, SP, SM, &
SC, or a combination of these groups; with a liquid limit not greater than 30 and a maximum
plasticity index less of 10 per ASTM D 4318; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any
dimension, debris, ashes, cinders, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious
matter. All offsite borrow materials or imported materials that may be borrow material, select fill,
or other approved material shall consist of soils meeting Unified Soil Classification System
(USCS) of SC or coarser.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups ML, CL, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to
ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Maximum liquid limit shall be 30
and maximum plasticity index shall be 10 per ASTM D 4318.
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 3 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-
inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 GEOTEXTILES
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and
4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in
a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up
to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All work performed in the public space / right of way shall comply with DC DOT and DC WASA
standards.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 4 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earthwork operations.
D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against
freezing temperatures or frost.
3.3 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage
ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
3.4 EXPLOSIVES
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 5 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations,
and subgrades.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe
or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels
of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-
duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an
undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand
backfill.
3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
B. If the Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation
and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 6 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
E. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for unit prices.
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by
Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by the
Architect.
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
Install silt fence around soil stockpile.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.12 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
EARTHWORK 02300 - 7 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Water, sewer, and storm sewer work within the public space / right of way shall comply with DC
WASA standards.
C. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
and bodies of conduits.
D. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any
dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement
of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 8 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698 unless otherwise noted:
1. Structural fills: under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and
recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material
at 95% AASHTO T-180 (ASTM D-1557).
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95
percent.
3.17 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-
foot straightedge.
1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 9 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to
within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill
with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.
1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698.
2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- thick compacted layers
to final subgrade.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-
on-grade as follows:
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
minimum locations and frequencies:
1. Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for
every 1000 sq. ft. or less of paved area, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.
2. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1
test for every 200 sq. ft. or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.
3. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100
feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
4. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each
150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
5. Additional tests may be required by the geotechnical engineer.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 10 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.21 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape
and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 11 of 11
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection
system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic
pressure and superimposed and construction loads.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. LEED Submittals:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328, ASTM A 572, or ASTM A 690; with continuous
interlocks.
D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and
strength required for application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Sheet Piling: Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and
tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Accurately place the piling, using
templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet
piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches.
Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a
horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment . Cut tops of sheet
piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.
B. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other
permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing
original brace.
1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete
work unless otherwise approved by Architect.
2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced
frames.
3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until
permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic
pressures.
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed
sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in
stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements,
facilities, and utilities.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by
execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during
construction, and indicated on Drawings,
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For each type of organic mulch in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of
materials by percentage of weight, protection-zone fencing
C. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to
remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.
D. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during
construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly
treated and repaired when damaged.
E. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by
construction during and after completing the Work.
F. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which
establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
construction activities.
C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and
organic mulch.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing
organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade
of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel,
and other objects more than [1 inch] <Insert dimension> in diameter; and free of weeds, roots,
and toxic and other nonsoil materials.
C. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting[ one of] the following
requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect.
D. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes
prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and
sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from
construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while
mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding,
or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.
C. Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside protection zones and other areas indicated with 4-inch
average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks.
1. Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without
concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain,
provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect.
C. Repair or replace trees, indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
D. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and
remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the
site.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection
zones according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
B. Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand
excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe
jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning.
C. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill.
A. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as shown
on Drawings and as follows:
1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning
instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other
equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently covered
with soil.
3. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
4. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of
the required excavation.
C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required
excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to
expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches
as shown on Drawings and as follows:
1. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root
system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by
arborist.
2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and the following:
3. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
4. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
3.6 REGRADING
A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
B. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
C. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches or less below elevation of
finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to
required finish elevations.
A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be
relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
1. Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and
shrubs.
2. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions.
3. Perform repairs within 24 hours.
4. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as
determined by Architect.
A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.
2. Division 2 Section “Lawns and Grasses” and "Exterior Plants" for finish grading including
preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and
clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than
underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2
inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil
materials.
B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of
groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property, shall be removed from the Project site, and shall
be disposed of at a legal off-site area.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall obtain (immediately prior to the start of construction) and maintain photographs
or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining
construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site
clearing.
B. Record drawings, according to Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and
accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical
conditions.
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction (DC DOT).
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3. Prepare and submit a Traffic Control Plan to the DCRA Permit Center for DC DOT
approval and acquire the associated permit to perform work in the public space / right-of-
way.
C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and provide to and
store on-site (unless otherwise agreed) in an Owner-approved location.
D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for location and surface marking of
subsurface utiltities within the Project area prior to site clearing.
E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place.
A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in
Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
1. Obtain off-site borrow soil materials, approved by the geotechnical engineer, when
satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and sediment and erosion control
Drawings.
B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
D. Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with the DOE approved plan and DOE
regulations.
A. Refer to Section 02231 Tree Protection and Trimming. Comply with the following Tree
Protection specifications if this section is not included in the documents.
B. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing.
Remove fence when construction is complete.
1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area.
2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area.
3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.
D. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and
excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to
expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
E. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
3.4 UTILITIES
A. Contractor will arrange for shutting off utility service for existing structures before site clearing,
when required.
B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
E. Utility service shut-off, disconnection, capping and sealing, temporary service, removal,
alteration, and abandonment shall be coorinated with the utility provider and shall be performed
in accordance with the utility provider’s regulations.
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner
where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18
inches below exposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.
5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated in Division 2 Sections covering earthwork: For fill in areas to
remain grass or landscaped, place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose
depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,
and other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Install
silt fence around topsoil stockpile.
1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of
existing slabs, paving, curbs, and gutters to remain before removing existing portions.
Saw-cut faces vertically.
2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.
3.8 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off of Owner's
property.
1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them
to recycling facilities.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers installation of exterior water, sanitary sewer, and storm lines from the
property line to the building.
B. All materials, installation, and quality assurance for water lines and appurtenances installed in
the DC right-of-way/public space and on private property shall be in accordance with the
standards, specifications, and applicable permits of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer
Authority (DC WASA) and the District of Columbia Department of Transportation (DC DOT).
The DC WASA and DC DOT standards and specifications are not covered in this specification
section – refer to applicable DC WASA and DC DOT publications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
B. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
D. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.3 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-
free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.
G. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
H. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure
seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
L. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
M. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in
both directions than supported unit.
3.4 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base
plates, and anchors.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Demonstration and Training : Submit six copies within seven days of end of each
training module.
1.5 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.
Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to
master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the
system, equipment, or component:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and
reassembly instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.2 INSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 15 “Mechanical Systems Commissioning”.
2. Division 16 “ Electrical Systems Commissioning”.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product
selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards,
and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items
that support the design process.
D. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a
project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals,
measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and
supporting information.
E. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or
separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
A. Members Appointed by Contractor: Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of
the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process
through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to,
representatives of Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers,
suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates
the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage
the CxA under a separate contract.
2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel.
3. Architect and engineering design professionals.
A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractor for information and use.
B. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning
team activities.
C. Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner, to the CxA and
Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and
maintenance training plan.
A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall
schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not
limited to, the following:
F. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The
sampling rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to,
equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests,
and test reports to verify compliance with the OPR. When a random sample does not meet the
requirement, the CxA will report the failure in the Issues Log.
J. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates, and include them in the Cx Report
Project:
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION
WASHINGTON, DC
Prepared by:
ALLEN & SHARIFF CORPORATION
7061 Deepage Drive • Columbia, Maryland 21045
Phone: 410-381-7100 • Fax: 410-381-7110
Commissioning Authority
Warren Isaac, CxA, LEED®AP
443-545-1159
Table of Contents
1. Overview
1.1 Abbreviations and Definitions
1.2 Purpose of the Commissioning Plan
1.3 Commissioning Scope
1.4 Commissioned Systems
1.5 N/A
5. Commissioning Process
5.1 Commissioning Scoping Meeting
5.2 Final Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase
5.3 Site Observation
5.4 Meetings
5.5 Management Protocols
5.6 Progress Reporting and Logs
5.7 N/A
5.8 Prefunctional Checklists, Tests and Startup
5.9 Development of Functional Test and Verification Procedures
5.10 Execution of Functional Testing Procedures
5.11 N/A
5.12 N/A
5.13 N/A
7. Schedule
7.1 General Issues
7.2 Project Schedule
General
LEED Functional Commissioning Outline
1. Overview
Commissioning during the construction of this project is intended to achieve the following specific objec-
tives:
According to the Contract Documents:
Ensure that applicable equipment and systems are installed properly and receive adequate start-up and
operational checkout by installing contractors.
Verify the design meets LEED and Owner intent.
Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.
• D/X Systems
• VAV Terminals
• Lighting Controls
1.5 N/A
Project Manager
General Contractor
Site Contact
Project Manager
Project Architect
Project Manager
Mechanical Contractor
Site Contact
Plumbing Contractor
Site Contact
Electrical Contractor
Site Contact
TAB Contractor
Site Contact
BAS/ATC Contractor
Site Contact
All contractor personnel on the commissioning team are to make themselves familiar with
LEED NC 2.2 Prerequisite 1 EA commissioning process.
5. Commissioning Process
This section sequentially details the commissioning process by commissioning task or activity.
communications determined and the work products list is discussed. Also covered are the general list of
each party’s responsibilities, which party is responsible to develop the startup plan for each piece of
equipment and the proposed commissioning schedule. The outcome of the meeting is to increased under-
standing by all parties of the commissioning process and their respective responsibilities. The meeting
provides the CxA additional information needed to finalize or modify the Cx Plan, including the commis-
sioning schedule. Prior to this meeting the CxA is given all drawings and specifications and the construc-
tion schedule by trade. The GC is responsible for taking meeting minutes and distribute them to each
team member.
5.4 Meetings
The CxA may attend selected planning and job-site meetings at their prerogative, in order to remain in-
formed on construction progress and to update parties involved in commissioning. The GC is to provide
the CxA with information regarding substitutions, change orders and any Architect’s Supplemental
Instructions (ASI) that may affect commissioning equipment, systems or the commissioning schedule.
The CA may review construction-meeting minutes, change orders or ASI's for the same purpose. Later
during construction, necessary meetings between various commissioning team parties will be scheduled
by the as required by the CxA, through the GC.
Issue Protocol
For requests for information (RFI) or The CxA goes first: __x_ direct to A/E, ___through the GC,
formal documentation requests:
For minor or verbal information and The CxA goes direct to the informed party.
clarifications:
For notifying contractors of deficien- The CxA documents deficiencies through the GC, but may dis-
cies: cuss deficiency issues with contractors prior to notifying the GC.
For scheduling functional tests or The CxA may provide input for some coordination of training
training: and testing, but does not do any scheduling.
For scheduling commissioning meet- The CxA selects the date and schedules through the:
ings: __x_GC.
___The CA schedules and notifies attendees directly.
For making a request for significant The CxA has no authority to issue change orders.
changes:
For making small changes in specified The CxA may not make changes to specified sequences without
sequences of operations: approval from the A/E.
Subcontractors disagreeing with re- Try and resolve with the CxA first. Then work through GC who
quests or interpretations by the CxA will work with CxA directly to resolve the situation.
shall:
______________________________ ____________________________________________________
___ _____
______________________________ ____________________________________________________
___ _____
N/A
Contractors typically already perform some, if not many, of the prefunctional checklist items the commis-
sioning authority will recommend. However, few contractors document in writing the execution of these
checklist items. This project requires that the procedures be documented in writing by the installing tech-
nician. The CxA does not witness much of the prefunctional check listing, except for testing of larger or
more critical pieces of equipment and some spot-checking. CONTRACTOR IS TO SUBMIT TO THE
CxA THEIR PREFUNCTIONAL STARTUP DOCUMENT FORMS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT
4 WEEKS PRIOR TO STARTING SYSTEMS.
The following procedures will be used for this project: (the contractor is responsible for the plan devel-
opment):
The CxA adapts and enhances, if necessary, the representative prefunctional checklists (PC) and proce-
dures, and develops original lists, as necessary.
The CxA transmits them to the GC who designates which trade or contractor is responsible to fill out each
line item on the Prefunctional Checklist from the CxA. The GC then transmits the checklist to the re-
sponsible Subs.
The Sub designated to develop the Start-up Plan obtains manufacturer installation, start-up and checkout
data, including actual field checkout sheets used by the field technicians.
The Sub copies all pages with important instructional data and procedures (not covered in manufacturer
field checkout sheets) from the start-up and checkout manuals and adds a signature line in the column by
each procedure.
The copied pages, along with the prefunctional checklist provided by the GC (originally from the CxA)
and the manufacturer field checkout sheets become the “Start-up and Checkout Plan.”
For systems that may not have adequate manufacturer start-up and checkout procedures, particularly for
components being integrated with other equipment, the Sub should provide the added necessary detail and
documenting format to the CxA for approval, prior to execution.
The Sub transmits the full Start-up Plan to the CxA for review and approval.
The CxA reviews and approves the procedures and the format for documenting them and noting any pro-
cedures that need to be added, and conveys to the GC. The GC then transmits the full start-up plan to the
Subs for their review and use. (This usually means that the Prefunctional Checklist, alone, will go to more
than one Sub, while the full plan will go to the primary installing contractor.)
checks off items on the prefunctional and manufacturer field checkout sheets, as they are completed.
Only individuals having direct knowledge of a line item being completed shall check or initial the forms.
The Subs and vendors execute the checklists and tests and submit a signed copy of the completed start-up
and prefunctional tests and checklists to the CxA. The CxA may review prefunctional checklists in pro-
gress, as necessary.
5.8.3 Sampling Strategy for CxA Observation of Prefunctional Checkout and Startup
At the discretion of the CxA a small percentage of equipment as determined by the CxA shall be wit-
nessed during prefunctional checkout and startup.
5.8.5 TAB
The TAB contractor submits the outline of the TAB plan and approach to the CxA and the controls con-
tractor four weeks prior to starting the TAB. The CxA reviews the plan and approach for understanding
and coordination issues and may comment, but does not “approve.” The TAB submits weekly written
reports of discrepancies, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA and GC.
This facilitates quicker resolution of problems and will result in a more complete TAB before functional
testing begins. TAB work shall be coordinated with the Control and Mechanical Contractors to assure
systems can be properly balanced. Any system which is being scheduled by the GC to be balanced, but
can not be properly balanced for what ever reason at the requested time should be refused and reported to
the CxA. Project schedules are very important, but not at the expense of a properly balanced system.
5.9.1 Overview
Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation.
Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, compo-
nent failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems
are run through all of the control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be re-
sponding as the sequences state. The commissioning authority develops the functional test procedures in
a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is performed by
the installing contractor or vendor. The CxA only is to witness and document the testing. All hands on is
performed by the contractor or their subs. Contractor is to supply all test equipment necessary to perform
the functional testing as outlined by the CxA.
The CxA shall have the authority to postpone functional testing if he feels the systems have not been
properly prepared for Functional Testing. It is then the contractor’s responsibility to retest systems as re-
quired.
5.10.4 Sampling
Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical equipment may be functionally tested
using a sampling strategy. The CxA shall determine this sampling per past sampling success.
6. N/A
7. Schedule
The initial commissioning schedule is summarized in Table 7-1. A more detailed schedule is contained in
Form C-10, Detailed Commissioning Schedule
General:
The systems outlined in the specifications, project documents, and commissioning plan are to be fully
verified as functional working systems through the effort of the commissioning team with the leadership
of the Cx authority. The Cx process shall begin with a review and comment of the design concept, and
continue through the final operational verifications.
The system design review by the CxA is indented as a cursory review of the overall systems design to
verify that it meets the LEED criteria outlined for this project. The owner project requirements (OPR),
and the MEP bases of design (BOD) shall be reviewed for their intent and compatibility. All design issues
or recommendations shall be forwarded to the design team for their review and action as deemed appro-
priate.
As the project enters the construction phase the Cx authority shall meet with the Cx team, which shall
consist of but is not limited to the following professionals and tradesmen.
The commissioning is led by the Commissioning Authority (CxA), whom is acting on the owners behalf,
and is the lead person of the Cx team.
Owners Representative (OR), which may in some cases be the CxA
Building Operational Personnel (BOP),
Design Engineers (EA), Architect (AE)
General Contractor (GC)
Mechanical Contractor (MC)
Electrical Contractor (EC)
TAB Contractor (TAB)
Building Automation System Contractor (BAS)
Other professionals or tradesmen that may be necessary for the particular portion or scope of the project.
The intent is to have qualified personnel as members of the Cx team who have the authority to execute the
commissioning plan and who are dedicated to the LEED process and the owner’s objectives relative to
sustainability and green building design.
The construction process is the phase of the project, which obviously receives the major-
ity of attention during commissioning. A brief description of the intended process is to follow.
Equipment outlined in the Cx process is used for commissioning process description only, and
may not represent the actual/installed MEP devises and equipment used on this project. The de-
scription is generic in nature and is intended to create an understanding of the general construc-
tion commissioning process for the referenced project.
A general description of the Cx activities from the design phase through the construction
and acceptance phases is outlined for a general understanding of the commissioning LEED NC
2.2 prerequisite and enhanced commissioning activities required for this project. It is to be un-
derstood that the commissioning process requires a total team effort to be successful.
Construction Phase:
The construction phase is the project evolvement from early construction to the start of the acceptance
phase. During the construction phase, the CxA shall schedule commissioning meetings as necessary
through the GC. Meetings are to take place only in the event that the commissioning process is not being
followed properly, or if scheduling issues arise. A meeting shall be scheduled just prior to contractor
starting equipment designated as “Commissioned Equipment “(such as, HVAC , major electrical and
plumbing systems) for the first time. In lieu of non scheduled Cx meetings, most ongoing Cx related is-
sues may be addressed via phone conferences with the CxA. Meeting minutes generated from non-
commissioning meetings are to be submitted to the CxA within one week of the meeting. Minutes of
scheduled commissioning meetings shall be the responsibility of the CxA or someone appointed by the
CxA.
During construction, MEP systems testing is to be verified by designated member of the Cx team and
associated record documents shall be signed by both the contractor and the designated Cx team witness
and shall be submitted to the CxA within one week of testing. The test record shall be reviewed and in-
serted in the final commissioning report by the CxA. Test documents may also be required to be submit-
ted to the design engineer as specified.
Prior to startup of equipment, which is part of the construction phase, the contractor is to submit
manufacturer’s startup procedure documents to the CxA for review and comment. Further startup proce-
dures/requirements may be submitted from the CxA to the contractor in the form of prefunctional test
documents. This process is intended to ensure proper and safe system startup in preparation for successful
functional testing, which will take place during the acceptance phase of the project. It is of the greatest
importance that the contractor complete all startup document checklists for EACH piece of equipment and
submit them to the CxA within one week of successful equipment startup.
Once the equipment has been successfully started, and startup documents submitted to the CxA, the
control contractor is to perform the point to point checkout of the BAS system. The control contractor is
then to assist the TAB contractor in total system balance as outlined in the construction documents. Prior
to the BAS and the TAB contractor verification process, they are to submit their verification procedures
narrative to the CxA for review and comment. At the completion of the TAB system verification, the
TAB contractor is to also submit a copy of the balance report to the CxA for review. The CxA shall wit-
ness portions of the equipment startup and BAS/TAB verification processes’ on an unannounced basis,
and submit any issues that arise in writing to the architect for distribution.
At this juncture of the project, the building should be 98% complete and close to readiness for occupancy.
The commissioning process should now to move to the acceptance phase.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
B. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and
training. Architect and Commissioning Agent will return copy with comments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,
indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section
number in Project Manual.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite
electronic PDF file for each manual type required.
F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled
volumes.
a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name,and subject matter
of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the
manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and
major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-
referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose
diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with
text.
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below,
include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment,
and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on
Contract Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram
controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required
for identification.
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and
finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures,
repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name
and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name,
address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials
and related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,
include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents.
For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title
in Project Manual.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail
essential maintenance procedures:
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list
of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,
with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance
documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting
operation and maintenance documentation.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
B. Related Sections:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation
varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained
record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar
entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record
prints.
2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately.
Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of
marked-up record prints.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to
distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same
location.
B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include
identification on cover sheets.
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate
electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name
each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data
file.
4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,
and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where
applicable.
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes
in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for
project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record
documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for submitting final LEED
documentation including LEED online templates.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
4. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing
Owner's personnel.
5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of
items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service
agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating
certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance
manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or
settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location
designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number
where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,
and maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of
request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or
notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for
Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected
by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of
construction.[ Use CSI Form 14.1A.]
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories
for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. Six paper copies, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through
Construction Manager, will return three copies.
1.5 WARRANTIES
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents
of the Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable,
use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,
including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
D. IAQ Management Plan: Complete filter change and air testing as required by approved
IAQ Management Plan.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1. See Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for LEED prerequisites and credits
including SS Credit 3, MR Credit 1 and MR Credit 2.
2. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of
demolished materials.
3. See Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and
below-grade improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
B. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site,
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
C. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
Owner.
D. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for
reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.
E. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that
are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect
them against damage during selective demolition operations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to
be removed and salvaged.
G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-
removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,
walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1
Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of
construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled
movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by
new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent
surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents
of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as
not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for
new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and
miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of
them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before
selective demolition operations began.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.
8. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 “LEED Requirements.”
2. Division 1 “Construction Waste Management.”
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from
indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.
4. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching
penetrations in fire-rated construction.
D. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record
survey data.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and
patching of construction elements.
2. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed
construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For
exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the
fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and
functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities,mechanical
and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.
Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work
are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field
measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies
are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly.
B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted
surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to
obtain required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work
progresses.
5. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines
and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard
established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,
building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for
mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with
control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required
lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather
conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and
tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction
Manager.
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar
reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent
benchmarks and control points during construction operations.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct
alignment and elevation, as indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible
results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial
Completion.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise
levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to
be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm
that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with
indicated requirements.
G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of
adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately
located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of
attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to
form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
considered hazardous.
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and
patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete
without delay.
E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and
similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage
elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures
with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings
when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or
a diamond-core drill.
F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar
operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as
invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements
specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize
evidence of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one
finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new
space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and
appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new
materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an
even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores
enclosure to a weathertight condition.
G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness
necessary for proper execution of the Work.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum
the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to
written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only
cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and
that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the
space.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste
materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with Construction Waste
Management Plan.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and
adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to
ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper
operation without binding.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be
repaired without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating
components that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Section:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit six copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use [CSI Form 13.1A] [facsimile of form provided
in the Project Manual].
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery
of need for change, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for preparation
and review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for
Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the
terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent
damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Storage:
4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for
period of installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,
humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,
other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and
limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract
Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of
installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other
items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard
options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been
produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in
conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
4. Manufacturers:
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that
complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those
named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product meets applicable LEED credit requirements.
4. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
5. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
6. Samples, if requested.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from
partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.
2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site
clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste
resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction
waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition
or selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 21 days of date established for the
Notice to Proceed .
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment,
submit report. Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Hauler name and destination of diverted materials.
3. Generation point of waste.
4. Total quantity of waste by volume or weight. Use one method consistently
throughout project.
5. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual by volume or weight.
6. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual iby volume or weight.
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) by volume or weight.
8. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of
total waste.
F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by
landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
G. LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2.1, signed by Contractor,
tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted,
and statement that requirements for the credit have been met.
D. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged,
recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation,
total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling
and transportation procedures.
1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in
this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before
incorporation into the Work.
2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals
and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone
numbers.
4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of
recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone
numbers.
5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of.
Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator
facility.
6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for
separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and
designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives
received for recycling waste materials shall [accrue to Owner] [accrue to Contractor]
[be shared equally by Owner and Contractor].
C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical
according to approved construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste
until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and
unacceptable materials at each container and bin.
C. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other
metals.
1. Pulverize concrete to maximum [1-1/2-inch] [4-inch] size.
D. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with
other metals.
1. Pulverize masonry to maximum [3/4-inch] [1-inch] [1-1/2-inch] [4-inch] size.
2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
E. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length.
Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood
materials.
2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
G. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts.
Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.
H. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals
from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.
I. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate
supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.
J. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store
in a dry location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets
from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into
component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees [on-site] [at landfill facility].
C. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a
dry location.
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile
chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
E. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. Related Section:
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be
included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect,
testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water
system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.
Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction
operations.
C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing
system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.
Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction
operations.
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas
for construction personnel.
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect
each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required
by locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide
vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space
thermostatic control.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system
for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each
return air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC
system as required in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum
interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required
by progress of the Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until
facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service
can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and
maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use
of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed
construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select
equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements
being installed.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of
sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by
Owner.
G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate
illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic
conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection
requirements without operating entire system.
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field
office.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use
when away from field office.
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible
according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion
inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after
Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under
conditions acceptable to Owner.
C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction
personnel.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not
permitted.
G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered
"tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
I. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs
are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be
permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time
of Substantial Completion.
D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the
drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations.
Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
F. Site Enclosure Fence: Furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will
prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Lock entrances at end of each work day.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before
full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to
infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security
and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service
has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no
later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent
construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary
facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that
cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
G. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar operations.
I. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
J. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of
Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description
of the land on which Project is to be built.
AI Asphalt Institute
APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems
(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)
GA Gypsum Association
GS Green Seal
HI Hydronics Institute
MH Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
NFPA NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
C. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other
quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services
required by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having
jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
D. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 “LEED Requirements” for LEED requirements including EQ Credit 3.1/
2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or
a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified
requirements.
E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the
source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
installation of the Work and for completed Work.
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or
quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting
requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before
proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply
exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum
within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values
are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and
testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar
documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on
performance of the Work.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at
Project site.
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control
procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures
to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of
irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its
services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to
Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain
USGBC LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED Silver
certification based on LEED-NC, Version 2.2.
B. Related Sections:
1. Divisions 1 through 16 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of
each of these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to
LEED.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
C. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested
within a 10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made
from bamboo, cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool.
H. Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered
or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing
process (pre-consumer), or after consumer use (post-consumer).
1. Spills and scraps from the original manufacturing process that are combined with
other constituents after a minimal amount of reprocessing for use in further
production of the same product are not recycled materials.
2. Discarded materials from one manufacturing process that are used as
constituents in another manufacturing process are pre-consumer recycled
materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used
for Project. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for
the following categories of items:
1. Furniture.
2. Plumbing.
3. Mechanical.
4. Electrical.
5. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment.
6. Wood-based construction materials.
C. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans
as well as reports on completed LEED online templates.
D. LEED Documentation Submittals: Submit the following and complete related LEED
online templates. Provide manufacturer’s documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Credit MR 4.1: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-
consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes
a minimum of 10 percent of cost of materials used for Project.
A. Credit MR 5.1: Provide a minimum of 10 percent of building materials (by cost) that
are regional materials.
A. Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use
adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1168:
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L.
4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.
7. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
19. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond
melamine covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high molecular
weight polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any
surface): 250 g/L.
20. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.
21. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.
22. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.
23. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.
24. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L.
25. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight.
26. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight.
27. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight.
B. Credit EQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use
paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1113, Green Seal Standard GS-11 and GS-
3 and the following chemical restrictions:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than
250 g/L.
4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
6. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
7. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
8. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
9. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
10. Flat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
11. Nonflat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
12. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than
250 g/L.
13. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350
g/L.
14. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
15. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
16. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
17. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
18. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
19. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
20. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L.
21. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L.
22. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L.
23. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0
percent by weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings).
24. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain acrolein,
acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-
ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-
dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate,
ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury,
methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene,
toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, or vinyl chloride.
C. Credit EQ4.3:
1. Carpet and cushion systems shall comply with testing and product requirements
of the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Green Label Plus Program.
2. Carpet adhesive must meet VOC limit of 50 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Credit EQ 3.1: Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied
Buildings under Construction."
1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems
during construction period as specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities
and Controls," install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at
each return-air inlet for the air-handling system used during construction.
2. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.
B. Credit EQ 3.2:
1. Air-Quality Testing:
1) Formaldehyde: 50 ppb.
2) Particulates (PM10): 50 micrograms/cu. m.
3) Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): 500 micrograms/cu. m.
4) 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PH): 6.5 micrograms/cu. m.
5) Carbon Monoxide: 9 ppm and no greater than 2 ppm above outdoor
levels.
c. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are
exceeded, conduct additional flush-out with outside air and retest the
specific parameter(s) exceeded to indicate the requirements are achieved.
Repeat procedure until all requirements have been met. When retesting
noncomplying building areas, take samples from same locations as in the
first test.
d. Air-sample testing shall be conducted as follows:
SECTION 01351
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary for and reasona-
bly incidental to complete the special procedures for historic treatment work as shown
on the drawings or specified, including, but not limited to the following:
1. Storage and protection of existing historic materials.
2. Temporary protection of historic materials during construction.
3. Protection during application of chemicals.
4. Protection during use of heat-generating equipment.
5. Historic treatment procedures.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Historic Treatment Program: Submit a written plan for each phase or process including
protection of surrounding materials during operations. Describe in detail materials,
methods, and equipment to be used in each phase of work.
B. If alternative methods and materials to those indicated are proposed for any phase of
work, provide a written description including evidence of successful use on other, com-
parable projects, and program of testing to demonstrate effectiveness for use on this
Project.
C. For historic treatment specialists and supervisory personnel. Include list of completed
projects with the scope of work and budget for each.
D. Using photographs, show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site im-
provements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
historic treatment operations. Submit before work begins.
D. Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during historic
treatment. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable protected
storage location during historic treatment and cleaned and reinstalled in their original
locations after historic treatment operations are complete.
E. When removed from their existing location, store historic materials within a weather-
tight enclosure where they are protected from wetting by rain, snow, or ground water,
and temperature variations. Secure stored materials to protect from theft.
1. Identify removed items with an inconspicuous mark indicating their original loca-
tion.
B. Properties immediately adjacent to historic treatment area may be occupied during the
Work. Conduct historic treatment so that operations will not be disrupted. Provide not
less than 72 hours’ notice to adjacent property owner of act ivies that will affect their
operations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for precautions and effects of products
and procedures on adjacent building materials, components, and vegetation.
B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its pro-
gress.
D. Prior to the start of work or any cleaning operations, test existing drains and other wa-
ter removal systems to ensure that drains and systems are functioning properly. Notify
Architect immediately of drains or systems that are stopped or blocked. Do not begin
Work of this Section until the drains are in working order.
1. Provide a method to prevent solids including stone or mortar residue from enter-
ing the drains or drain lines. Cleanout drains and drain lines that become
blocked or filled by sand or any other solids because of work performed under
this Contract.
2. Protect storm drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing
only clean water to pass.
B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, build-
ing site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or damage resulting from appli-
cations of chemical cleaners and paint removers.
C. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners se-
lected fro Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces.
Use covering materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply
masking agents to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not apply liquid
masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly re-
move masking to prevent adhesive staining.
D. Do not clean surfaces during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to
unprotected surfaces.
E. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes and dispose of off Owner’s property.
F. Dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that pre-
vents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping,
and water penetration into building interiors.
A. Comply with the following procedures while performing work with heat-generating
equipment, including welding, cutting, soldering, brazing, paint removal with heat, and
other operations where open flames or implements utilizing heat are used:
1. Obtain Owner’s approval for operations involving use of open-flame or welding equipment.
(a) Notification shall be given for each occurrence and location of work with heat-
generating equipment.
5. Remove and keep the area free of combustibles, including, rubbish, paper,
waste, etc., within area of operations.
6. Where possible, furnish and use baffles of metal or gypsum board to prevent the
spraying of sparks or hot slag into surrounding combustible material.
7. Prevent the extension of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows,
doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings roofs, and other openings.
8. Inspect each location of the day’s work not sooner than 30 minutes after comple-
tion of operations to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper
housekeeping is maintained.
A. The principal aim of preservation work is to halt the process of deterioration and stabi-
lize the item’s condition, unless otherwise indicated. Repair is required where specifi-
cally indicated. The following procedures shall be followed:
2. Use additional material or structure to reinforce, strengthen, prop, tie, and sup-
port existing materials or structure.
4. Use traditional replacement materials and techniques. New work shall be dis-
tinguishable to the trained eye, on closed inspection, from old work.
5. Record the work before the procedure with pre-construction photos and during
the work with periodic construction photos.
C. Obtain Architect’s review and written approval in the form of a Constructive Change Di-
rective or Supplemental Instruction before making changes or additions to construction
or removing historic materials.
G. Where Work requires existing features to be removed, cleaned, and reused, perform
these operations without damage to the materials itself, to adjacent materials, or to the
substrate.
I. When cleaning, match samples of existing materials that have been cleaned and iden-
tified for acceptable cleaning levels. Avoid over-cleaning to prevent damage to exist-
ing materials during cleaning.
PART 1 GENERAL
B. The subcontractors who will be responsible for the execution of the restoration of the
historic materials and surfaces on the interior and exterior of the Georgetown
Neighborhood Library, including but not limited to the following, shall meet the levels of
experience and abilities noted herein:
1. Historic Decorative Plaster
2. Historic Stone
3. Historic Marble
4. Historic Glass
5. Historic Wood
6. Historic Metal
7. Historic Clay Masonry
C. In order to successfully propose the scope of work for the historic materials on the pro-
ject, subcontracting companies must demonstrate a proven capability to execute work
that qualifies under the Secretary of the Interior’s Guideline for the Rehabilitation of
Historic Structures.
D. Acceptable evidence of such qualifications will include, at a minimum, all of the follow-
ing:
1. A proven understanding of the Secretary’s Guidelines with a minimum of ten
years experience with projects of similar size and scope as that of the Takoma
Park Library, provide in writing.
2. Presentation of three (3) similar projects that have been certified by the National
Park Service as having met the Standards, provide in writing.
3. Names and resumes of the project foreman and crewmembers to be assigned to
the project listing projects successfully completed and contact names and phone
numbers for the Owners of the projects. The foreman and crewmembers pro-
posed for the project shall not be changed without written acceptance and agree-
ment of the Owner to the change.
4. Upon direction of the Architect and prior to the approval of the proposed subcon-
tractor, the proposed subcontractor will execute a mockup of finished work with
his proposed crew for Architect’s approval.
5. With each bid the subcontractor shall provide a written description of his onsite
procedures and methods demonstration an understanding of both the require-
ments of the Project Specifications and the sensitivities involved in working
around and with delicate historic material to be conserved and restored.
QUALIFICATIONS OF RESTORATION ARTISANS
AND CRAFTSMEN SUBCONTRACTORS 01350 - 1 of 2
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
Crenshaw Lighting
2430 Floyd Hwy North
Floyd, VA
p. 540.745.3900
f. 540.745.3911
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and
procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and
other submittals.
B. Related Sections:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that
do not require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals
may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract
Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on [Architect's] [Construction Manager's]
receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of
failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing,
including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional
time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. [Architect]
[Construction Manager] will advise Contractor when a submittal being
processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper
copy submittal item for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to
record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by
Architect and Construction Manager.
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of subcontractor.
g. Name of supplier.
h. Name of manufacturer.
i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
G. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and
unless Architect or Construction Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in
the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
H. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect and Construction
Manager will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form: Use [AIA Document G810] [CSI Form 12.1A] [facsimile of
sample form included in Project Manual].
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record
relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by
Architect and Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and
limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.
K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation
from Architect'sand Construction Manager's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Action Submittals: Submit six paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return three copies.
2. Informational Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal, unless
otherwise indicated. Architect and Construction Manager will not return copies.
3. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes
signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign
documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and
certifications where indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of
construction and type of product or equipment.
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42
inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. Six opaque copies of each submittal. Architect and Construction Manager
will retain three copies; remainder will be returned.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of
these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics
between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition
at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as
Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
a. Number of Samples: Submit six full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will
return submittal with options selected.
and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
V. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final
location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not
limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and
calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and
a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of
software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria
in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination
with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to
Architect and Construction Manager.
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include
Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number,
name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal
has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract
Documents.
A. General: Architect and Construction Manager will not review submittals that do not
bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal,
make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it.
Architect and Construction Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:
D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will
be returned without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
B. Related Sections:
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points
marked for location and direction of each [photograph] [video recording]. Indicate
elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding
photographic documentation.
B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within [three] <Insert number> days of taking
photographs.
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
c. Date photograph was taken.
d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass
point), and elevation or story of construction.
a. Name of Project.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited
reproduction of photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of [8] <Insert
sensor size> megapixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in
focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not
be accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital
camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing
software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at
Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same
manner as those submitted to Architect[ and Construction Manager].
F. Indoor Air Quality Management Photographs: Take a set of eight photos minimum at
three different times during construction that document the Indoor Air Quality
Management goals and Materials & Resource and Indoor Environmental Quality
Credits.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Section:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,
monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a
construction schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the
network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains
no float.
1. Float time [belongs to Owner] [is not for the exclusive use or benefit of
either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project
resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones
and Contract completion date].
B. Start-up Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire
construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports.
Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description,
original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,
late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start
date, or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted
in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start
date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from
[commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] until most recent
Application for Payment.
1.4 COORDINATION
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from
entities involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and
schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for [commencement of the Work]
[the Notice of Award] [the Notice to Proceed] to date of [Substantial Completion] [final
completion].
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each
principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of
the Work.
6. Other Constraints: <Insert additional constraints not indicated elsewhere>.
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered RFIs.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is [14] <Insert
number> or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a
separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain
compliance with the schedule.
B. Start-up Network Diagram: Submit diagram within [14] <Insert number> days of date
established for [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] [the Notice of
Award]. Outline significant construction activities for the first [90] <Insert number>
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a
cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract
shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable
completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for
reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment
request dates.
3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate
nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to
correlate with Contract Time.
D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the
Work. Using the start-up network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify
probable critical paths.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with
Contract milestone dates.
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-
scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as
often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the
Contract Time.
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network;
locate paths with most float near the edges.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with
its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to
demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list
indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated
reports showing the following:
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions
have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the
report of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including,
but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and
activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in
performance of construction activities.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Coordination drawings.
2. Requests for Information (RFIs).
3. Project meetings.
B. Related Sections:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 COORDINATION
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information
or interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product
Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to
fully describe items needing interpretation.
C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated
above, acceptable to Architect.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional
information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal
according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
E. On receipt of Architect's and Construction Manager's action, update the RFI log and
immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and
notify Architect and Construction Manager within seven days if Contractor disagrees
with response.
F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI
number. Submit log monthly. Software log with not less than the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's and Construction Manager's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change
Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal
Request, as appropriate.
A. General: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences
at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
x. Progress cleaning.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute
meeting minutes.
a. Contract Documents.
b. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan and other required LEED plans.
c. LEED requirements.
d. Options.
e. Related RFIs.
f. Related Change Orders.
g. Purchases, including LEED-compliant materials.
h. Deliveries.
i. Submittals.
j. Review of mockups.
k. Possible conflicts.
l. Compatibility problems.
m. Time schedules.
n. Weather limitations.
o. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
p. Warranty requirements.
q. Compatibility of materials.
r. Acceptability of substrates.
s. Temporary facilities and controls.
t. Space and access limitations.
u. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
v. Testing and inspecting requirements.
w. Installation procedures.
x. Coordination with other work.
y. Required performance results.
z. Protection of adjacent work.
aa. Protection of construction and personnel.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests, including LEED
documentation progress.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute
the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish
line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each
Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of
values:
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for
LEED documentation and other project closeout requirements in an
amount totaling [five] <Insert percentage> percent of the Contract Sum
and subcontract amount.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work
where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased
or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials,
for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part
of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each
allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit
cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract
Documents to determine quantities.
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and
profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of
actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the
schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at
Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change
Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
10. LEED submittals: Update progress on LEED submittals including LEED plans
and online templates.
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and
payments as certified by Architect[ and Construction Manager] and paid for by
Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the
Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered
by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use [AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703]
[AIA Document G702/CMa and AIA Document G703] [EJCDC Document C-620]
<Insert name and designation of other standard form> as form for Applications for
Payment.
E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for
Payment. Sample copies are included in the Project Manual.
G. Transmittal: Submit [three] <Insert number> signed and notarized original copies of
each Application for Payment to [Architect] [Construction Manager] by a method
ensuring receipt[ within 24 hours]. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar
attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording
appropriate information about application.
H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of
mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous
application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must
submit waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner
acceptable to Owner.
I. LEED Submittals: With each Application for Payment, provide LEED submittals
progress update.
J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must
precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Schedule of unit prices.
5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits.
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
10. Initial progress report.
11. Report of preconstruction conference.
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
L. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and
supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not
limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Evidence of completion of LEED submittals including online templates.
3. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and
proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
4. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
5. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and
Claims."
6. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
7. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
8. Evidence that claims have been settled.
9. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar
data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and
assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
10. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Section:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is[ an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the
duration of the Work as] a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or
services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by
appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required
by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
[applicable taxes, ]overhead, and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that
requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit
prices are specified in those Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate
the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.Indicate LEED credits that may be affected by
the change.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or
system specified.
7. Proposal Request Form: Use [CSI Form 13.6A "Change Order Request
(Proposal)" with attachments CSI Form 13.6B "Proposal Worksheet
Summary" and 13.6C "Proposal Worksheet Detail"] [form provided by
Owner. Sample copy is included in Project Manual] [form acceptable to
Architect].
B. Unit Price Adjustment: Refer to Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative
procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum
to reflect measured scope of unit price work.
Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for
subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Lump-sum allowances.
2. Unit-cost allowances.
3. Quantity allowances.
4. Contingency allowances.
5. Testing and inspecting allowances.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices.
2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of
allowances for testing and inspecting.
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date
when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an
allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final
selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the
site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
C. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for
installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
D. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other
portions of the Work.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as
required to coordinate installation.
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered
by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include [taxes,]freight,
and delivery to Project site.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project
site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and
materials [ordered by Owner] [selected by Architect] under allowance shall be
included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.
A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and
only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.
B. Contractor's[ overhead, profit, and] related costs for products and equipment ordered
by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not
part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation[, taxes], insurance,
equipment rental, and similar costs.
C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include
Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.
A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies,
actual tests and inspections, and reporting results.
B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or
costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for
incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.
C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the
allowance.
D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting
allowance to Owner by Change Order.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution
of overhead costs and other margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change
Orders related to unit-cost allowances.
4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by
independent quantity survey, measure, or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the
allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order
amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials
and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and
interfaced with related work.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Specific requirements for work of each contract are also indicated in individual
Specification Sections and on Drawings.
C. Related Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for the Work covered by the Contract Documents,
restrictions on use of the project site and work restrictions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Coordination activities of Project Manager include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Responsibilities of Project Manager for temporary facilities and controls include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Provide common-use field office for use by all personnel engaged in construction
activities.
2. Provide telephone service for common-use facilities.
A. Extent of Contract: Unless the Agreement contains a more specific description of the
work, requirements indicated on Drawings and in Specification Sections determine
which contract includes a specific element of Project.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, the work described in this Section for each contract
shall be complete systems and assemblies, including products, components,
accessories, and installation required by the Contract Documents.
2. Trenches and other excavation for the work of each contract shall be the work of
[the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work].
3. Blocking, backing panels, sleeves, and metal fabrication supports for the work of
each contract shall be the work of [the General Construction Contract] [each
contract for its own work].
4. Furnishing of access panels for the work of each contract shall be the work of
each contract for its own work. Installation of access panels shall be the work of
[the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work].
5. Equipment pads for the work of each contract shall be the work of [the General
Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work].
6. Painting for the work of each contract shall be the work of [the General
Construction Contract].
7. Cutting and Patching: [Each contract shall perform its own cutting; patching
shall be under the General Construction Contract].
8. Through-penetration firestopping for the work of each contract shall be provided
by [the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work].
9. Contractors' Preliminary Construction Schedule: Within [ten] 10 working days
after preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule submittal has
been received from Project Manager, submit a matching preliminary horizontal
bar-chart schedule showing construction operations sequenced and coordinated
with overall construction.
1. Sewer Service: Include the cost for sewer service use by all parties engaged in
construction activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract.
2. Water Service: Include the cost for water service, whether metered or otherwise,
for water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site in
the General Construction Contract.
3. Electric Power Service: Include the cost for electric power service, whether
metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction
activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract.
A. Work in the General Construction Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:
B. Temporary facilities and controls in the General Construction Contract include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Temporary facilities and controls that are not otherwise specifically assigned to
the <Insert name of other contracts>.
2. <Insert temporary facilities and controls>.
A. Work in the <Insert name> Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:
B. Temporary facilities and controls in the <Insert name> Contract include, but are not
limited to, the following:
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Project Location: <Insert Project location (street address, city, and state).>
1. The Work includes <Insert a brief listing of major products and systems
included in Project>.
2. Project is designed to comply with a Certification Level according to the U.S.
Green Building Council's Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design (LEED)
Rating System, as specified in Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements."
A. The Work shall be conducted in <Insert number> phases in the following order, with
each phase substantially complete before beginning the next phase:
B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit a schedule showing the sequence,
commencement and completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's
personnel for all phases of the Work.
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be
carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
B. Preceding Work: Owner [has awarded] [will award] separate contract(s) for the
following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be
substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.
1. <Insert name of the Contract>: A separate contract [has been] [will be]
awarded to <Insert name of separate Contractor> [to] [for] <Insert a brief
description of work performed under separate contract>.
C. Concurrent Work: Owner [has awarded] [will award] separate contract(s) for the
following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted
simultaneously with work under this Contract.
1. <Insert name of the Contract>: A separate contract [has been] [will be]
awarded to <Insert name of separate Contractor> [to] [for] <Insert a brief
description of work performed under separate contract>.
D. Future Work: Owner [has awarded] [will award] separate contract(s) for the following
additional work to be performed at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of
that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this
Contract.
1. <Insert name of the Contract>: A separate contract [has been] [will be]
awarded to <Insert name of separate Contractor> [to] [for] <Insert a brief
description of work performed under separate contract>.
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations,
including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises
is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on
portions of Project.
B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.
C. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to [work in areas] [areas within the Contract
limits] indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the
Work is indicated.
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site[ and use by the
public].
3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways[ parking garage,] [ loading areas,]
and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's
employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for
parking or storage of materials.
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and [existing] [adjacent] building
during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction
operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as
not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction
period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during
construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the
Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless
otherwise indicated.
A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections
using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in
particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the
context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
(228)
SHT. # SHEET NAME:
COVER SHEET
A-0.00 ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS, SPOT ELEVATIONS
A-0.01 DRAWING LIST
A-0.02 DEMOLITION AND PRESERVATION NOTES
A-0.03 HISTORIC PRESERVATION NOTES AND GLOSSARY
A-0.04 HISTORIC PRESERVATION NOTES
1 7/10/2009
EGRESS DRAWINGS (2)
AE-0.00 CODE ANALYSIS, EGRESS CALCULATIONS AND TABLES
AE-1.00 EGRESS PLANS
2 7/10/2009
A-3.14 WALL SECTIONS
A-3.15 WALL SECTIONS
A-3.16 WALL SECTIONS
3 7/10/2009
A-5.75 FURNITURE
4 7/10/2009
S4.3 SECTIONS AND DETAILS
S4.4 SECTIONS AND DETAILS
S4.5 SECTIONS AND DETAILS
S4.6 SECTIONS AND DETAILS
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS (23)
M-0.01 SYMBOL LIST AND ABBREVIATIONS, GENERAL NOTES
5 7/10/2009
PLUMBING DRAWINGS (17)
P-0.01 SYMBOL AND ABBREVIATIONS, NOTES AND SCHE.
P-4.01 DETAILS
TA DRAWINGS (20)
TN DRAWINGS (16)
TN001 TELECOM PLATE/BOX SCHEDULE, NOTES, ABBREVIATION, AND DETAILS
TY DRAWINGS (10)
TY001 SECURITY PLATE/BOX SCHEDULE, NOTES, ABBREVIATION, AND DETAILS
6 7/10/2009
TY100 SECURITY LOWER LEVEL PLAN
TY101 SECURITY FIRST LEVEL PLAN
TY102 SECURITY SECOND LEVEL PLAN
TY103 SECURITY THIRD LEVEL PLAN
TY104 SECURITY LOWER LEVEL RCP
TY105 SECURITY FIRST LEVEL RCP
TY106 SECURITY SECOND LEVEL RCP
TY107 SECURITY THIRD LEVEL RCP
TY 501 A/V DETAILS
7 7/10/2009
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590
Washington, DC GMP SET
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 16 to ensure that all systems are operating
in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements
and coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 16 shall be familiar with all parts of
Division 1 and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract
Documents.
1. Include cost for the commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this section, in the
quoted price.
2. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.
3. Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification
checks and functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule.
4. Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all
electrical services provided.
5. Provide electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and functional
performance testing as required by the CA.
6. Review specification Division 1 and 15 to fully understand their responsibilities as they
pertain to the commissioning processes.
1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES
2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data,
commissioning documentation, testing assistance, O&M data, training, etc.
3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings to facilitate the Cx
process. Commissioning shall be discussed monthly, as a regular agenda item during the
normal construction meetings, and minutes submitted to CxA.
4. Contractors shall provide normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals to the CxA of
commissioned equipment.
a. Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating,
troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any Owner-contracted
tests, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all
responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In
addition, the installation, start-up, and checkout materials that are actually shipped
inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the
factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the CxA.
b. The CxA may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning
process.
7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and
control of commissioned equipment in areas where the Specifications, control drawings or
equipment documentation are not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.
8. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures.
Submit manufacturer’s detailed start-up procedures and the full start-up plan and
procedures and other requested equipment documentation to CxA for review.
9. During the start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document the electrical-related
portions of the prefunctional checklists provided by the CxA for all commissioned
equipment.
10. Perform and clearly document all completed start-up and system operational checkout
procedures, providing a copy to the CxA.
11. Address current A/E punch list and Action List items before functional testing.
12. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to assist in the functional
performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed-upon
schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and
problem solving.
14. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and
updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
15. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and final CAD as-
builts for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after completion of
commissioning.
Warranty Period
1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built
drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
A. Refer to Division 1, & 15 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are
found.
B. Refer to Division 1, 15, & Cx Plan for systems to be commissioned and for functional testing
requirements.
A. The following systems and equipment (including all integral controls) will be commissioned in
this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer only to equipment that is to be
commissioned.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Division 16 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this
Division.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 SUBMITTALS
A. The electrical contractors shall follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in the
Responsibilities list in this section and in Division 1. Division 16 has start-up responsibility and
is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting the design
objectives of the Contract Documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do
not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the CxA or Owner.
B. Contractor is to supply all testing equipment, tools and labor to perform functional testing
A. Refer to this section for specific details on non-conformance issues relating to prefunctional
checklists and tests.
A. Division 16 shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in
Division 16 and deliver to the CM/GC for inclusion in the O&M manuals, according to this
section. This does not replace O&M manual documentation requirements elsewhere in these
Specifications
C. Review and Approvals: Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals
shall be made by the A/E. Refer to Division 1.
A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan
described in Division 1, 15, & Cx Plan and the filled out start-up, initial checkout and
prefunctional checklists.
END OF SECTION